nx_nx75_cad

What’s New in NX 7 and 7.5

Proprietary & Restricted Rights Notice

© 2010 Siemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc. All RightsReserved. This software and related documentation are proprietary toSiemens Product Lifecycle Management Software Inc.

All trademarks belong to their respective holders.

2 What’s New in NX 7 and 7.5

Contents

Introduction to What’s New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

HD3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

HD3D overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1HD3D Tool Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4HD3D view styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5HD3D tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7See-Thru display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9HD3D preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10HD3D Visual Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11HD3D Visual Reporting tool enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Check-Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16

HD3D Check-Mate tool overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Set up Check-Mate tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Execute HD3D Check-Mate tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Display Check-Mate results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Filter Check-Mate results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22Check-Mate customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23HD3D Check-Mate workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Synchronous Modeling with synchronous technology . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Resize Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1Label Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Optimize Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Replace Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Create Feature enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Move Face enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Pattern Face – enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6Make Fixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Dimension to Virtual Edge enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Dimension enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8Show Related Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Region Boundary Faces enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Make Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Face Finder enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Cross Section Edit enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13Synchronous Technology face overflow options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

What’s New in NX 7 and 7.5 3

Contents

2D Drafting with DraftingPlus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

DraftingPlus overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Display view identifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Drawing View enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4Automatically Start View Creation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5Projected View enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6Standard Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7Project to View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8Automatically Start Project to View Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9Detail View enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10Section line in Drawing View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11Infinite sketch lines in Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12Auto Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15Continuous Auto Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16Make Symmetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-17Pattern Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-18Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20Copy or move sketch geometry in a vertical or horizontal direction . . . . 4-21Edit curve parameters enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Reuse 2D section objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22Import I-deas Drafting symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23Import I-deas ASC/DWG drawing files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24Copy to 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25DXF/DWG Import to NX Drafting as Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26

Reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Reuse Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Component-first workflow for reusable components . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1Reusable pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Add a reusable component or fastener assembly by componentarray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

Add selected objects to the Reuse Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4Search settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Reuse library resource bar usability enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Fastener Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Classify part in NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Product Template Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Product Template Studio enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7Knowledge Fusion Visual Rules enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8

CMM Inspection Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

CMM Inspection Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1NX CMM Inspection Programming workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2


Contents

Turbomachinery Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Turbomachinery (Multi Blade) Milling overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Multi Blade geometry — MULTI_BLADE_GEOM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2Multi Blade Rough operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3Multi Blade Hub Finish operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4Multi Blade Finish operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5

Teamcenter Integration for NX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Save As performance improvements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Modified customer defaults for saving precise assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Longer names for non-masters and multi-CAD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2Password option for utilities when running Teamcenter 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Adding item types to File New templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Create an alternate representation in model template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Storing template PAX files in Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7SSL supported in four-tier Teamcenter environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Performance improvement for four-tier deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8Add custom menu selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9Import and manage visual reports in Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10

Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

Handles and visual indicators enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1Toolbar and menu consistency, and Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Add or Remove Buttons on toolbar drop-down lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Collection toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Command Finder enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8Save a user role with the current layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9Name of last selected role . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Point Constructor enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10Point on Bounded Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Part Navigator entry for Datum Plane Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11Auto complete of command input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12File New enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Inspection Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Generate accurate section curves with lightweight loading . . . . . . . . . . 9-14Layer Settings — enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15Shadow Settings enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16Capture Studio Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17GC Toolkits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18Disable Dynamic Soft Shadows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20Curve Continuity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21Curve Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22Curve Analysis Display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23Combs Options, Peaks Options, and Inflections Options . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Issue Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24


Contents

Exact lightweight geometry and refile_part utility changes . . . . . . . . . . 9-27Specify geometry layer in JT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Move Object enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29New customer defaults for collapsed groups and on-screen inputboxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Direct sketching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1Direct sketch and feature edit preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Intermediate Datum CSYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3Datum CSYS enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Auto Dimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Continuous Auto Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6Replace with Independent Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7Make Symmetric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8Pattern Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Polygon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11Exit Sketch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12Edit Defining Section enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Copy or move sketch geometry in a vertical or horizontaldirection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13

Cut / Copy / Paste enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Display as PMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Project Curve enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15Composite Curve enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Selection Intent for Composite Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Extract Virtual Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18Maple Mathematical Package Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20Selection Intent enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Boolean enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22Extrude – Inferred Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Offset Curve in Face – enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Offset Surface – enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Datum Plane – enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29Extrude enhancement—intersecting section curves . . . . . . . . . 10-31Edit the dimensions of an internal sketch section from the feature’sedit dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32

Region Boundary Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Reuse 2D section objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34Feature Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35Group enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-37Feature Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Edit curve parameters enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39


Contents

Error during update enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40Face Blend – three-face blend enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-41Path Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Global Deformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-42Radius Reduction in Global Shaping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-44Concave Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-45Patch Openings enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Body Type option for Freeform commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Snap to an object without associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-48Automatically make datums and sketches internal . . . . . . . . . 10-50Modeling Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50Resize Datum Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-51Convert to Linked Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Retaining imprinted edges in a Split Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-52Synchronize Views in Replace Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Assemblies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Lightweight loading controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-56Seamless lightweight loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-57Assembly constraint enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-58Delayed update of Assembly Constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Design in context: WAVE linking with Modeling commands . . . 10-62Mirror Assembly enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-64Display settings in context . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66NX Relations Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Motion envelopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Variable positioning and Fix constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-70

Shape Studio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Surface Intersection Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-71Text – expression support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-72Edit Object Display – JT Point Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-73Transform and align geometric objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-74Aesthetic Face Blend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Transition control setting for Studio Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76I-Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-77X-Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-79X-Form enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-81Match Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-82Match Edge enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Improved control of shapes in N-sided Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Specify editor to edit a spline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-84Deviation Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-85Section Analysis and Grid Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Non-Proportional Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-87Edge Symmetry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

Drafting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90Drafting user interface enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-90


Contents

Copy/Paste enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-91Custom Symbol enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-93Surface Finish Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-96Compound weld symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-97Centerline enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-99Callout and Identification symbol enhancements for partslists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-100

Limits and fits tolerance for dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-102Chamfer dimension enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-104Leader line enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-106Parallel dimension enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-108Annotation enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-109ASME Y14.5–2009 tolerancing standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-111Track Drawing Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-113Chinese (GB) and Russian (ESKD) default standardssettings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-120

Weld symbol redesign and single flange JIS support . . . . . . . . 10-121Single Sided arrowhead terminators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-123ESKD (Russian) standard thread display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-123Restrict crosshatch angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124ESKD (Russian) weld symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-124GB (China) weld symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-125Detail View color, font, and width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-125Narrow Arc Length and Angular Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-126Section Line Style Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-127

PMI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-129PMI user interface enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-129PMI Lightweight Section Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-129PMI Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-131PMI Centerlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-133Leader line enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-134PMI Custom Symbol enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-135PMI Surface Finish enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-137Compound weld symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-137Parallel dimension enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-139Limits and fits tolerance for dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-140Annotation enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-141PMI reading direction after a view rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-143Inherited PMI in extracted edge views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-144Annotation Plane enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-145PMI Feature Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-145PMI bidirectional edit enhancements for dimensions . . . . . . . 10-146Import real PMI from JT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-147ASME Y14.5–2009 tolerancing standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-148PMI objects in JT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-150

Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-150


Contents

NX Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-150Aerospace Sheet Metal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-163Forming/ Flattening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-167

Manufacturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Parallel Generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2Tool Path Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12Divide by Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-13Expanded Journaling support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15Tool update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-15Operation actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-16Manufacturing Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17

Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17Turbomachinery Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-17Sinumerik Spline output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23Optimize Feed Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-23Cut steep and non-steep areas with Flowcut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-24Crosscut patterns in Flowcut Ref Tool operations . . . . . . . . . . . 11-25Clearance options in Milling operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-26Plane based Engage and Retract moves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-28Profile 3D and Solid Profile 3D Tool Path Smoothing . . . . . . . . 11-28Tool Holder Gouge and Collision Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29Cut Levels for Cavity Milling/Z-Level Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-29Cut Levels — Planar Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31Overlap Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-31Reference Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-33Use 2D IPW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-35Output Contact/Tracking Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36Face Milling-Negative Floor Stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-36Non Cutting Moves Enhancement Smooth Traverse . . . . . . . . . 11-38

Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39Automatic detection of rest material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-39Automatic Tracking Point Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-40Automatic WCS Orientation when editing Turning objects . . . . 11-41Ignore Members at Concave Corners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-43Conical and Variable stock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-45Containment using Trim Point Ramp Angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-46Diameter Constant offset stock values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-47Initial Profile Plunge cut in Finishing and Roughingoperations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-48

Manual Spun Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50Maximum cut Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-50N-style Holder for 55 degree diamond lathe tools . . . . . . . . . . . 11-51Output Contact Tracking in Contour Turning operations . . . . . 11-51


Contents

Relief Cut for Linear Roughing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-52Reorient Tool Holder and Tracking point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-54Retract Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-55Variable feed rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56

Thread Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56Thread Milling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-56Hole/Boss geometry object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-57

Feature-based Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58Feature-based Machining for Turning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-58Feature-based Machining for Wire EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-59Feature-based Machining Wire EDM start hole data . . . . . . . . 11-59Feature-based Machining for 3 to 5 axis machining . . . . . . . . . 11-60Geometry for 3 to 5 axis machining processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-61Solid Edge and user-defined features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62Machining Feature Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-62Feature-based Machining PMI recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-66Face color and attribute recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-67Create Feature Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-68Accessing objects in Feature-based Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-69Machining Knowledge Editor available for Windows 64-bit . . . 11-69

Integrated Simulation and Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-70Tool Path Simulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-70Classifying cutting vs non-cutting areas of a Tool Assembly . . . 11-71Generating spinning geometry in a cutting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-72Automatic Part, Blank, and Check geometry in ISV . . . . . . . . . 11-73Preview Motion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-74Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-75

CMM Inspection Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-76CMM Inspection Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-76NX CMM Inspection Programming workflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-78

Manufacturing Teamcenter Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-83Postprocessing time stored in Teamcenter Part Planner . . . . . . 11-83Time per tool stored in Teamcenter Part Planner . . . . . . . . . . . 11-84Postprocessors managed in Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-86Correct version of Manufacturing templates loaded for NXsessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-86

Post Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-87Post Builder enhancements for Sinumerik controllers . . . . . . . 11-87Post Builder support for Siemens Sinumerik controllers . . . . . . 11-89Improved Post performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-91

Wire/EDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-91Wire/EDM No-core Follow Periphery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-91Fill and Silhouette Fill display options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-92

Digital Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

NX 7.5 Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1


Contents

Solver version support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Multimedia and training content in Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-5Teamcenter Integration for Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-6General capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-8Display controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-14Geometry idealization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23Geometry abstraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-29Material and physical properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-32Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34Assembly FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-52Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-55Durability Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-67Advanced Durability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68Thermal and Flow, Electronic Systems Cooling, and Space SystemsThermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70

Laminate Composites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-126FE Model Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-142NX FE Model Updating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-156Post-processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-159Solvers and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-166

NX 7 Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-198Solver version support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-198Gasket analysis support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-202General capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-204Display controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-206Boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-209Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-219Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-221Geometry idealization and abstraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-227Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-229Meshing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-236Material orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-250Assembly FEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-256Nastran environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-260Abaqus environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-283ANSYS environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-296LS-DYNA environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-301Thermal and Flow, Electronic Systems Cooling, and Space SystemsThermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-303

Laminate Composites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-338FE Model Correlation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-343Import and export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-344NX Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-347Post Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-348Teamcenter Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-359

NX 7.5 Design Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-362


Contents

Teamcenter Integration for Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-362Enhancements for materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-364New option for creating a FEM file with visible bodies . . . . . . 12-365Controlling the maximum tetrahedral mesh size for undooperations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-366

Change for the maximum solution time default . . . . . . . . . . . 12-366Reusable regions for contact and glue definitions . . . . . . . . . . 12-367Durability Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-367Post-processing enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-369

NX 7.5 Motion Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-371Flexible bodies dynamic solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-371Capture assembly arrangements during an animation . . . . . . 12-372Launch co-simulation directly from MATLAB/Simulink . . . . . 12-373Post-processing enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-374Static Equilibrium result as input to Dynamic solution . . . . . 12-375New motion object for coupling joints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-376Gruebler count displays in Motion Navigator . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-377Import a Process Simulate Kinematics model . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-378Additional support for Measure commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-379Context menu for motion objects in graphics window . . . . . . . 12-379Bar graph option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-379Change parent and child object colors in Customer Defaults . . 12-381

NX 7 Motion Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-382RecurDyn Solid 3D Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-382Joint Wizard support for assembly constraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-383Driver for Point on Curve constraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-384Quasi Static Articulation option for Adams/Solver . . . . . . . . . 12-385

NX Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Analyze Formability – One-step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1Durability Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-3Space Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4NX – SIZER Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-4

Product Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

Check-Mate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1Check-Mate enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1Check-Mate Result column in the Assembly Navigator . . . . . . . . 14-2Check-Mate healing options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3Check-Mate applications support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Check-Mate rule files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Check-Mate test enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5Check-Mate Set Up Tests enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6Check-Mate batch processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8Check-Mate customer defaults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8


Contents

Check Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9Defining requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9Managing External Requirements from all sources . . . . . . . . . 14-10Managing External Requirements from Teamcenter . . . . . . . . 14-12Managing Requirement Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-15

Systems Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1

Routing Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1Routing Electrical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1Routing Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-8Routing General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-9

Automotive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12General Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-12Die Engineering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-14Die Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-27

Ship Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35Steel planning/sectioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-35Steel features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-37Manufacturing features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-41

Flexible Printed Circuit Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46Flexible Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-46Rebend enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-47

PCB Exchange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-48PCB Exchange for Zuken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-48Thermal conductivity calculation of a board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-52Board mesh creation options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-54Support for GenCAD file format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-55Automatically save created components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-55Part pad associativity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-56Exporting restriction area to IDF enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-57Automatically use component’s reference set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-58Enhancement of attributes for cutouts converted to holes . . . . . 15-60Merge restricted areas with cutouts into one loop . . . . . . . . . . . 15-61Specify drilled hole associated part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-63PCB Exchange Settings dialog box enhancements . . . . . . . . . . 15-63ECAD/NX model comparison enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-64Default directory for ECAD files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-66Directory for new created components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-66PCA import rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-67Use existing part attribute as default for component number . . 15-68Import ECAD model in a part file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-69Filtering enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-69Display the board coordinate system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-70Override board thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-70View or modify a specific NX object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-71New drilled holes design features support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-71


Contents

Space Systems Thermal solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-72PCB.xchange application name change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-73

PCB Exchange for Zuken . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-73PCB.xchange + Zuken application name change . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-73

Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1

Block Styler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Tree List block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1Block-based wizard style dialog box layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-2

Knowledge Fusion Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-3

Manufacturing Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

Weld Assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1User Defined Weld . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1Easy Measurement Pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-2Weld Advisor enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-3Bead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-4Fill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-7Delete in Connected Face Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-9Delete in Weld Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10New Auto Point options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-10Reverse Z Direction in Weld Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-11Control Direction in Weld Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-12

Mold Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-13Assembly load option change for large assemblies . . . . . . . . . . 17-13Parting workflow enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-14Concept design option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-15Trim Region Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-18Split Face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-19Edit Parting and Patch Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-21Mold Design Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-22Mold Cooling Tools toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-24Enlarge Surface Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-33Edge Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-34Runner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-35Design Trim Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36Solid Patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-36Traverse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-37Motion simulation for tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-37

Progressive Die Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39Assembly constraints in Insert Group and Standard Parts . . . . 17-39Standard Part Library enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-39Piercing Insert Design enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-40Forming Insert Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-41Insert Auxiliary Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-41


Contents

Direct Unfolding enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-42Bend Operation enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43Progressive Die Wizard usability enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . 17-43Die Base enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-44Die Design Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-45Relief Design enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-45Force Calculation enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-46Motion simulation for tooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-47Analyze Formability – One-step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-48Hole Table enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-50Scrap Design enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-51Progressive Die Wizard uses assembly constraints . . . . . . . . . . 17-51

Electrode Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-52Electrode Multiple Sparking Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-52

Translators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1

NX to JT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1Exploded views support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1Lightweight section view support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1Write real PMI in JT files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2Visualizing part and assembly representations withinTeamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3

DXF/DWG Import to NX Drafting as Drawing Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-5Import Assembly to Teamcenter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-6Infinite Line translation using 2D Exchange, IGES, and DXF/DWG . . . 18-7Geometry repair options in Translators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7


Chapter

1 Introduction to What’s New

The What’s New Guide briefly summarizes the new features in each release.

This guide highlights what each function does, why it should be used, andwhere it can be found in the user interface. This guide also conveys thebenefit of each new capability.

This guide contains all enhancements included in NX 6.0.x, NX 7 and NX7.5 releases.

What’s New in NX 7 and 7.5 1-1

Chapter

2 HD3D

HD3D overview

What is it?

Use the HD3D tools in NX to display and interact with information directlyon the 3D model.

You can:

• Access the HD3D tools from the HD3D Tool Manager on the Resource bar.Currently, Visual Reporting and Check-Mate HD3D tools are available.

• View and interact with tags in the graphics window.

Tags identify objects for which an HD3D tool has information. Check-Matetags identify areas with problems or check result information. VisualReporting tags appear as color wheels.


HD3D

• Control how you view tags and other information inside the 3D modelusing the See-Thru display styles.

• Use visual reporting to get a visual report of information on the model.

For example, you can color code components to display their load state.

In the following graphic, components are partially loaded andcomponents are fully loaded.

2-2 What’s New in NX 7 and 7.5

HD3D

• Display information in different styles in the HD3D dialog box.

For example, to scroll through thumbnails to find the items you want, usethe Flow List+Tree view style in the Check-Mate tool.

When you first activate an HD3D tool, the view styles are shown in thetool’s dialog box. You can also display the tool’s results in its own separatewindow.

• Set preferences for the HD3D tools using the HD3D Tools dialog box.

Why should I use it?

You can use the HD3D tools to interact visually with information presentedin the graphics window that may previously have been presented in dialogbox lists and information reports.

Where do I find it?

HD3D Tool Manager

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab

See-Thru option


HD3D

Toolbar View®See-Thru

HD3D Tool Manager

What is it?

The HD3D Tool Manager provides access to HD3D tools. The VisualReporting tool helps you visualize product information. The Check-Mate toolhelps you validate product information.

# ComponentHD3D Tool Manager

Return to HD3D Tool ManagerbuttonDeactivate button

Visual Reporting tool

Check-Mate tool

From the HD3D Tool Manager, you can:

• View the status of each tool.

• Activate or deactivate a tool.

When you activate an HD3D tool, the tool’s dialog box replaces the HD3DTool Manager.

• Refresh a report after you make changes to your model.


HD3D

• Deactivate an HD3D tool so that no report information appears in thetool’s button.

• Access the HD3D Tool Properties dialog box where you can select theapplications in which you want to access the HD3D tool.

Where do I find it?

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab

HD3D view styles

What is it?

View styles let you view and navigate the information made available by anHD3D tool.

In the Visual Reporting tool, view styles are called legend styles.

The following styles are available:

• Flow List+Tree: Displays results in a list of thumbnail images that youcan scroll through.

Note

This style is not available in the Visual Reporting tool.

View Style listHighlighted thumbnail of a taggedobject

You can:


HD3D

– Scan the images using the scroll bar. You can also scroll the list byclicking any of the images to the right or left of the centered image.

– Display the tool’s results outside of the tool dialog box, in a separatewindow.

– Stretch the size of the list to make it tall and narrow. The tiles arethen arranged vertically.

– Expand and collapse the results for thumbnails that have the + plussign.

– Focus the view on the selected tag in the graphics window.

– Select objects associated with the tag.

• Tile List: Displays results in a tile format that includes a thumbnail and asummary of the result.

• Tree List: Displays results in columns. You can click on a column headingto sort results by the values in that column. For example, you can sortresults by name, category, part name, profile name, or result status.


HD3D

• Info View: Displays details about one result or piece of information ata time.

When you first activate an HD3D tool, the view styles are shown in thetool’s dialog box. When you double-click a tag or list item, or right-clickand select Show Info View, an info view window displays the informationfor that tag or list item.

You can click the More Detail button to see a complete description of thetest.

Where do I find it?

Resource bar Any active HD3D tool.

HD3D tags

What is it?

HD3D tags displayed in the graphics window are a new visual way to interactwith information on the 3D model.

Tags identify objects for which an HD3D tool has information. They present asubset of the results and information that is shown in the HD3D tool dialogbox.


HD3D

Check-Mate tags identify areas with problems or check result information.Visual Reporting tags appear as color wheels.

You can:

• Display tags from every active HD3D tool together in the graphics window.

In the following graphic, both Visual Reporting tags and Check-Matetags are displayed on the model.

• Access detailed information and options from the tags.

• Open the Info View window for the result or the information the tagrepresents.

• Remove the tags temporarily from the graphics window. You can restorethe tags at any time.


Tags help you quickly find and access information about an area of yourdesign.

Where do I find it?

Tags are displayed in the graphics window whenever an HD3D tool thatuses them is active.


HD3D

See-Thru display

What is it?

See-Thru is a new rendering option that displays unimportant facet geometrywith translucency. It uses de-emphasis colors to deemphasize unimportantfaceted geometry so that important faceted geometry stands out better.

When you apply a visual report that has unmatched components, theSee-Thru option is automatically selected and applied to the unmatchedcomponents.

You can manually change the See-Thru settings (style or color preferences)while a visual report is active. When you deactivate the report, the See-Thruoptions return to their default settings.

There are three styles of See-Thru rendering:

See-ThruShell

Displays less important shaded geometry as a translucentshell with a specified color. Hidden unimportant facetgeometry is not displayed. This is the default See-Thrustyle.

See-ThruOriginal ColorShell

Displays less important shaded geometry as a translucentshell, preserving the original shaded geometry colors.Hidden unimportant facet geometry is not displayed.

See-ThruLayers

Displays less important shaded geometry as translucentlayers with a specified color.

You can change the default edge color and translucency for each style in theVisualization Preferences dialog box. You can change the default color onlyfor the See-Thru Shell and See-Thru Layers styles.


HD3D

Note

• Only sheet and solid bodies are affected by the See-Thru options.

• The translucency percentage is hard-coded for each style.

• When you enable the See-Thru rendering option , if shaded edgesare displayed, that is the shaded edges have some color other thannone, then the edges are displayed only for the topmost visible layerof unimportant facet geometry, regardless of the See-Thru style.


Use the See-Thru option to provide for displays that make it easier to see tagsor other information inside the 3D model.

Where do I find it?

See-Thru options

ToolbarView®See-Thru

View®See-Thru Style list ®See-Thru Shell/See-Thru Original Color Shell /See-Thru Layers

Visualization preferences for See-Thru options

Menu Preferences®Visualization

Location in dialogbox

Visualization Preferences dialog box®Facetingpage®Session Settings group®See-Thru Settingssubgroup

Visualization Preferences dialog box®Color Settingspage®Part Settings group®De-emphasis Settingssubgroup

HD3D preferences

What is it?

Use the HD3D Tools dialog box to set preferences for the HD3D tools.

You can:

• Turn on or off one, or all HD3D tools. When you turn off all HD3D tools,the HD3D tools tab is also removed from the Resource bar.


HD3D

• Reorder the HD3D tools.

• Select the NX applications in which you want the HD3D tools to appear.You can select the tool or tools you want in the HD3D Tools dialog box andthen select the applications you want in the HD3D Tool Properties dialogbox. For example, you can have the Check-Mate tool show up only inthe Modeling application.

Note

The HD3D tools remain active even after you close the HD3D Tools tab

in the Resource bar.

Where do I find it?

HD3D Tools dialog box

Menu Preferences®HD3D Tools

HD3D Tool Properties dialog box

Menu Preferences®HD3D Tools dialog box®Properties

Shortcut menu

In the HD3D Tool Manager, right-click an HD3D

tool®Properties

HD3D Visual Reporting

What is it?

Use the Visual Reporting tool to display components according to the resultsof a report that you specify. The report consists of the following:

• A report property, which is used to color or tag the part.

• A report scope, which lets you specify the components used in the report.The visual report is applied to all components in the displayed part,unless the scope specifies differently.

A legend in the Visual Reporting dialog box lets you interpret the results andperform actions on groups of components that are displayed with the samecolor. You can open the legend in a separate window.

When you use a visual report, you can:

• Retrieve and activate an existing visual report.


HD3D

• Define and activate a new report. Some example reports are includedwith NX.

• Change the value of any user-defined terms of the scope.

• Specify whether the results are shown as colors, tags, or both on yourcomponents.

• Work with NX functions as usual. If you make changes that affect the

visual report, you can click Refresh to update the results.

You can use the following properties to build your report:

• Component properties that can be shown as Assembly Navigator columns

• Part attributes

• Teamcenter properties that can be retrieved from the Item, Item Revision,or dataset

When you define a visual report, you can:

• Specify the report property and scope.

• Specify the groups that appear in the legend, or you can let the softwareautomatically determine the groups. For example, you can create a visualreport based on the Status the components have in Teamcenter. You candefine a scope term that specifies you are only interested in seeing thestatus for part files you own.

• Save the visual report as a VPX file for later use.

Results appear in the graphics window, as shown in the following figure.


HD3D

Visual report with colors only

In the figure above, the visual report displays each component based on thePosition column in the Assembly Navigator. Red components are partiallyconstrained, yellow components are fully constrained, and blue componentsare fixed.


You can use the Visual Reporting tool to quickly visualize information aboutthe design you are working on.

• Coloring components helps you quickly interpret large amounts ofinformation, such as overall trends in the assembly. In the example, youcan quickly see that most of the components are partially constrained. Ifyou activate a visual report based on weight, you can easily see if one areais significantly heavier than the others.

• Tagging components provides you with more information than is possiblewith colors by themselves. For example, when your visual report uses tagsto report on weight, you can move your cursor over a tag to see the exactweight of the component.

Where do I find it?

Activate a visual report

Resource Bar HD3D Tools®double-click Visual Reporting

Define a visual report

Menu File®Utilities®Define Visual Report


HD3D

Define a visual report (alternate options)


Visual Reporting dialog box®Report group®DefineNew Report

Visual Reporting dialog box®Report group®Editthe active report, and save under a new name

Open the legend in a separate window

PrerequisiteReporting Style must be set to Color Objects or Colorand Tag Objects.

Shortcut menuIn the Visual Reporting dialog box, right-click thelegend background®Send to Window

HD3D Visual Reporting tool enhancements

What is it?

The Visual Reporting tool has the following enhancements:

• You can use the new explore mode to explore the results of a visual report.

• You can store and retrieve report definitions in Teamcenter.

While you are in the explore mode, you can:

• Use the Explore Visual Report toolbar to get results on selectedcomponents and subassemblies.

• Examine results in the Report Group, Report Property, and ResultsBelow columns in the Assembly Navigator.

– The Report Group column shows icons that correspond to the legendcolors for components or subassemblies that are part of the currentexploration.

– The Results Below column has an icon on subassembly nodes thathave children in the current Group to Explore, which is a commandon the Explore Visual Report toolbar.

• Right-click one or more component or subassembly Assembly Navigatornodes for additional visual report options, such as whether to includethe node in the report.


HD3D

The following figure shows the results of an exploration of components intwo subassemblies. Blue components are unconstrained, yellow componentsare partially constrained, and red components are fully constrained. Athird subassembly is not included in the exploration; its components arede-emphasized in the graphics window, and its Report Group column is blankin the Assembly Navigator.


The explore mode lets you run visual reports on the components orsubassemblies you specify. You can move up and down the assembly tree toexplore the results on different levels. Previously, a visual report could onlyreport on the entire part file.

Where do I find it?

Resource Bar HD3D Tools® double-click Visual Reporting


HD3D

Check-Mate

HD3D Check-Mate tool overview

What is it?

Use the HD3D Check-Mate tool to interactively check parts, assemblies,and drawings to ensure that they:

• Follow company design standards.

• Use best practices.

• Meet modeling quality standards.

Check-Mate uses the HD3D visualization tools to graphically tag resultsdirectly on the model.

When you use this tool, you can:

• Execute Check-Mate tests interactively as you design your models.

• Display results in a graphical tree list, or using tags on the 3D model.

See tags clearly on the 3D model using the new See-Thru displaycommands. Hide tags from the display temporarily by pressing Ctrl+3.

• Access actions from the results list or from the graphic tags. For example,right-click the list item to make the listed part the work part and to selectassociated features to edit.


HD3D

Tip

Make the best use of the graphical displays in the HD3D Check-Matetool by using the full screen display mode. Place the floating informationwindows on the secondary monitor, if you use dual monitors.


You can use the HD3D Check-Mate tool to quickly locate, diagnose, and fixproblems.

Where do I find it?

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab ®double-click Check-Mate.

Set up Check-Mate tests

What is it?

The Set Up Tests command is now available in the HD3D Check-Mate Tooldialog box. This button opens the Check-Mate dialog box where you candefine product validation tests to run.


HD3D

# Component DescriptionParts tab Lets you select which parts to test, and how

many levels of an assembly to include.Tests tab Lets you select tests to perform from lists

of provided tests and user-defined profiles.Run Options tab Lets you control log files and other checking

options.Customize button Lets you define parameters and settings

for each test.Create TemporaryProfile button

Lets you store profiles to save a list oftests with parameters and options alreadydefined.


You can set up tests from the same HD3D Tools tab that you use to displayresults.

Where do I find it?

HD3DCheck-Mate Tool dialog box

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab ®double-click Check-MateLocation in dialogbox Settings group®Set Up Tests

Toolbar and menu locations

Toolbar Check-Mate®Set up TestsMenu Analysis®Check-Mate®Set Up Tests

Execute HD3D Check-Mate tests

What is it?

The Execute Check-Mate Tests command is now available in the HD3DCheck-Mate Tool dialog box.

You can now:

• Define, run, and review results on the same HD3D Tools tab.

• Interact with test results as you create your design.


HD3D

• Keep the tests active and reuse them on other parts.

• Deactivate Check-Mate with the Deactivate button on the HD3D ToolsManager.


You can execute tests from the same tab on which you set up tests and reviewresults using the HD3D Check-Mate tool.

Where do I find it?

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab ®double-click Check-Mate

Location in dialogbox Controls group®Execute Check-Mate Tests

Display Check-Mate results

What is it?

You can now display Check-Mate results graphically to more easily scanfor design problems.

You can:

• Display results as a tree list to scan the columns of the results. Click on acolumn heading to sort results by the values in that column. For example,sort results by name, category, part name, profile name, or result status.

• Display results as tiles to view a thumbnail image and summaryinformation.


HD3D

• Display results as a flow list to graphically scan through the thumbnailimages at the top of the tree list.

Graphical icons are used to help sort the results in each of the resultslistings. These icons show a category of result, the pass or fail status,and a priority.

• Locate problems graphically with tags placed on the 3D model in thegraphics window.


HD3D

• Use the See-Thru display types to make tags more visible on a 3D model.

• Double-click a graphical tag or an item in the results list to display theCheck-Mate Result window which gives summary information on the test.Click the More Detail button to see a complete description of the test.


HD3D


You can graphically scan Check-Mate results using HD3D displays and tagsto identify and locate problem areas more quickly than sorting through lists.

Where do I find it?

HD3D Check-Mate Tool dialog box

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab ®double-click Check-MateLocation in dialogbox Results group

Toolbar and menu locations

Menu Analysis®Check-Mate®View Check-Mate Results

Toolbar Check-Mate®View Check-Mate Results

Filter Check-Mate results

What is it?

Use the Settings group in the options in the HD3D Check-Mate Tool dialogbox to filter Check-Mate results.


HD3D

For example, the options shown indicate that the software will display failedtests without showing the passed tests, and will filter out tests on parts inyour assemblies for which you do not have write permission.

Tip

You can also sort results in the table by clicking on a column heading tosort by that column.


You can filter and sort your test results in the order that you want to fixproblems. The results remain available on the HD3D Tools tab as you workwith other commands.

Where do I find it?

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab ®double-click Check-MateLocation in dialogbox Settings group

Check-Mate customization

What is it?

There are new ways to customize Check-Mate, depending on the role of theuser, and the amount of customization required.

From the HD3D Check-Mate Tool dialog box users can:

• Choose from a list of supplied tests as the simplest level of customization.


HD3D

• Edit each test to modify test parameters.

• Store a list of chosen tests as a temporary profile. Users can edit a profileto modify the list of tests, or to modify parameters from each test.

Test authors can customize Check-Mate tests to do the following:

• Create and store global profiles from the Check-Mate Author Tools dialogbox.

• Use Knowledge Fusion Interactive Class Editor to author tests to create acompany profile to enforce company standards.

• Customize the bit-mapped image used to show the result category.

• Modify the test information in the Check-Mate Result window.


HD3D

• Modify the description, which is used for the node’s tooltip and for the textin the Tile results view list.


You can customize Check-Mate test profiles to efficiently reuse the same setsof tests on multiple parts and to enforce company standards.

Where do I find it?

HD3D Check-Mate Tool dialog box

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab ®double-click Check-MateLocation in dialogbox Settings group, Set Up Tests

Check-Mate Author Tools dialog box

Menu Analysis®Check-Mate®Author Tests

Toolbar Check-Mate®Author Tests

For documentation on customizing, find the instructions distributed with theCheck-Mate software.

HD3D Check-Mate workflow

What is it?

Depending on your work role, there are different ways to use Check-Mate.

A typical designer workflow is shown below.

Start with an open part, assembly, ordrawing being designed.


HD3D

On the HD3D Tools tab, double-clickCheck-Mate.

In the Settings group, click Set Up

Tests .

On the Parts tab, select the part fileand the levels of the assembly tocheck.

Select the tests to run in theCategories list. Select from standardtests or from your local companyprofiles.

Click Add To Selected to move theselected tests to the Chosen Testslist.

Click Close.To run the chosen tests, in theControls group, click Execute

Check-Mate Tests .


HD3D

To sort by the result status, in theResults group, click on the Resultcolumn heading.

To filter results, use the options in theSettings group.

To review any problem areas, clickon the result objects in the Resultsgroup. Double-click to see informationin the Check-Mate Result window.

To edit a feature in an assemblycomponent follow these steps.

1. Right-click on an error and selectMake Work Part.

2. Right-click and select SelectAssociated Objects.

3. Edit the feature using the PartNavigator.

Continue to work with the model andreview tests.

Press Ctrl+3 to temporarily hidegraphic tags.

Open other parts to run the sametests.

Deactivate Check-Mate when finishedusing Deactivate at the top of theHD3D Tools Manager.


Chapter

3 Synchronous Modeling withsynchronous technology

Resize Chamfer

What is it?

Use the Resize Chamfer command to change the size of a chamfered edgeregardless of its feature history.


You can edit the size of an angled face so that it has one of the followingparameter sets:

• Symmetric Offset

• Asymmetric Offset

• Offset and Angle

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling

Prerequisite

A face must be labeled as a chamfer using the LabelChamfer command if it cannot be recognized as achamfer.


Synchronous Modeling with synchronous technology

Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Resize Chamfer

MenuInsert®Synchronous Modeling®Chamfer®ResizeChamfer

Label Chamfer

What is it?

Use the Label Chamfer command to label an angled face as a chamfer. Theangled face can be on the NX model or on an imported solid.

Use this command when you want the following commands to recognize anangled face as a chamfer:

• Resize Chamfer

• Move Face

In the model on the left the highlighted face is labeled as a chamfer.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Label Chamfer

MenuInsert®Synchronous Modeling®Chamfer®LabelChamfer



Optimize Face

What is it?

Use the Optimize Face command to simplify surface types, merging faces,improving edge accuracy, and recognizing blends.


Use this command on models imported into NX to convert B-surface facesto analytic faces.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Optimize Face

MenuInsert®Synchronous Modeling®Optimize®OptimizeFace

Replace Blend

What is it?

Use the Replace Blend command to convert B-surface faces that appearlike blends to a replace blend feature.


Use this command on models imported into NX to convert B-surface faces torolling ball type blend faces.



You can inherit the blend radius from the selected face, or you can entera radius.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Replace Blend

MenuInsert®Synchronous Modeling®Optimize®ReplaceBlend

Create Feature enhancement

What is it?

You can now turn on or off creating features when you select or clear theCreate Feature option while working in History-free mode.

You can use this option with the Hole, Edge Blend, and Chamfer commands.


Use this option to edit the feature parameters later.

With the Hole command, the parameters of the hole are maintained inrelation to the planar face when you select the Create Feature option. Forexample, if the planar face is moved, the bottom of the hole also moves.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPrerequisite You must be in History-free mode

Toolbar

Feature®Hole

Feature Operation®Edge Blend

Feature Operation®Chamfer

Menu

Insert®Design Feature®Hole

Insert®Detail Feature®Edge Blend

Insert®Detail Feature®ChamferLocation in dialogbox Settings group®Create Feature



Move Face enhancement

What is it?

When you use the Move Face command, you can select faces in componentsother than the work part within an assembly.


You can move multiple component faces of an assembly at the same time.

Where do I find it?

Entire Assembly selection option

Application ModelingPrerequisite All parts must be in History-free modeSelection bar Selection Scope®Entire Assembly

Move Face command


Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Move FaceMenu Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Move Face



Pattern Face – enhancement

What is it?

When you use the Pattern Face command while in History-free mode, afeature that you can edit is created in the Part Navigator.

When you use the Move Face, Pull Face, or Offset Region commands on anyinstance of the pattern, all instances of the pattern are updated.

Other features, for example, Edge Blend, Chamfer, and Hole, that are listedin the Part Navigator, and applied to individual edges or faces in an instanceof the pattern, are also updated when you edit the pattern.


You can maintain the pattern behavior in history-free modeling.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

You must be in History-free mode

The pattern must be created in NX 7.0 or later

Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Pattern Face .Menu Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Pattern Face



Make Fixed

What is it?

Use the Make Fixed command to add a fixed constraint to selected faces.The constraint is also listed in the Part Navigator.The fixed constraint appears in the Saved list in all Relate command dialogboxes. When you create a relation between a face with a fixed constraint andanother face, you can turn off the fixed constraint.


Use Make Fixed on a face if you want to prevent the face from changing itsposition when surrounding faces are changed by other synchronous modelingcommands.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Make FixedMenu Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Relate®Make Fixed

Saved list


PrerequisiteYou must be in History-free mode, in one of the Relatecommand dialog boxes

Menu Insert®Synchronous Modeling®RelateLocation in dialogbox

[Relate command dialog box]®Motion group®Resultstab®Saved list

Dimension to Virtual Edge enhancement

What is it?

You can now use either the Linear Dimension or the Angular Dimensioncommand to create a dimension to the virtual edge at the intersection of twofaces separated by a blend.

The virtual edge is highlighted as you move the cursor over an edge blend,to indicate that the virtual edge can be selected.



Angular dimension

Where do I find it?

Dimension commands


Toolbar

Synchronous Modeling®Linear Dimension

Synchronous Modeling®Angular Dimension

Menu

Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Dimension®LinearDimension

Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Dimension®AngularDimension

Dimension enhancement

What is it?

You can use the Lock Dimension option to define a static relationship betweenedges and faces when you create linear, angular, or radial dimensions.

The locked dimension appears in the Saved list in all Relate command dialogboxes. When you create a relation between a face with a locked dimensionand another face, you can turn off the locked dimension.


Use the Lock Dimension option to prevent the face from changing itsposition when surrounding faces are changed by other synchronous modelingcommands.



Where do I find it?

Lock Dimension option


Toolbar

Synchronous Modeling®Linear Dimension

Synchronous Modeling®Angular Dimension

Synchronous Modeling®Radial Dimension

Menu

Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Dimension®LinearDimension

Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Dimension®AngularDimension

Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Dimension®RadialDimension

Location in dialogbox Settings group®Lock Dimension

Saved list


PrerequisiteYou must be in History-free mode, in one of the Relatecommand dialog boxes

Menu Insert®Synchronous Modeling®RelateLocation in dialogbox

[Relate command dialog box]®Motion group®Resultstab®Saved list

Show Related Face

What is it?

Use the Show Related Face command to highlight and review relations thatexist on faces.

Use this command to show faces with the following relations:

• Fixed

• Linear Dimension



• Angular Dimension

• Radial Dimension

• Offset Relations

For the three dimension commands this relation is saved when the LockDimensions option is selected.


You can:

• Highlight relations that will not change when surrounding faces arechanged by other synchronous modeling commands.

• Delete the highlighted relations.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Show Related Face

MenuInsert®Synchronous Modeling®Relate®ShowRelated Face

Region Boundary Faces enhancement

What is it?

When using the Pull Face and Offset Region commands, you can select theportion of a face using the Region Boundary Faces selection option. Theseregions are determined by existing edges and curves that lie on the face.




This selection option helps you select portions of a face without using theDivide Face command.

Where do I find it?

Region Boundary Faces selection option

Application ModelingPrerequisite You must be in History-free modeToolbar Selection Bar®Face Rule®Region Boundary Faces

Pull Face and Offset Region commands


Toolbar

Synchronous Modeling®Pull Face

Synchronous Modeling®Offset Region

Menu

Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Pull Face

Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Offset Region



Make Offset

What is it?

The Make Offset command allows you to establish and save an offset (wallthickness) relationship with another face.

If the motion face is not a constant distance from the stationary face, it willbe made so.


Use Make Offset to establish and maintain a constant offset (thickness)between two faces.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Synchronous Modeling→ Make Offset

MenuInsert→ Synchronous Modeling→ Relate→ MakeOffset

Face Finder enhancement

What is it?

You can use the Select Offset option in the Face Finder group to select facesthat appear to be offset from each other.

This option is also available in the dialog boxes for the following commands:

• Move Face

• Offset Region

• Resize Face

• Cut Face



• Copy Face

• Mirror Face

• Relate commands

• Dimension commands

• Change Shell Thickness

• Group Face


You can use the Select Offset option to simplify the selection of faces thatappear to be offset from each other.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingLocation in dialogbox

Previously mentioned Synchronous Modeling dialogboxes®Face Finder group®Settings tab®Select Offset

Cross Section Edit enhancement

What is it?

You can move the center of a hole by dragging just one of its cross sectioncurves created by the Cross Section Edit command.




This allows you to change the center position of a hole while maintainingits original diameter.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Synchronous Modeling®Cross Section EditMenu Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Cross Section Edit

Synchronous Technology face overflow options

What is it?

Synchronous Technology commands now include options to let you controloverflow characteristics of faces you move, and how they interact with otherfaces.

Extend ChangeFace

Dragging the selected face extends it into or moves it pastother faces it encounters.

Selected face



Extend IncidentFace

Dragging the selected face extends it until it meets astationary, incident face. The selected face then ceases toextend, and the stationary face extends instead.

Incident faces

Extend Cap Face Dragging the selected face past an overhanging edgecauses it to overflow and cap itself (the bottom of thechange face in the figure below).

Automatic Dragging the selected face causes either the selectedface or an incident face to extend, depending on whichoutcome would result in the least amount of change tovolume and area.


Use these options to control how a change face overflows stationary orincident faces in solid bodies.

Where do I find it?





Settings group®Overflow Behavior

Menu Insert®Synchronous Modeling®Move Face/ OffsetRegion/ Replace Face/ Make Coplanar/ Make Coaxial/Make Tangent/ Make Perpendicular/ Make Parallel/Linear Dimension/ Angular Dimension/ RadialDimension

Toolbar Synchronous Modeling


Chapter

4 2D Drafting with DraftingPlus

DraftingPlus overviewNX DraftingPlus is a collection of new and existing functions devised tomeet the demands of 2D centric design and drawing requirements, as wellas support 2D to 3D workflows. NX DraftingPlus extends the NX Draftingtoolset by providing additional 2D and 3D drawing productivity tools, with theprimary focus of addressing 2D design and drawing production requirements.It is fully integrated into NX Drafting and offers a set of 2D-centric drawingtools for customers who require 2D design and layout capabilities, or whowant to maintain or reuse legacy 2D drawings.

Full NX integration and common user interface

The extra functionality provided by NX DraftingPlus is accessed fromcommands which appear in the existing NX Drafting toolbars and menus.This lets you utilize the existing NX user interface and all interfacecustomization functionality such as roles and radial menus. It also meansthat NX DraftingPlus functionality can be used while creating drawingsfrom 3D models or to create 2D designs from scratch, while maintaining fulldata compatibility with NX.

Optimized for 2D

Designing in 2D requires a robust curve creation and modification toolset. NXDraftingPlus provides a single source for commonly used tools and simplifiesthe process with on-screen interaction and gesture-based interactions. NewSketcher functions such as Infinite Line and Auto Dimension provide bettersupport for 2D-centric workflows.

Robust drawing view creation tools

View creation and orientation tools along with Standard Views, Projectto View, Dynamic Preview, and Intelligent Margins give NX DraftingPluscutting edge view creation capabilities.

Symbol creation and reuse

To provide a single, consistent mechanism for working with custom symbols,both NX Drafting and DraftingPlus now leverage the NX Reuse Library for


2D Drafting with DraftingPlus

managing symbols. In addition, symbols can now be managed in Teamcenter.NX DraftingPlus allows for the direct import of I-deas symbols to easilymigrate SYM files to NX.

A bridge to 3D

The Copy to 3D command in NX DraftingPlus provides a streamlined pathto convert 2D designs into a 3D model, without recreating the geometry.This optional workflow lets you move an old 2D design into a new version asa 3D model.

Data Migration

In addition to the I-deas symbol importer, NX DraftingPlus supports thedirect import and export of I-deas drawings (ASC/DWG), DXF/DWG data,and IGES data. This lets you leverage existing investments in I-deas 2Ddata, or data from most other 2D systems.

NX Power Drafting

NX DraftingPlus is also available through a fully functional, standalonesolution called NX Power Drafting. It can be used to create detailedproduction drawings in two basic ways:

• As a tool for documenting a drawing using 3D solid models and assembliescreated in NX.

• As a standalone high-performance 2D design and drawing system.

NX Power Drafting consists of NX Gateway, NX Drafting, and NXDraftingPlus, as well as various translators to provide a complete 2D/3Ddrafting solution for NX.

Display view identifier

What is it?

The Display Identifier option lets you display either the view orientation orthe view name on the drawing displayed in the graphics window. The viewidentifiers are not plotted.



Name and orientation display identifier

You can display the view identifier for one or more specific drafting views orset it as a preference for all new drafting views.


When multiple drafting views appear on the drawing, it can be difficultto identify the view without selecting it. The view identifiers show thisinformation at all times. When creating drawing views using the StandardViews command, having the view orientation displayed helps to identifydifferent views.

Orientation display identifier for empty drawing views

Where do I find it?

View Style dialog box

Application DraftingPrerequisite DraftingPlus

ToolbarDrafting Edit ® Edit Style , then select one or moreviews from the drawing sheet

Radial Toolbar

Highlight the view border, press and hold the right

mouse button ® Style



MenuEdit ® Style then select one or more views from thedrawing sheet or Part Navigator

Graphics window

Double-click a view boundary

Right-click one or more view boundaries® StylePart Navigator Right-click a view node ® StyleLocation in dialogbox General tab ® Display Identifier list

View Preferences dialog box


Toolbar Drafting Preferences ® View PreferencesMenu Preferences ® ViewLocation in dialogbox General tab ® Display Identifier list

Drawing View enhancements

What is it?

The Drawing View command is enhanced with the following features. You cannow do the following:

• Place a drawing view by doing one of the following:

– Use Center to create an Automatic Rectangle boundary type.

– Use Corners to create a Manual Rectangle boundary type. You canalign each corner independently.

• Specify the center coordinates to define the position of the drawing withreference to the 3D model’s coordinate system.

• Specify a standard drawing view orientation or a custom orientation.


The enhancements to Drawing View simplify placing drawing views.

Specifying view orientation allows you to take advantage of several newcommands which organize orientation and enhance your 2D design process.



Where do I find it?


Toolbar Drawing→Drawing ViewMenu Insert→View→Drawing ViewShortcut Menu Right-click a drawing sheet border®Add Drawing ViewPart Navigator Right-click a sheet node®Add Drawing View

Automatically Start View Creation

What is it?

The new Automatically Start View Creation option lets you select the typeof view you want to automatically start when creating a drawing sheet. Youcan choose from the following:

• Base view

• Drawing view

This option replaces the Automatically Start Base View Command.


If you are primarily working with 2D drawings, automatically starting theDrawing View command simplifies your workflow.

Where do I find it?

Application DraftingMenu Preferences ® DraftingLocation in dialogbox General tab® Drawing Work Flow group

Create the first drawing sheet in the part file

Application DraftingPrerequisite Part file with no drawing sheets

Toolbar Drawing ® New SheetMenu Insert ® SheetPart Navigator Right-click the Drawing node® Insert Sheet



Location in dialogbox Settings group

Projected View enhancement

What is it?

The Projected View command is enhanced to make a drawing view as theparent view. The new drafting view is a drawing view with appropriateorientation.

The following drafting views can now be parent views when using theProjected View command:

• Base view

• Drawing view

• Orthographic view

• Auxiliary view


Projected View lets you place an orthographic or auxiliary view in a typicallayout, without having to specify the orientation.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Drawing→Projected ViewMenu Insert→View→Projected View

Shortcut MenuRight-click the border of an existing view ® AddProjected View

Part Navigator Right-click a view node® Add Projected View



Standard Views

What is it?

Use the Standard Views command to create one of several standard sets ofdrafting views on a sheet. You can specify the scale, center coordinates, viewstyle, and margins for the set of views you create.

You can create either drawing views or base views.

Multiple base view creation

Use Auto-Scale to Fit option when placing base views to scale the view set sothat all of the model geometry appears in them.

You can choose from the following standard sets of drafting views:

• Front / Top

• Front / Right

• Front / Left

• Front / Top / Right

• Front / Top / Left

• Front / Top / Right / Isometric

• Front / Top / Left / Isometric

For the drafting views, you can select either empty drawing views or baseviews associated to the 3D model.




You can create a whole set of standard drafting views at once rather thanone at a time simplifies the process.

You can create standard sets to ensure consistency when defining centercoordinates, margins, and style in a drawing.

You can standardize different drawings by creating specific sets of draftingviews arranged in a consistent layout.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Drawing→Standard ViewsMenu Insert→View→Standard Views

Shortcut MenuRight-click a drawing sheet border®Add StandardViews

Part Navigator Right-click a sheet node®Add Standard Views

Project to View

What is it?

Use the Project to View command to project Drafting objects from one view toanother.

The Project to View command lets you do the following:



• Create Drafting objects by projecting one or more objects from the sourceview onto either one or two planes. Silhouette curves are provided andextracted edges are connected.

• Simultaneously project the selected objects in the source view onto thedefined planes in one or more target views of the active drawing sheet.

• Infer the location of the planes directly on one of the target views orspecify the depth value for the planes.

• Select the curve type for the created silhouette curves on the specifiedplanes and the extracted edges connecting the two planes as active,reference, or none.

• Preview the projection.

The Drafting objects you want to project are view-dependent objects of thefollowing types:

• Sketch objects like curves and/or points.

• View dependent geometry objects like curves and/or points.

• Extracted edges.


When you use Project to View, the geometry is properly aligned. Thisensures that the view curves are positioned properly and are consistent indifferent views.

Where do I find it?

Application DraftingPrerequisite DraftingPlusMenu Insert ® Sketch Curve ® Project to View

Automatically Start Project to View Command

What is it?

When a Drawing View is the parent view for the Projected View command,you can set a preference to start the Project to View command automatically.

Where do I find it?

Application Drafting



Prerequisite DraftingPlusMenu Preferences ® DraftingLocation in dialogbox General tab® Drawing Work Flow group

Create projected views


Prerequisite

DraftingPlus

Open Projected View dialog box when a Drawing Viewis the parent view

Graphics window Right-click® Automatically Start Project to View

Detail View enhancement

What is it?

The detail view is now associated to its parent view. When you make changesto the parent view, these changes are immediately reflected in the detail view.

Associativity is active when you create a new detail view. You can make thedetail view independent of its parent by using the Convert to IndependentDetail View command from the shortcut menu.

In previous NX versions, support for associative updating of sketch curves indetail view was not available. This improvement benefits 2D centric designand drawing workflows who require the same behavior as that availablewith views from models.


Use the associative detail view when the parent view contains significantview-dependent data that might change after the detail view is created.



Use this functionality to avoid having to duplicate changes in parent anddetail views. This is especially useful for 2D workflows because the samesketch is seen in parent and detail views.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Drawing→Detail ViewMenu Insert→View→Detail View

Shortcut MenuRight-click the border of an existing view®Add DetailView

Part Navigator Right-click a view node®Add Detail View

Section line in Drawing View

What is it?

You can now add the following to drawing views:

• Section lines

• Half-section lines

• Revolved section lines


You can now easily add section line annotations to drawing views for2D-centric workflows.



Where do I find it?


Shortcut Menu

Right-click a drawing view border®Add Section Line

Right-click a drawing view border®Add Half-SectionLine

Right-click a drawing view border®Add RevolvedSection Line

Part Navigator

Right-click a drawing view node®Add Section Line

Right-click a drawing view node®Add Half-SectionLine

Right-click a drawing view node®Add RevolvedSection Line

Infinite sketch lines in Drafting

What is it?

New options for creating sketch lines let you do the following:

• Create a collinear infinite line while creating a finite line segment in asketch on the drawing sheet or in a drafting view.

Although infinite lines are collinear with line segments, they are createdas two separate objects. You can delete infinite lines, independent of theircollinear line segments, at anytime. You can also delete the line segment,independent of the collinear infinite line, at any time.

• Create only an infinite sketch line on the drawing sheet or in a draftingview.



• Create infinite lines which are associated to the tangent of an arc or thevertex of two line segments.

• Create line segments only. You can add a collinear infinite line to theexisting line segment at any time using the Add Infinite Line commandfrom the shortcut menu.

You can set the default color, font and width of an infinite line using theoptions in the File→Utilities→Customer Defaults dialog box. The options areavailable on the Gateway→Object→Infinite Line tab. You can also use Showand Hide commands to display or hide infinite lines.


Use infinite lines to help you create and align 2D geometry in a drawing.



Where do I find it?

Create a sketch line segment with a collinear infinite line


Prerequisite

DraftingPlus

You must be in an active sketch

Toolbar

Sketcher Tools→Profile

Sketcher Tools→Line

Sketcher Tools→Derived Lines

Menu

Insert→Sketch Curve→Profile

Insert→Sketch Curve→Line

Insert→Sketch Curve→Derived LinesLocation in dialogbar Infinite Line group→Add Infinite LineShortcut menu Before placing line, right-click→Add Infinite Line

Create a sketch infinite line only


Prerequisite

DraftingPlus

You must be in an active sketch

Toolbar

Sketcher Tools→Profile

Sketcher Tools→Line

Sketcher Tools→Derived Lines

Menu

Insert→Sketch Curve→Profile

Insert→Sketch Curve→Line

Insert→Sketch Curve→Derived LinesLocation in dialogbar Infinite Line group→Infinite Line OnlyShortcut menu Before placing line, right-click→Infinite Line Only

Add a collinear infinite line to an existing sketch line segment




Prerequisite

DraftingPlus

You must be in an active sketchGraphics window Right-click line segment→Add Infinite Line

Auto DimensionOverview How To Options Related Topics

Use the Auto Dimension command to create dimensions on selected curvesand points according to a set of rules.

You can apply the following rules in any order.

• Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions on Lines

• Create Dimensions to Reference Axes

• Create Symmetric Dimensions

• Create Length Dimensions

• Create Adjacent Angles

Driving and Automatic Dimensions

You can create two types of dimensions.

DrivingCreates a dimension based on an expression. You can convert drivingdimensions to reference dimensions.AutomaticThis type of dimensional constraint can only be created by autodimensioning. Automatic dimensions remove degrees of freedom from thesketch, and act like a constant length or angle constraint with a value.• When you drag sketch curves, automatic dimensions are relaxed,allowing you to shape the sketch. After the drag, the new shape willbe constrained by the automatic dimensions again.

• If you add a constraint that conflicts with an automatic dimension, theautomatic dimension is deleted.

• You can convert automatic dimensions into driving or referencedimensions.



All dimensions are displayed in the Part Navigator when TimestampOrder is turned off in the Unused Items®Sketch®Curves andDimensions®Dimensions folder.


In Modeling, use this command to assist in creating a fully constrained sketchby removing all degrees of freedom from the selected curves.

In Drafting, use this command to fully dimension selected sketch curvesin a drawing.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Auto Dimension

(Drafting and Sketch task environment) Sketch

Tools®Auto DimensionMenu (Modeling) Tools®Sketch Constraints®Auto

Dimension

(Drafting and Sketch task environment)Tools®Constraints®Auto Dimension

Continuous Auto DimensioningOverview How To Options Related Topics

Use the Continuous Auto Dimensioning command to automaticallydimension sketch curves after each operation.

This command uses auto dimensioning rules to fully constrain the activesketch, including positioning dimensions to the parent Datum CSYS.

You can set auto dimensioning rules from the following:

• Inferred Constraints and Dimensions

• File®Utilities®Customer Defaults®Sketch→Inferred Constraints andDimensions®Dimensions

The Continuous Auto Dimensioning command creates the automaticdimension type of sketch dimension.

Automatic dimensions fully constrain a sketch. The dimensions are updatedas you drag the sketch curves. They remove degrees of freedom from the



sketch but do not lock the values permanently. If you add a constraint thatconflicts with an automatic dimension, the automatic dimension is deleted.You can convert automatic dimensions into driving dimensions.


In Modeling, use this command to ensure you are always working with a fullyconstrained sketch which will be updated predictably.

In Drafting, use this command to automatically create dimensions for all thecurves that you create in a drawing.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar (Modeling)

Direct Sketch®Continuous Auto Dimensioning /

Inferred Constraints and Dimensions

(Drafting and Sketch task environment)

Sketch Tools®Continuous Auto Dimensioning /

Inferred Constraints and DimensionsMenu (Modeling, Drafting, and Sketch task environment)

Tools®Sketch Constraints®Continuous AutoDimensioning /Inferred Constraints and Dimensions

Make SymmetricOverview How To Options Related Topics

Use the Make Symmetric command to constrain two points or curves to besymmetric about a centerline in a sketch.

You can apply the symmetry constraint between two objects of the same type:

• Lines

• Arcs

• Circles

You can also make different point types symmetric. For example, you makethe end of a line and the center of an arc symmetric about a line.




Use this command when you create or edit a sketch and you want to controlthe position of existing sketch geometry to be symmetric to a centerline.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar

(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Make Symmetric


Tools®Make Symmetric

Menu

(Modeling and Drafting) Insert®SketchConstraint®Make Symmetric

(Sketch task environment) Insert®Make Symmetric

Pattern CurveOverview How To Options Related Topics

Use the Pattern Curve command to pattern edges, curves, and points that areparallel to the sketch plane.

The available types are:

• Linear Pattern

• Circular Pattern

This command also creates a pattern constraint that can be modifiedwhen you double-click one of the patterned curves.



Circular Pattern with 5 Instances

Where do I find it?

Toolbar(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Pattern Curve


Tools®Pattern CurveMenu (Modeling and Drafting) Insert®Sketch Curve®Pattern

Curve

(Sketch task environment) Insert®Curve®PatternCurve

PolygonOverview How To Options Related Topics

Use the Polygon command to create polygons by specifying:

• Center point

• Number of sides

• Radius

• Rotation angle

Polygons can be created using the following methods:

• Inscribed Radius



• Circumscribed Radius

• Side of Polygon

For this example, the following values are used:• Number of Sides = 8

• Size = Inscribed Radius

• Radius = 10.0

• Rotation = 0°

Where do I find it?

Toolbar(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Polygon


Tools®Polygon

Menu

(Modeling and Drafting) Insert®SketchCurve®Polygon

(Sketch task environment) Insert®Curve®Polygon

ChamferOverview How To Options Related Topics

Use the Chamfer command to bevel a sharp corner between two sketch lines.

You can create the following chamfer types:

• Symmetric

• Asymmetric


You can also hold the left mouse button and drag over curves to create achamfer.



Where do I find it?

Toolbar(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Chamfer


Tools®ChamferMenu (Modeling and Drafting) Insert®Sketch

Curve®Chamfer

(Sketch task environment) Insert®Curve®Chamfer

Copy or move sketch geometry in a vertical or horizontal directionWhen you drag sketch geometry to copy or move it, you can now use keyboardshortcuts to:

• Constrain the movement to a vertical or horizontal direction. Thedirections are relative to the active sketch.

• Enable or disable snapping.

You can copy or move curve end points or entire curves.

To do this task Perform this actionMove vertically or horizontally withsnapping.

Hold Shift and drag

Move vertically or horizontallywithout snapping.

Hold Shift+Alt and drag

Copy vertically or horizontally withsnapping.

Hold Shift+Ctrl and drag



Copy vertically or horizontally withoutsnapping.

Hold Shift+Ctrl+Alt and drag

Edit curve parameters enhancement

What is it?

You can now edit the parameters of non-associative lines and arcs.

Lines and arcs are now edited by the line or arc feature dialog box. There isa single dialog box for lines and one for arcs. This applies to lines or arcsthat are created:

• Associative• Non-associative• As features• Using Basic Curves


• To edit the parameters of non-associative lines or arcs.• To edit feature curves after removing their parameters.• To edit lines or arcs created as features.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, Drafting

Toolbar Edit Curve→ Edit Curve ParametersMenu Edit→ Curve→ Parameters

Graphics window

Double-click a line or arc, orright-click a line or arc and choose Edit Parameters, orright-click a line or arc and choose Edit Curve.

Reuse 2D section objects

What is it?

You can create reusable 2D section objects from existing sketch objects,such as points, curves, dimensions and groups, and add and retrieve themthrough the Reuse Library.• Reuse existing sketch objects at different locations and orientations, in anexisting sketch or as a new sketch.

• Share a 2D section library with other users.



• Retrieve a saved 2D section from the Reuse Library in the work part ascurves in an existing sketch or as a new sketch.

To create a new 2D section, do one of the following:

• Copy sketch curves, points, dimensions, and group objects from a sketchand right click Define Reusable Object on a library in the Reuse Librarybrowser.

• Click Define Reusable Object on the Reuse Library toolbar, choosethe 2D section, and then select the sketch curves, points, dimensionsand groups.

To retrieve a 2D section into a model, do one of the following:

• Drag and drop a 2D section from a node in the Reuse Library navigator tothe graphics window.

• Right-click and choose Insert on a 2D section object in the Reuse Library.


Reusing curves from a 2D Section library can be faster than creating newcurves.

Where do I find it?

ApplicationModeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, Drafting, andother applications where you can use the Reuse Library.

Graphics windowRight-click a library in the Reuse Librarynavigator®Add Reusable Object here

Import I-deas Drafting symbols

What is it?

You can now create NX custom symbols by importing I-deas Drafting symbols.These I-deas symbols must be stored in files with the .sym extension.

You can do the following:

• Import I-deas Drafting symbols from one or more SYM files or fromfolders and subfolders.

• Specify the destination library.



Note

You can import Ideas symbols into any folder except the PartSymbols folder.

• See the import status and summary.

• View the symbol.

• Search for a specific symbol.

• Stop the import.


Use this functionality to create NX symbols from existing I-deas symbols. Youcan also convert whole symbol libraries in one step.

This functionality allows you to leverage an existing investment in I-deas.

Where do I find it?

Application DraftingPrerequisite DraftingPlusMenu File ® Import ® Symbol

Import I-deas ASC/DWG drawing files

What is it?

You can now import I-deas ASC (ASCII) and DWG (binary) drawing files andgenerate the corresponding NX drawing.

Select the I-deas ASC/DWG file you want to import and specify a new part forthe generated NX drawing.


Use the I-deas drawing import command to import I-deas legacy drawingsin ASC or DWG file format.

This functionality allows you to leverage an existing investment in I-deas.

Where do I find it?

Application DraftingPrerequisite DraftingPlusMenu File ® Import ® I-deas ASC/DWG



Copy to 3D

What is it?

The Copy to 3D command copies sketch and view curves from drafting viewsto the 3D model space, for the purpose of constructing model geometry. Whenyou use the Copy to 3D command, the copied view curve(s) and/or sketchcurves become part of the current model, with no associativity to the draftingview.

The Copy to 3D command let you do the following:• Select all curves from one or more drafting views or specific curves.

• Select the destination part as the work part or you can specify anotherpart file.

• Place the copied curves on the bounding box of the model. From theDistance from View Plane list, you can choose Automatic or Specify.

• Create sketches in Modeling.

• Switch to Modeling.

The Automatic option automatically positions the copied curves on thebounding box of the model. The curves of each drafting view are copied to theappropriate face of the bounding box, depending on the view orientation youhave defined (TOP, LEFT, and so on). The Specify option lets you specify thedistance from the CSYS origin for each drafting view.

With the Automatic setting, you can also specify a Clearance value to offsetthe copied curves slightly from the bounding box to facilitate selection.

When copying selected curves automatically, you can specify if the boundingbox is inferred from the selected curves or from entire drafting views.

This command was previously available in Drafting in an early form. For thisrelease, the Copy to 3D command is enhanced.


Copy to 3D provides a streamlined path to convert 2D designs into 3D,without recreating the geometry.

If you copy multiple drafting views to the 3D model space in conjunction withthe new Standard Views command, the Automatic setting ensures that thecopied curves are optimally positioned to create models with minimal effort.You can use the curves to define sections or limits for extrusions.

Copy to 3D allows you to move an older version of a 2D design into a newversion, as a 3D model.



Where do I find it?


Menu Edit ® View ® Copy to 3DShortcut Menu Right-click selected drafting views®Copy to 3DPart Navigator Right-click a drafting view node®Copy to 3D

DXF/DWG Import to NX Drafting as Drawing Views

What is it?

The DXF/DWG data will be created in drawing views instead of importedviews. There will not be any data in modeling when you use this option.

The new options added to these dialogs are:

• Import to Drafting as Drawing Views - If this option is set then views inAutoCAD drawings (layout) will be created as drawing views in the NXdrawing.

• Include Model Space – If this option is set, one additional drawing will becreated for model data in the DXF/DWG file. The drawing will containthe TOP view of model data.

Note

Include Model Space is visible only if you select Import to Draftingas Drawing Views.


Use these commands if you want your 3D data in AutoCAD as 2D in NXdrafting and want to create drawing views instead of imported views. Thedata in the drawing views is not associated to the 3D data in Modeling andjust contains the 2D data. You can modify this 2D or can add data to drawingview.

Where do I find it?

Menu

File®Import®DXF/DWG®Import to New Part

File ®Open (*.dwg, *.dxf)®Options


Chapter

5 Reuse

Reuse Library

Component-first workflow for reusable components

What is it?

When you add a component from the Reuse Library to an assembly, you cannow select the component and place it before creating its mounting holes.Mounting holes are associated with components, and are automatically cutwhen you insert the component into the assembly.

The dialog box of the reusable component first leads you to create points thatspecify the location of the reusable components, as shown in the followingfigure. This example uses the Fastener Assembly dialog box.

The fastener assemblies are placed at the points, and their mounting holesare automatically cut, as shown in the following figure.


Reuse


Before NX 7.5, you added a reusable component by a feature-first approach,where you cut the mounting holes before adding the component. The newprocess has the following advantages:

• It is more intuitive.

• It speeds up the assembly process by combining several operations.

• It lets you standardize the use of components and their mounting holes.

Reusable pockets

What is it?

Use the Reusable Pocket command to create, add, or edit a reusable pocketin your model. Reusable pockets are stored in the Reuse Library.

You can also add or edit a reusable pocket when you add a reusable componentor fastener assembly.


Reusable pockets have the same advantages as other reusable components;for example:

• You do not have to create a pocket from scratch if one that meets yourneeds, or one that requires only minor modifications, is in the reuselibrary.

• They can support your company and design standards.

If you are using the Add Reusable Component or Fastener Assembly dialogboxes, you can add or edit a reusable pocket without closing the dialog box.


Reuse

Where do I find it?

Reusable Pocket

Toolbar Reuse Library®Reusable PocketMenu Tools®Reuse Library®Reusable Pocket

Add Reusable Component dialog box

Graphics window

Drag a part from the Reuse Library into the graphicswindow to open the Add Reusable Component dialogbox

Location in dialogbox Pocket group®Create Pocket

Fastener Assembly dialog box

Toolbar Reuse Library®Fastener AssemblyMenu Tools®Reuse Library®Fastener AssemblyLocation in dialogbox

Set Type to Position, then choose Configurationgroup®Pocket®Create Pocket

Add a reusable component or fastener assembly by component array

What is it?

You can now add a reusable component or a fastener assembly to an instancefeature by component array:

• To add a reusable component as a component array, drag the reusablecomponent you want into the graphics window and set the Placementoption to Create Component Array.

• To add a fastener assembly as a component array, select multiple pointswhen you position the fastener assembly.


This is useful when you want to, for example, add a selected fastenerassembly to every hole in an array in a single operation.

Where do I find it?

Reusable component


Reuse

Graphics windowDrag a reusable component into the graphics window,which opens the Add Reusable Component dialog box

Location in dialogbox Placement®Create Component Array

Fastener assembly

Toolbar Reuse Library®Fastener AssemblyMenu Tools®Reuse Library®Fastener AssemblyLocation in dialogbox

Type®Position, then Position group®Specify Pointand select multiple points

Add selected objects to the Reuse Library

What is it?

You can select geometry objects in the graphics window and add them to theReuse Library as reusable entities.

Available object types you can select are:

• Faces

• Bodies

• Features

• 2D Sections

• Additional types specified by the global selection filter.

After you specify an object type:

1. Select the objects from the graphics window.

2. Specify a reference (anchor) point.

3. Select the library folder to contain the objects.

4. (Optional) Create a preview image of the reusable objects.


You can easily add common geometry objects to the Reuse Library as reusableentities.


Reuse

Where do I find it?

Toolbar Reuse Library® Define Reusable ObjectMenu Tools® Reuse Library® Define Reusable Object

Search settings

What is it?

This enhancement lets you modify the Reuse Library search to do thefollowing:

• Run a case sensitive search.

• Search library folders and members.

• Search the entire library or the selected branch only.


You can modify the Reuse Library search settings to search the reuse librariesfaster and in a more efficient way.

Where do I find it?

Reuse Librarynavigator Search group ® Search Settings

Reuse library resource bar usability enhancements

What is it?

• You can now add, remove, or rename library folders from the ReuseLibrary navigator.

• When you drag a library member from the Reuse Library navigator tothe graphics window, you can now position the member at the cursorlocation. You can also select a face or a body with a reference point anddrag the member to it.


• You can modify the Reuse Library folders form the Reuse Librarynavigator.

• You can drag a reusable object from the Reuse Library and position itin graphics window.


Reuse

Where do I find it?

Reuse Librarynavigator Right-click a library® New Node/Rename/Delete

Fastener Assembly

Add a fastener assembly by point selection

What is it?

You can now select either a point or a hole to add a fastener assembly.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar Reuse Library®Fastener AssemblyMenu Tools®Reuse Library®Fastener AssemblyLocation in dialogbox Type®Position

Classify part in NX

What is it?

In Teamcenter, classification is used to create and maintain a hierarchicalclassification structure of your parts based on their attribute values. Thisenhancement lets you create, modify, or delete part classifications in NX.


You can create or modify a Teamcenter classification for a part from NX.

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite You must be in Teamcenter Integration.

Graphics window

Right click a classification object in the Reuse Librarynavigator ® Classify Part

Right click a classification object in the Reuse Librarynavigator ® Edit Classified Part

Right click a classification object in the Reuse Librarynavigator ® Remove Classified Part


Reuse

Product Template Studio

Product Template Studio enhancements

What is it?

The Product Template Studio application now has the ability to:

• Create templates from FEA context.

• Create templates from motion studies context.

• Clone drawings when a template is executed.

• Import classic variants information from Teamcenter and display it inthe PTS Author.

The following objects are now supported in a template:

• Motion files and objects such as:

– Joints, links, dampers, couplers

– Forces

– Simulations and solutions

– Animation controls

– Packaging objects

– Results

– Graphs

• FEM objects such as:

– Loads

– Constraints and boundary conditions

– Simulations and solutions

– Results


These enhancements give you the ability to capture and reuse robustpractices in motion studies and FEA analysis.


Reuse

Where do I find it?

Application Product Template studio

PrerequisiteYou must open a model and select a feature in theModel Explorer window.

Location in dialogbox Attributes tab

Knowledge Fusion Visual Rules enhancements

What is it?

The Product Template Studio application now allows you to add knowledgefusion visual rules to product templates. These rules are decision logics in thefollowing categories:

• Fetch — Fetch objects such as parts, features, bodies, reference sets andso on.

• Filter — Filter objects such as parts, features, expressions, geometry andso on.

• Construct — Create conditional components and decision logic loops.

• Act — Adds or removes objects such as components, attributes,expressions, layers and so on.

• Result — Sends the results to the information window or an HTML filewhich you can author.


Use the knowledge fusion visual rules to visually add knowledge fusion logicto new and existing product templates.

Where do I find it?

Application Product Template StudioPrerequisite You must open a model.Location in dialogbox User interaction panel


Chapter

6 CMM Inspection Programming

CMM Inspection Programming

What is it?

NX CMM Inspection Programming is an application that you use to definecomplete, verifiable machine inspection programs for Coordinate MeasuringMachines (CMMs) and NC (Numerical Control) machine tools, withappropriate post-processors or additional software such as CMM InspectionExecution. Using an inspection file that works in synch with the masterNX model file, NX CMM Inspection Programming unites the world of themanufacturing shop floor with manufacturing planning and design so thatshop floor operators and design engineers can easily share unambiguousinspection data.



Because NX CMM Inspection Programming is fully integrated with NX PMIand Manufacturing, PMI annotations and design updates to the master modelautomatically update in your inspection programs. Annotations are easilyselectable, and can encapsulate requirements as well as part information.

NX CMM Inspection Programming offers these benefits over other inspectionprogramming applications:

• The ability to program against the original NX master model.

• PMI associativity that lets you quickly import inspection features andtolerances, as well as automatic inspection paths for those tolerancesand features.

• Use of an inspection method library to automate inspection paths andparameters using customizable templates.

• Machine and tool library storage.

• Full machine simulation and collision detection.

• Dimensional Measurement Interface Specification (DMIS) compliantsource files that you can use to execute an inspection job and displayoperator work instructions and inspection results at the CMM or NCmachine.

Where do I find it?

Application NX CMM Inspection ProgrammingMenu File®NewLocation in dialogbox Inspection tab®select a template file

NX CMM Inspection Programming workflowNX CMM Inspection Programming is based on the NX Manufacturingarchitecture and offers many flexible ways to inspect a model. Although youcan complete many tasks in different orders, the following represents atypical workflow.

1. Open an NX master part file to inspect and optionally, create tolerancesand annotations in PMI.



2. Create an inspection part file that references the NX master model.

Insert, Feature,and TolerancetoolbarsInspectionNavigatorNavigator,Actions, andOperationstoolbars

3. Retrieve a virtual CMM model, probe head, and probe from a library, andalign the master model as necessary.



4. Link to PMI to import:

• Inspection features for all toleranced solids, based upon modelgeometry.

• GD&T and direct tolerance information.



• Automatic inspection paths on the toleranced features.

Note

Any tolerance and feature names you define in PMI are retainedin NX CMM Inspection Programming.

5. Manually add additional elements, including:

• Features, such as points, lines, planes, cylinders, curves, surfaces,patterns, arcs, circles, spheres, cones, closed and open slots and tabs,and tori.



• Tolerances, including:

– Direct tolerances such as distance between, angle between,coordinate, diameter, radius, width, and cone angle.

– Datum definitions and most GD&T tolerances.

• Special features and inspection paths.

Constructedfeatures

Inspectionpaths

Multi-featurepaths

6. Calibrate and simulate your processes using NX collision detection.

7. Output your processes to a Dimensional Measuring Interface Standard(DMIS) file and then run the program on an actual CMM.



8. In a solution such as Dimensional Planning and Validation (DPV),statistically compare the results file created from your inspection run tothe NX CMM Inspection Programming process.

9. Edit your process if necessary. You can delete, modify, or add new features,tolerances, probes, and inspection operations.


http://www.plm.automation.siemens.com/en_us/products/tecnomatix/quality_mgmt/dim_plan_val/index.shtml

Chapter

7 Turbomachinery Milling

Turbomachinery (Multi Blade) Milling overviewIn Turbomachinery Milling, you use Multi Blade operations to machinemultiple blade parts, such as impellers or blisks, with or without splitters.Multi Blade Milling operations are designed specifically for machining bladetype parts. They are the most efficient operations for machining these typesof parts. You can create operations for roughing, rest milling, hub finishing,and blade and splitter finishing.

Roughing Rest Milling

Hub Finishing Blade and Splitter Finishing


Turbomachinery Milling

Multi Blade Milling operations support the following:

• Tool axis smoothing

• Tool path smoothing

• In Process Workpiece

• Holder Collision checking and avoidance

• A preview of expected results

There are no geometric restrictions and the geometry you specify is shared byall the operation types. You can specify the following geometry:

• Multiple splitters

• Curved blades with undercuts

• Blades with one or more surfaces

• Surfaces without a well ordered UV grid.

Gaps and overlaps are automatically healed.

Where do I find it?

Application Manufacturing

PrerequisiteRequires the NX Turbomachinery Milling Add-onlicense.

Toolbar Insert®Create OperationMenu Insert®OperationLocation in dialogbox

Create Operation dialog box®Typegroup®mill_multi_blade

Multi Blade geometry — MULTI_BLADE_GEOMUse the MULTI_BLADE_GEOM geometry parent to define the rotation axisand geometry for blade machining. The geometry that is defined can beinherited and used in blade machining operations.



Hub Splitter

Blade Blade Blend Shroud

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Insert®Create GeometryMenu Insert®Geometry


Create Geometry dialog box®Typegroup®mill_multi_blade®Geometry Subtype

group®MULTI_BLADE_GEOM

Multi Blade Rough operationsUse Multi Blade Rough operations to create roughing operations for bladetype parts. Multi Blade Rough operations are part type specific roughingoperations. The operations allow multi-level, multi-axis roughing for multiblade type parts. Roughing is performed from the top down.

You can define the following:

• Multi-level cutting

• Cut patterns

• Depths

• Start point and cut direction



• Tool axis lead/lag and tilt

• Tool path and tool axis smoothing

• Blank geometry or IPW for stock definition

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Insert®Create OperationMenu Insert®Operation


Create Operation dialog box®Typegroup®mill_multi_blade®Operation Subtype

group®MULTI_BLADE_ROUGH

Multi Blade Hub Finish operationsUse Hub Finish operations to create finish tool paths for multi blade hubs.Hub Finish operations are part type specific finishing operations. Theoperations allow hub finishing for multi blade type parts.

You can define:

• Cut patterns




Hub Finish operations have the following characteristics:



• They do not require shroud geometry.

• They do not machine blends. Blends are covered by the Blade Finishoperations. Areas where the blends of adjacent blades touch and coverthe hub are not cut.

Where do I find it?





group®HUB_FINISH

Multi Blade Finish operationsUse Blade Finish operations to finish blades and blade blends down to thehub. Blade Finish operations are part type specific finishing operations. Theoperations allow multi-axis finishing for the blade or splitter of multi bladetype parts.

You can define:

• Sides to cut

• Cut patterns

• Cut levels





Where do I find it?





group®BLADE_FINISH


Chapter

8 Teamcenter Integration for NX

Save As performance improvements

What is it?

The performance of the Save As command is improved when you areoperating at higher latencies in a four-tier Teamcenter environment.

Note

This functionality is available with Teamcenter 8 or later.

The performance is improved regardless of the number of:

• Components in the assembly

• Component attributes synchronized with Teamcenter

• Part attributes synchronized with Teamcenter

The improved performance applies when you use Save As for the following:

• New item

• New item type

• New revision

• Alternative representation


Save As performance is improved when you are using Teamcenter Integrationin a four-tier Teamcenter environment.

Where do I find it?

Application Teamcenter IntegrationMenu File®Save As


Teamcenter Integration for NX

Modified customer defaults for saving precise assemblies

What is it?

The Ensure Precise Assembly for Imprecise Assemblies customer defaultis changed to Save Imprecise Assemblies as Precise on Save PreciseAssembly to more accurately reflect the action during a save of impreciseassemblies. The check box for this option is selected by default.

To simplify saving imprecise and precise assemblies, the following customerdefaults are removed:

• Synchronize Precise Structure

This option is now on by default

• Legacy Update Precise Structure

This option is no longer applicable as Synchronize Precise Structureis on by default.

• Automatically Update Precise Assembly Revision Modified Flag

This option is now on by default.


The customer defaults for saving precise assemblies are simplified. You nowhave one customer default option for saving precise assemblies.

Where do I find it?

MenuFile®Utilities®Customer Defaults®TeamcenterIntegration for NX®General, Assembly tab.

Longer names for non-masters and multi-CAD files

What is it?

The number of characters allowed for a name or number is extended to 128characters from a previous limit of 69 characters for non-master datasets(drawings, FEMs, and so on) and multi-CAD files (JT files and so on). Thisapplies to new datasets and multi-CAD files and previously created ones. Younow have 128 character limits for master datasets, non-master datasets,and multi-CAD files.

This capability is enabled automatically in NX 7.5 and works with Teamcentersupport for 128 characters.




You can use longer names for non-master datasets and multi-CAD files.

Where do I find it?

Application Teamcenter Integration

Password option for utilities when running Teamcenter 8

What is it?

You can hide the password in a file that contains the password. When yourun Teamcenter 8, you can use the new password option pf as a commandline option instead of p.

You can use this whenever a password is required. This includes allTeamcenter Integration utilities and command line startup of TeamcenterIntegration.

The value for pf is a file name. Teamcenter Integration reads the password inthe file and sends the extracted password to Teamcenter.

For example, you can use the following to start Teamcenter Integration:ugraf —pim=yes —u=xyz —pf=mypassword.dat

It is recommended that you ensure that the file is protected by local machineaccess controls so that only authorized user accounts for certain applicationscan read the file.


You can keep passwords more secure by hiding them from unauthorized users.

Where do I find it?

ApplicationTeamcenter Integration command line utilities andcommand line startup

Adding item types to File New templates

What is it?

You can select from multiple item types for a template when you create a newitem. The item types available can vary for each template and are provided inthe Item Type list. The listed item types can be customized for each template.



The Item Type list can be modified to list several or all valid item types bymodifying the template PAX files.

Note

Acceptable item types are those that are valid Teamcenter item types.

The following XML element needs to be modified for each template to addadditional item types:

<ItemType></ItemType>

The following examples show how to modify the XML element for differentscenarios:

• To display the full list of item types:<ItemType>Any</ItemType>

• To display the full list of item types, but have an item type preselectedand displayed as the default:

<ItemType>NXPart,Any</ItemType>

• To display a specific list of item types, include only those that are to belisted:

<ItemType>NXPart,NXDrawing,NXSheetmetal</ItemType>

• To keep the template tied to one item type, include only that one:<ItemType>NXPart</ItemType>

Note

If only one item type is allowed for a template, the Item Type listis not displayed in the File New dialog box.

The Item Type list is only shown when you are creating a new item, not whenyou are creating a non-master such as a drawing that has a specificationrelation type.

When auto-assign is off, after you assign a number, revision, or item nameand the item type is changed, all of the fields are cleared. If auto-assign is onand the item type is changed, all of the fields are reassigned new numbersand values. This occurs because if you have a naming rule in effect for oneitem type but not another, the values that are current may not be valid.

For CAM templates (in the Manufacturing tab in the File New dialogbox), the list of valid item types is defined by the Teamcenter preferenceNX_supported_operation_types. The functionality for item types in CAMtemplates is the same as other templates, but limited by the types set in thepreference. The item type default for CAM templates is MENCMachining.




You can customize new item templates by adding a list of specific item typesthat you can select.

Where do I find it?

Application Teamcenter IntegrationMenu File→NewLocation in dialogbox Item Type

Create an alternate representation in model template

What is it?

You can use File→New to create a new model as an alternate representation(Alt Rep). On the Model tab, select the Alt Rep check box for a model templateto create an Alt Rep. The Alt Rep dataset is created under an existing ItemRevision.

The value for the Alt Rep dataset name is created using the same methodthat is used for creating an Alt Rep when you perform a Save As operation(<ItemNumber>-<ItemRev>-alt#).

You cannot create a new item when an Alt Rep is being created. When the AltRep check box is selected (it is not selected by default), the Item Type list isnot available. Also, you cannot create an Alt Rep for CAE and CAM items.

In the modeling PAX file (nxdm_ugs_model_templates.pax), the AltRep checkbox is not included by default and must be added for modelingtemplates. Modeling templates are defined as only those templates wherethe class attribute of ObjectData has the value ModelTemplate as in<ObjectData class=”ModelTemplate”>. To add the Alt Rep check box to a modeltemplate, add the following to the PAX file:

<ShowAltRep>Yes</ShowAltRep>

For example:<PaletteEntry id=”d2”>

<References/><Presentation name=”Model” desription=”NX Example with datum CSYS”>

<PreviewImage type=”UGPart” location=”@DB/model-plain–1–mm-template/A”/></Presentation><ObjectData class="ModelTemplate">

<Filename>@DB/model_inch/A</Filename><Units>English</Units><ItemType>Item,Part,SpecElement,DMTemplate</ItemType><RelationType>master</RelationType><ShowAltRep>Yes</ShowAltRep>

<ObjectData>



</PaletteEntry>

When you have a part loaded and select the Alt Rep check box, the templateswitches to non-master functionality. The Number, Revision, and Item Nameboxes are grayed out, the Dataset Name box is displayed, and the ReferencePart boxes are populated with values. You can use the Browse button toselect a different reference part. If a part is not loaded, those boxes are blankand grayed out. You can use the Browse button to select a part to reference.

In addition, the Add master part as a component check box is displayed. Ifyou select this check box, the master dataset is added as a component of thenewly created Alt Rep. This is shown in the Assembly Navigator.

If you create an Alt Rep and the referenced item does not have a masterdataset or a master dataset exists without a named reference, when you clickOK in the File New dialog box to create the Alt Rep, you are prompted tocreate the master first.

If you select an existing Alt Rep as the reference part, the correspondingmaster part is loaded and used as the reference part instead.

A Blank Model template contains the Alt Rep check box by default. A BlankModel template is displayed if all of the templates in a PAX file are modelingtemplates. If the templates in a PAX file are a mixture of modeling and othertemplates, then the blank template is a Blank Gateway template, and theAlt Rep check box is not included.

If you create an Alt Rep in Teamcenter and open it in NX, the model templatesthat have the Alt Rep specification in the PAX file are shown in the File Newdialog box. If no templates have the Alt Rep specification in the PAX file, thenall model templates are shown with the Alt Rep check box displayed and theAdd master part as a component check box not displayed. You can create theAlt Rep but no master dataset can be added as a component.


You can create an Alt Rep from a new model template.

Where do I find it?

Application Teamcenter IntegrationMenu File→NewLocation in dialogbox Model tab®Alt Rep check box



Storing template PAX files in Teamcenter

What is it?

You can store the PAX files used to define the templates in TeamcenterItems and Item Revisions. The PAX files stored in Teamcenter are read byTeamcenter Integration during startup to create the templates containedin the File New dialog box.

You define the location of the PAX files with the following Teamcenterpreference:

TC_NX_FileNewPAXFiles_NX?

where ? is the version of NX you are running, such as 6 or 7

For example, if you are running NX 7:TC_NX_FileNewPAXFiles_NX7

Valid values: Items or Item Revisions

For example: model_1 or model_2/A

Note

Typically there are multiple values, such as one for the modelPAX file, one for the drawing PAX file, and so on.

This preference is not shipped with Teamcenter; you must add it manually.If the preference is not used, Teamcenter Integration defaults to thedefault location of PAX files used in previous releases of NX, which is%UGII_BASE_DIR%\ugii\templates, or as defined by the environmentvariable UGII_TEMPLATE_DIR.

If only an Item is listed in the preference, the PAX file in the latest ItemRevision of that Item is used. This is determined by the Latest by CreationDate revision rule.

To modify the contents of a PAX file, you revise the Item Revision and thenchange the PAX file dataset under the newly created Item Revision.

It is recommended that you store each PAX file dataset in a separate Item.This method enables each Item Revision of the Item to contain the samePAX file with different revisions of the file. Storing multiple PAX files in thesame Item could cause problems as subsequent Item Revisions could containdifferent PAX files, not just different versions of the same file.


Managing the PAX files in Teamcenter Items and Item Revisions providesmore flexibility and universal access to the same PAX files within an



installation and allows you to replicate the PAX files in a Teamcentermulti-site configuration.

Where do I find it?

Application Teamcenter IntegrationMenu File→NewLocation in dialogbox Templates in tabs

SSL supported in four-tier Teamcenter environment

What is it?

Secure Socket Layer (SSL) is now available when you connect to Teamcenterin a four-tier Teamcenter environment. SSL is a layer of security provided byweb servers and its use is identified by a URL that begins with https.

SSL capability is provided by the use of Teamcenter’s Service OrientedArchitecture (SOA) as the new communications channel with Teamcenterin the four-tier environment. SOA replaces AIWS as the communicationschannel.


You have a more secure communication method when using TCIN in afour-tier Teamcenter environment.

Where do I find it?

Application Teamcenter Integration

The incorporation of Teamcenter’s SOA is part of theTCIN architecture for this release and is automaticallyimplemented in the software. No preferences or optionsare needed to activate the functionality.

Performance improvement for four-tier deployment

What is it?

NX four-tier client performance improvements enable NX users from remotedivisions and disparate locations to work in real-time with regional/globalTeamcenter hubs at network latencies as high as 250ms with four-tierdeployments.



With these improvements, you can significantly reduce your IT costs byconsolidating your multi-site environments.


You can work globally more easily and efficiently, and reduce IT costs.

Where do I find it?

ApplicationTeamcenter Integration in a four-tier Teamcenterenvironment.

Add custom menu selection

What is it?

You can add a custom menu selection to an existing shortcut menu inTeamcenter Navigator. The shortcut menu is displayed when you right-clickan object in Teamcenter Navigator.

You can add custom menu selections for the following item and node types:

• Item

• Item Revision

• Dataset

• Folders

Note

Only folders that have Teamcenter unique identifiers are supported.For example, these include the Newstuff and Home folders, but notthe search folders.

To see the custom menu selection, right-click a supported object orcombination of objects, such as an Item Revision and its datasets. If anyof the objects selected are not supported, the custom menu selection is notavailable. Also, when you right-click in a blank area (no object is selected),the custom menu selection is not available.

The custom menu selection is implemented programmatically using NX Open.


You can add additional functionality by using custom menu selections atyour site.



Where do I find it?

Application Teamcenter IntegrationResource Bar Teamcenter Navigator

Import and manage visual reports in Teamcenter

What is it?

You can import and then manage your HD3D visual reports in Teamcenter.The ugmgr_vpximport utility allows you to import the visual reportssupplied with the NX product into the Teamcenter database. You can thenuse Teamcenter functionality to manage and control the reports.

Note

This functionality is applicable only when you are running Teamcenter2007.2 or Teamcenter 8.2.

You can set a Teamcenter preference to a the location where the visualreports from NX were imported. When you select the Report Name fromthe drop-down menu on the HD3D Tools dialog box for the type of reportyou want, the imported reports are listed as choices. If you do not set thispreference, the Report Name drop-down menu is initially empty. TheTeamcenter preference is:

TC_NX_default_visual_report_folder_path

As you use the imported reports or create your own custom reports theseare added to the drop-down list up to a maximum of 20. The most recentlyactivated reports are listed first and when you start a new NX session, thelist of reports is remembered from the previous session. If you use theTeamcenter preference, the most recently activated reports are listed andthen ones from the defined location are added.


You can import and manage your HD3D visual reports in Teamcenter.

Where do I find it?

Location ofutility %UGII_ROOT_DIR%\ugmanager\ugmgr_vpximport.exe


Chapter

9 Gateway

Handles and visual indicators enhancements

What is it?

The appearance and functionality of various handles and visual indicatorsthat assist in the creation and editing of geometry have been enhancedto provide a more visually compelling and engaging end-user experience.Enhancements include:

• Handles that are easier to select.

• 3D shapes for auxiliary handle geometry to help differentiate handlesfrom the surrounding NX geometry.

• Colors to denote the handle state for improved usability.

• Handle hints displayed on the handles show how to use the handle.

Handles and visualindicators

Description

Handle selection You can now click anywhere on the handle shape to select thehandle.

The handle snap point is unaffected by this enhancement.3D shaded handles All handles now have 3D shaded appearance regardless of the

display mode.

Handle appearance in wireframe mode


Gateway


Description

OrientXpressappearance

The OrientXpress has a new appearance to help distinguish it fromother triad-like Handles.

CSYS Manipulator The CSYSManipulator now has a 3D appearance and the origin canbe clearly distinguished from the other elements of the manipulator.

View Triadappearance

The View Triad has a new appearance that includes a transparentbox to help visualize the orientation of the model geometry.

WCS appearance The WCS also has a new appearance.

PreselectionNormal


Gateway


Description

The SketchManipulatorappearance

The Sketch Manipulator now has a 3D appearance and is alignedto other Sketch Triad objects.

Preselection Active Sketch CSYSLinear dimensionhandles appearance

The appearance of the handle is changed.

Preselection Active InactiveAngular dimensionhandles appearance


Preselection Active InactiveVector handlesappearance


Preselection Selection Inactive


Gateway


Description

Display handle hintsin the graphicswindow

Handle hints are arrows that appear when you hover on a handleto show the direction the handle can be dragged in or snapped to.

Linear translation allowed Angular translation allowed

Reposition handle Reverse vector direction

You can show or hide handle hints on the part by using theShow Handle Hints check box in the Preferences®VisualizationPreferences®Handles®Session Settings group.

New pre-selectionand selection colorsfor handles

Now colors help to clearly identify each handle state:

• Pre-selection

• Selection

• Active handle, that is, handle that accepts input

• Inactive handleColor control ofhandles and theOrientXpress

You can set either customer defaults or Visualization preferencesto customize handle colors for all handles:

• File®Utilities®CustomerDefaults®Gateway®Visualization®Color Settings

• Preferences®Visualization Preferences®Handles®PartSettings


Gateway


Description

Display and colorcontrol for poles andpolylines

You can set either customer defaults or Visualization preferences tocustomize pole and polyline display and colors:

• File®Utilities®Customer Defaults®Modeling®FreeformModeling®Color and Font

• Preferences®Modeling®Analysis®Pole and Polyline Display

You can now select the polyline color for display geometry andedited geometry.

Control handle size You can change the sizes of handles by using the Handle Size optionin the Preferences®Visualization Preferences®Handles®PartSettings group.

Measure Distance

Measure Angle

The Measure Distance and Measure Angle command outputs havea new appearance.

Measure Distance Measure AngleOn-screen input boxes On-screen input boxes have a new 3D appearance.

Toolbar and menu consistency, and Roles

What is it?

The content of toolbars and menus are improved and more consistent acrossapplications, and in full screen display mode.


Gateway

• Toolbars are consolidated and reorganized to better match the menu barmenu organization. Some menu bar menus have been reorganized, andsome commands have moved to other submenus where they better fit in.

• Toolbar drop-down lists better match many of the submenus.

• The menus and toolbars available in the different roles, now better matchthe required tasks for the roles.

Where do I find it?

Resource bar Roles palette


Gateway

Add or Remove Buttons on toolbar drop-down lists

What is it?

It is now easier to locate the Add or Remove Buttons option that lets youcontrol which commands appear on toolbar drop-down lists.

The option is available on the menu that appears when you right-click adrop-down list on a toolbar.

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite

You must open the Customize dialog box first.Right-click in the toolbar area and choose Customize,or click Tools®Customize.

ToolbarRight-click on a toolbar drop-down list®Add orRemove Buttons

Collection toolbars

What is it?

A collection toolbar is a toolbar that contains a collection of some of anapplication’s individual toolbars. It is the default toolbar that is displayedwhen you enter the full screen display mode.

Collection toolbars are available for the following applications:

• Modeling

• Shape Studio

• Drafting

The following graphic shows the collection toolbar available for Modeling.


Use collection toolbars to reduce the need to change tabs to get to otherapplication toolbars.

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite You must be in the full screen display mode.


Gateway

Toolbar Manager Modeling/Shape Studio/Drafting

Command Finder enhancements

What is it?

The Command Finder dialog box has the following new options:

Find Commandsin CurrentApplication Onlycheck box

Finds and lists commands in the current application.

Show ToolbarPath check box

Displays the toolbar location under the commanddescription in the Matches for list.

Show on Toolbarshortcut menuoption

Shows the command on the toolbar when you select thecommand presented in the Matches for list, right-clickand choose Show on Toolbar.

The Show on Toolbar option is available:

• If a command is not already displayed on a toolbar.

• If a command exists on any toolbar.

Show on Menushortcut menuoption

Shows the command on the menu when you select thecommand presented in the Matches for list, right-clickand choose Show on Menu.


Gateway

The Show on Menu option is available if a command isnot already displayed in a menu.

Where do I find it?

Menu Help®Command Finder

Toolbar Standard®Command FinderLocation in dialogbox

Settings®Find Commands in Current ApplicationOnly/Show Toolbar Path

Shortcut menuRight-click the command in the Matches for list®Showon Toolbar/Show on Menu

Save a user role with the current layout

What is it?

The new Update with Current Session option lets you update a user rolewith the current menu and toolbar layout. This is especially useful after youmake multiple changes to your menus and position your toolbars to bestsuit your workflow.

Where do I find it?

Resource barRoles palette®right-click a user role® Update withCurrent Session


Gateway

Name of last selected role

What is it?

The name of the role that was you last selected is now displayed in theCustomize dialog box.

Where do I find it?

Menu Tools®CustomizeLocation in dialogbox Roles page®Last Applied Role:<name of the role>

Point Constructor enhancement

What is it?

When you use the Point Constructor, you can now input coordinates withrespect to the coordinate system of your choice. To enable you to do this, thefollowing Reference options are added to the Point dialog box:

• Absolute - Work Part

• Absolute - Displayed Part

• WCS

• Drawing

These options replace theWCS and the Relative to Absolute check boxes.

When you are in the Drafting application, you can do the following:

• Select the view on a drawing sheet using the Select View option and usethe CSYS of that view as reference when you input coordinates.

• Display the drawing sheet coordinates even when the geometry in a viewis selected, using the Drawing option.

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite All applications except DraftingMenu Insert®Datum/Point®PointLocation in dialogbox Coordinates group®Reference list


Gateway

Note

The Point Constructor is also used by many other commands in avariety of applications.

Point on Bounded Grid

What is it?

A new Snap Point option, Point on Bounded Grid, is now available. Usethis option to snap cursor selection to points defined on datum plane gridsand view section grids.


Datum plane grids provide context of location and size to objects. Use thisoption to find points as a reference and measurement aid during selection.

Where do I find it?

PrerequisitesThis option is available with most commands thatsupport Snap Point options.

Selection Bar Snap Point option®Point on Bounded Grid

Part Navigator entry for Datum Plane Grid

What is it?

The Datum Plane Grid you create is now displayed as a node in the PartNavigator. You can select the node to highlight the feature, and right-clickthe node to access the commands associated with the feature.

The parent-child relationship between the Datum Plane Grid and the DatumPlane is also displayed in the Dependencies panel of the Part Navigator.

Part Navigator

History ModeModel ViewsCameras

User ExpressionsModel History

Datum Coordinate System (0)Datum Plane (1)


Gateway

Dependencies

Datum Plane (1)

ChildrenDatum Plane Grid

ParentsDatum Coordinate System (0)

Where do I find it?

PrerequisitesThe Datum Plane node must be selected under theModel History node in the Part Navigator.

Part Navigator Dependencies panel®Datum Plane Grid node

Auto complete of command input

What is it?

A new auto complete capability is added to some command dialog boxes thathave a preview. This capability is activated after you make the minimumrequired input for a command to display a preview. You can then startanother command without clicking OK or Apply in the current command’sdialog box. The software completes the current command and opens thedialog box for the next command.

The OK button displays brackets when auto complete is available.


You can use fewer mouse-clicks as you work through several commands.


Gateway

Where do I find it?

PrerequisitesYou have to make the minimum required input for thecommand.

File New enhancement

What is it?

The File®New dialog box has a new Inspection tab. You can select from theavailable templates and create a new inspection part.

For more information, see NX CMM Inspection Programming.

Where do I find it?

Application NX CMM Inspection ProgrammingMenu File®New

Toolbar Standard®NewLocation in dialogbox Inspection tab

Inspection Navigator

What is it?

A new Inspection Navigator tab is now available on the Resource bar. Usethis navigator to view the inspection component details of an inspection part.

For more information, see NX CMM Inspection Programming.

Where do I find it?

Application NX CMM Inspection Programming

Resource bar Inspection Navigator


Gateway

Generate accurate section curves with lightweight loading

What is it?

The Load Exact Representations when Saving Section Curves customerdefault loads solid bodies or sheet bodies for all visible lightweight bodies onthe section plane, when saving copies of section curves.

If you enable this customer default, the Save Copy of Section Curves optionuses the loaded solid body and sheet body geometry to create accurate sectioncurves. You can access this option from:

• The Assembly Navigator

• The View Section dialog box

• The Datum Plane Grid dialog box

If you do not enable this customer default, the Save Copy of Section Curvesoption sometimes creates approximate section curves from the loadedlightweight geometry.


You save on loading time and memory allocation when you load only thevisible bodies on the section plane as solid bodies or sheet bodies, and loadeverything else as lightweight bodies.

Use this customer default if you use lightweight loading sometimes, but needaccurate section curves. Unlike the polyline approximations created directlyfrom lightweight bodies, the accurate section curves generated from the solidand sheet bodies can be used in curve editing commands. For example, youcan extend, trim, or offset the accurate section curves.

Where do I find it?

Load Exact Representations when Saving Section Curves customer default

Menu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox Gateway®View Operations®View Sectioning tab

Save Copy of Section Curves option

Toolbar View®Edit Work Section


Gateway

Menu

View®Operation®New Section

View®Section®New Section

Insert®Datum Plane Grid

AssemblyNavigator

Right-click the Sections folder®New Section

Expand the Sections folder®Right-click a sectionnode®Save Copy of Section Curves


View Section dialog box®Section Curve Settings

group®Save Copy of Section Curves

Datum Plane Grid dialog box®Modeling Settings

group®Save Copy of Section Curves

Layer Settings — enhancements

What is it?

The following options are available in the Layer Settings dialog box:

• Delete Category

• Rename Category

• Edit Category Description

These options are available on the shortcut menu when you right-click asingle layer in the layer list and the layer belongs to a single category.

The Restrict One Layer to One Category check box is added to the CustomerDefaults dialog box to enable you to restrict the use of a category name to asingle layer, and a single layer to a single category name.


• Use the shortcut menu options to quickly edit a category description,rename the category or delete it.

• Use the Restrict One Layer to One Category customer default to performoperations on layer categories where you want to use one layer percategory.

Where do I find it?

Shortcut menu options in the Layer Settings dialog box


Gateway

PrerequisiteIn the Layer Settings dialog box, the Category Displaycheck box must be cleared.

Toolbar Utility®Layer SettingsMenu Format®Layer SettingsLocation in dialogbox In the Layer group, right-click a layer

Restrict One Layer to One Category in the Customer Defaults dialog box

Menu File®Utilities®Customer Defaults


Customer Defaults®Gateway®User Interface®LayerDialog box tab®Restrict One Layer to One Categorycheck box

Shadow Settings enhancements

What is it?

The Shadow Settings dialog box is enhanced to support soft shadows in theAdvanced Studio Display mode.

You can:

• Specify if the shadow edges are hard or soft.

• Increase the quality of the softness of the shadows and reduce distortionssuch as banding.

Soft Shadows —off

Soft Shadows —on

Soft shadowswith extra soft

edges

Soft shadowswith extrasoft edgesand improvedquality


Gateway


Soft shadows enable you to capture good quality images for design reviews.

Where do I find it?

Prerequisite Advanced Studio Display mode must be enabled.

Toolbar Visualize Shape®Shadow SettingsMenu View®Visualization®Shadow SettingsLocation in dialogbox Advanced Studio Settings group

Capture Studio Image

What is it?

Use the Capture Studio Image command to capture a static image of the workview in the Studio rendering style or when True Shading is enabled.

You can define options such as image size, dots per inch, anti-aliasingsamples, and improve the quality of the captured images.

The image size and image quality depend upon the graphics device supportand the current graphics memory at the time of the image capture.

The captured images can be saved in the following file formats:

• .tif

• .jpg

• .png

• .gif

• .bmp

The following graphics show the difference between the File®Export resultsand the Capture Studio Image results.

While the File®Export command captures an image of the current graphicswindow size, the Capture Studio Image command supports standard ISOand ANSI image sizes. In this example, the captured image size is largerthan the graphics window size, but the aspect ratio of the graphics window ismaintained in the captured image.


Gateway

File®Export results Capture Studio Image results

This command is available on Windows platform only.

Where do I find it?

PrerequisiteTrue Shading must be enabled, or the Rendering Stylemust be set to Studio.

Toolbar Visualize Shape®Capture Studio ImageMenu View®Visualization®Capture Studio Image

GC Toolkits

What is it?

GC Toolkits is a set of customizations and programs that set up NX toconform to the standards and requirements of companies in the People’sRepublic of China (PRC).

These customizations include:

• Changes to customer defaults to conform to the needs of PRC users.

• A new GB drafting standard.

• A custom program for setting up attributes.

• A simplified version of the Gear Modeling tool.

• Embedded design validation.


Gateway

• 3 new Simplified Chinese fonts.

• GB standard parts.

• New template parts.

Note

– The Gear Modeling tool runs with the MACH1 bundle. Noadditional license is required.

– The Embedded Design Validation features need either aCheck-Mate author licence or a Check-Mate user license forexecution. See the Release Notes for more information.

In NX 7.5, GC Toolkits helps you make your drafting sheets conform to GBstandards, and speed up the design process. The following Drafting Toolcommands are available.

ReplaceTemplate

Uses a standard GB drawing template instead of the olddrawing template to avoid recreation of the drawings.

Technical NotesLibrary

Provides a library and user interface to allow users toquickly add technical notes.

Checking Symbol Includes a checking symbol as per GB standards.

Sort Dimension Rearranges the dimensions according to userspecifications.

Merge Sheet Merges a set of drafting sheets in one sheet layout.


Many customer defaults have ANSI standards as default values. Customizingthese is time consuming. GC Toolkits simplifies this process, making NXeasier to set up and customize for PRC users.

Where do I find it?

GC Toolkits is included in the NX distribution media.


Gateway

Prerequisite • If you select Simplified Chinese as your runtimelanguage, the package is enabled automatically. Thesystem sets this environment variable for you:

– UGII_LANG=simpl_chinese

• If you select another language as your runtimelanguage, you must set the following environmentvariable to enable the package:

– UGII_COUNTRY=prcMenu GC Toolkits®Drafting Tool commands

GC Toolkits®Attribute Tool commands

GC Toolkits®Checkers commands

GC Toolkits®Gear Modeling commands

Disable Dynamic Soft Shadows

What is it?

The Disable Dynamic Soft Shadows option is available in the VisualizationPerformance Preferences dialog box.

Dynamically updating soft shadows can sometimes affect system performance.Use this option to disable the dynamic update of soft shadows.

For example, you can select the Disable Dynamic Soft Shadows check boxduring dynamic view rotation. The system will use hard shadows duringdynamic updates and automatically restore to soft shadows when you finishthe dynamic viewing operation.

Where do I find it?

Menu Preferences®Visualization Performance


General Graphics tab®Session Settingsgroup®Studio Views subgroup®Disable Dynamic SoftShadows check box


Gateway

Curve Continuity

What is it?

Use the Curve Continuity command to evaluate the continuity betweena curve and a reference object. A reference object can be a face, an edge,a curve, or a datum plane.

You can calculate G0, G1, G2, and G3 continuity values between the end pointof the curve and the nearest point on the reference object.

An associative curve continuity analysis object is created with a label at theend point of the curve.

How the continuity constraints are displayed depends on the continuity typesspecified in the Curve Continuity dialog box. If the deviation for a continuitytype exceeds the modeling tolerances, the continuity type is shown in red.

Curve continuity analysis between a curve and a face

Curve continuity analysis between two curves

The associative curve continuity analysis objects are listed in the main panelof the Part Navigator. You can select or clear the check boxes to show or hidethe labels in the graphics window.


Gateway

AnalysisCurve Continuity Analysis

Curve Continuity AnalysisCurve Continuity Analysis


You can check curve deviations, such as variation in position, tangency,curvature, and acceleration between faces, curves, edges, or the normal of adatum plane.

This command is useful in the surfacing workflow, where you must verify thecontinuity between curves that are used as inputs to create surfaces.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar Analyze Shape®Curve Continuity AnalysisMenu Analysis®Curve®Continuity

Curve Analysis

What is it?

Use the Curve Analysis commands to analyze the shape of an edge or a curve.

For a selected curve or edge, you can:

• Display the curvature comb. You can specify the curvature combparameters such as the number of needles, needle scale, scale factor, andso on.

• Create and display curvature peak points and curvature inflection points.

Curve analysis objects dynamically update as you change the curves on whichthey are based, or when you change the analysis parameters.

Curve

Curvature comb

Peak point

Inflection point


Gateway

The associative curve analysis objects are listed in the main panel of thePart Navigator. You can select or clear the check boxes to show or hide thecurvature comb, peak point, and inflection point symbols in the graphicswindow as required.

AnalysisCurve Analysis

Curve Analysis

You can specify the color and line fonts for the needle and cap line of the curveanalysis objects in the Edit Object Display and Object Preferences dialogbox. For more information, see Curve Analysis Display options.


You can analyze and display the curve curvature, and verify that the curve issmooth and does not include unintended inflections.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar

Analyze Shape®Curve Analysis ®Curve Analysis

– Combs / Curve Analysis – Peaks / Curve

Analysis – InflectionsMenu Analysis®Curve®Curve Analysis

Curve Analysis Display options

What is it?

The following options are available in the Edit Object Display and ObjectPreferences dialog box:

NeedleA color swatch lets you specify the color of the needles.

The line font list lets you specify the line font of the needles.

CapSelect this check box to display the cap line.

A color swatch lets you specify the color of the cap line.

The line font list lets you specify the line font of the cap line.


Gateway


Use these options to specify the color and line fonts for the needles and caplines of curve analysis objects.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar Utility®Edit Object Display

Menu

Edit®Object Display

Preferences®Object


Edit Object Display dialog box®Analysis tab®CurveAnalysis Display group

Object Preferences dialog box®Analysis tab®CurveAnalysis Display group

Combs Options, Peaks Options, and Inflections Options

What is it?

The following commands are no longer available in the Analysis menu:• Combs Options

• Peaks Options

• Inflections Options

The parameters for controlling curvature combs, curvature peak points, andcurvature inflection points are available in the Curve Analysis dialog box.For more information, see Curve Analysis.

Issue Navigator

What is it?

Use the Issue Navigator to capture, track, and close issues that arise duringyour design process. Issues can be design problems, workflow problems, oranything else you want to track in NX.

Before you can use the navigator, you must do the following. See the NX 6.0.3Help for more information.

• Make sure the Teamcenter Community site where your issues lists arelocated has at least one existing issue list. If not, create the issue liststhat you want to use.


Gateway

• Set a customer default to specify the URL of the Teamcenter Communitysite where your issues lists are located. You should also specify the otherdefaults for the Issue Navigator, which define navigator columns, filterconditions (if any), email notification for the person assigned to fix theissue, and attachment download behavior for native NX.

• Select the Issue Navigator in the Start menu.

Consider the following behavior when you create or modify an issue:

• You must log into the site where your issue lists are located before youcan work on any issues in native NX, or in Teamcenter Integration whenTeamcenter Community is the site. To log in, right-click the backgroundor a column heading in the main panel of the navigator.

Note

In NX 6.0.3, the site must be Teamcenter Community.

• You can attach part files, bookmarks, text documents, and other referenceinformation to an issue.

• You can assign the issue to the person who is responsible for fixing it.Optionally, when you set up the navigator, you can specify that it sende-mail notification to the assignee when the issue is created, modified,or closed.


Gateway

Simplified representation of the Issue Navigator

Issue Navigator main panel

Issue listIssue

In the figure above, an issue node isselected.Attachments — the icon shows thetype of attachment.

In the figure above, the attachmentsfor the selected issue are a part and avalidation log.Details panel


Gateway

View types — specifies how theinformation in the details list (item 7)is shown.

In the figure above, the Thumbnailsview type is used.Details list — displays the detailsof the selected issue or issue list, inaccordance with the view type.

In the example, the details list showsthumbnails for the attachments.

The server generates a unique ID for each issue.

You can group or filter issues in the Issue Navigator with the Configure Viewdialog box. Grouping issues makes them appear in the order you want, forexample, based on priority. You can also create custom filtered views of theIssue Navigator that show only the issues that interest you.

Closed issues are read-only, and have a lock icon .


The Issue Navigator lets you manage user-defined issues and their supportingfiles in a single location in NX.

Where do I find it?

Menu Start®All Applications®Issue Navigator

Resource Bar Issue Navigator

Exact lightweight geometry and refile_part utility changes

What is it?

The lightweight (faceted) representation format has been enhanced to containexact surface geometry information for faces with analytic surface geometrysuch as faces with planar, cylindrical, spherical, or toroidal surface geometry.

The software uses the exact geometry information while performingcertain operations on faces, edges, and vertices of lightweight bodies. Thisinformation enables the software to perform the operations on lightweightbodies with the same accuracy as on solids. Examples of operations whereexact geometry information is used include Move Component and manytypes of measurement.


Gateway

If the exact geometry in the part is created or updated in NX 6.0.2 or later,then the exact geometry information will be included in the lightweightrepresentation and used by NX where possible. For parts with geometrylast modified prior to NX 6.0.2, you must regenerate the lightweightrepresentations to benefit from the improvements.

The refile_part and ugmanager_refile utilities have been enhanced tofacilitate the regeneration.

Switch Descriptionregen_lw Regenerates all lightweight representations in

the part, in order to take advantage of NX 6.0.2enhancements to the lightweight format, suchas the embedding of exact surface geometrydefinitions for faces with analytic geometry.

regen_lw_def_tol Regenerates all lightweight bodies using thecurrent default faceting tolerance values.

Note

In Teamcenter Integration,regen_lw_def_tol must be used inconjunction with regen_lw to take effect.


These enhancements enable you to get precise results in some importantsituations where you would previously have gotten approximate results dueto the faceted nature of the representations.

Where do I find it?

Lightweight representations created or edited in NX 6.0.2 automatically useexact lightweight geometry for analytic faces.

To update other parts to take advantage of the enhanced lightweightrepresentation format, you can run the refile_part utility (in native NX) or theugmanager_refile utility (in Teamcenter Integration), using the new switches,from the command line of your operating system.

See the Utilities and File Management Help and the Teamcenter Integrationfor NX Help for more information.


Gateway

Specify geometry layer in JT files

What is it?

You can now set customer defaults to specify the layer on which to locatemodel geometry objects when you open a JT file in NX. Geometry objectsinclude solid bodies, sheet bodies, and faceted bodies.

If you want the geometry to be placed on the work layer, select the Use WorkLayer check box.If you want the geometry objects to be placed on a different layer, clear theUse Work Layer check box, and specify the layer you want in the ModelGeometry Layer box.


The ability to control the geometry placement layer in JT files helps you to:

• Follow your company standards for geometry placement on layers.

• Place geometry objects on the layer that best suits your design intent.

Where do I find it?

Menu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox Gateway®Extras®JT Files tab

Move Object enhancements

What is it?

The Move Object dialog box has the following new options:

Layer Option list• Work moves or copies the selected objects in the current work layer.

• Original moves or copies the selected objects on their original layer.

• As Specifiedmoves or copies the selected objects to the specified layer.

Layer boxAvailable only when Layer Option is set to As Specified.Lets you specify the layer to which the selected objects are to be moved orcopied.

AssociativeCreates an associative Move Object feature.


Gateway

Note

The Associative option is not available in Sketcher and Draftingapplications.


Use the Associative option to create an associative Move Object feature.

The layer options let you specify the layer to which the selected objects areto be moved or copied.

Where do I find it?

Application GatewayToolbar

Standard®Move ObjectMenu Edit®Move ObjectLocation in dialogbox

Result group®Layer Option/Layer

Settings group®Associative

New customer defaults for collapsed groups and on-screen inputboxes

What is it?

The following customer defaults are now available:

Keep Group Closed if Selection Block in Group gets Focus

Keeps a group from expanding when a selection option in that group is active.

The collapsed group appears as shown when it contains an active selectoption.


Gateway

Show All Out-of-Focus Handle Input Fields

Displays all on-screen input boxes even when they are not active.

Customer default selected Customer default not selected

Where do I find it?

Menu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Customer Defaults dialog box®Gateway®UserInterface®General page


Chapter

10 Design

Sketching

Direct sketching

Overview How To Options Related Topics

A Direct Sketch toolbar is available in Modeling. Use the commands onthis toolbar to create a sketch on a plane without entering the Sketch taskenvironment.

When you create a point or curve using the commands on this toolbar, asketch is created and is active. The new sketch is listed in the model historyin the Part Navigator. The first point you specify defines the sketch plane,orientation, and origin.

You can define the first point on the following:

• Screen position

• Point

• Curve

• Face

• Plane

• Edge

• Specified Plane

• Specified Datum CSYS


Direct sketching requires fewer mouse clicks, which makes creating andediting sketches faster and easier.


Design

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingToolbar Direct Sketch

Direct sketch and feature edit preferencesOverview How To Options Related Topics

Set the following in the Modeling Preferences dialog box for the actions whenyou double-click sketches and features.

Edit tabEdit Sketch Action Direct Edit

Lets you edit the sketch directly inModeling.

Caution

Direct Edit updates the modelimmediately. Select TaskEnvironment if you havesketches with many dependentfeatures.

Task EnvironmentEnters the Sketch task environment.

Double-click Action (Sketches) Edit with RollbackMakes the selected sketch the currentfeature and enters the Sketch taskenvironment.

EditEnters the direct sketch mode withoutchanging the current feature.

Double-click Action (Features) Edit with RollbackMakes the selected feature thecurrent feature and enters the editmode.

EditEnters the feature edit mode withoutchanging the current feature.

To edit sketches directly in Modeling, you should:

• Set Double-click Action (Sketches) to Edit with Rollback.


Design

• Set Edit Sketch Action to Direct Edit

• Right click the sketch and choose Edit.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingMenu Preferences®ModelingLocation in dialogbox Edit tab

Intermediate Datum CSYS


The software can automatically create an intermediate Datum CSYS whenyou create or reattach a sketch. This Datum CSYS is created between theselected geometry and the sketch.

To create the Datum CSYS, you need to do the following:

• From the Plane Method list, select Inferred.

• Select the Create Intermediate Datum CSYS check box.

• Specify a face or plane, a horizontal reference, and the origin point.

By default, the Datum CSYS is internal to the sketch. It is not visible outsidethe Sketch task environment or in the model history in the Part Navigator.

You can make this Datum CSYS:

• External from the sketch when you right-click the sketch in the PartNavigator and choose Make Datums External.

• Internal to the sketch when you right-click the sketch in the PartNavigator and choose Make Datums Internal.


Use this option to have the following:

• Greater control over the origin in the dialog boxes for creating andreattaching sketches.

• Improved preview in the dialog boxes for creating and reattachingsketches for inferring the Datum CSYS.


Design

Where do I find it?

Task environment Sketch

Toolbar Feature®SketchMenu Insert®Sketch


Sketch Plane group®Inferred

Settings group®Create Intermediate Datum CSYS

Datum CSYS enhancement

When you use the Datum CSYS command, you can now create a new DatumCSYS type called Plane, X-Axis, Point.

You can create this Datum CSYS by specifying the following:

• Plane for Z-Axis

• X-Axis vector

• Point to be projected to the plane


Use this type when you want the Datum CSYS origin to stay on the specifiedplane. The primary use of this type is to host sketch objects.

As with all geometry located on a Datum CSYS, the geometry is updated evenwhen the body face the Datum CSYS was placed on is deleted, suppressedor eliminated in the design process.


Design

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Feature®Datum/Point Drop-down®Datum CSYSMenu Insert®Datum/Point®Datum CSYSLocation in dialogbox In the Type group, Plane, X- Axis, Point

Auto Dimension


Use the Auto Dimension command to create dimensions on selected curvesand points according to a set of rules.

You can apply the following rules in any order.

• Create Horizontal and Vertical Dimensions on Lines

• Create Dimensions to Reference Axes

• Create Symmetric Dimensions

• Create Length Dimensions

• Create Adjacent Angles

Driving and Automatic Dimensions

You can create two types of dimensions.

DrivingCreates a dimension based on an expression. You can convert drivingdimensions to reference dimensions.AutomaticThis type of dimensional constraint can only be created by autodimensioning. Automatic dimensions remove degrees of freedom from thesketch, and act like a constant length or angle constraint with a value.• When you drag sketch curves, automatic dimensions are relaxed,allowing you to shape the sketch. After the drag, the new shape willbe constrained by the automatic dimensions again.

• If you add a constraint that conflicts with an automatic dimension, theautomatic dimension is deleted.


Design

• You can convert automatic dimensions into driving or referencedimensions.

All dimensions are displayed in the Part Navigator when TimestampOrder is turned off in the Unused Items®Sketch®Curves andDimensions®Dimensions folder.


In Modeling, use this command to assist in creating a fully constrained sketchby removing all degrees of freedom from the selected curves.

In Drafting, use this command to fully dimension selected sketch curvesin a drawing.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Auto Dimension


Tools®Auto DimensionMenu (Modeling) Tools®Sketch Constraints®Auto

Dimension

(Drafting and Sketch task environment)Tools®Constraints®Auto Dimension

Continuous Auto DimensioningOverview How To Options Related Topics

Use the Continuous Auto Dimensioning command to automaticallydimension sketch curves after each operation.

This command uses auto dimensioning rules to fully constrain the activesketch, including positioning dimensions to the parent Datum CSYS.

You can set auto dimensioning rules from the following:

• Inferred Constraints and Dimensions

• File®Utilities®Customer Defaults®Sketch→Inferred Constraints andDimensions®Dimensions

The Continuous Auto Dimensioning command creates the automaticdimension type of sketch dimension.


Design

Automatic dimensions fully constrain a sketch. The dimensions are updatedas you drag the sketch curves. They remove degrees of freedom from thesketch but do not lock the values permanently. If you add a constraint thatconflicts with an automatic dimension, the automatic dimension is deleted.You can convert automatic dimensions into driving dimensions.


In Modeling, use this command to ensure you are always working with a fullyconstrained sketch which will be updated predictably.

In Drafting, use this command to automatically create dimensions for all thecurves that you create in a drawing.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar (Modeling)

Direct Sketch®Continuous Auto Dimensioning /

Inferred Constraints and Dimensions

(Drafting and Sketch task environment)

Sketch Tools®Continuous Auto Dimensioning /

Inferred Constraints and DimensionsMenu (Modeling, Drafting, and Sketch task environment)

Tools®Sketch Constraints®Continuous AutoDimensioning /Inferred Constraints and Dimensions

Replace with Independent Sketch


Use the Replace with Independent Sketch command to replace a linked curvefeature with an independent sketch.

This command will replace a WAVE linked sketch or a two-dimensional linkedcomposite curve with an identical sketch that is completely independent ofthe parent.


Design


Use this command when you no longer want a design to be controlled byits master layout.

For example, during the design and development of a product, you may havea master layout to control the design of many component parts. When thedesigns are released for manufacturing, you do not want the components tochange if the master layout is changed. To do this, you can break the linkand replace the linked sketch with an independent sketch. An additionaladvantage is that the replaced independent sketch has its own constraintsthat you can modify.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Edit Feature®Replace with Independent SketchMenu Edit®Feature®Replace with Independent Sketch

Part NavigatorRight-click a Linked feature®Replace withIndependent Sketch

Make Symmetric


Use the Make Symmetric command to constrain two points or curves to besymmetric about a centerline in a sketch.

You can apply the symmetry constraint between two objects of the same type:

• Lines

• Arcs

• Circles

You can also make different point types symmetric. For example, you makethe end of a line and the center of an arc symmetric about a line.


Design


Use this command when you create or edit a sketch and you want to controlthe position of existing sketch geometry to be symmetric to a centerline.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar

(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Make Symmetric


Tools®Make Symmetric

Menu

(Modeling and Drafting) Insert®SketchConstraint®Make Symmetric

(Sketch task environment) Insert®Make Symmetric

Pattern Curve


Use the Pattern Curve command to pattern edges, curves, and points that areparallel to the sketch plane.

The available types are:

• Linear Pattern

• Circular Pattern

This command also creates a pattern constraint that can be modifiedwhen you double-click one of the patterned curves.


Design

Circular Pattern with 5 Instances

Where do I find it?

Toolbar(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Pattern Curve


Tools®Pattern CurveMenu (Modeling and Drafting) Insert®Sketch Curve®Pattern

Curve

(Sketch task environment) Insert®Curve®PatternCurve

PolygonOverview How To Options Related Topics

Use the Polygon command to create polygons by specifying:• Center point

• Number of sides

• Radius

• Rotation angle

Polygons can be created using the following methods:

• Inscribed Radius

• Circumscribed Radius


Design

• Side of Polygon

For this example, the following values are used:• Number of Sides = 8

• Size = Inscribed Radius

• Radius = 10.0

• Rotation = 0°

Where do I find it?

Toolbar(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Polygon


Tools®Polygon

Menu

(Modeling and Drafting) Insert®SketchCurve®Polygon

(Sketch task environment) Insert®Curve®Polygon

Chamfer


Use the Chamfer command to bevel a sharp corner between two sketch lines.

You can create the following chamfer types:

• Symmetric

• Asymmetric


You can also hold the left mouse button and drag over curves to create achamfer.


Design

Where do I find it?

Toolbar(Modeling) Direct Sketch®Chamfer


Tools®ChamferMenu (Modeling and Drafting) Insert®Sketch

Curve®Chamfer

(Sketch task environment) Insert®Curve®Chamfer

Exit Sketch

Use the Exit Sketch command to exit the Sketch task environment withoutdoing the following:

• Saving the modified sketch.

• Updating the model.

The Exit Sketch command restores the part to the state it was prior toentering the Sketch task environment while avoiding the unnecessary step ofupdating all features downstream of the sketch.


Use this command when you want to do the following:

• Explore and edit sketch curves and constraints without changing sketchesand the model permanently.

• Discard sketch edits made since you entered the Sketch task environment.


Design

Where do I find it?

Task environment SketchMenu Task®Exit Sketch

Edit Defining Section enhancement

The Edit Defining String command has been renamed to Edit DefiningSection and includes the following enhancements.

• You can use this command with most section-based commands, such asExtrude, Project Curve, Through Curve Mesh.

• The dialog box displays command-specific section names and the status ofeach section (good, good but with non-Sketch references, problem, problemand non-Sketch references, and mapping required).

• The dialog box remains open when you edit more than one section.

• The command updates a section according to the Selection Intent rulethat was used to create the section.

• The mapping window uses stronger colors to show the section curvesthat you need to map.


When multiple features are based on sections in a single sketch, Edit DefiningSection lets you modify the sections in a controlled and efficient manner.

Where do I find it?

Task environment Sketch

Toolbar Sketch→Edit Defining SectionMenu Edit→Edit Defining Section

Copy or move sketch geometry in a vertical or horizontal direction

When you drag sketch geometry to copy or move it, you can now use keyboardshortcuts to:

• Constrain the movement to a vertical or horizontal direction. Thedirections are relative to the active sketch.

• Enable or disable snapping.


Design

You can copy or move curve end points or entire curves.

To do this task Perform this actionMove vertically or horizontally withsnapping. Hold Shift and drag

Move vertically or horizontallywithout snapping. Hold Shift+Alt and drag

Copy vertically or horizontally withsnapping. Hold Shift+Ctrl and drag

Copy vertically or horizontally withoutsnapping. Hold Shift+Ctrl+Alt and drag

Cut / Copy / Paste enhancements

When you use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands, you can now moreefficiently cut or copy objects from an active or inactive sketch, and pastethem into an active sketch, or as a new sketch.


Use these command when you need to:

• Duplicate sketch objects into an active sketch or as a new sketch.

• Manage a set of sketch objects as an independent sketch, instead of apart of a complex sketch.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling and Drafting

Toolbar Standard®Cut / Copy / PasteMenu Edit®Cut / Copy / Paste

Display as PMI

What is it?

Use the Display as PMI command in the Sketch task environment or a DirectSketch to select and convert sketch dimensions to PMI dimensions.

Sketch dimensions that you convert:

• Remain visible after exiting the Sketch task environment and continue todisplay even when the screen is refreshed.

• Allow viewing and editing of their dimension values in other commandsand applications (for example, with the Feature Dimension command).


Design


The Display as PMI command allows sketch dimensions to be persistentlydisplayed and edited outside of the Sketch task environment.

Where do I find it?

Application Sketch task environment

PrerequisiteStart®PMImust be selected before you enter the Sketchtask environment.

Toolbar Sketch Tools®Display as PMIMenu Tools® Display as PMI

Graphics windowRight-click a sketch dimension in the graphics windowand choose Display as PMI.

Modeling

Project Curve enhancements

What is it?

The Project Curve command has several new options.

You can:

• Project a curve on the surface that is nearest to the input curve alongthe projection vector, if there are more candidate surfaces on which thecurve can be projected using the Project to Nearest Point along Vectorcheck box.

• Bridge small gaps between any two segments in projection curves andjoin the segments as a single curve using the Create Curves to BridgeGaps check box.


Design

• Report segment and gap information using the Gap List.

The curve and gap information is also displayed in an Alerts window.

• Preview the result before completing the command using the Previewcheck box.


Use the Project to Nearest Point along Vector option when you want toproject a curve on the surface that is nearest to the input curve along theprojection vector, and there are more candidate surfaces on which the curvecan be projected.

Use the Create Curves to Bridge Gaps option when you want to createprojection curves that have no gaps in them.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Curve®Project CurveMenu Insert®Curve from Curves®Project


Design


Projection Direction group®Project to Nearest Pointalong Vector check box

Gaps group®Create Curves to Bridge Gaps check box

Gaps group®Gap List

Gaps group®Maximum Bridged Gap Size

Preview group®Preview check box

Composite Curve enhancements

What is it?

The Composite Curve command has the following new options.

Join Curves list Lets you join the segments of the composite curve into asingle curve using any one of the following options.

• No: Does not join the segments of the composite curve.

• Cubic: Approximates the input curves with a degree3 polynomial spline. Use this option to minimize thenumber of knots.

• General: Creates a spline that is an exactrepresentation of the input curves. The Generaloption can create a higher degree curve than theCubic or Quintic type. In applications where anapproximate representation is acceptable, you mayprefer to use Cubic or Quintic.

• Quintic: Approximates the input curves with a degree5 polynomial spline.

Tolerance Sets the tolerance value for the Join Curve operation. Thedefault value is the Distance Tolerance value that is setin the Modeling Preferences dialog box.


Use the Join Curves options when you want to join the segments of thecomposite curve into a single curve.

Where do I find it?



Design

Toolbar

Feature®Associative Copy Drop-down®Composite

CurveMenu Insert®Associative Copy®Composite Curve

Selection Intent for Composite Curve

What is it?

Two additional Selection Intent options are available for the CompositeCurve command.

• The Body Edges selection option lets you select all the edges of a body atthe same time.

If the selected body consists of multiple faces, you must select the AllowSelf-intersection check box in the Composite Curve dialog box to enableselection of all edges.

• A new Boundary Edges Only selection option lets you select all theboundary edges of a sheet body.

Note

This option is available only when you set the Curve rule on theSelection bar to Tangent Curves or Connected Curves.


Use these Selection Intent options to select all body edges, or only theboundary edges of a body, in a single mouse click while creating a compositecurve feature.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Selection bar®Body Edges/Boundary Edges Only

Extract Virtual Curve

What is it?

Use the Extract Virtual Curve command to create curves from face rotationaxes, blend centerlines, and virtual intersections of blend faces.

You can create the following types of virtual curves:


Design

Rotation Axistype

You can extract the axis of a cylindrical, conical, toroidal,or revolved face to construct a rotation axis virtual curve.

The following graphic shows the rotation axis virtualcurves (blue) for the revolved faces.

Blend Centerlinetype

You can extract the centerline of a blend face to constructa virtual centerline curve. Only rolling ball face blendsare supported.

The following graphic shows the virtual blend centerlinecurve (blue) of the highlighted blend face.


Design

VirtualIntersection type

You can extract the virtual intersection of a blend face toconstruct a virtual intersection curve. Only rolling ballface blends are supported.

The following graphic shows the virtual intersectioncurve (blue) of the highlighted blend face.


The Extract Virtual Curve command is useful when you want to extractthe axis of a revolved face, the centerline of a blend face, or the virtualintersection of a blend face and create an associative curve feature.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Curve®Extract Virtual CurveMenu Insert®Curve from Bodies ®Extract Virtual Curve

Maple Mathematical Package Integration

What is it?

The Maple Worksheet Integration lets you take advantage of the functionalityavailable in MAPLE. MAPLE is a rich application for technical computingand mathematics, available from Maplesoft, Inc. This is accomplished viaintegration between MAPLE worksheets and NX expressions.

After a MAPLE worksheet which contains the desired computation orcalculation is created, you can do the following:

• Use the NXMaple Worksheet Integration to select the MAPLE worksheet,either from the operating system or from Teamcenter.


Design

• Choose specific NX expressions to serve as input parameters to theMAPLE worksheet. A manual or name-based automated mapping canbe used.

• Choose specific NX expressions to receive the resultant values from theMAPLE worksheet.

• Create a timestamp feature in the NX model history to store allassociations with the MAPLE worksheet. This feature remainsassociative to the MAPLE worksheet and participates in NX updates. Itautomatically keeps the resulting expression values up-to-date.


• To apply mathematical functions that are not available in NX toexpressions.

• To encapsulate mathematical and engineering calculations as anassociative feature in NX part model.

Where do I find it?


Menu Analysis ® Maple Worksheet Integration

Selection Intent enhancements

What is it?

Selection Intent is now available for bodies in a Body Rule list. You can nowspecify Single Body, Feature Bodies, or Bodies in Group when you selecttool bodies for Boolean commands and target bodies for trim commands.

A new Selection Intent, Curves in Group, is now available in the Curve Rulelist, to let you manage subsets of curves.

In this example, the Extrude command uses Curves in Group selection intentoption and selects a group consisting of the rectangle and the circle.


Design

When you add the triangle to the group of curves, the extrude is updatedto include it.


Use these enhancements to select multiple objects more easily, and to modelin a more robust fashion, ensuring that your parts are updated properly whenyou change the members of the group. The Curves in Group option is alsouseful for managing subsets of curves within large complex sketches.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar Selection bar®Curve Rule listSelection bar®Body Rule list

Prerequisite

The Body Rule list is available when using theUnite, Subtract, Intersect, Trim Body, and Split Bodycommands.

Boolean enhancements

What is it?

The Boolean commands Unite, Subtract, and Intersect are enhanced so youcan:

• Use the Body Rule options in the Selection bar to select multiple tools.


Design

• Edit the Keep Target and Keep Tool settings of a Boolean feature.

• Map dependent features when you edit a Boolean feature and selecta new target or tool.


Use these enhancements to preserve the integrity of features that aredependent on bodies resulting from a Boolean operation.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Feature®Combine Drop-down®Unite /Subtract

/IntersectMenu Insert®Combine®Unite/Subtract/Intersect

Extrude – Inferred Boolean

What is it?

The Extrude command has been enhanced to automatically infer the Booleanoperation that you may want to apply. Inferred is the default Boolean option.

• The inferred Boolean operation is based on the extrude direction andsection normal. The tool body must touch or intersect the target bodyfor a Boolean to be inferred.

Case 1

Direction is away from target; mostlogical inferred Boolean is Unite.

Inferred Boolean = UniteStatus Line: Boolean will be aUnite


Design

Case 2

Direction is into target; most logicalinferred Boolean is Subtract.

Inferred Boolean = SubtractStatus Line: Boolean will be aSubtract

Case 3

No possible Boolean; none inferred.

Inferred Boolean = noneStatus Line: No Boolean will beperformed

• The Inferred option is available in the Boolean group of the Extrudedialog box and is the default.

– If the inferred Boolean operation is not suitable, you must directlyselect a feasible Boolean operation.

– After you specify a Boolean type, that type becomes the defaultBoolean operation the next time you use Extrude.

– When an Extrude feature is edited, the actual Boolean used (even ifinferred) will appear in the Extrude dialog box instead of Inferred.

• When possible, the Extrude command will also infer a target body. Youcan change this inferred target by selecting a different target.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling and Shape Studio

Toolbar Feature ® ExtrudeMenu Insert ® Design Feature ® ExtrudeLocation in dialogbox Boolean group, Boolean list® Inferred


Design

Offset Curve in Face – enhancements

What is it?

The Offset Curve in Face command has been enhanced with new optionsavailable in the Offset Curve in Face dialog box:

• In the Type group there is a new option available named Variable Offset.

This option lets you specify points on the curve to be offset. You can thenspecify variable offset distances at each point.

– Points P1 – P4 lie on the originalcurve on surface.

– D1 – D4 are distance values fromthe respective points.

– Yields variable offset curve insurface (1).

• In the Direction and Method group, there is a new option named OffsetDirection.

This option lets you specify a vector to offset the curve perpendicular tothe vector. There are two options:

– Normal to Curve – This option creates the offset along the directionwhich is perpendicular to tangential vector of input curve.

1. Input curve.

2. Offset direction based onperpendicular to tangentialvectors of input curve.

3. Resulting offset curve.

– Normal to Vector – This option lets you designate a vector thatdetermines the perpendicular direction of the offset.


Design

1. Input curve.

2. Specified vector.

3. Normal direction of offset.

4. Resulting offset curve.

• Projected Distance – This new Offset Method option lets you designatean offset distance on a virtual plane using a specified normal vector.

1. Input curve.

2. Input vector.

3. Input curve is projected ontovirtual plane that is normal toinput vector.

4. Offset distance.

5. 2-D offset curve is projectedback up to surface.

• You can now offset curves in a datum plane as well as faces.

• Offset group – The options in this group let you specify law-definedvariable offset distances.

This is available when you use Variable in Type.

• Fillet Sharp Corner group – The new Fillet option lets you remove sharpcorners to help curve smoothing.


Design

• Settings group:

– Curve Fit – This option, lets you control the degree and segments ofthe curve being smoothed.

– Join Curves – This option lets you determine the kind of curve tocreate when joining curves of multiple faces. Gaps between curves arefilled based on a specified tolerance.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Curve ® Offset Curve in FaceMenu Insert ® Curve from Curves ® Offset in Face


Type group, Offset group,Direction and Method group, Fillet Sharp Corner group,Settings group

Offset Surface – enhancements

What is it?

The Offset Surface command has the following enhancements:

• The Approximate Offset Faces check box has been removed from theSettings group of the Offset Surface dialog box.

NX 6

SettingsApproximate Offset Faces

Tangent Edges

Tolerance


Design

NX 7.5

SettingsTangent Edges

Tolerance

Offset Surface now automatically uses the best method for repairingself-intersections in the offset surface.

• The new Partial Result group gives you the ability to obtain a partialresult when a full result cannot be delivered because of problems withthe input geometry.

When the Enable Partial Offset check box is selected, you are presentedwith information about the resulting offset surface

– A preview of the offset appears.

– Problem input faces are marked with asterisks.

– Problem input edges are highlighted.

– You can review the problem geometry then choose to cancel theoperation or pursue a partial result.

– If you decide that you want a partial result, the problem geometryis automatically removed from the input, and the operation isre-executed using the revised input.


Design

– You can then manually create patches to fill in the gaps in theresulting offset surface.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Feature ®Offset SurfaceMenu Insert ® Offset/Scale ® Offset SurfaceLocation in dialogbox Partial Result group, Settings group

Datum Plane – enhancement

What is it?

You can create a plane offset from another plane in one step.

For example, previously you had to first create a bisector plane (1) before youcould create a plane offset from it (2). Now, you can offset from the bisectorplane in one step.


Design

The Offset option is available in the Datum Plane dialog box and othercommand dialog boxes that require the definition of a plane from the SpecifyPlane list.

You can also edit most previously created or defined planes and add an offset.


Use this command to avoid creating an extra plane solely for the purposeof creating an offset plane.

Where do I find it?

Datum Plane command:

Application Modeling, Shape Studio, Manufacturing, Sheet Metal

Toolbar

(Modeling and Shape Studio)

Feature→ Datum/Point Drop-down→ Datum Plane

(Sheet Metal)NX Sheet Metal→ Datum Drop-down→ Datum Plane

(Manufacturing)

Geometry→ Geometry Drop-down→ Datum Plane

Menu(Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal)Insert® Datum/Point® Datum Plane

Graphics window Right-click the plane normal® OffsetLocation in dialogbox Offset group

Dialog boxes with a Specify Plane list.

Application Modeling, Shape Studio, Manufacturing


Design

Toolbar variousMenu variousGraphics window Right-click the plane normal® OffsetLocation in dialogbox

[command dialog box]® Specify Plane® Specify Planelist

Extrude enhancement—intersecting section curves

What is it?

You can create a single extrude feature using a “self-intersectingsection”—where curves of the section intersect each other.

For example, you can use this for the extrude feature to construct the ribsfor molded parts.


You can reduce the number of features needed and the number of steps tocreate them.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

Make sure capability is turned on. Use File→Utilitiies→ Customer Defaults→ Modeling→ General→Miscellaneous tab→ Allow Self-intersecting Sectionin Extrude Feature.

Toolbar Feature→ Extrude


Design

Menu Insert→ Design Feature→ Extrude.

Edit the dimensions of an internal sketch section from the feature’s editdialog box

What is it?

You can edit the sketch dimensions of a feature’s internal section duringfeature edit without having to directly edit the sketch.

• Dimensions that you explicitly add to the sketch section or convert fromauto to driving dimension appear in the graphics window when you editthe feature’s internal section.

• Change the value of a sketch section dimension by clicking it and typing anew value in the on-screen input box.

• The Section group in the edit dialog box must be active for the sketchsection dimensions to appear.

Shown below are editable internal sketch section dimensions in an extrudefeature.

This capability is available for any feature whose section is defined by aninternal sketch, such as Extrude, Revolve, and Louver, and has drivingdimensions.


Changing the sketch dimensions of a feature’s section when you edit a featureis faster than using the Sketch environment to change sketch dimensions.


Design

Where do I find it?

ApplicationModeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, and otherapplications that support sketches.

Prerequisites

The sketch section dimensions must be drivingdimensions (you can create new dimensions or convertthe sketch’s auto-dimensions to driving dimensions).

If you are editing a feature from its creation dialog box,the Section group options must be active for the sketchsection dimensions to appear.

You can also display and edit a feature’s sketch sectiondimensions outside a feature edit by right-clicking ShowDimensions on the feature and then double-clickinga dimension.

Graphics windowSketch section driving dimensions appear in thegraphics window where you can edit them.

Region Boundary Curves

What is it?

For commands or options that support the Region Boundary Curves selectionintent rule, NX now supports inferring regions through object-action selection(for example, by right-clicking a sketch feature and choosing Extrude).

In previous releases the infer behavior was based on the Feature Curves ruleinstead of Region Boundary Curves, which could result in errors as shownbelow in the extrude example.

Infer with Feature Curves Infer with Region BoundaryCurves


Design


This change provides a more natural workflow when selecting sketch curvesfrom commands such as Extrude and Revolve, and improves the updateprocess if the sketch is subsequently changed.

Where do I find it?

ApplicationModeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, and otherapplications.

Toolbar Most commands that let you select a sketch curve.

Menu

Most commands that let you select a sketch curve.

Files®Utilities®CustomerDefaults®Modeling®Generaltab®Miscellaneous®Selection Intent Rule to InferSection from Sketch

Reuse 2D section objects

What is it?

You can create reusable 2D section objects from existing sketch objects,such as points, curves, dimensions and groups, and add and retrieve themthrough the Reuse Library.

• Reuse existing sketch objects at different locations and orientations, in anexisting sketch or as a new sketch.

• Share a 2D section library with other users.

• Retrieve a saved 2D section from the Reuse Library in the work part ascurves in an existing sketch or as a new sketch.

To create a new 2D section, do one of the following:

• Copy sketch curves, points, dimensions, and group objects from a sketchand right click Define Reusable Object on a library in the Reuse Librarybrowser.

• Click Define Reusable Object on the Reuse Library toolbar, choosethe 2D section, and then select the sketch curves, points, dimensionsand groups.

To retrieve a 2D section into a model, do one of the following:

• Drag and drop a 2D section from a node in the Reuse Library navigator tothe graphics window.


Design

• Right-click and choose Insert on a 2D section object in the Reuse Library.


Reusing curves from a 2D Section library can be faster than creating newcurves.

Where do I find it?

ApplicationModeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, Drafting, andother applications where you can use the Reuse Library.

Graphics windowRight-click a library in the Reuse Librarynavigator®Add Reusable Object here

Feature Dimensions


What is it?

Use the Feature Dimension command to view and edit a feature’s parametersas dimensions in the graphics window.

Right-click and choose Show Dimension on a feature to display its featuredimensions:

Internal sketch section dimensions.

Extrude Start and End limit distance feature parameter dimensions.


Design

Extrude Section

Start limit distance= 0.0

End limit distance =0.05

Start two-sided offset= 0.1

End two-sided offset= 0.2

You can view and edit the feature parameters of the following features asdimensions:

• Extrude

• Block

• Cone

• Cylinder

• Sphere

• Sketches of the following types:

– Internal sketch sections for features such as Extrude, Revolve,and Louver, that have manually added dimensions or automaticdimensions that were converted to driving dimensions.

– Sketches with dimensions you have manually added yourself.

– Sketches with automatic dimensions that you have converted usingthe Convert to driving dimension option.

– Sketches whose reference dimensions you have converted from adriving dimension and made to display as PMI (or a driving dimensionyou made to display as PMI and then converted to a referencedimension).

To clear the display of dimensions from the graphics window, choose View®Refresh or press the F5 key.


Design

Right-click a dimension in a sketch and choose Display as PMI to make adimension persistent and available to the Drafting application, where youcan edit its value the same as in Modeling. The Drafting customer defaultAllow PMI bidirectional edits must be enabled and PMI must be active in theStart menu. (See the PMI Feature Dimensions topic for details.)


Use this command to view and edit the value of any expression displayedas a feature dimension or PMI feature dimension, without having to editthe feature.

Feature dimensions are available to display and edit on inactive sketches aswell as outside the sketch environment.

Where do I find it?

ApplicationModeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, and otherapplications.

Toolbar Edit Feature® Feature DimensionMenu Edit® Feature® Feature Dimension


Dimensions group, Select Dimension option, orselect from the list.

PMI group, Display as PMI option.

Graphics windowor Part Navigator

Right-click Show Dimensions on an Extrude, Block,Cone, Cylinder, or Sphere feature, an external sketchwith driving dimensions, or a feature with an internalsketch with driving dimensions.

Group enhancements

What is it?

You can easily select groups, edit groups, and control the display properties ofgroup members.

• In the graphics window, you can select groups without having to use theGroup selection filter. Groups also appear in the QuickPick list.

• You can select groups outside the work part in the context of an assembly.

• Groups appear as expandable nodes in a Groups folder in the PartNavigator. Groups created within a sketch also appear in an expandablesketch node.


Design

GroupsGroup “IMPORTED_PATH_DATA”Point x 52Spline

Group “MANUAL_DIMENSIONS”Horizontal Dimension x 3

• You can add members to a group by right-clicking the group and choosingEdit Group or by selecting objects in the Part Navigator and draggingthem to the group node.

• You can specify display properties for a group and control whether theproperties are applied to new objects that are added to the group


Use groups to organize objects in your part so that it is easier to identifythem, select them, and edit their display properties.

Where do I find it?

Application All applications except GatewayMenu Format→Group

Feature Group

What is it?

The Group Features command is now called Feature Group. The termFeature Group also replaces the term Feature Set in the Part Navigator.

The Feature Group command is enhanced to make it easier to view, select,and edit the members of a Feature Group. You can:

• Collapse and expand a Feature Group node in the Part Navigator to easilyview and access its members.

Feature Group (5) “lug”Extrude (2)Simple Hole (3)Edge Blend (4)

• Add members by dragging features to the Feature Group node.

• Use the Show Dimensions command to display the dimensions of theFeature Group members.


Design

• Delete a Feature Group with or without deleting its members.

• Use the Embed Feature Group Members option to simplify the structureof the history tree by showing members only within the Feature Groupnode.


Use the Feature Group command as a convenience tool to collect multiplefeatures and organize your model. You can reduce the amount of work byperforming operations on the group instead of each individual member.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling, Shape Studio, NX Sheet MetalMenu Format→Group→Feature GroupPart Navigator Right-click features and choose Feature Group

Edit curve parameters enhancement

What is it?

You can now edit the parameters of non-associative lines and arcs.

Lines and arcs are now edited by the line or arc feature dialog box. There isa single dialog box for lines and one for arcs. This applies to lines or arcsthat are created:

• Associative• Non-associative• As features• Using Basic Curves


• To edit the parameters of non-associative lines or arcs.• To edit feature curves after removing their parameters.• To edit lines or arcs created as features.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling, Shape Studio, Sheet Metal, Drafting

Toolbar Edit Curve→ Edit Curve ParametersMenu Edit→ Curve→ Parameters


Design

Graphics window

Double-click a line or arc, orright-click a line or arc and choose Edit Parameters, orright-click a line or arc and choose Edit Curve.

Error during update enhancements

What is it?

For the Edit During Update command, a new Make Current Feature on Errorpreference lets you:

• Stop a part update when an error occurs.

• Make the problem feature the current feature in the Part Navigator sothat you can correct the error.

You can edit, add, or remove features and then manually resume the update.

Make Current Feature on Error is available as a Modeling preference andas a customer default.


Use the Make Current Feature on Error setting when you are modifying orreviewing a part so that you can correct errors as they occur.

Where do I find it?

Modeling Preference

Application ModelingMenu Preferences→ModelingLocation in dialogbox

Modeling Preferences→Update tab®Make CurrentFeature on Error

Customer Default

Menu File→Utilities→Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Modeling→General→Update→Make Current Featureon Error


Design

Face Blend – three-face blend enhancements

What is it?

An enhanced Face Blend command now offers more robust support forthree-face blends.


• Explicitly type face blends as two-face or three-face blends.

• Create three-face blends on a wider variety of input shapes and endconditions.

• Create face blends with fewer mouse clicks and keyboard strokes.

This example shows a three-face blend along a variable-width rib.


Create three-face blends when you need to fully round the tops of stiffeningribs or the bottoms of channels. You can also use a three-face blend to roundthe tops of ligaments without reducing their height.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Feature→Face Blend


Design

Menu Insert→Detail Feature→Face BlendLocation in dialogbox Type→list→Three Defining Face Chains

Path SelectionOverview How To Options Related Topics

Path Selection lets you define a continuous path in a complex network ofcurves and edges with a minimal number of selections. Path Selection isavailable for all commands that are section-based.

The software previews a path between a selected Start curve and a candidateEnd curve. There are editing options that let you modify segments within thepath, or extend the path from its end point. This example shows a Start curveand the inferred path to a candidate End curve.

Note

Path Selection is a selection aid; it is not a Selection Intent.

Where do I find it?

Selection bar Path Selection

Global Deformation

What is it?

Use the Global Deformation command to modify an existing product designto accommodate changes from downstream CAE analysis or physicaltryout. The changes may be required due to functional design or production


Design

process constraints such as shape changes required to achieve an optimummanufacturing or assembly process.

Inputs for this command can include the formed shape of the sheet body, aset of points representing the formed shape, and a similar set of points (samenumber of points) representing the deformed shape.

You can obtain input data using the following options:

• One-step Feature—Use the Analyze Formability – One-step command tocreate a One-step feature. The One-step feature consists of the deformedshape in a faceted body representation.

• Facet Bodies — Use NX CAE or a third party analysis package andimport the analysis results to NX as STL data to create faceted bodies.The Global Deformation command can then use the faceted bodies tocalculate the compensation.

• Points from File

– Use NX CAE or a third party analysis package to generate sets ofpoints in two text files (with .dat or .txt extensions). The points arefrom the mesh’s nodes of the both formed and deformed shape.

– Use white light scanning to measure a physical part in the deformedposition. Corresponding points on the nominal surface must also begenerated. These measurements can create sets of points or STL datathat can be imported to NX.

NX Analysis STL data files Text files

AnalyzeFormabilityOne-stepfeature

or

Sprung facets

Product facets(optional)

Product sheetbody

or

Sprung points

Product points(optional)

Product sheetbody

Global Deformation


Design

• Compensated sheet

• Compensated facets (optional)


The Global Deformation command is valuable in the MRO (maintenance,repair, and overhaul) process. The as designed and as produced componentsare often different due to downstream design changes that were neverreflected back into the original model. You can use Global Deformation toeasily reflect the changes back into the original design and evaluate themfor reuse within new designs.

For example, you can use Global Deformation for MRO in jet engines. Youcan adapt the as designed engine blade (in it’s hot state) to the unwound(cold state) blade when the engine is not operating. This representation ofthe form is important because it is the state in which they are manufacturedand repaired.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Edit Surface®Global DeformationMenu Edit®Surface®Global Deformation

Radius Reduction in Global Shaping

What is it?

The Global Shaping by Function dialog box now has an option called RadiusReduction. You can use this option to reduce the radius of a free form blendon a sheet metal body.

You can:

• Deform points, curves, datum axes, and datum planes in addition to faces.

• Hold curvature continuity at the region boundary.

• Set a non-zero offset at the region boundary

• Specify cross target curves for wall deformation.

• Maintain the continuity of the original sheet metal body instead of thetarget sheet metal body at the target curve.


Design


Use the Radius Reduction option to reduce the radius of a free form blendin a sheet metal body to account for clearance and material flow whileperforming cutting functions.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Edit Surface®Global Shaping by FunctionMenu Edit®Surface®Global Shaping by FunctionLocation in dialogbox Type list®Radius Reduction

Concave Faces

What is it?

Use the Concave Faces command to add identifying attributes to concavefaces whose maximum radius is within a specified range.

You can:

• Automatically identify faces that are concave when viewed from thespecified direction.

• Assign a name, a value, and a color attribute to the identified faces toaid easy selection of faces for use with other commands that need facesas an input.

For example, you can use this command in conjunction with the GlobalShaping by Function command. You can initially identify and assignattributes to faces whose radius lies within a specified range, and thenuse the Radius Reduction option to automatically reduce the radius ofthese faces before machining the part.


Design

Viewing direction

Concave faces highlighted in yellow

Where do I find it?

Toolbar Analyze Shape®Concave FacesMenu Analysis®Shape®Concave Faces

Patch Openings enhancements

What is it?

The Patch Openings command has several enhancements including newNotch and Joggle options on the Type list.

With the enhancements to this command, you can:

• Patch an opening using a single patch type or a sequence of patch types.

• Create special surfacing of notches and joggles.

• Smooth out the edges of an opening by creating face extensions alongthe edges.

• Suppress the parametric feature that created the hole.


Design

• Control the shape and flow of the patching surface by using dividingcurves to break up the opening.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Surface®Surface Drop-down®Patch OpeningsMenu Insert®Surface®Patch OpeningsLocation in dialogbox Type list®Notch /Joggle

Body Type option for Freeform commands

What is it?

The Body Type option to let you specify a solid body or a sheet body is nowavailable for the following commands:

• Ruled

• Swept

• Through Curves

• Through Curve Mesh

• Studio Surface

These commands previously relied solely on Modeling preferences for a bodytype specification.


Specifying the body type for these commands from the dialog box when youcreate the body types is easier and more consistent with other Modelingcommands than using a preferences setting.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling, Shape Studio


Design

Toolbar

Surface® Ruled

Surface® Swept

Surface® Through Curves

Surface® Through Curve Mesh

Surface® Studio Surface (Shape Studio only)

Menu

Insert® Mesh Surface® Ruled

Insert® Sweep® Swept

Insert® Mesh Surface® Through Curves

Insert® Mesh Surface® Through Curve Mesh

Insert® Mesh Surface® Studio SurfaceLocation in dialogbox Settings group® Body Type

Snap to an object without associativity

What is it?

For the Extrude and Revolve commands, the new Snap to Object option letsyou define a Start or End distance value by selecting a point, a planar face,or a datum plane. The software calculates the distance along the extrudevector or the revolve arc, and sets the value. There is no associativity to thepoint, face, or datum plane.

The Snap to Object option works in the context of an assembly. For example,in the following assembly, you can use the Snap to Object option to extrudethe profile to the center point of the dimple.


Design

Note

• For an extrude operation, if you use a planar face or datum plane asthe “Snap to” object, Siemens PLM Software recommends that theface or datum be normal to the extrude vector.

• For a revolve operation, if you use a planar face or datum plane asthe “Snap to” object, Siemens PLM Software recommends that theface or datum be normal to the revolve arc where the face or planeintersects the arc.


The Snap to Object option makes it easy to calculate the Start or End distanceto a point, planar face, or datum plane. Use this option when associativity tothe limiting point, face, or plane is not important.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteFor the Extrude or Revolve commands, the Start or Endlimit must be set to Value.

Graphics windowRight-click a Start or End handle and choose Snap toObject.


Design

Automatically make datums and sketches internal

What is it?

You can set two new Modeling preferences or customer defaults thatautomatically make

• Datums internal to their child sketches.

• Sketches internal to their child features.

The software automatically internalizes datums or sketches only when youcreate a child sketch or a child feature. You can still make datums or sketchesexternal using the existing Part Navigator commands. The new settingswill not cause datums and sketches to be internalized again when you editthe feature.


Internal datums and sketches do not appear in the Part Navigator, so you canuse these settings to shorten the Model history for a part.

Where do I find it?

Modeling preference

Application ModelingMenu Preferences→Modeling


Modeling Preferences→General tab®AutomaticallyMake Datums Internal to Child Sketch/AutomaticallyMake Sketch Internal to Child Feature

Customer Default

Menu File→Utilities→Customer Defaults


Modeling→General→Miscellaneous→AutomaticallyMake Datums Internal to Child Sketch/AutomaticallyMake Sketch Internal to Child Feature

Modeling Preferences

What is it?

The following options are removed from the Modeling Preferences dialogbox®Analysis tab®Curve Curvature Display group:

• Display: Curvature, Radius of Curvature


Design

Style: Linear, Logarithmic

Inside , Outside

These options are now available in the Curve Analysis dialog box. Formore information, see Curve Analysis.

• Show Cap Line

This option is now available in the Edit Object Display and ObjectPreferences dialog box.

For more information, see Curve Analysis Display options.

Where do I find it?

Curve Analysis options

Menu Analysis®Curve®Curve Analysis

Toolbar Analyze Shape®Curve AnalysisLocation in dialogbox

Curve Analysis dialog box®Settings group®NeedleDirection, Calculation Method, Scaling Method

Curve Analysis Display options

Toolbar Utility®Edit Object Display

Menu

Edit®Object Display

Preferences®Object


Edit Object Display dialog box®Analysis tab®CurveAnalysis Display group®Cap

Object Preferences dialog box®Analysis tab®CurveAnalysis Display group®Cap

Resize Datum Plane

What is it?

Use the Resize Datum Plane command to change the width and length of anexisting datum plane.


You can change the size of a datum plane, even in large models, withoutupdating the model. Although you can also resize a datum plane with theEdit with Rollback command, doing so requires an update of the model.


Design

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingMenu Edit®Feature®Resize Datum Plane

Graphics windowRight-click an existing datum plane®Resize DatumPlane

Convert to Linked Body

What is it?

Converts an unparameterized feature to a Linked Body feature. The LinkedBody feature is without parents and appears in the Part Navigator as abroken link.

Any dependencies that may exist for the body, edges, and faces of theunparameterized feature are transferred to the corresponding body, edges,and faces of the converted Linked Body feature.


You can use this command any time you need to replace the body of anunparameterized feature with another body. You can edit the Linked Bodyto specify a new parent body of the part, and then use the ReplacementAssistant to maintain associativity with downstream data.

This command may also be useful in avoiding phased migration withtraditional migration methods. You can migrate all parts of an assembly atthe same time, including Assembly and Drafting files.

Where do I find it?


Part NavigatorRight-click an unparameterized feature®Convert toLinked Body

Retaining imprinted edges in a Split Body

What is it?

Keep Imprinted Edges is a new option for the Split Body command that letsyou retain the edges that mark the intersection between the split bodies. TheAdvanced Simulation application uses the edges to automatically create gluecoincident mesh mating conditions between the bodies.

The selected solid body in the figure is the target in a Split Bodyoperation. A highlighted face plane is the tool that will split the body.


Design

The result is two solid bodies adjoining each other.

If Keep Imprinted Edges was selected during the Split Bodyoperation, hiding the cylinder solid body reveals the imprinted edges (topimage).

If Keep Imprinted Edges was not selected, imprinted edges are notpresent when you hide the cylinder (bottom image).

Note

An existing edge can be considered an imprinted edge if it forms part ofthe intersection between faces from the target and the tool.

When working in Advanced Simulation with an idealized part active,the Split Body option Keep Imprinted Edges becomes Auto CreateMesh Mating Conditions.


Use this option to create edges between the bodies generated from a SplitBody command, which are used in Advanced Simulation to automaticallycreate mesh mating conditions. Mesh mating conditions ensure that meshesare continuous from one body to the other. Previously, you had to manuallycreate mesh mating conditions between any bodies created by the Split Bodycommand.


Design

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling, Advanced SimulationPrerequisite When working in Advanced Simulation, the idealized

part must be activeLocation in dialogbox

(From Modeling)Settings group®Keep Imprinted Edges

(From Advanced Simulation)Settings group®Auto Create Mesh Mating Conditions

Menu Insert®Trim®Split BodyToolbar

Modeling®Insert→Trim→Split Body

Synchronize Views in Replace Feature

What is it?

Synchronize Views is a new option in the Replace Feature command. Thisoptions synchronizes the current and replacement views when you replace afeature. When you rotate, pan, zoom, or apply rendering styles in one view,NX automatically synchronizes the other view to match these operations.

Before replacement After replacement

The following animation demonstrates the automatic synchronization of thecurrent view and the replacement view as you replace the hole feature fromone block to the other.


Design

A split screen appears only when:

1. The selected feature to replace has downstream dependents that appearin the List subgroup under the Mapping group.

2. You select any of the displayed dependents as reference from the Listsubgroup.


Use this option to locate objects that you want to replace in one view, whileNX automatically tracks your movements toward the same location in theother view. This saves mouse clicks and reduces the need to repeat the sameview manipulations in the other view.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPrerequisite You must select a dependant reference of the selected

feature to replace from the List subgroup in the Mappinggroup.

ToolbarEdit Feature®Replace Feature

Menu Edit®Feature®Replace


Design


Settings group®Synchronize Views

Assemblies

Lightweight loading controls

What is it?

Lightweight loading is no longer controlled by reference set. New controlsdetermine whether components are loaded lightweight (using facetedrepresentations) or exact (using solid representations).

• Set the Use Lightweight Representations assembly load option to specifywhich representation is used when a component is loaded. You shouldalso set the Use Partial Loading assembly load option to fully realize theperformance and memory benefits.

• Use the Show Exact and Show Lightweight commands to switch betweenrepresentation types.

Because lightweight loading is now separate from reference sets, you can nowload any reference set lightweight, as long as lightweight representationsexist for the contents of the reference set. For example, you can load theEntire Part reference set lightweight if the representations exist.

Use the Automatic Lightweight Generation customer default to controlwhether NX maintains lightweight representations for all bodies or just thosebelonging to certain reference sets.

Because the lightweight reference set is no longer needed, it is automaticallyremoved from your parts:

• NX does not retain the lightweight reference set except for some caseswhere you edited the contents for special use. You can ensure that thelightweight reference set is always deleted by setting the LightweightReference Set Removal customer default to Remove All.

• When you use the As Saved assembly load option to load a componentwhose last-used reference set is a Lightweight reference set that is beingdeleted, the Model reference set is loaded instead. The representationused depends on the Use Lightweight Representations assembly loadoption.


Design


Loading assemblies using lightweight representations instead of exactrepresentations can have significant memory savings and improved load anddisplay performance, especially when you work in large assemblies.

The new lightweight loading controls make it easier for you to load yourassembly lightweight using the reference sets of your choice.

Where do I find it?

Use Lightweight Representations

Menu File®Options®Assembly Load OptionsLocation in dialogbox Scope group®Use Lightweight Representations

Show Lightweight and Show Exact

Toolbar

Assemblies®Context Control®Show Lightweight

/Show Exact

MenuAssemblies®Context Control®ShowLightweight/Show Exact

Graphics windowRight-click a component®Show Lightweight/ShowExact

AssemblyNavigator

Right-click a component node®ShowLightweight/ShowExact

Customer defaults



Assemblies®Site Standards®LightweightRepresentations tab®Automatic LightweightGeneration

Assemblies®Site Standards®Reference Setstab®Lightweight Reference Set Removal

Seamless lightweight loading

What is it?

The new seamless lightweight loading capability lets you select lightweightgeometry in almost all NX commands. If the software requires the solidrepresentation to complete the operation, it is automatically loaded.Lightweight geometry that you can select includes faces, edges, and vertices.


Design

Seamless lightweight loading lets you interact and work with lightweightrepresentations as if they were solid bodies, with no need to manually switchrepresentations. In previous releases, you could only use a few commandswith lightweight representations; selection of lightweight topology was notpossible in other commands.

Use the Load Smart Lightweight Data customer default to control whetherthe software uses seamless lightweight loading.

Note

When the Load Smart Lightweight Data customer default is active,which means that seamless lightweight loading is in use, some extradata is loaded from the components. As a result, loading an assemblytypically uses 20 – 80% more memory than traditional lightweightloading. However, this is still significantly lighter than loading theassembly with exact representations.

Operations on lightweight data generated before NX 7.5 may cause thesoftware to load exact data more often than for representations createdor updated in NX 7.5. For optimal performance and memory efficiency,you can refile your pre-NX 7.5 part files using the refile_part utilityto update the lightweight representations. See the Utilities and FileManagement Help for more information about the refile_part utility.


Seamless lightweight loading makes it easier for you to adopt lightweightloading, because you no longer need to be aware of the representationsused by each component in order to manually switch representations whenrequired. You can now work in the same way as when you load exactrepresentations, but with most of the usual performance and memory benefitof lightweight loading.

Where do I find it?


Assemblies®Site Standards®LightweightRepresentations tab®Load Smart Lightweight Data

Assembly constraint enhancements

What is it?

Assembly constraints have the following enhancements:

• You can temporarily display the degrees of freedom for a selectedcomponent. Degrees of freedom arrows appear in the graphics window,


Design

and the Status line shows the number of rotational and translationaldegrees of freedom that exist in the component.

• Constraints are now included when you import a part.

• You can use constraints that reference edges to create a From InstanceFeature component array. Previously, you could only use constraints thatreference faces.

• When you right-click an unsuppressed constraint in the graphics window,the shortcut menu includes a Load Related Geometry command. Thiscommand loads all the geometry required to solve the constraint, whichincludes geometry referenced by other constraints in the same network aswell as geometry referenced by the constraint itself.

Constraint-related enhancements to the Assembly Navigator include thefollowing:

• The Position column icons are different for mating conditions andassembly constraints. Mating condition icons are blue , and assemblyconstraint icons are black .

• The Constraints folder has a Load Related Geometry command onits shortcut menu. This command loads referenced geometry for allunsuppressed constraints in your assembly.

• The Constraints folder and each constraint inside the folder have Positioncolumn icons that show whether all referenced geometry is loaded orsome referenced geometry is unloaded .

Degrees of Freedom


Design

Degrees of freedom can only be determined when the selected componentis loaded and unsuppressed.

When you import a part that has a constraint with arrangement-specificsuppression states, the imported part uses the suppression state of thatconstraint in its active arrangement. Arrangements are not imported withparts, because the assembly that contains the original part may have differentarrangements than the assembly where the part is imported.


The ability to use constraints that reference edges lets you, for example,create a From Instance Feature component array using a componentpositioned by Concentric constraints.

When you load an assembly with partial loading, some constraints mayreference unloaded geometry, which may cause them to fail when you updateyour assembly. If you use the Load Related Geometry command before theupdate, the constraints can solve. You can check the Position column in theAssembly Navigator to confirm that all referenced geometry is now loaded.

Where do I find it?

Show Degrees of Freedom

Application Assemblies

Toolbar

Assemblies®Component Position®Show Degrees

of Freedom

MenuAssemblies®Component Position®Show Degreesof Freedom

Graphics window Right-click a component®Show Degrees of FreedomAssemblyNavigator

Right-click a component node®Show Degrees ofFreedom

Load Related Geometry


Graphics windowRight-click an unsuppressed constraint®Load RelatedGeometry

AssemblyNavigator

Right-click the Constraints folder®Load RelatedGeometry


Design

Delayed update of Assembly Constraints

What is it?

Use the Delay Assembly Constraints command when you want to delay theupdating of assembly constraints until you activate the update.

When you delay assembly constraint updating:

• New constraints are not solved until you update them.

• Constraints do not update when the assembly or components change.

• Constraints are ignored, as if they were suppressed.

• Delayed constraints are marked with a icon in the Assembly Navigator.

• The Constraints folder in the Assembly Navigator is marked with aicon when it contains out-of-date constraints.

To update delayed constraints, do one of the following:

• Choose the Update Assembly Constraints command to update allconstraints in your current assembly.

• Choose the Update All command to update all constraints in your currentsession.

• Deactivate the Delay Assembly Constraints command.

In the figure below, the delayed constraints are yellow.

Two delayed parallel constraints

When you activate the update, constraints in assemblies that are frozen donot update until you unfreeze the assemblies.


Design


The ability to delay constraint updating is useful when you want to makemultiple changes to the constraints of a large, heavily-constrained assembly.Now you can make several changes, and then update the out-of-dateconstraints at the same time. This can greatly improve performance becausethe constraints only update once, instead of after each change you make.

You can also use this enhancement to prevent unwanted updates in frozenassemblies, such as released assemblies.

Where do I find it?

Delay Assembly Constraints


MenuTools®Update®Interpart Update®Delay AssemblyConstraints

Update Assembly Constraints


MenuTools®Update®Interpart Update®Update AssemblyConstraints

AssemblyNavigator

Right-click a constraints folder containing delayedout-of-date constraints®Update Delayed Constraints

Update All

Application AssembliesMenu Tools®Update®Interpart Update®Update AllAssemblyNavigator

Right-click a constraints folder containing delayedout-of-date constraints®Update Delayed Constraints

Design in context: WAVE linking with Modeling commands

What is it?

The interpart-geometry-selection-within-a-Modeling-command capabilityhas been enhanced as follows:

• You can create WAVE links automatically when selecting interpartgeometry to specify a point, vector, plane, or CSYS, depending on yourSelection Scope and Create Interpart Link settings.


Design

Note

Depending on the Modeling command, the options for creating apoint, vector, plane, or CSYS may appear in the command dialogbox, or in a separate dialog box. See the Gateway to NX Help formore information.

• When you select interpart geometry, Selection Intent rules for Stop atIntersection, Follow Fillet, Chain Within Feature, and Boundary EdgesOnly are supported.

• When you use associative interpart selection intent, one linked feature iscreated instead of multiple features. For example, suppose a current chainhas a Linked Composite Curve feature, but the software stops selectingcurves because there are two possible choices. When you select the curveyou want, it is added to the Linked Composite Curve feature. Before NX7.5, the software created a new linked feature for each selection you made.

Your Selection Scope and Create Interpart Link settings have the followingeffects on WAVE linking:

• If the Selection Scope option is set to Entire Assembly and the CreateInterpart Link button is selected on the Selection bar, WAVE links arecreated when you select geometry outside the work part and its children.

• If the Selection Scope is set to Entire Assembly and the Create InterpartLink button is not selected on the Selection bar, you can select geometryoutside the work part, but no WAVE links are created.

• If the Selection Scope is set to Within Work Part and Components,WAVE linking is disabled because you cannot select geometry outside thework part and its children.


You can now easily reference geometry in other components during Modeling

operations when the Create Interpart Link is selected. The parts areassociative, and changes you make to one part can drive the design of anotherpart. You no longer need to manually create WAVE links before you enter aModeling operation.

Where do I find it?



Design

Prerequisites

Set the File®Utilities®CustomerDefaults®Assemblies®General®Interpart Modelingtab®Allow Associative Interpart Modeling customerdefault to Yes.

Selection bar

Selection Scope

Create Interpart Link

Mirror Assembly enhancements

What is it?

The Mirror Assembly command has the following enhancements:

• You can specify the symmetry plane for a component you want to mirrorwith the Reuse and Reposition option. You can create a datum planeor datum CSYS to define the symmetry plane before a mirror assemblyoperation, or you can specify the symmetry plane during the operation.

Tip

For nonsymmetrical components, specifying a symmetry planemakes it easier for the software to compute an appropriate mirroredposition.

• You can create nonassociative mirrored parts.

• You can select multiple rows in the Mirror Review step, which lets youchange the mirror type for several components at the same time.

• All bodies in the selected components are now mirrored with theAssociative Mirror and Non-associative Mirror options, regardless ofwhich reference set the bodies belong to.

• Each mirrored body is added to the reference set of the source body.

• The Include WAVE Linked Bodies customer default setting is ignored in amirror assembly operation.

Tip

To find a customer default, choose File®Utilities®Customer

Defaults, and click Find Default .

The name of the datum CSYS or datum plane you want to use as a symmetryplane must match the value in your Name of Symmetry Datum CSYS/Plane


Design

customer default. We recommend you use the default name, SymmetryOverride.

An alternate way you can specify a datum plane for the plane of symmetryis to click the Specify Symmetry Plane button when you select a componenton the Mirror Review tab. One advantage of this approach is that you do notneed to save the datum plane with the part file.


Before NX 7.5, the Reposition option worked best when the assembly wastruly symmetrical. However, many real-world parts can be used as right-handand left-hand parts, even though they are not truly symmetrical; for example,one side may have an extra hole or other feature that does not affect thefit or function on the other side, and can therefore be used on either side.Previously, you had to make sure the WCS in the part represented thesymmetry plane while you created the geometry in order to get your desiredreposition solution. In NX 7.5, you can create the symmetry plane you needbefore or during the mirror assembly operation.

Before NX 7.5, you could only mirror bodies that belonged to the Modelreference set.

Where do I find it?

Non-Associative Mirror


Toolbar

Assemblies®Components Drop Down®Mirror

AssemblyMenu Assemblies®Components®Mirror Assembly


Mirror Setup tab / Mirror Review tab®Non-Associative

Mirror

Specify Symmetry Plane


Toolbar

Assemblies®Components Drop Down®Mirror

AssemblyMenu Assemblies®Components®Mirror AssemblyLocation in dialogbox Mirror Review tab®Specify Symmetry Plane

Name of Symmetry Datum CSYS/Plane customer default


Design


Assemblies®Site Standards®Miscellaneoustab®Name of Symmetry Datum CSYS/Plane

Display settings in context

What is it?

Two new options let you specify whether layer setting and display propertychanges you make while working in the context of an assembly are alsoapplied to the part file that owns the geometry:

Apply ’Move toLayer’ to OwningParts

Applies layer changes to the underlying geometry. Thisoption is not available when you select multiple layers.

This option is available only when both of the followingconditions are met:

• The selected geometry objects can have displayproperty changes applied to them.

• The selected geometry objects are owned bycomponents or subassemblies of the displayed part,but not owned by the displayed part itself.

If this check box is not selected, any layer changes youmake are applied only to the selected object occurrencesin the displayed part.

Apply Changesto Owning Parts

Applies other display properties to the underlyinggeometry. Examples of object display properties are color,layer, and translucency.

This option is not available if either of the followingconditions is true:

• You select a component.

• You select only geometry that belongs to the displayedpart.

If this check box is not selected, any display propertychanges you make are applied only to the selected objectoccurrences in the displayed part.


Before NX 7.5, display property and layer changes you made to a componentwhile working in the context of an assembly were only applied to the displayedpart (that is, to the assembly). If you changed the displayed part, for example


Design

from the assembly to one of its components, the display property and layerchanges did not appear in the component. It is less confusing now that youcan control where in-context display property and layer changes are applied.

You can make the same display changes to multiple parts in a singleoperation. This reduces your need to change the displayed part.

Where do I find it?

Apply ’Move to Layer’ to Owning Parts

Toolbar Utility®Layer SettingsMenu Format®Layer SettingsLocation in dialogbox

Settings group®Apply ’Move to Layer’ to OwningParts

Apply Changes to Owning Parts

Toolbar Utility®Edit Object DisplayMenu Edit®Object DisplayLocation in dialogbox Settings group®Apply Changes to Owning Parts

NX Relations Browser

What is it?

The NX Relations Browser has the following enhancements:

• When you select one or more part nodes in the Interpart Relations View,the parent relations are also selected. The details appear in the Relationstable. Parent relations remain selected as long as one or more of theirpart nodes are selected.

• You can make a single selected part become the displayed or work part byright-clicking it in the Interpart Relations View and choosing the MakeDisplayed Part or Make Work Part command. These commands are notavailable if the selected part is already the displayed or work part.

• When you select one or more linked features in the Relations table, thecorresponding features and geometry are selected and highlighted in thegraphics window and the Part Navigator.

• You can edit a single selected linked feature by right-clicking it in theRelations table and choosing the Edit Link command, which opens theWAVE Geometry Linker. This command is not available for interpartexpression relations.


Design

• You can break selected linked features from the browser by right-clickingone or more of them in the Relations table and choosing the BreakLinks command. This command is not available for interpart expressionrelations.

• If you cannot interact with the browser because a complex operation suchas part load or update is in progress, or because a dialog box that preventscompletion of a browser operation is open, you receive a message.

• You receive a message when the browser needs to be updated because youmade changes to the parts and relations in the software.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Assemblies®Relations BrowserMenu Assemblies®WAVE®Relations Browser

Motion envelopes

What is it?

The Motion Envelope function, which is used to create a volume of motionfor components, has the following enhancements:

• New underlying swept volume generator technology that createsbetter motion envelopes more quickly. This technology is also used byTeamcenter Visualization.

• A simpler user interface for defining an envelope accuracy in the Customquality option. Beginning in NX 6.0.2, when you set Quality to Custom,the quality is defined using a single Envelope Tolerance option, replacingthe multiple, less intuitive options of the previous releases.

Use the Envelope Tolerance option to specify the maximum distancebetween the theoretical and actual motion envelopes. Smaller tolerancesproduce more accurate envelopes, but require more time and memory.


Design

Motion envelope of a vise handle ball

The new swept volume generator has the following requirements:

• A 3D graphics adapter with 24-bit depth buffer or better (Required)

• A system with at least 2GB of RAM (Recommended)

Note

The generation of high quality envelopes for complex parts may use alarge amount of memory for some motion definitions. If you find thatyou are unable to generate motion envelopes due to virtual memoryor RAM limits on your computer, you could try using a lower qualitysetting for the motion envelope, or restart NX so the largest amount ofmemory is available. Alternatively, try to create the envelope using acomputer with more memory.

The new swept volume generator can make use of multiple CPUs or cores.However, the benefit of having more than two cores decreases rapidly, becausemost of the work is done by the graphics adapter.


Advantages of creating motion envelopes in NX 6.0.2, compared to earlierreleases, include the following:

• Accuracy — the motion envelope is tighter at all quality levels: low,medium, high, and custom.

• Performance — the generation of a motion envelope of any quality ismuch faster.

• Usability — Custom envelope tolerances are much easier to understand.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

You must be in the assembly sequencing environment,and your assembly sequence must include one or moremotion steps.


Design

Toolbar

Assembly Sequencing and Motion®Motion Envelope

Menu Tools®Motion Envelope

Variable positioning and Fix constraints

What is it?

When variable positioning is used on a component that includes Fix assemblyconstraints, the inherited version of each Fix constraint is now a Bondconstraint.

When you open an assembly that includes Fix constraints inherited byvariable positioning applied in an earlier release of NX, the higher-levelinherited Fix constraints are converted to Bond constraints.


Inheriting a Fix constraint to a higher-level Fix constraint can causeundesirable behavior such as preventing movement of the fixed component’sparents in higher-level assemblies. Converting the Fix constraint to aBond constraint at higher levels preserves some of the behavior of the Fixconstraint on the component. The higher-level Bond constraint connects thefixed component to its parent, which lets the component and parent move as apair, but restricts independent movement of the component.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

You can only use variable positioning on a componentthat has at least two assembly levels above it. Thismeans that the component must have at least one parentthat has a parent of its own.

Note

The lowest level can be a subassembly if you donot select any of its components.

Shortcut menuAssembly Navigator®right-click a componentnode®Override Position


Design

Shape Studio

Surface Intersection Analysis

What is it?

The Surface Intersection Analysis command creates a Surface IntersectionAnalysis object (SIAO).

The SIAO helps you analyze an intersection curve of intersecting surfaces forinflections and continuity between two sets of surfaces.

Surface Intersection Analysis has the following characteristics:

• You can analyze the intersection curve using combs.

• The SIAO appears in the Part Navigator under the Analysis group, andcan be edited.

• The SIAO can be used to create an Analysis template.

• It is dynamically updated when its parent surfaces are modified.

You can modify the display parameters of the SIAO in the SurfaceIntersection Display group in the Analysis tab of both the Edit ObjectDisplay and Object Preferences dialog boxes.

Surface Intersection DisplayBaseNeedleCap

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Analyze Shape ® Surface Intersection


Design

Menu

Analysis®Shape®Surface Intersection

Edit®Object Display®Analysis tab

Preferences®Object®Analysis tab

Text – expression support

What is it?

The Text command now lets you add text to your part that is defined as atext string expression.

A text string expression can be designated once the Reference Text checkbox is selected in the Text dialog box.

• Click the Select Expression option in the Text dialog box to bring up theRelationships dialog box where you can select from list of existing stringexpressions.

• You can interactively define a new string expression using the CreateString Expression option in the Relationships dialog box.

1) String expression as Reference Text in Relationships dialog box.2)Reference Text applied to part.


Design


Many workflows involve modeling parts with specific textual information suchas a part identification numbers, which are subject to change and revision.

Having part specific information as associative string expressions provides away to automate revisions and changes to text applied to a part.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling, Drafting, Shape Studio

Toolbar Curve®TextMenu Insert®Curve®Text

Edit Object Display – JT Point Display

What is it?

You can now edit the display of JT facet bodies just as would NX facet bodies.

The available Display options for JT facet bodies are:

• Normal

• Point

• Plus Sign

• Asterisk

• Circle

• Pound Sign

• Cross

• Grid Point

• Square

• Triangle

• Diamond

• Centerline


Design

Where do I find it?

Toolbar Utility ® Edit Object DisplayMenu Edit ® Object DisplayShortcut Menu Right-click the JT facet body® Edit DisplayLocation in dialogbox Facet Body group ® Display

Transform and align geometric objects

What is it?

You can select any geometric object, transform and realign it. You could dothat with only facet bodies previously.

The following figure shows a sheet body transformed and aligned to a solidbody using a point set.


Use this command to move and realign objects to other bodies or objects usingpoint sets, best fit, or patch methods.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling, Shape Studio


Design

Menu

Edit® Align® Point Set to Point Set

Edit® Align® Multi-Patch

Edit® Align® Best Fit

Note

These commands were previously found underEdit® Facet Body® Alignment.

Aesthetic Face Blend


What is it?

The Aesthetic Face Blend command creates appealing blends whilemaintaining engineering surface requirements and constraints.


When creating an Aesthetic Face Blend, you can control the following:

• Whether the blend sections are aligned based on a rolling ball, spinecurve or vector.

• Whether blend tangents are developed using a radius or a chord length.


Design

Radius

Chord Length

• The shape of the blend cross sections.

• The continuity of the blend to the blend input faces.

Circular Accelerated

G1

G2 Not applicable

• How the blend faces are to be trimmed.

• Degree and Rational output settings.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Feature® Aesthetic Face BlendMenu Insert® Detail Feature®Aesthetic Face Blend

Transition control setting for Studio Surface

What is it?

When you select By Points from the Alignment list in the Studio Surfacedialog box, you can now select No Constraint as the transition control.


Design

The No Constraint option results in a surface that is not forced to becomenormal with any section curve, unlike the other transition controls, Normal toEnd Sections and Normal to all Sections.


Use No Constraint when you do not want the surface normals to be affectedby section-to-section transitions.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling and Shape StudioToolbar (ShapeStudio only) Surface® Studio SurfaceMenu Insert® Mesh Surface® Studio SurfaceLocation in dialogbox

Output Surface Options group® Transition Control®No Constraint

I-Form


What is it?

Use the I-Form command to dynamically modify a face by inserting andediting iso-parameteric curves.

You can select and modify any type of face (B-surface and non-B-surface) bymodifying inserted iso-parameteric curves.

Here are some of the ways you can change a face with I-Form:


Design

Select a face and insert iso-parameteric U curves at desired locations.

Select the constraint point handles and drag them along the X-axis.

Insert iso-parameteric V curves.

Move the constraint point handles along the iso-parameteric V curves.

Drag the constraint point handles along the X-axis again.


Design

- Return to the iso-parameteric U curves and select and dragindividual constraint points along the X-axis.

Change the direction to the Z-axis and adjust the face in the Zdirection.


Use this command if you want to modify faces without pre-processing, such ashaving to first extract, untrim, or otherwise convert them.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling and Shape StudioToolbar Edit Surface® I-FormMenu Edit® Surface® I-Form

X-Form

What is it?

The new simplified X-Form dialog box gives you improved access to frequentlyused options, and supports the following logical top-down workflow.

1. Select object.

2. Select poles to edit.

3. Change object degree.

4. Select movement method.

5. Edit poles.

Other usability improvements include the following:

• You can now specify movement methods using options in the Move,Rotate, Scale, Planarize tabs.

• The OrientXpress tool is available to enable rapid selection of a movementmethod from within the scene.

• When you use Move with the Polygon option, polygon vector handlesare displayed at each surface pole.


Design

Vector handles on poles – dynamically controlled

• If you reduce the degree or the number of patches of a surface or curve, atemporary on-screen display shows the maximum deviation (at the pointof instance).

On-screen maximum deviation

• A Deselect Poles Automatically check box has been added to the PoleSelection group:

– Pole selection is cumulative; any pole selected is added to theprevious selected pole. This is the default state.

– When you select a pole, any other selected poles are automaticallydeselected.

• You can use the shortcut menu when you right-click a pole or polylines to:

– Increase or decrease the U and V degrees.

– Choose a movement method.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

(Modeling) Freeform Shape → X-Form

(Shape Studio) Edit ®®® X-Form


Design

Menu Edit → Surface → X-Form

X-Form enhancements

What is it?

The X-Form command includes the following enhancements:

• You can select and modify any type of face (B-surface or non-B-surface)without having to extract, untrim, and convert it.

• Use the Use Face Finder check box to identify faces with symmetry andoffset conditions. The modifications you make to the selected face willautomatically be applied to the faces that meet these conditions.

• You can snap a pole to another pole of the same face as you can with theStudio Spline command.

• On-screen display of deviation value when reducing the degree or patchcount of a surface.

• The OrientXpress tool is available for on-screen directional specification.

• On-screen shortcut menus are available for degree parameterization andmovement options.

• When the Associative Freeform Editing preference is enabled, you canassociatively snap poles to selected geometry such as curves, edges, or


Design

faces. The relationship with the parent object is maintained when theparent object is repositioned.


The enhancements increase productivity and improve workflows. Youcan seamlessly edit faces by dynamically manipulating the pole locationsregardless of how a model was constructed.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Edit Surface→X-FormMenu Edit→Surface→X-Form

Match Edge

What is it?

The Match Edge command has been enhanced to include:

• The type of Match Edge operation is now calculated based on the selectedReference geometry so you don’t need to explicitly select a type.

• Selection of both the Edge to Edit and a single Reference surface willoccur automatically when the selection cursor crosses both the Edge toEdit and the Reference geometry.

• A Shape Control tab has been added:

– You can control the amount of edge match applied to the matchingsurface using the Modification Percentage slider where 0% producesa totally unmatched state and 100% produces a fully matched state.

– A Blend check box has been added to activate Blend, Depth and Skewinput for matching operations.

• Before and After deviation values are displayed for checking edgematching based on your continuity specifications.

• You can use the Align parameterization option to enable the Edge toEdit surface to adopt to the parameterization of the Reference surfacepole structure without increasing the degree or patches of the surfacebeing matched.


Design

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

(Modeling) Freeform Shape → Match Edge

(Shape Studio) Edit ®®®Match EdgeMenu Edit → Surface →Match Edge

Match Edge enhancements

What is it?

The Match Edge command includes the following enhancements:

• You can select and modify any type of face (B-surface or non-B-surface)without having to extract, untrim, and convert it.

• Use the Use Face Finder check box to identify faces with symmetry andoffset conditions. The modifications you make to the selected face willautomatically be applied to the faces that meet these conditions.


The enhancements increase productivity and improve workflows. You canseamlessly select faces and match face boundaries to see the model updatein real-time to the desired shapes.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Edit Surface→Match EdgeMenu Edit→Surface→Match Edge

Improved control of shapes in N-sided Surface

What is it?

The Center Flat slider in the N-sided dialog box is now available to let youimprove surface shapes over a wider range of conditions.

In previous releases, the Center Flat slider was unavailable when the typewas set to Trimmed, and the UV orientation was set to Area, and constraintfaces were selected.


Design


You can control the continuity and flatness of a new surface for moreconditions than you could before.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Surface® N-sided SurfaceMenu Insert® Mesh Surface® N-sided SurfaceLocation in dialogbox Shape Control group® Center Control

Specify editor to edit a spline

What is it?

You can specify to use either X-Form or Studio Spline as the default editorwhen you double-click a spline.


If you want to control degrees or segments, use X-Form as the editor whenyou double-click a spline.

If you want to edit spline constraints, use Studio Spline.

Where do I find it?

Application Modeling, Shape StudioPrerequisite The setting is effective only in Shape Studio

Menu

Preferences®Modeling

Files®Utilities®Customer Defaults


Modeling Preferences®Freeform tab®Default Actionon Spline

Customer Defaults®Modeling®FreeFormModeling®General tab®Default Action on Spline


Design

Deviation Gauge

What is it?

The Deviation Gauge command has the following enhancements:

• The Absolute Value option lets you control values visible in the label.

• The Dynamic Label option lets you see the deviation at the location of ahandle, as you drag it across the selected source geometry.

• A color legend is available in the graphics window to show the differencebetween minimum and maximum deviations.

• Color mapping between a facet body and a face appear on the face.

• Results of the deviation analysis are visible in the dialog box, and includethe total number of samples, the number of samples inside both inner andouter tolerance, and the number of samples out of tolerance.

Dynamic Label

Color legend

Where do I find it?

Application Shape Studio

Toolbar Analyze Shape®Deviation GaugeMenu Analysis®Deviation®Gauge


Design


Deviation Gauge®Plot group®Absolute Value

Deviation Gauge®Label group®Dynamic Label

Section Analysis and Grid Analysis

What is it?

The functionality in the Section Analysis command is divided between twoseparate commands: Section Analysis and Grid Analysis.

Section Analysis command

• You can analyze shapes by cutting sections on selected objects.

• You can control the orientation of the cutting plane.

• You can create section curves separately, without also having to createsection analysis objects.

• You can specify section placement using these options:

– Uniform — Cuts a section based on the number of sections or thespacing between the sections.

– Through Points— Cuts sections through user specified points.

– Between Points — Cuts sections between user specified points,adjusted for the number of sections or the spacing of sections.

– Interactive— Cuts sections on the selected objects by drawing eachsection through two defining points in the graphics window. Sectionsare cut in the view direction.

• The orientation of curvature needles for an Isoparametric section nowalways measures and displays the surface curvature of the selected faces,and not the section curve curvature as in prior releases.

Grid Analysis command

• You can analyze shapes by defining a grid to cut sections on selectedobjects.

Preferences for the curvature display Needle Direction, Calculation Method,and Scaling Method options have been moved from Modeling Preferences toboth the Section Analysis and Grid Analysis dialog boxes.


Design


Splitting section and grid analysis functionality into separate commandsimproves their interaction and efficiency for Class A workflows.

Where do I find it?

Application Shape Studio

Toolbar

Analyze Shape®Section Analysis

Analyze Shape®Grid Analysis

Menu

Analysis®Shape®Section

Analysis®Shape®Grid Analysis

Non-Proportional Zoom

What is it?

The Non-Proportional Zoom command has three main enhancements.

• You can dynamically designate the Non-Proportional Zoom aspect ratio ofthe display.

• You can set a Non-Proportional Zoom and change back and forth betweenthe set Non-Proportional Zoom and the regular display.

• The Non-Proportional Zoom Options dialog box is where you can specifythe behavior of your zoom operation.

The Analyze Shape toolbar has been updated to address the enhancements.

Display Non-Proportional Zoom

• Clicking this option will display the previously set Non-ProportionalZoom.

• Clicking this option more than once switches between the currentlyset Non-Proportional Zoom display and the regular display so you cango back and forth between displays.

• If no Non-Proportional Zoom display has been set, this option isunavailable.

Set Non-Proportional Zoom


Design

• Clicking this option sets a Non-Proportional Zoom of the graphicsdisplay.

• If you click Set Non-Proportional Zoom when DisplayNon-Proportional Zoom is inactive, any previously setNon-Proportional Zoom will be lost.

• If a set Non-Proportional Zoom is displayed and you click SetNon-Proportional Zoom, the existing set Non-Proportional Zoom willbe updated.

Non-Proportional Zoom Options

• Clicking this option opens the Non-Proportional Zoom Options dialogbox.

• In the dialog box, you can specify the Method used for theNon-Proportional Zoom. There are two options:

– Rectangle - The display aspect ratio is defined by dragging anexplicit rectangle. This functions like previous releases.

– Dynamic - The aspect ratio is dynamically defined by draggingthe cursor. The non-proportional zoom is set once the left mousebutton is released.

– Using either method, you can now repeatedly adjust yourNon-Proportional Zoom designation without leaving the function.

• In Dynamicmode, you can establish a center for your Non-ProportionalZoom using the Anchor Center check box:

Anchor Center

– The Non-Proportional Zoom will always center on the first clickof the cursor.

Anchor Center

– The Non-Proportional Zoom will always center about the centerof the view.

– The screen will not pan upon release of the left mouse button.

• In Dynamic mode, you can use the Sensitivity slider to adjust theexaggeration of the Non-Proportional Zoom so larger or smaller zoomoperations can be effected with one cursor drag.


Design


• To evaluate the curvature flow of surfaces and curves when you edit polesusing tools such as X-form or Studio Spline.

• To evaluate the curvature flow of surfaces and curves as a part of designquality validation such as checking the uniformity of the pole structureof curves, surfaces or sheet bodies.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Analyze Shape → Display Non-Proportional Zoom

Analyze Shape → Set Non-Proportional Zoom

Analyze Shape → Non-Proportional Zoom Options

Menu

View → Operation →Display Non-Proportional Zoom

View → Operation → Set Non-Proportional Zoom

View → Operation → Non-Proportional Zoom Options

Edge Symmetry

What is it?

The new Edge Symmetry command matches edge geometry and continuityto a centerline plane for use in developing surfaces that are symmetricalacross a plane.

• You can define the centerline plane by:

– Selecting an existing plane.

– Using one of the principal XYZ planes (XC-ZC is the default).

– Using basic plane definition methods.

• You can specify an offset value from the designated plane using the Offsetoption.

• You can modify degree and patch parameterization.

• You can specify the method used for designating edge symmetry matching:


Design

– Movement – Use to specify if poles will be moved the minimumdistance necessary to achieve the match (Normal), or if they will bemoved using a projection algorithm to make the match (Project).

– Shape Control – Use to control the position of selected poles androws of poles and control the shape-blending factors of Blend, Depthand Skew.

• You can specify G0, G1, G2, and G3 continuity for edge symmetrymatching and check before and after deviation values based on yourspecifications.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

(Modeling) Freeform Shape → Edge Symmetry

(Shape Studio) Edit ®®® Edge SymmetryMenu Edit → Surface → Edge Symmetry

Drafting

Drafting user interface enhancements

What is it?

In order to enhance the consistency, usability, and discoverability ofthe Drafting application, the menus and toolbars are restructured andreorganized into logical sub-groups of commands.

Changes to the Drafting user interface include the following:

• The Essentials Role for Drafting is reduced to only the most commonly-used Drafting and Gateway commands.

Note

All commands, except legacy GD&T commands, are still availablein the Essentials with Full Menus and Advanced with Full Menusroles for Drafting.

• Access to legacy GD&T functionality, also known as Checked GD&T, isonly available by customizing your menus or toolbars and adding thecommands that you want.

Commands that are removed from menus and toolbars are:


Design

– Insert→GDT Parameters

– Information→PMI→Geometric Tolerancing→(all)

– Preferences→PMI→Geometric Tolerancing

• The Insertmenu now includes direct access to sketch curve and constraintcreation commands.

• The Insert→Annotation menu contains commands for creating all othertypes of Drafting annotations except custom symbols, centerlines, andtables. The Annotation toolbar includes the same commands as theAnnotation menu

• The Insert→Dimension menu and Dimension toolbar includes theFeature Parameters command.

• Separate Insert menus are available for creating centerlines and tables(including parts lists).

• The Insert→Symbol menu contains commands for defining and creatingcustom symbols and user-defined symbols.

• The Centerline, Drafting Preference, and Drafting Toggles toolbars areremoved.

• A new Drafting toolbar is available which provides access to all of thecommands for creating and editing Drafting-specific annotations, symbols,centerlines, and tables.

• Annotation Preferences and Section Line Preferences commands arenow available on the Annotation toolbar.

• View Preferences and View Label Preferences commands are nowavailable on the Drawing toolbar.

Copy/Paste enhancements

What is it?

You can now copy and paste the following Drafting objects at a particularlocation in one operation:

• Curves

• Sketch curves with their constraints

• Sketch dimensions


Design

• Non-associative annotations and symbols without leader lines

• Associative and non-associative extracted edges

• Silhouette curves

• Sketch groups

• Non-sketch groups whose contents are individually supported and arelocated in the same view or sheet

These Drafting objects can be located in none, one, or more drafting views ona drawing sheet. You can paste them in a different drafting view, drawingsheet, or part.

With the Paste dialog box open, you can:

• Move your copy to the location you want.

• Copy the same objects multiple times by clicking Apply.

Note

You cannot paste:

• PMI-inherited annotations

• Retained annotations

• Sketches

• Non-sketch groups whose contents include an unsupported object orare located in multiple views or sheets


The Drafting Paste command simplifies copying and pasting Drafting objects.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Standard ® PasteMenu Edit ® Paste

Graphics windowRight-click on a drafting view or a drawing sheet ®Paste

Part NavigatorRight-click on a drafting view or a drawing sheet node® Paste


Design

Custom Symbol enhancements

What is it?

The Custom Symbol functionality is redesigned to allow for more robust andreusable custom symbols in Drafting and PMI. You can do the following:

• Use the Reuse Library to store and retrieve custom symbols. Symbolscreated in Drafting can be reused as PMI custom symbols, and vice versa.

Name

Custom Symbol LibraryCustom SymbolsFastenersIdentificationSymbolsMoldSymbolsNXSymbols

Part Symbols

• Store and reuse custom symbols from a Teamcenter environment.

Note

When working in a Teamcenter Integration environment, you mustfirst import the custom symbols from the operating system into theappropriate Reuse Library folder. A symbol Installation tool withan interactive user interface is available to guide you through thewhole installation process.

• Smash both Drafting and PMI custom symbols into their constituentparts. These parts become basic drafting and PMI objects. This includessupport for sketch curves and sketch annotation.

• Edit the name and symbol image displayed in the Reuse Librarynavigator. You can also change the library in which the symbol is stored.

• Rotate the custom symbol at its anchor point.


Design

• Control how much of the graphics window is used to define the imagefor a new custom symbol.

• Add custom symbols to text using the Custom Symbol category in theSymbols group of the Text Editor dialog box, or any dialog box that usestext editor options.

Note

NX custom symbol libraries from previous versions are notautomatically installed. If you want to use the NX Symbols,Mold Symbols, Fasteners, or Identification Symbols libraries,you will need to use the symbol installation tool found in the$UGII_BASE_DIR\ugii\symbol\install_tool directory. This tool allowsyou to manually load these symbol libraries, and any other customsymbol libraries, in either a native NX environment or a TeamcenterIntegration environment, and use them within the Reuse Library.


Use Custom Symbols to create and add unique and company-specificannotation to your 2D and 3D part data. The Reuse Library provides asingle, consistent mechanism for working with custom symbols in both theDrafting and PMI environment.

Where do I find it?

New custom symbol

Application/Taskenvironment Drafting and PMI task environment

Toolbar Annotation→Define Custom SymbolMenu Insert→Symbols→Define Custom Symbol


Design

Resource bar

Reuse Library tab →Custom SymbolLibrary→right-click a library folder→Define CustomSymbol

Add a custom symbol to the part


Toolbar

Annotation→Place Custom Symbol

PMI→Custom Symbol

Menu

Insert→Symbols→Place Custom Symbol

PMI→Symbols→Custom

Resource barReuse Library tab →Member Selectwindow®right-click a custom symbol→Insert

Add a custom symbol to a Note or Feature Control Frame


Toolbar

Annotation→Note

Annotation→Feature Control Frame

PMI→Note

PMI→Feature Control Frame

Menu

Insert→Annotation→Note

Insert→Annotation→Feature Control Frame

PMI→Note

PMI→Feature Control FrameLocation in dialogbox

Text Input group→Symbolssubgroup→Category→Custom Symbol

Add a custom symbol to an ID or Weld symbol


Design


Toolbar

Annotation→Weld Symbol

Annotation→Identification Symbol

PMI→Weld

Menu

Insert→Annotation→Weld

Insert→Annotation→Identification Symbol

PMI→Symbols→Weld


Annotation Editor →Text dialog box®Text Inputgroup→Symbols subgroup→Category→CustomSymbol

Surface Finish Symbols

What is it?

Standards-compliant support for creating surface finish symbols in Draftingis available. Supported standards include the following:

• ASME Y14.36M-1996

• ISO 1302:1992

• ISO 1302:2002

• JIS B0031(1994)

• GB 131-93

• ESKD

• DIN EN ISO 1302:1992

• DIN EN ISO 1302:2002

The Surface Finish Symbol dialog box and its functionality is similar to thedialog box and functionality used to create PMI surface finish symbols

You can place surface finish symbols with extension line leaders on additionalobject types, such as extension lines and dimension lines.


Design


Use the Surface Finish Symbol command to create standards-compliantsymbols for both English and Metric parts in Drafting.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Annotation→Surface Finish SymbolMenu Insert→Annotation→Surface Finish Symbol

Compound weld symbols

What is it?

The Drafting and PMI Weld command has a Compound Weld option that,when set, creates compound weld symbols above and below the weld line byadding a Fillet weld symbol on top of a supported weld symbol.

Supported weld symbols are:

• Square

• Bevel Groove

• J-Groove


Design

• Flared Bevel Groove

Square andfilletcompound weld

symbol

Bevel groove andfilletcompound weld

symbol

J-groove andfilletcompound weld

symbol

Flared bevel andfilletcompound weld

symbol

When the Compound Weld option is set, you can also specify the size andSize Letter Code for the additional Fillet weld.

Note

You can only specify the Size Letter Code for ISO, DIN, GB and ESKDcompound welds.


Use the option to create welds that contain more than one weld symbol on oneor both sides of the weld line.

Where do I find it?

Application/Taskenvironment Drafting application and PMI task environment

Toolbar



Menu

Insert→Annotation→Weld Symbol

PMI→Symbol→Weld Symbol


Other Side group→Compound Weld

Arrow Side group→Compound Weld


Design

Centerline enhancements

What is it?

New centerline options and functionality enhancements let you do thefollowing:

• Display a center mark centerline as a point.

Centerline as a point

• Interactively control the length of individual extension legs of anycenterline type by right-clicking the centerline and selecting SetExtension Individually.

• Create centerlines on counter bored holes using the AutomaticCenterlines command.

Where do I find it?

Center mark as a center point


Toolbar Centerline→Center Mark


Design

Menu Insert→Centerline→Center MarkLocation in dialogbox Settings group→Display as center point

Individual extension line display


Toolbar Centerline→Center MarkMenu Insert→Centerline→Center MarkLocation in dialogbox Settings group→Set Extension Individually

Graphics windowRight-click centerline symbol →Set ExtensionIndividually

Create automatic centerlines


Toolbar Centerline→Automatic CenterlineMenu Insert→Centerline→Automatic

Callout and Identification symbol enhancements for parts lists

What is it?

Parts list callout symbols and Identification symbols are enhanced to betterconform to drawing standards. These enhancements let you do the following:

• Create an underlined callout or Identification symbol.


Design

• Set the default style of your parts list callout symbol and Identificationsymbol to be an underlined symbol.

• Create a horizontal or a vertical group of two or more callout orIdentification symbols.

Horizontally grouped symbols Vertically grouped symbols

• Adjust the order of the symbols in a group.


Use the new callout options to create standards-compliant callout orIdentification symbols in your part.

Where do I find it?

Set or edit the style of a callout symbol


Design


Menu Preferences→Annotation→Parts List tabGraphics window Parts List table®right-click→Style→Parts List tabPart Navigator Right-click Parts List node→Style→Parts List tabLocation in dialogbox Callout group→Symbols option→Underline

Set or edit the style of an Identification symbol


Menu

Preferences→Annotation

Insert→Annotation→Identification SymbolToolbar Annotation→Identification SymbolGraphics window Right-click Identification symbol→Style


→Symbols tab →Underline

Settings group®Style button →Symbolstab→Underline

Group callout or Identification symbols


Toolbar

Tables→Callouts Group Drop-down→Group

Horizontally or Group Vertically

MenuTools→Table→Callouts→Group Horizontally or GroupVertically

Graphics windowSelect symbols®right-click®Group Horizontally orGroup Vertically

Limits and fits tolerance for dimensions

What is it?

Limits and Fits tolerance options are available for linear, radial, anddiametrical Drafting and PMI dimension types. These options let you dothe following:


Design

• Create a dimension with a standards-compliant limits and fits tolerancedisplay.

• Display the dimension tolerance in one of the following formats:

– Fit symbol only.

– Fit symbol and limits.

Note

This tolerance type is not supported when the part standard isGB or ESKD

– Fit symbol and tolerances.

– Tolerances only.

Options for deviation and grade are derived from look-up tables, which can becustomized, and are based on the following drafting standards:

• ANSI B4.1 and B4.2 – Supports English and Metric units

• ISO 286 – Supports Metric units only

• JIS B0401 – Supports Metric units only

• DIN 7182 – Supports Metric units only

• ESKD – Supports Metric units only

• GB 4458.5 – Supports Metric units only

The Customer Defaults for each standard are updated with options for settingthe default Limits and Fits tolerance style.


Use the options to create dimensions with standards-compliant limits and fittolerance types.


Design

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Annotation→Annotation Preferences

Drafting Edit→Edit Style ®select one or morelinear, radial, and diametrical dimensions

Menu


Edit→Style→select one or more linear, radial, anddiametrical dimensions

Graphics window

Right-click a linear, radial, or diametricaldimension→Style

Double-click a linear, radial, or diametrical

dimension→Dimension Style on the dialog barLocation in dialogbox

Dimensions tab→Precision and Tolerancegroup®Dimension Display Type list®Limits and Fits

Chamfer dimension enhancements

What is it?

The following are the enhancements to the Chamfer command.

• The Chamfer Symbol Type option lets you control the visibility of the Cin the Symbol style of the chamfer dimension.

• The new Separator option lets you control the capitalization of the “X”in the chamfer dimension.


Design

• You can more easily position a linear style chamfer based on the locationof the cursor.

• You can edit or repair the associativity of a Drafting or PMI chamferdimension.

Where do I find it?

Manage the chamfer symbol display


Toolbar


Drafting Edit→Edit Style


Design

Menu


Edit→StyleGraphics window Select chamfer®right-click®Style


Dimensions tab→Chamfer group®Chamfer SymbolType

Dimensions tab→Chamfer group→Separator

Manage the associativity of a chamfer symbol


Toolbar Drafting Edit→Edit Dimension AssociativityMenu Edit→Annotation→Edit Dimension AssociativityGraphics window Right-click chamfer dimension→Edit Associativity

Leader line enhancements

What is it?

Enhancements to the display of leader and extension lines give you additionalfunctionality when creating annotations with leaders.


• Create as many intermediate and termination points for a leader as youneed.

• Create unique arrows for each leader termination point.

• Create leaders with multiple stubs, on one or both sides of the annotation.Each stub can have a unique stub length.


Design

• Use the Make Perpendicular option on the shortcut menu to make thefirst leg of the leader line perpendicular to the leader stub. Note that thismay cause the stub length to change when you reposition the annotationto maintain perpendicularity.

• Apply gaps and breaks, found in the User Defined Symbols command, toany leader. Including leaders for custom symbols.

• Create true extension lines with gaps off of angular edges and curves.

• Create PMI annotation with leaders that terminate at the true 3D pointlocation.

Note

There are no options provided to project leaders to the plane of theannotation text. Legacy annotations with projected leaders must beupdated to the new version to be displayed with true leaders.


Design

Where do I find it?

Application/Taskenvironment Drafting application and PMI task environmentLocation in dialogbox Leader group of the note and symbol dialog boxes

Parallel dimension enhancement

What is it?

The Use Measurement Direction option is available for defining themeasurement direction of a parallel dimension.

— Parallel dimension without a direction vector

— Parallel dimension with a direction vector


Use the direction vector option to control the measurement direction for yourparallel dimension.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Dimension→Parallel

PMI→PMI Dimensions→Parallel


Design

Menu

Insert→Dimension→Parallel

PMI→Dimension→Parallel

Graphics windowWhile placing or editing a parallel dimension,right-click→Use Measurement Direction

Location in dialogbar Direction group→Use Measurement Direction

Annotation enhancements

What is it?

The following enhancements are available to improve the process of creatingand modifying annotations.

• You can edit the contents of a retained annotation, and move it, withoutre-associating the annotation first.

• Target Point symbols are now associated to their referenced curve, point,section segment, or solid edge. Changes in these objects will now affectthe symbol.

• You can control the size of the boundary around text islands incrosshatched and area filled regions using the text margin setting.

Text margin = 10% Text margin = 30%

• In addition to rectangular areas, you can now specify a square, circular, orspherical area for unit basis callouts in feature control frames for flatnessand profile of surface callouts.

Flatness with rectangular unitbasis area

Flatness with circular unit basisarea


Design

Flatness with spherical unitbasis area Flatness with square unit basis

area


Use these enhancements to create standards-compliant 2D drafting or 3DPMI annotations.

Where do I find it?

Text boundary size for crosshatch and area fill regions


Toolbar Annotation→Annotation PreferencesMenu Preferences→Annotation→Fill/Hatch tabLocation in dialogbox Text Island Margin

Customer Default for text boundary size for crosshatch and area fill regions

Application/Taskenvironment Drafting application and PMI task environmentMenu File→Utilities→Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Drafting→Annotation→Fill/Hatch tab→Crosshatchand Area Fill group®Text Island Margin

Square, circular or spherical unit basis areas in a feature control frame


Toolbar



Menu



Frame group→Tolerance subgroup®Unit Basis Valuelist


Design

ASME Y14.5–2009 tolerancing standard

What is it?

The ASME Y14.5–2009 tolerancing standard is now supported in Draftingand PMI.

The standard adds the following symbols to dialog boxes that contain theText or Text Input group with symbols:

Independency

Indicates that perfectform of a feature of sizeat MMC or LMC is notrequired.

Continuous Feature

Indicates that a group oftwo or more interruptedfeatures act as a singlefeature.

Spot Face Indicates a spotface.

Dialog boxes where these symbols appear include the following:

• Note dialog box

• Feature Control Frame dialog box

• Text Editor dialog box, which is available on a dimension toolbar.


The symbols are used in conjunction with GD&T symbols when needed, asdefined in the ASME Y14.5–2009 tolerancing standard.

Where do I find it?

Application PMIMenu Preferences®PMI®Tolerancing StandardsLocation in dialogbox Standard®ASME Y14.5–2009

Independency and Continuous Feature

Application Drafting, PMI


Design

Toolbar

Drafting:

Annotation®Note

PMI:

PMI®Note

Menu

Drafting:

Insert®Annotation®Note

PMI:

PMI®Note


Text Input group®Symbols subgroup®set Category

to GD&T®Independency or Continuous Feature

Spot Face


Toolbar

Drafting:

Annotation®Note

PMI:

PMI®Note

Menu

Drafting:


PMI:

PMI®Note


Text Input group®Symbols subgroup®set Category to

Drafting®Spot Face


Design

Track Drawing Changes

Track Drawing Changes overview

What is it?

Track Drawing Changes is a set of commands that let you compare thecurrent state of the drawing against a previously saved state, called asnapshot, and lets you analyze the differences between the two states.

The Track Drawing Changes commands let you do the following:

• Capture drafting and CGM data in batch mode or on demand.

• Visualize all changes between the CGM data and the current state ofthe drawing.

• Create external or interactive reports that identify changed, added, ordeleted items on a drawing within an NX session or between NX sessions.

• Interactively interrogate changes from a generated report.

• Delete the CGM snapshot at any time.

Note

Only specific drafting data is tracked and analyzed. For example, theanalysis of drafting silhouette and smooth edge curves and PMI objectsis not supported at this time. See Create Snapshot Data for a completelist of tracked objects.


Use these functions to track drawing changes:

• after you update a drawing,

• after you update a model,

• between drawing modifications documented in the drawing revision table,

• or whenever you want to validate the current state of the drawing againsta saved state.

Where do I find it?

Application DraftingToolbar Track Drawing ChangesMenu Analysis→Track Drawing Changes


Design

Create Snapshot Data

What is it?

Use this command to capture and store information about the drafting datain the current part. Information which can be captured and compared isdisplayed in the table below.

Information type Comparison data(if applicable)

Date and time of the snapshot

Sheet parameters

• Name

• Length

• Height

• Projection angle

• Scale

• Out-of-date status

View parameters

• Name

• Type

• Border

• Anchor point

• View scale

• Out-of-date status

Drafting dimensions

• Retained status

• Origin

• SizeDrafting notes and labels

Feature control frame symbols

Datum target symbols

Datum feature symbols

ID, weld, surface finish and customsymbols

• Retained status

• Text

• Origin

• Leader terminator


Design

Crosshatch and area fill patterns

• Retained status

• Angle

• Scale

• Visibility

Tables and parts lists

• Retained status

• Text

• Origin

• Visibility

Centerlines

• Retained status

• Size

• Origin

• VisibilityCGM image of each sheet

You can create permanent snapshots of the drafting data which can be used toidentify modifications that occurred after current changes are documented inthe drawing revision change table. Permanent snapshots are saved with thepart. Permanent snapshots can be created interactively or from a commandline prompt. Only one snapshot is saved with the part. Snapshot data canbe deleted at any time

You can also create temporary snapshots at any time, and use them totrack evolving changes in the part within the same NX session. Temporarysnapshots are used to find changes after the drawing updates or after a modelupdate. Temporary snapshots are not saved with the part.


Use the snapshot data to generate a comparison report which identifiesdifferences in drafting data when the part changes or is updated.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Track Drawing Changes→Create Snapshot Data


Design

MenuAnalysis→Track Drawing Changes→Create SnapshotData

Execute Compare Report

What is it?

Execute Compare Report generates a report that compares the currentdrafting data with the snapshot data.

You can control the information that you want to display in the report.Options for the comparison report let you do the following:

• Set a comparison tolerance.

• Set the appearance and visibility of the symbol used to indicate changes.

• Select the drafting objects and data types to report on.

You can also control whether the comparison is made against the savedsnapshot data, by selecting the Snapshot option, or against the current stateof the part since the report was last run by selecting the Track Changes

option.

When Track Changes is selected, a temporary snapshot of the data iscollected then replaced every time a comparison report is generated. Turningoff the Track Changes option will delete the temporary snapshot data. Thetemporary snapshot data is not stored with the part.

The results are presented in an interactive report dialog that displayssummary and detailed data which enables you to visually identify andunderstand individual changes, additions or deletions.

Type Current Saved


Design

my_part.prt

Sheet1:Frames_SheetSheet Name

Sheet2:Symbols_sheetDimensions

Dimension(1)SymbolsSymbol(2)OriginText

ChangedFrames_SheetChangedChangedAddedChangedChanged322.4 772.521

SHT1

375.5 787.2.509

You can navigate to a changed or added item by double-clicking the data item,or highlighting the data item, right-clicking, and selecting Navigate to Object.

While reviewing the report, you can select and check off items in the report.The check mark indicates that the item was reviewed by you or another user.Check marks are saved with the report if it is saved. This lets you open thesaved report and continue checking the items on the report as needed.

Initial settings for the comparison report are available in theFile→Utilities→Customer Defaults dialog box, under the Drafting→TrackDrawing Changes→General and Report Filter tabs.

The report results can be saved with the part, or in an external file. Resultscan also be exported to a browser or spreadsheet using the shortcut menu.


Use Execute Compare Report to generate a comparison report and use theresults to interrogate the differences between the current drafting data andthe data saved in a snapshot.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Track Drawing Changes→Execute Compare Report

MenuAnalysis→Track Drawing Changes→Execute CompareReport


Design

Open Compare Report

What is it?

Use the Open Compare Report command to open a saved report. Thiscommand is unavailable if a report does not exist.


Use this command to continue to review and interrogate the additions,deletions, and changes identified in the saved comparison report.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Track Drawing Changes→Open Compare ReportLocation in dialogbox

Analysis→Track Drawing Changes→Open CompareReport

Overlay CGM

What is it?

Use the Overlay CGM command to overlay the saved CGM on top of thecurrent drawing sheet. A CGM is saved when you take a snapshot of thedrafting data.


Design

CGM overlay of snapshot data


Use this command to visually detect differences between the saved CGM dataand the current version of the drawing sheet.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Track Drawing Changes→Overlay CGMMenu Analysis→Track Drawing Changes→Overlay CGM

Settings

What is it?

Use the Settings command to control the information that is gathered anddisplayed in the comparison report.


Use the Settings command to set options for the drawing comparison report.

Where do I find it?



Design

Toolbar Track Drawing Changes→SettingsLocation in dialogbox Analysis→Track Drawing Changes→Settings

Delete Compare Data

What is it?

Use the Delete Compare Data command to remove the permanent snapshotdata from the part file.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Track Drawing Changes→Delete Compare Data

MenuAnalysis→Track Drawing Changes→Delete CompareData

Delete Compare Report

What is it?

Use Delete Compare Report to delete the saved comparison report.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Track Drawing Changes→Delete Compare Report

MenuAnalysis→Track Drawing Changes→Delete CompareReport

Chinese (GB) and Russian (ESKD) default standards settings

What is it?

Two new default standards files are available to configure specific annotationand drafting view preferences in accordance with Chinese and Russiandrafting standards


Design


Use either of these standards to automatically configure over 200 annotationand drawing view preferences for your PMI and Drafting environments.

Where do I find it?

To set the standard for the current NX session

Application Drafting and PMIMenu Tools→Drafting Standard

To set the default standard or create a custom standard

Menu File→Utilities→Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox Drafting→General→Standard tab

Weld symbol redesign and single flange JIS support

What is it?

The following enhancements are added to the Drafting and PMI weld symbols:

• The weld symbol is redesigned to display in a more standards-compliantmanner. The display is based on the text height specified for the symbol.

Previous weld symbol Current weld symbol

All new weld symbols will be created using this standards-compliantarrangement. Existing weld symbols will be updated to reflect thestandards-compliant arrangement if the Preferences→Drafting→Generaltab→Maintain Object Version On Update option is not selected.

Caution

If you do not select the Maintain Object On Update option, allobjects in the drawing will be updated, not just the weld symbols


Design

• A new Weld Space Factor option provides additional control over thespacing between the different components of the weld symbol.

Weld Space Factor = 1 Weld Space Factor = 2

• Support for the creation of single flange JIS weld symbols is also provided.

JIS single flange weld symbol

Where do I find it?

Create or edit the Weld Space Factor of a weld symbol

Application DraftingToolbar Annotation→Weld SymbolMenu Insert→Symbol→Weld SymbolLocation in dialogbox Settings group

Set the preference and default of theWeld Space Factor for all weld symbols

Application DraftingToolbar Drafting Preferences→Annotation Preferences

Menu


File→Utilities→Customer Defaults


Design


Drafting Preferences dialog box®Symbols tab→Weld

Customer Defaults dialog box®Drafting®General®Standard tab®CustomizeStandard®Other Symbols®Weld tab

Single Sided arrowhead terminators

What is it?

You can now select single sided arrowhead terminators on annotation withleaders. There are four new arrowhead types:

• — Top Open Arrow

• — Bottom Open Arrow

• — Top Closed Arrow

• — Bottom Closed Arrow


Use the single sided arrowhead terminators to maintain compliancy withESKD (Russian) standards or to use other annotations (for example, WeldSymbols) that use half arrowheads.

Where do I find it?

Application Drafting and PMI

PrerequisiteThe single sided arrowhead options are only availablein annotation command dialog boxes with groups.

Location in dialogbox Leader group®Style sub-group.

ESKD (Russian) standard thread display

What is it?

You can select an option to display threads on a drawing in compliance withthe ESKD (Russian) standard.


Use the ESKD thread option to maintain compliancy with the ESKD(Russian) standards.


Design

Where do I find it?



View Style/View Preferences→Threads

Customer Defaults→Drafting→General→CustomizeDrafting Standard→View→Threads tab→ThreadStandard

Restrict crosshatch angle

What is it?

The Assembly Crosshatching and Restrict Crosshatch to +/- 45 degreesoptions enable you to restrict assembly crosshatching angles to plus or minus45 degrees in section views.


Use the restricted crosshatch angle to maintain compliancy with the ESKD(Russian) standards.

Where do I find it?



Preferences/Style®View®Section tab

Customer Defaults®Drafting®View®Hatching tab

ESKD (Russian) weld symbols

What is it?

New standard for weld symbols that includes additional settings and symboltypes required by the ESKD (Russian) standards. The additional settingsavailable for ESKD weld symbols are:

• Weld Line Gap

• Arrowhead Type

Note

Color, font, and width settings are available for all weld standards.

The additional symbols available for the ESKD weld symbols are:

• Flush Weld

• Machining for Graded Junction


Design

• Intermittent Weld

• Weld Along Closed Contour

• Weld Along Open Contour

New symbols to meet the ESKD (Russian) standards have also been added for:

• Staggered Weld

• Field Weld

Where do I find it?

To set the default standard for weld symbols

Application Drafting or PMIMenu File→Utilities→Customer Defaults→Location in dialogbox

Drafting→General→Standard→CustomizeStandard→Other Symbols →Weld tab→Standards

GB (China) weld symbols

What is it?

GB is a new standard for weld symbols that includes additional settings andsymbol types required by the GB (China) Standard. The additional symbolavailable for GB weld symbols is:

• Trilateral Weld

Where do I find it?

To set the default standard for weld symbols

Application Drafting or PMIMenu File→Utilities→Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Drafting→General→Standard→CustomizeStandard→Other Symbols→ Weld tab→Standards

Detail View color, font, and width

What is it?

You can control the color, font and width settings for:

• Detail view boundary lines.

• Detail view labels on a parent boundary line.


Design

The options to do this are available from Customer Defaults, Preferences,and Style.

Detail View with dotted, orange colored boundary and black text


You can use these settings to control how detail views and labels appear onparent boundary lines.

Where do I find it?

Drafting Standard Customer Default

Application DraftingPrerequisite Drawing views with standard orientations

Menu Preferences or Style®View®Detail tab.


File®Utilities®CustomerDefaults®Drafting®General®Standard tab®DraftingStandards®View®Detail View tab

Shortcut menuGraphics window ®right-click®Style (on a viewboundary)

Narrow Arc Length and Angular Dimensions

What is it?

The Narrow formatting option shows the value of a small dimension outsidethe dimension lines. A label shows to which dimension the value applies.Included in the Narrow angle and Narrow arc length dimension options is theability to change the leader attachment location for all Narrow dimensions(Linear, Arc Length, and Angular).


Design

Narrow angle dimension Narrow arc length dimension


Use the new dimensions to make small arc length and angular dimensionseasier to read.

Where do I find it?

Application DraftingPrerequisite Drawing views with standard orientationsMenu Preferences®Annotation®Dimensions tab®Narrow

Section Line Style Enhancements

What is it?

New Section Line Style controls support the ESKD (Russian) and ISO128Standards. The ESKD Standard includes control for the length of the endline. The ISO128 Standard for section lines has been enhanced to include anInvisible font and control over whether the label is displayed on the arrow orat the end of the section line.


Design

ESKD Section Line ISO128 Section Line

The Invisible font is only available for section line types that support thickends and breaks. If you set the line font to invisible, the ends and breaksdisplay, but not the lines between them.


Use the new Section Line Style controls when support for ESKD or ISO128is required.

Where do I find it?

Preferences Section Line

Application DraftingPrerequisite Drawing views with standard orientationsMenu Preferences®Section LineShortcut menu Graphics window®right-click®Style (on a section line)

Annotation Style Section Line

Application DraftingPrerequisite Drawing views with standard orientationsMenu Edit®Annotation Style and select Section Line.Shortcut menu Graphics window®right-click®Style (on a section line)


Design

PMI

PMI user interface enhancements

What is it?

In order to enhance the consistency, usability, and discoverability of the PMIapplication, the menus and toolbars are restructured and reorganized intological sub-groups of commands.

The PMI menu changes include the following:

• The new Specialized menu replaces the Notes menu. Also, a fewcommands that were on other menus are now on the Specialized menu(see the rest of the items in this list).

• The Balloon command is now on the main PMI menu instead of theNotes menu.

• The Surface Finish and Weld Symbol commands are now on the mainPMI menu instead of the Symbols menu.

• The Locator Designator command is now on the Specialized menu.

• The Region command is on a new Supplemental Geometry menu, alongwith the new Centerlines and Center Mark commands.

• The Geometric Tolerancing menu no longer appears on the PMI menu,but you can add any geometric tolerancing commands you need by usingTools®Customize.

• The User Defined command is now on the Specialized menu.

• The new Section menu contains the Section View command and a newLightweight Section View command.

The PMI toolbar has similar changes that match the reorganized PMI menu.

PMI Lightweight Section Views

What is it?

Use the Lightweight Section View command to create a new type of PMIsection view that is faster and does not increase the size of the part file. Youcan show the results in either of the following ways:

• As a traditional section view, where the material behind the cutting planeis displayed


Design

• As a plane-only result, where only the curves at the plane of the cut aredisplayed

You can optionally create associative section curves where the cutting planeintersects the geometry.

Model and cutting plane beforelightweight section view is created

Model with lightweight section view,including section curves

PMI lightweight section views cannot be inherited on a drawing or plotted.


PMI lightweight section views, which support a single plane cut, arecomplementary to the PMI Section View command. Advantages of PMIlightweight section views include the following:

• They do not significantly increase your part file size.

• They update very quickly.

You can more easily see the geometry at the cutting plane in a PMIlightweight section view, especially when the display is in wireframe mode.

Associative section curves let you add PMI objects to a lightweight sectionview.

Where do I find it?

Application PMI


Design

Toolbar PMI®Lightweight Section ViewMenu PMI®Sections®Lightweight Section View

PMI Search

What is it?

Use the PMI Search command to find PMI objects based on criteria you specify.

In the PMI Search dialog box, specify the type of PMI you want to search for.Use the Details button to do any of the following:

• Define search criteria for the selected PMI type.

• Edit criteria selected in the list box.

• Add new criteria. You can do this only when no criteria is selected inthe list box.

You can set the scope of the search for the work part only, or for the work partand its components.

The results appear in the PMI Search dialog box. If you want to examine theresults at a later time, you can save the results with your part file as a SearchModel View. You can provide a name for the view in the Model View Namebox, which is in the Settings group of the dialog box.

Note

• You can save a search view only when your work part is thedisplayed part.

• Existing or saved Search Model Views are listed in the PartNavigator with the other model views. They are not listed in thePMI Search dialog box.


Design

Model before search for radius dimensions (all PMI shown)

Results saved as a Search Model View (only radius dimensionsshown)


The PMI Search command is useful when you want to find all the PMIobjects in your model that meet some specified criteria, such as all the PMIdimensions that require a particularly tight tolerance.


Design

Where do I find it?

Application PMI

Toolbar PMI®SearchMenu Information®PMI®Search

PMI Centerlines

What is it?

You can now create PMI centerlines and center marks for your 3D model.

PMI centerline (left hole) and center mark (right hole)


PMI centerlines and center marks help you capture design information. Theynot only help you document your design, but they also act as supplementalgeometry to which you can attach other PMI objects such as datum symbolsand dimensions.

Where do I find it?

Centerline

Application PMI

Toolbar

PMI®Supplemental Geometry Drop-down ®3D

CenterlineMenu PMI®Supplemental Geometry®3D Centerline


Design

Center Mark

Application PMI

Toolbar

PMI®Supplemental Geometry Drop-down

®Center MarkMenu PMI®Supplemental Geometry®Center Mark

Leader line enhancements

What is it?

Enhancements to the display of leader and extension lines give you additionalfunctionality when creating annotations with leaders.


• Create as many intermediate and termination points for a leader as youneed.

• Create unique arrows for each leader termination point.

• Create leaders with multiple stubs, on one or both sides of the annotation.Each stub can have a unique stub length.

• Use the Make Perpendicular option on the shortcut menu to make thefirst leg of the leader line perpendicular to the leader stub. Note that thismay cause the stub length to change when you reposition the annotationto maintain perpendicularity.

• Apply gaps and breaks, found in the User Defined Symbols command, toany leader. Including leaders for custom symbols.


Design

• Create true extension lines with gaps off of angular edges and curves.

• Create PMI annotation with leaders that terminate at the true 3D pointlocation.

Note

There are no options provided to project leaders to the plane of theannotation text. Legacy annotations with projected leaders must beupdated to the new version to be displayed with true leaders.

Where do I find it?

Application/Taskenvironment Drafting application and PMI task environmentLocation in dialogbox Leader group of the note and symbol dialog boxes

PMI Custom Symbol enhancements

What is it?

PMI custom symbols have the following enhancements:

• The Smash Custom Symbol function is now available in the PMIapplication.

• Custom symbols are now stored in the Reuse Library. This includesPMI symbols provided with the software in the PMI Symbols and NXPMI Symbols folders.

See the custom symbols topic in the Drafting section for additionalenhancements that apply to custom symbols in both Drafting and PMI.


Design

Smashing a custom symbol breaks it into its constituent pieces. When yousmash a PMI custom symbol:

• You can reuse, modify, or move the individual objects.

• Only the selected display instance is smashed if you selected the PMIcustom symbol in the graphics window or from a model view. If theselected display instance is the only instance, the PMI is deleted.

• All instances of the symbol are smashed, and the PMI is deleted if youselected the PMI custom symbol in the PMI node of the Part Navigator.

Custom symbol before smashing Custom symbol after smashing

In Modeling:

• If the PMI custom symbols contain modeling objects, the smashed symbolsresult in regular modeling objects. Associative curves and model edgesare converted to 3D curves that have no associativity to the model. Sketchobjects that result from the smash are added to a new sketch in the sameplane where the symbol was placed.

• If the PMI custom symbols contain drafting objects, the smashed symbolsresult in curves and sketches as described in the item above. Dimensionsand annotations become Assorted Parts objects, which have limitedfunctionality in the Modeling application; you can only perform hide,delete, edit display, and properties operations on them.

In Drafting:

• If the PMI custom symbols contain modeling objects, the smashed symbolsresult in objects such as curves. If the symbol is in a view when it issmashed, its sketch objects are added to the sketch for that view; if thesymbol is on a sheet, its sketch objects are added to a new sketch onthat sheet.


Use custom symbols to create and add unique and company-specificannotation to your 2D and 3D part data. The Reuse Library provides a singleconsistent mechanism for working with custom symbols in both the Draftingand PMI environments.


Design

Where do I find it?

Application PMIMenu Edit®Annotation®Smash Custom Symbol

PMI Surface Finish enhancements

What is it?

The PMI Surface Finish command has the following enhancements:• A surface finish symbol now also supports standards ISO 1302:2002,GB 131–93, ESKD, and DIN EN ISO 1302:2002, as well as thepreviously-supported standards.

• A surface finish symbol resizes proportionally when you edit the size ofits text.

• A new Machining Tolerance option lets you specify a machining tolerance.

• You can rotate a surface finish symbol using a handle in the graphicswindow.

Where do I find it?

Machining Tolerance

Application PMI

Toolbar PMI®Surface FinishMenu PMI®Surface FinishLocation in dialogbox Attributes group®Machining Tolerance

Compound weld symbols

What is it?

The Drafting and PMI Weld command has a Compound Weld option that,when set, creates compound weld symbols above and below the weld line byadding a Fillet weld symbol on top of a supported weld symbol.

Supported weld symbols are:

• Square

• Bevel Groove

• J-Groove


Design

• Flared Bevel Groove

Square andfilletcompound weld

symbol

Bevel groove andfilletcompound weld

symbol

J-groove andfilletcompound weld

symbol

Flared bevel andfilletcompound weld

symbol

When the Compound Weld option is set, you can also specify the size andSize Letter Code for the additional Fillet weld.

Note

You can only specify the Size Letter Code for ISO, DIN, GB and ESKDcompound welds.


Use the option to create welds that contain more than one weld symbol on oneor both sides of the weld line.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar



Menu

Insert→Annotation→Weld Symbol

PMI→Symbol→Weld Symbol


Other Side group→Compound Weld

Arrow Side group→Compound Weld


Design

Parallel dimension enhancement

What is it?

The Use Measurement Direction option is available for defining themeasurement direction of a parallel dimension.

— Parallel dimension without a direction vector

— Parallel dimension with a direction vector


Use the direction vector option to control the measurement direction for yourparallel dimension.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Dimension→Parallel

PMI→PMI Dimensions→Parallel

Menu

Insert→Dimension→Parallel

PMI→Dimension→Parallel

Graphics windowWhile placing or editing a parallel dimension,right-click→Use Measurement Direction

Location in dialogbar Direction group→Use Measurement Direction


Design

Limits and fits tolerance for dimensions

What is it?

Limits and Fits tolerance options are available for linear, radial, anddiametrical Drafting and PMI dimension types. These options let you dothe following:

• Create a dimension with a standards-compliant limits and fits tolerancedisplay.

• Display the dimension tolerance in one of the following formats:

– Fit symbol only.

– Fit symbol and limits.

Note

This tolerance type is not supported when the part standard isGB or ESKD

– Fit symbol and tolerances.

– Tolerances only.

Options for deviation and grade are derived from look-up tables, which can becustomized, and are based on the following drafting standards:

• ANSI B4.1 and B4.2 – Supports English and Metric units

• ISO 286 – Supports Metric units only

• JIS B0401 – Supports Metric units only

• DIN 7182 – Supports Metric units only

• ESKD – Supports Metric units only

• GB 4458.5 – Supports Metric units only

The Customer Defaults for each standard are updated with options for settingthe default Limits and Fits tolerance style.


Design


Use the options to create dimensions with standards-compliant limits and fittolerance types.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar


Drafting Edit→Edit Style ®select one or morelinear, radial, and diametrical dimensions

Menu


Edit→Style→select one or more linear, radial, anddiametrical dimensions

Graphics window

Right-click a linear, radial, or diametricaldimension→Style

Double-click a linear, radial, or diametrical

dimension→Dimension Style on the dialog barLocation in dialogbox

Dimensions tab→Precision and Tolerancegroup®Dimension Display Type list®Limits and Fits

Annotation enhancements

What is it?

The following enhancements are available to improve the process of creatingand modifying annotations.

• You can edit the contents of a retained annotation, and move it, withoutre-associating the annotation first.

• Target Point symbols are now associated to their referenced curve, point,section segment, or solid edge. Changes in these objects will now affectthe symbol.

• You can control the size of the boundary around text islands incrosshatched and area filled regions using the text margin setting.


Design

Text margin = 10% Text margin = 30%

• In addition to rectangular areas, you can now specify a square, circular, orspherical area for unit basis callouts in feature control frames for flatnessand profile of surface callouts.

Flatness with rectangular unitbasis area

Flatness with circular unit basisarea

Flatness with spherical unitbasis area Flatness with square unit basis

area


Use these enhancements to create standards-compliant 2D drafting or 3DPMI annotations.

Where do I find it?

Text boundary size for crosshatch and area fill regions


Toolbar Annotation→Annotation PreferencesMenu Preferences→Annotation→Fill/Hatch tabLocation in dialogbox Text Island Margin

Customer Default for text boundary size for crosshatch and area fill regions


Design

Application/Taskenvironment Drafting application and PMI task environmentMenu File→Utilities→Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Drafting→Annotation→Fill/Hatch tab→Crosshatchand Area Fill group®Text Island Margin

Square, circular or spherical unit basis areas in a feature control frame


Toolbar



Menu



Frame group→Tolerance subgroup®Unit Basis Valuelist

PMI reading direction after a view rotation

What is it?

Enhancements to the Update Reading Direction after View Rotate functioninclude the following:

• Improved performance, especially when rotating models with largenumbers of PMI symbols

• Support for component PMI displayed in an assembly context

• Support for updating the reading direction of retained PMI symbols, andof symbols with retained annotation planes

• Support for multiple displays of the same PMI symbol in differentorientations, such as multi-view layouts

• Immediate updates of reading direction when you create symbols inrotated views

• A customer default to specify the initial setting of the Update ReadingDirection after View Rotate preference


Design


The Update Reading Direction after View Rotate preference causes thedisplay of PMI symbols to dynamically flip into a readable direction when yourotate the model view. This lets you easily read and understand symbols,regardless of the current orientation of the view.

Where do I find it?

Update Reading Direction after View Rotate

Application PMIMenu Preferences®PMILocation in dialogbox

Display tab®Display group®Update ReadingDirection after View Rotate

Update Reading Direction after View Rotate customer default


PMI®PMI General®Display tab®Update ReadingDirection after View Rotate

Inherited PMI in extracted edge views

What is it?

Extracted edge views in Drafting now handle inherited PMI correctly.


Design


Before NX 7.5, inherited PMI in an extracted edge drawing view did notupdate correctly when the extracted edge belonged to an unloaded component.

Annotation Plane enhancements

What is it?

The Annotation Plane option has the following enhancements:

• When you set the option to User Defined, a Specify CSYS option appears.This lets you define the annotation plane by specifying the CSYS.

• When you set the option to any of the principle planes of the WCS, theplanes of the OrientXpress tool are available in the graphics window.

OrientXpress planes


You can quickly switch from one WCS principle plane to another by selectingOrientXpress planes in your graphics window.

Where do I find it?

The Annotation Plane option appears on all PMI dialog boxes and dimensiondialog bars.

PMI Feature Dimensions

What is it?

Use the Display as PMI option in the Feature Dimension dialog box to converta feature dimension to a PMI feature dimension.

A PMI feature dimension has the following behavior:

• It is associative to the feature.

• It supports bidirectional editing: changes you make to the PMI featuredimension are applied to the model, and vice versa.

• It has all the capabilities of other PMI dimensions. For example, a PMIfeature dimension is visible in the Part Navigator, can be inherited onto


Design

drawings, and can flow to downstream applications. See the PMI Help formore information about the capabilities of PMI objects.

• You can reverse the conversion by clearing the Display as PMI check box.

See the Feature Dimensions topic in the Modeling section of the What’s NewGuide for more information about feature dimensions.


A PMI feature dimension has the same advantages as other featuredimensions; that is, you can now make changes to your model by editing itsfeature or PMI feature dimensions.

Where do I find it?

Application Both the Modeling and PMI applications must be active.

Toolbar Edit Feature®Feature DimensionMenu Edit®Feature®Feature DimensionLocation in dialogbox PMI group®Display as PMI

PMI bidirectional edit enhancements for dimensions

What is it?

Use the Allow PMI Bidirectional Edits customer default to specify whether,when you edit the value of an inherited PMI dimension in a drawing, thechange will also be applied to the corresponding PMI object in your model.


This enhancement improves your ability to update your model while youare working in the context of a drawing. Before NX 7.5, you could edit thedimension properties and style, but not the value.

Where do I find it?

Allow PMI Bidirectional Edits customer default



Drafting®General®Drawing tab®Allow PMIBidirectional Edits


Design

Edit


Menu Edit®Annotation®Annotation Object

Shortcut menuRight-click an inherited PMI dimension in adrawing®Edit

Import real PMI from JT files

What is it?

When you open a JT file in NX, PMI objects can now be created from the datain the JT file. They have all the capabilities as PMI objects created in NX,assuming both of the following conditions are true:

• All the necessary data is provided in the JT file.

• The check box for your Create real PMI symbols from JT files customerdefault is selected.

Note

If the JT file does not provide enough data to create a real PMI object,the software creates a display-only object to ensure that the PMI isdisplayed in some form.

PMI objects may have different display characteristics than the originalobjects if the appearance data in the JT file is not complete. When thishappens, the software uses its current defaults to complete the appearancedata for the PMI objects.


Before NX 7.5, PMI objects in JT files appeared in NX as display-only symbolsthat could not be manipulated like PMI objects created in NX.

Where do I find it?


Product & Manufacturing Information®PMI®Generaltab®Create real PMI symbols from JT files


Design

ASME Y14.5–2009 tolerancing standard

What is it?

The ASME Y14.5–2009 tolerancing standard is now supported in Draftingand PMI.

The standard adds the following symbols to dialog boxes that contain theText or Text Input group with symbols:

Independency

Indicates that perfectform of a feature of sizeat MMC or LMC is notrequired.

Continuous Feature

Indicates that a group oftwo or more interruptedfeatures act as a singlefeature.

Spot Face Indicates a spotface.

Dialog boxes where these symbols appear include the following:

• Note dialog box

• Feature Control Frame dialog box

• Text Editor dialog box, which is available on a dimension toolbar.


The symbols are used in conjunction with GD&T symbols when needed, asdefined in the ASME Y14.5–2009 tolerancing standard.

Where do I find it?

Application PMIMenu Preferences®PMI®Tolerancing StandardsLocation in dialogbox Standard®ASME Y14.5–2009

Independency and Continuous Feature



Design

Toolbar

Drafting:

Annotation®Note

PMI:

PMI®Note

Menu

Drafting:


PMI:

PMI®Note


Text Input group®Symbols subgroup®set Category

to GD&T®Independency or Continuous Feature

Spot Face


Toolbar

Drafting:

Annotation®Note

PMI:

PMI®Note

Menu

Drafting:


PMI:

PMI®Note


Text Input group®Symbols subgroup®set Category to

Drafting®Spot Face


Design

PMI objects in JT files

What is it?

When you open a JT file in NX, the following objects now appear if they weresaved in the JT file:

• Assembly-level PMI and model views from Teamcenter JT files. Thisincludes the display of component PMI in assembly model views.

• PMI locator symbols that were created in I-deas or NX.


JT files that are opened in NX now more closely match their source files.

Where do I find it?

Toolbar Standard®Open ®select a JT fileMenu File®Open®select a JT file

Sheet Metal

NX Sheet Metal

NX Advanced Sheet Metal commands

What is it?

The NX Advanced Sheet Metal commands enable you to work withstraight-brake and non-straight-brake features to provide entire Sheet Metaldesign.

The following commands are available.

• Advanced FlangeUse this command to create non-linear flanges, or sheet metal supportstructures in complex assemblies. You can use existing geometry asreference to define flange dimensions.

• Bridge BendUse this command to create Z-shaped, U-shaped, or fold-type transitionbetween two unconnected Sheet Metal bodies.

• Unform


Design

Use this command to unform an Advanced Flange feature.

• ReformUse this command to reform an Unform feature to its previous bend state.Features added after the Unform feature are also repositioned.

• MetaformUse this command to unform complex geometry to an alternate shape.This command also works with non-Sheet Metal features and takesmaterial characteristics into account. The following alternate shapesare supported:

– Formed to Flat

– Flat to Formed

– Formed to Formed


With the addition of these commands, you will have a complete set of tools tomodel the sheet metal part successfully.

These commands also offer cutting-edge technology to control the flatteningprocess.

Where do I find it?

Application NX Sheet Metal

Prerequisite

An Advanced Sheet Metal license is required for the NXAdvanced Sheet Metal commands to be available in theNX Sheet Metal application.

ToolbarNX Sheet Metal®NX Advanced Sheet Metal Drop-downlist

Menu Insert®NX Advanced Sheet Metal

Gusset

What is it?

Use the Gusset command to create stiffening features where extra strengthis needed in a bend region.

You can:

• Create punched or embossed shapes in bend regions of sheet metal parts.


Design

• Create the gusset using the Automatic Profile or User Defined Profileoptions.

• Make the gusset square or round.

• Specify default dimensions for the Gusset feature using customer defaults.

Gusset features are represented as centerline curves in the Flat Pattern view.

Round gusset Flat Pattern view

When you unbend a bend that contains a Gusset feature, the geometry ofthe Gusset feature is removed. Any subsequent rebend operations will notrecreate the gusset. However, after the rebend operation, the Gusset featurewill be represented as a centerline curve in the Flat Pattern view.


You can create strengthening features in the bend region.

Unlike with other punching commands such as Solid Punch, when you usethis command, you can create Unbend, Rebend, Flat Solid, and Flat Patternfeatures from the bend region on which you apply the Gusset.

Where do I find it?

Gusset dialog box


Toolbar NX Sheet Metal®GussetMenu Insert®Punch®Gusset

Customer Defaults for Gusset


Design

Menu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox NX Sheet Metal®Gusset®General and Rounding tabs

Cleanup Utility

What is it?

Use the Cleanup Utility command to identify areas of a model that do notconform to the requirements of the Convert to Sheet Metal command.

You can cleanup imported parts and improve successful conversion of non-NXparts to NX Sheet Metal models.

The Cleanup Utility identifies areas of concern within the model andautomatically addresses issues, prompting for further inputs if needed.

Before using this command, you may need to rip edges in order to fix anysharp corners in the part.

You can identify and correct the following:

• Non-uniform thickness regions

• Non-concentric bend regions

• Sliver and spike faces in the part

• Non-G1 continuity between a planar face and the bend face

• Bends having zero bend radius, that is, the outside bend radius is equal tothe thickness of the part and the inside bend radius is zero

Customer default options are available to specify the default tolerance values.


The Cleanup Utility improves the ability to work with non-NX parts byassisting in successfully converting them to NX Sheet Metal models.

Where do I find it?

Cleanup Utility dialog box


Toolbar

NX Sheet Metal®Convert Drop-down list®Cleanup

UtilityMenu Tools®Cleanup Utility


Design

Cleanup Utility customer defaults

Menu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox NX Sheet Metal®Cleanup Utility®All tab

Export Trumpf GEO File

What is it?

Use the Export Trumpf GEO File command to export flat pattern data to a .geofile. Because the GEO file format is accepted by Trumpf bending machinesand related software, you can transmit data from NX to Trumpf bendingmachines without the need for general translators like IGES, STEP, and so on.

You can specify the following criteria:

• The Flat Pattern feature from which to obtain the data.

• The flat pattern geometry types you want to include in the .geo file, forexample, exterior curves, bend center lines, and so on.

• The file name of the .geo file.

If you use Teamcenter Integration, the file is stored in Teamcenter.


Automatically entering data into Trumpf machines helps prevent errors andsaves time.

Where do I find it?

Application NX Sheet MetalPrerequisite A Flat Pattern feature must be present in the work part.

Toolbar

NX Sheet Metal®Flat Pattern Drop-down list®Export

Trumpf GEO FileMenu Insert®Flat Pattern®Export Trumpf GEO File

Closed Corner enhancements

What is it?

You can now create simple miter corners using the new Miter Corner optionavailable in the Closed Corner dialog box.


Design

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

In the Closed Corner dialog box, Type must be set toClose and Relief. In the Corner Properties group,Treatment must be set to Closed, Circular Cutout, UCutout, V Cutout, or Rectangular Cutout.

Toolbar NX Sheet Metal®Closed Corner

Menu Insert®Corner®Closed CornerLocation in dialogbox Corner Properties group®Miter Corner

Flange enhancements

What is it?

When you use the Flange command, you can now create a flange on the edgeof a bend.

When you specify the base edge, you can select one of the linear edges ofthe bend face as the base edge, and create consecutive bend regions withzero web length.

You can use the Unbend and Rebend commands to unbend or rebend flangescreated on bend edges.


Design

Bend face

Edge adjacent to the bend face

Flange created on the edge of the bend

Internal flange on a tubular part


This enhancement lets you create sheet metal parts with internal flangesand consecutive bend regions.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar NX Sheet Metal®FlangeMenu Insert®Bend®Flange


Design

NX Sheet Metal features discontinued in Modeling

What is it?

The following Sheet Metal features are no longer available in the Modelingapplication:

• The commands on the Insert®Sheet Metal Features menu. Use thecommands in the NX Sheet Metal application instead.

• The Sheet Metal Features toolbar.

• The Sheet Metal Preferences dialog box on the Preferences®SheetMetal menu.

Existing parts will update using the stored preferences, but you will notbe able to modify the preferences.

You can modify the preferences in the NX Sheet Metal Preferences dialogbox, in the NX Sheet Metal application.

Resize Bend Radius enhancement

What is it?

A Fixed Unfolded Length type option is available. Use this option to resizeselected bends while keeping a specified face or edge stationary.

Select Face/Edge is available to specify the stationary edge or face.

When you create the Fixed Unfolded Length type of Resize Bend Radiusfeature and change the bend radius, the dimensions of the unfolded modelremain fixed, but the overall dimensions of the folded model change.

The figure on the right shows the Sheet Metal part after it was resized usingthe Fixed Unfolded Length type. The unfolded length of the Sheet Metal partremains the same, but the overall folded dimensions of the part are changed.


Design

Initial bend radius = 3 Modified bend radius = 5


You can depict a bend in various intermediate stages, when you use theFixed Unfolded Length type and resize selected bends in conjunction withthe Resize Bend Angle command.

You can also:

• Study over-bending and springback effects of selected bends.

• Perform forming studies on an already-designed Sheet Metal part.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar NX Sheet Metal®Resize Bend RadiusMenu Insert®Resize®Resize Bend Radius


Type group®Fixed Unfolded Length

Stationary Face/ Edge group®Select Face/Edge

Rebend enhancement

What is it?

When you use the Rebend command, you can specify a face or an edge thatremains stationary during the rebend operation.


Design

You can control the positioning of the resultant body after the rebendoperation.

Select Face or Edge is available to specify the stationary face or edge.

Selected bend in theflattened Sheet Metal partfor the rebend operation

Rebend generated withoutspecifying a stationaryface. The resulting bodyis positioned at its defaultlocation.

Rebend generated usinga stationary face forreference. The positioningof the resulting body ischanged.

Where do I find it?

Application NX Sheet Metal, Flexible Printed Circuit Design

Toolbar

NX Sheet Metal®Rebend

Flexible Printed Circuit Design®RebendMenu Insert®Form®Rebend


Stationary Face or Edge group®Select Face or Edge

Tool ID attributes display in the Flat Pattern view

What is it?

You can display tool IDs as callouts in the Flat Pattern view or drawingmember view if the callout text is inserted as a specific attribute(SHEET_METAL_TOOL_ID) on a datum CSYS on a Sheet Metal part.


Design

The datum CSYS can be placed anywhere on the Sheet Metal part or it can beassociated with user defined features (UDF) or other Sheet Metal features:for example, Dimple, Louver, or Bead.

You can also create a tool using UDFs with an associated datum CSYS andinsert the attribute, SHEET_METAL_TOOL_ID, with the callout text as theattribute value on the datum CSYS. You can then place the tool on the SheetMetal part using a CSYS or other positioning dimensions. The location of theCSYS on the UDF is also the location of the tool ID callout.

In the following example, two UDFs and a Dimple are placed on the SheetMetal part. The Rectangular Tool and Dimple are placed using the CSYS forplacement, while the Circular Tool is placed using positioning dimensions.

Each tool has the respective callout text RECTANGULAR_TOOL_30X20,CIRCULAR_TOOL_20, and DIMPLE 40X20, inserted as the attribute valuefor the string attribute SHEET_METAL_TOOL_ID. The tool IDs for each toolare displayed in the flat pattern view with a marker, a leader, and the tool IDcallout.

Formed Sheet Metal part withUDFs and a Dimple

Tool IDs displayed in the FlatPattern view

You can modify the tool ID name and control the display of the tool ID usingthe options in the NX Sheet Metal Preferences dialog box. You can alsospecify customer defaults in Drafting and Sheet Metal for the color, type,width, and layer of the tool ID.


Design

In the Drafting application, you can right-click the tool ID callout, chooseEdit, and use the Note dialog box to edit the callout. You can edit the tool IDAttribute, tool parameters, and location after you place the tool.


Displaying tool ID attributes as callouts in the flat pattern view help youidentify the tools used to create sheet metal features.

You can use the API in your own NX Open programs to extract informationlike the tool ID, location, orientation, and tool parameters if they are insertedas attributes. You can extract tags and the bend radius, angle, and neutralfactor values associated with flat pattern or flat solid objects. This is helpfulin manufacturing processes.

Where do I find it?

Tool ID callouts must be inserted as attribute values of a specific string typeof feature attribute, SHEET_METAL_TOOL_ID, on a datum CSYS anywhereon a Sheet Metal part, or can be associated with a UDF or other Sheet Metalfeatures.

Flat Pattern Display preferences for tool ID attributes

What is it?

The following NX Sheet Metal preferences are available for flat patterndisplay:

Tool MarkerControls the display of the color, font, width, and layer of tool markerobjects.

If you clear the Tool Marker check box, the Marker, Leader, and Tool IDAttribute values in the flat pattern display are not available.

Tool IdDisplays Tool ID Attribute values as callouts in the flat pattern display.

Note

You can set the default values for the tool ID attributes using thecustomer default options. For more information, see Customer defaultsfor tool ID attributes.

Where do I find it?

Application NX Sheet MetalMenu Preferences®NX Sheet Metal


Design


NX Sheet Metal Preferences dialog box®Flat PatternDisplay tab®Curves group®Tool Marker check box

NX Sheet Metal Preferences dialog box®Flat PatternDisplay tab®New callouts from defaults group®ToolId check box

Customer defaults for tool ID attributes

What is it?

You can set the default values for tool ID attributes using the followingcustomer default options:

Tool Marker• Enabled

Select this check box to specify if Tool Marker Objects should becreated and displayed on flat patterns.

• Color, Font, Width, Layer

Specifies the color, font, width, and layer for Tool Marker Objects onflat patterns.

Custom Callout 7• Available

Select this check box to specify if the callout is available on thePreferences and Style dialog boxes for flat patterns.

• Enabled

Select this check box to specify if the callout is created on flat patterns.

• Name, Object Types, Content

Specifies the name, object types, and content for the Tool MarkerObjects.

Where do I find it?



Design


Customer Defaults dialog box®SheetMetal®Extras®Curves tab®Tool Marker group

Customer Defaults dialog box®SheetMetal®Extras®Annotations tab®CustomCallout 7 group

Customer Defaults dialog box®Drafting®Extras®FlatPattern Curves tab®Tool Marker group

Customer Defaults dialog box®Drafting®Extras®FlatPattern Annotations tab®Custom Callout 7 group

Aerospace Sheet Metal

Additional Curves

What is it?

This option will provide capabailitiy to include additional curves placed onan Aerospace flange, bend or other feature and add then onto a flat solid orflat pattern.

Additional curves


Design

Flat solid

Flat pattern


Place additional curves on aerospace sheet metal part for engraving, torepresent punched features in bend area, and so on. You can then add themonto flat solids and flat patterns for manufacturing.


Design

Where do I find it?

Application Aerospace Sheet MetalToolbar

Aerospace Sheet Metal→Flat Solid

Aerospace Sheet Metal→Flat PatternMenu Insert→Flat Pattern→Flat Solid / Flat Pattern, choose

Additional Curves options.Location in dialogbox

Additional Curves group®Select Curve or Point

Analyze Formability – One-step

What is it?

This command allows you to flatten complex parts and provides formabilityanalysis via various outputs.

Model Mesh


Design

Flattened Thickness plot

Stress plot Strain plot


Use this to flatten complex sheet metal or non-sheet metal parts. It alsoprovides stress, strain, and thickness plots.

Where do I find it?

Application Aerospace Sheet MetalToolbar Aerospace Sheet Metal®Analyze Formability –

One-stepMenu Insert®Flat Pattern®Analyze Formability – One-step

Analysis®Analyze Formability – One-step


Design

Forming/ Flattening

Forming and Flattening application discontinued in NX 7.5

What is it?

The Sheet Metal®Forming/Flattening application is no longer available inNX 7.5. You can access forming and flattening functionality in the NX SheetMetal application.

• For flattening operations, use the Flat Pattern command.

• For complex parts, use the Metaform command. This command isavailable on the NX Advanced Sheet Metal Drop-down list.

Note

An Advanced Sheet Metal licence is required for the NX AdvancedSheet Metal commands to be available in the NX Sheet Metalapplication.

• For the Part in Process operations, use the Unbend, Rebend, and Resizecommands.


Chapter

11 Manufacturing

General

Parallel Generate

What is it?

Use the Parallel Generate command to generate operations in the backgroundwhile you continue working. Select any number of operations at the sametime, and they count as one parallel process. You can:

• Run multiple processes concurrently.

• Stop parallel processes with the Stop Parallel Generate command.

Note

• You must select all the operations that use an In-Process Workpiecetogether and submit them as one process.

• The part must remain open in the current session. You can continueto work on it, or work on another part, but you cannot close thepart. This is different than batch processing, which requires you toclose the part and wait until the batch processing is complete toopen the part.

Use the Maximum Concurrent Processes customer default to specify howmany processes the software can run concurrently. The maximum number isfour.

New operation status indicators include the following:

• Pending

This indicates that the operation is in queue for a scheduled process. Theindicator appears when the maximum number of concurrent processesis exceeded.

• Parallel Generating

This indicates that the operation is processing in the background.


Manufacturing

Tip

When the background processing is complete, the operation statuschanges to Repost . There is no notification message when the processis complete.


Using the Parallel Generate command helps if:

• Your computer has multiple cores or processors, and you want to use themto speed up tool path processing.

• Your computer has a slower processor, and you do not want to wait forcomplex tool paths to generate before working on another operation.

Where do I find it?

Parallel Generate commands


Toolbar Operations®Parallel Generate Tool PathOperationNavigator

Right-click the selected operations®ParallelGenerate/Stop Parallel Generate

Maximum Concurrent Processes customer default

Application ManufacturingMenu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Manufacturing®Operation®General tab®ParallelTool Path Generation group

User Interface

Operation Navigator enhancements

What is it?

The Operation Navigator has the following enhancements:

• There are new columns:

– Depth of Cut

– Feed

– Speed


Manufacturing

– Stock

– Stepover

– Holder Description

– MCS

• New Freeze Column and Unfreeze Column commands are available tocontrol column visibility when you scroll.

• A new Unapprove command lets you remove the approval on a tool path.

• In addition to operations, you can copy programs, methods, and geometryfrom one part to another. The same rules for copying within a part apply:

– If you select a geometry or program group to copy, the operations arealso copied.

– If you select a method or tool group to copy, operations are not copied.

Where do I find it?

Freeze Column/Unfreeze Column

Application ManufacturingOperationNavigator

Right-click on the column heading and choose FreezeColumn/Unfreeze Column

Unapprove


Right-click on the operation and chooseObject®Unapprove


Manufacturing

Operation Navigator Time and Length display

What is it?

The Time and Length columns include turning paths and drill cycles.

The tool tip for an entry in the Time or Length column displays the Cuttingand Non Cutting values as well as the total value. The Non Cutting valueincludes estimates for tool changes and rapid feeds.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite The operation must have a generated tool path.

Geometry selection — face and curve rules

What is it?

Face and curve rules are now available for selecting geometry. Rules areshown in the selection bar.

Note

The intent is not stored. This is only a selection aid and is separatefrom the Selection Intent functionality.


Use face and curve rules to:

• Select tangent faces.

• Select connected faces.

• Use the other geometry selection rules.

Specify planes

What is it?

Manufacturing now provides the standard NX plane options or the Planedialog box to specify planes such as the clearance plane or lower limit plane,floor plane, and boundary planes.


Manufacturing

• You can select component geometry from the Plane dialog box if you setSelection Scope on the Selection bar to either Entire Assembly orWithinWork Part and Components.

• After you select an object to define the plane, you can drag the plane todefine the offset distance.

• Defined planes are displayed in the graphics window as triangles.

Cut Angle and Level Angle

What is it?

Manufacturing now provides the standard NX angle options to specify CutAngle values in Milling and Level Angle values in Turning.

• Angles remain associative to the geometry used to define them.


Manufacturing

Note

Geometry does not transfer with templates. Any associativity ina template part is lost when you create a new operation from thetemplate.

• The new Vector option enables a predictable cut angle regardless ofthe WCS orientation. You define a 3D vector that is stored as the cutdirection. To define the cut angle, the software projects the 3D vectoralong the tool axis to the cut levels.

• For the Specify option, the graphics window displays the angle directionand value.

• You can specify an angle by dragging the angle vector in the graphicswindow.

Where do I find it?



Manufacturing


[Milling operation] dialog box®Path Settings

group®Cutting Parameters ®Strategytab®Cutting group

[Turning operation] dialog box®Path Settings group

Tool Axis

What is it?

• Fixed-axis operations have a Dynamic option that lets you manipulate thevector in the graphics window to specify the tool axis.

• The Interpolate Vector option for variable-axis operations has an updateddialog box. It displays each vector in a standard NX list with labels forsystem generated vectors and user-defined vectors. The list is updatedas you add, delete, or edit vectors.

You can manipulate vectors in the graphics window.

Where do I find it?



Manufacturing


[Fixed-axis or Multi-axis Milling operation] dialogbox®Tool Axis group

UDE dialog box

What is it?

The User Defined Events dialog box is now consistent with other NX dialogboxes, and has new options for creating User Defined Events. You can now:

• Add context related text or a Web page with help information related tothe currently edited UDE.

• Add group frames.

• Add a legend bitmap in the UDE dialog box.

These options are also added to Post Builder.


Use the new options to define, create or edit User Defined Events within theManufacturing application.

Where do I find it?



[Milling operation] dialog box®Machine Control

group®Edit

Manufacturing Preferences

What is it?

The Manufacturing Preferences dialog box is now consistent with otherdialog boxes. Manufacturing Preferences that are also in ManufacturingCustomer Defaults have the same terminology.

Where do I find it?

Manufacturing Preferences

Application ManufacturingMenu Preferences®Manufacturing

Manufacturing Customer Defaults


Manufacturing

Application ManufacturingMenu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox Manufacturing

Customize dialog boxes

What is it?

The Customize Dialog dialog box now has a standard layout, and standardlists for you to add, delete, or rearrange dialog box items. Groups are shownas collapsible items within the list.


It is now easier to customize an operation dialog box, because the items toadd are at the top of the Customize Dialog dialog box, and the items used areshown in collapsible groups.

Where do I find it?


Right-click the operation and chooseObject®Customize.


Manufacturing

Update Customization

What is it?

The Update Customization dialog box now has a standard layout.


The new layout and Select All option provide an accelerated workflow forupdating dialog boxes.

Where do I find it?


Right-click the operation and chooseObject®CustomizeFrom

NC Assistant overview

Use the NC Assistant to collect the data necessary to machine your part.You can determine:

• Corner radii between walls using the Corners option.

Use this option to help select tool diameters.

• Corner radii between floors and walls using the Blends option.

Use this option to help select mill tool corner radii.

• Wall taper angles using the Draft option.

Use this option to help select mill tool taper angles.


Manufacturing

• Cut depths using the Levels option.

Use this option to help select tool lengths, and to group common levelstogether for cutting.

Corners Blends

Draft Levels

The analysis information is displayed using face colors on the shaded modeland text in the Information window.

Analysis type: Draft

# Color Number offaces

Angle

212 DeepCobalt 11 -90.0000000

29 StrongGreen 16 -14.0019421

StrongMagenta 4 5.50000000

Color-coded model with sample Information window text

Where do I find it?



Manufacturing

PrerequisiteYou must have a part file open that contains modelgeometry.

Menu Analysis®NC AssistantToolbar Geometry®NC Assistant

Tool Path Editor

What is it?

You can now:

• Edit multiple feed rates at the same time.

• Dynamically move tool path motions.

• Undo a single editing mistake without losing all of your edits. To do this,press Ctrl+Z without exiting the Tool Path Editor dialog box.


Manufacturing

• Abort Gouge Check operations running inside the Tool Path Editor. Todo this, click OK in the Work in Progress message box.

• Rewind to the beginning of the tool path animation or fast forward tothe end of the tool path animation.

The Tool Path Editor dialog box now includes all range selections. You neednot navigate to a different dialog box.

Note

The Tool Path Editor dialog box is long. To see the Motion list, undockthe dialog box from the Rail Clip.


Use the Tool Path Editor dialog box to modify tool paths when you do nothave access to the operation, or when the operation does not produce therequired behavior.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite The operation must have a generated tool path.OperationNavigator Right-click the selected operation®Tool Path®Edit

Divide by Holder

What is it?

Divide by Holder lets you divide a generated tool path where there are holdercollisions. When the software finds a holder collision, it moves backwardsalong the tool path to the closest transfer, then divides the tool path into twooperations at the transfer. The original operation contains collision free toolpath. The new operation contains the tool path section with holder collisions.

Name Path Edit StatusCAVITY_MILL Repost

Operation Navigator before Divide by Holder


Manufacturing

Name Path Edit StatusCAVITY_MILL Repost

CAVITY_MILL_DIV_1 Repost

Operation Navigator after Divide by Holder

You can change the following parameters in the split operation to eliminateholder collisions:

• Tool

The tool shape, diameter, corner radius, and taper angle must be the same.

• Holder

• Program group

• Machine Control options

• Feed rate

Divide by Holder is useful for:

• Level based operations.

• Area milling operations with a Zig or Zig Zag with Lifts cut pattern thatgenerates transfers.

Divide by Holder does not work if the operation does not have transfers.For example, you cannot use Divide by Holder for a Zig Zag cut patternwhere the tool enters the cut, zig-zags everywhere to machine the part,then retracts.


You can:

• Generate operations with holder checking turned off for fasterperformance, then run Divide by Holder to remove holder collisions.

• Use Divide by Holder when there are changes to the holder information,to correct the tool path without regenerating the operation.

Where do I find it?


Right-click the operation®Tool Path®Divide by Holder


Manufacturing

Expanded Journaling support

What is it?

Journaling is available in the following updated dialog boxes and groups:

• Planes

• Cut Levels

• Cut Angles

• Tool Axis

• Turning Teach Mode

• UDE

• Preferences

• NC Assistant

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingMenu Tools®Journal

Tool update

What is it?

Use the Update Tool from Library command to modify a library tool in thework part to match the current version of the tool in the library.

Tip

To be sure that all library tools in your part match the current library,select GENERIC_MACHINE at the top of the Machine Tool View in theOperation Navigator.


Use this command to:

• Restore a library tool that you retrieved into your work part and thenmodified. The Library Reference is also restored.

• Update a library tool in your work part when the library changes.


Manufacturing

Updating the tool is much easier than retrieving the tool from the libraryagain.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite A tool that was retrieved from the tool library.OperationNavigator Right-click the tool®Object®Update Tool from Library

Operation actions

What is it?

The following commands are available on the Operations toolbar and theradial toolbar when you edit an operation.

• Generate

• Verify

• Replay

• List


You no longer need to scroll through the dialog box to access these commands.


Manufacturing

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingToolbar OperationsGraphics window Hold Ctrl+Shift and-click®Generate/Verify/Replay/List

Manufacturing Wizards

What is it?

Manufacturing Wizards now present options in groups, and use the sameitems as the standard Manufacturing dialog boxes. You can use all of thelatest customizable items when you create a wizard.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingResource bar Manufacturing Wizards tab

Milling


Turbomachinery (Multi Blade) Milling overview

In Turbomachinery Milling, you use Multi Blade operations to machinemultiple blade parts, such as impellers or blisks, with or without splitters.Multi Blade Milling operations are designed specifically for machining bladetype parts. They are the most efficient operations for machining these typesof parts. You can create operations for roughing, rest milling, hub finishing,and blade and splitter finishing.


Manufacturing

Roughing Rest Milling

Hub Finishing Blade and Splitter Finishing

Multi Blade Milling operations support the following:

• Tool axis smoothing

• Tool path smoothing

• In Process Workpiece

• Holder Collision checking and avoidance

• A preview of expected results

There are no geometric restrictions and the geometry you specify is shared byall the operation types. You can specify the following geometry:

• Multiple splitters

• Curved blades with undercuts


Manufacturing

• Blades with one or more surfaces

• Surfaces without a well ordered UV grid.

Gaps and overlaps are automatically healed.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteRequires the NX Turbomachinery Milling Add-onlicense.


Create Operation dialog box®Typegroup®mill_multi_blade

Multi Blade geometry — MULTI_BLADE_GEOM

Use the MULTI_BLADE_GEOM geometry parent to define the rotation axisand geometry for blade machining. The geometry that is defined can beinherited and used in blade machining operations.

Hub Splitter

Blade Blade Blend Shroud

Where do I find it?



Manufacturing

Toolbar Insert®Create GeometryMenu Insert®Geometry


Create Geometry dialog box®Typegroup®mill_multi_blade®Geometry Subtype

group®MULTI_BLADE_GEOM

Multi Blade Rough operations

Use Multi Blade Rough operations to create roughing operations for bladetype parts. Multi Blade Rough operations are part type specific roughingoperations. The operations allow multi-level, multi-axis roughing for multiblade type parts. Roughing is performed from the top down.

You can define the following:

• Multi-level cutting

• Cut patterns

• Depths




• Blank geometry or IPW for stock definition

Where do I find it?



Manufacturing




group®MULTI_BLADE_ROUGH

Multi Blade Hub Finish operations

Use Hub Finish operations to create finish tool paths for multi blade hubs.Hub Finish operations are part type specific finishing operations. Theoperations allow hub finishing for multi blade type parts.

You can define:

• Cut patterns




Hub Finish operations have the following characteristics:

• They do not require shroud geometry.

• They do not machine blends. Blends are covered by the Blade Finishoperations. Areas where the blends of adjacent blades touch and coverthe hub are not cut.

Where do I find it?



Manufacturing




group®HUB_FINISH

Multi Blade Finish operations

Use Blade Finish operations to finish blades and blade blends down to thehub. Blade Finish operations are part type specific finishing operations. Theoperations allow multi-axis finishing for the blade or splitter of multi bladetype parts.

You can define:

• Sides to cut

• Cut patterns

• Cut levels



Where do I find it?




Manufacturing



group®BLADE_FINISH

Sinumerik Spline output

What is it?

Use the Sinumerik Spline option to output splines for tool paths. The splineshave been fine tuned and tested on the Siemens Sinumerik controllers.The Sinumerik Spline output is optimized for Zig cut patterns in finishingoperations, and is best suited for the Area Mill drive method.


The spline format uses G2 continuity where possible. This helps to ensurethat the tool paths run smoothly. The tool path is expected to run faster andproduce a smoother surface finish. The spline may also be used with othercontrollers.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

Fixed axis milling tool paths

The license file must include the stringsinumerik_spline.


Milling operation®Machine Control group®MotionOutput Type list

Optimize Feed Rate

What is it?

Use the Optimize Feed Rate option to remove material more efficiently and toextend tool life. This option constantly monitors tool load and adjusts the feedrate to maintain a uniform tool load.

The software uses a 3D IPW model or blank geometry to calculate the feedrates.


Manufacturing

Tool path

Material removal rate

Feed rate without optimization

Optimized feed rate

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite Milling operation

MenuTools®Operation Navigator®Tool Path®OptimizeFeed Rate

OperationNavigator

Right-click the selected operation®Tool Path®OptimizeFeed Rate


[Milling operation] dialog box®Feeds and Speeds

®Feed Rates group®Optimize Feed Rate WhenGenerating

Cut steep and non-steep areas with Flowcut

What is it?

You can now specify different cut patterns for steep areas and non-steep areasin Flowcut operations. For Flowcut Ref Tool operations, the new Crosscut cutpatterns are also available.


Manufacturing

Where do I find it?



Flow Cut operation dialog box®Drive Method

group®Edit ®Non-steep Cutting group/SteepCutting group

Crosscut patterns in Flowcut Ref Tool operations

What is it?

There are new cut patterns for Flowcut operations that smoothly cut acrossbi-tangent areas. These include:

• Crosscut Zig

• Crosscut Zig Zag

• Crosscut Zig Zag with Lifts

You can apply Crosscut cut patterns to steep areas, non-steep areas, or allof the part geometry.


Manufacturing


The Crosscut cut patterns let you machine steep areas that previouslyrequired a separate Zlevel operation or a Radial cut pattern Fixed-axisSurface Contouring operation.

Many mold and die manufacturers prefer Crosscut patterns.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteIn the Flow Cut Drive Method dialog box, Flowcut Typemust be set to Reference Tool Offsets.


Flowcut operation dialog box®Drive Method

group®Edit ®Non-steep Cutting group /SteepCutting group

Clearance options in Milling operations

What is it?

The following clearance options are now available in Surface Contouring,Planar Milling, Cavity Milling, Face Milling, and Zlevel Milling operations.

These options are also available in the new Thread Milling operation.


Manufacturing

Point

Bounding Cylinder

Cylinder

Sphere

Bounding Box

The outside of a bounding cylinder, cylinder, sphere, or bounding box isalways considered a safe clearance zone.

Use the Point option to specify a safe location for the cutter to transfer to.


Use these options to avoid collisions with the part and fixture devices.

Where do I find it?



[Milling operation] dialog box ®Geometry

list®MCS®Create New ®New Geometry dialog

box®Geometry Subtype group®MCS ®MCSdialog box®Clearance group®Clearance Option list

OperationNavigator

Right click a Milling operation®Edit®Mill Orient dialogbox®Clearance group®Clearance Option list


Manufacturing

Plane based Engage and Retract moves

What is it?

Use the Plane option to specify a plane to determine the start and end ofengage and retract moves in Surface Contouring operations.


A plane helps you to accurately determine the length of an engage or retractmove.

Where do I find it?



[Milling] operation dialog box®Non Cutting Moves(Engage from) Engage tab®Open Area group (Retractto) Non Cutting Moves Retract tab®Open Area group

Profile 3D and Solid Profile 3D Tool Path Smoothing

What is it?

You can specify Z Axis Smoothing options to adjust the tool path based onradius and angle values. The software will use the parameters specified tosmooth the tool path in the Tool Axis direction. This will smooth upward anddownward motion in the tool path by rounding sharp corners and reducingsteep motion.

Not applied Tool Path Smoothing applied

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite Profile 3D or Solid Profile 3D operationMenu Insert→Operation


Manufacturing

Location in dialogbox Cutting Parameters®Corners, Smoothing group

Tool Holder Gouge and Collision Check

What is it?

The Gouge Check command is now called Gouge and Collision Check. Thefollowing options are added:

• Stop When Limit Reached stops the tool path from processing when agouge or collision is detected.

• Maximum Limit limits the maximum number of gouges and collisionsallowed before the tool path stops processing.

You can set these and other options for the command either in the Gouge andCollision Check dialog box, or in the Customer Defaults dialog box.

Where do I find it?

Gouge and Collision Check dialog box

Application ManufacturingOperationNavigator Right click the operation®Tool Path®Gouge Check

Toolbar Operation toolbar®Gouge Check

Gouge and Collision Check customer defaults


MenuFile®Utilities®Manufacturing®Simulation &Verification®Gouge tab

Cut Levels for Cavity Milling/Z-Level Milling

What is it?

The Cut Levels dialog box is redesigned to make ranges easier to create andidentify. You can now select datum planes to define the top of range 1 andthe range bottoms.


Manufacturing

The active cut range is displayed as a plane.You can also drag the plane to edit the range.

Each range appears as one row in a standardNX list.

You can select a face to define a range bottom.The face that defines the range bottom ishighlighted when you select the range.

You can select points to define a range bottom.

Tip

To select a location on a facet body, turn

on the Point on Face Snap Pointoption.

You can move the cut level and range stackaround for better visibility.

You can specify how far to cut below the lastrange as a distance value or as a percent of thetool diameter.


Manufacturing

You can enter a ZC value for the top level.Range Depth is measured from the top leveldown.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingLocation in dialogbox

Cavity Milling or Z-Level Milling dialog box®PathSettings group

Cut Levels — Planar Milling

What is it?

The Cut Levels dialog box for Planar Milling has been updated so that theterminology is consistent with the Cut Levels dialog box in Zlevel and CavityMill.

Old Terminology New TerminologyMaximum CommonInitial Distance From TopFinal Distance From FloorIslands Critical Depths

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite You must be in a Planar Mill operation dialog boxLocation in dialogbox Path Settings group®Cut Levels

Overlap Distance

What is it?

The Overlap Distance option for the Planar Mill, Planar Profile, Profile 3Dand Solid Profile 3D operation subtypes has changed. It now affects the


Manufacturing

current operation rather than the following clean up operation. The locationof the option has also changed.

During a sequence of rest milling operations, use the Overlap Distance optionto extend the path for the current operation so that it overlaps the cut regionof another operation. Overlap Distance is only available when you use theUse 2D IPW or Use Reference Tool options.

Overlap Distance set to zero Overlap Distance set to a value of15.00


Using this option helps you eliminate scallops and obtain a full clean upbetween tool paths.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

For Planar Mill, Planar Profile, Profile 3D andSolid Profile 3D operation subtypes, the In ProcessWorkpiece option must be set to Use 2D IPW or UseReference Tool.

Menu Insert®Operation


[Planar Milling] operation dialog box®Path Settings

group®Cutting Parameters ®Containmenttab®Overlap group


Manufacturing

Reference Tool

What is it?

The Reference Tool option is now available in the Planar Mill, Planar Profile,Profile 3D and Solid Profile 3D operation subtypes.

Use the Reference Tool option to create a new operation with a smaller toolthat references a larger tool. The smaller tool only removes material thatwould not have been cut by the larger tool. You can place the reference tooloperation before or after operations with larger tools.

Place the reference tool operation before operations using the larger tool tofirst rough cut corners with a smaller tool.

The yellow area shows the areas cut with thesmaller tool. The tool path was contained inthose areas by the reference tool.

The green area shows the areas cut with thelarger tool. The tool path was previouslycontained in the yellow areas by the referencetool.

Place the reference tool operation after operations using the larger tool to cutareas that the larger tool could not fit into.


Manufacturing

The part has been roughed with a large tool.The reference tool operation will remove theremaining material.

The yellow area shows the areas cut with thesmaller tool. The tool path was contained in theyellow areas by the reference tool.


Using this option helps you eliminate tool motion where there is no material.The tool path can be created before or after the roughing paths.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

For Planar Mill, Planar Profile, Profile 3D andSolid Profile 3D operation subtypes, the In ProcessWorkpiece option must be set to Use Reference Tool.



[Planar Milling] operation dialog box®Path Settings

group®Cutting Parameters ®Containmenttab®Reference Tool group


Manufacturing

Use 2D IPW

What is it?

The Use 2D IPW option replaces the Save 2D In Process Workpiece option.Use the Use 2D IPW option in Planar Milling to machine only the materialthat is left on the part in subsequent operations. The software tracks theremaining material from one operation to the next.

When you use this option, the software:

• Finds uncut material by evaluating previous Planar Milling operationsthat share the same part geometry.

• Only recognizes valid Planar Milling operations including Planar Profile,Profile 3D, Solid Profile 3D, and Planar Mill. If other operations arefound, the software ignores them and uses the 2D IPW from the lastPlanar Milling operation.

• Supports the use of ball endmills.

The first tool path roughs out most of thematerial.

The second tool path removes only theremainder of the material recognized in theIPW.


When you use this option, you avoid tool motion where material has beenremoved by previous operations.

Where do I find it?



Manufacturing

PrerequisiteYou must be in a Planar Mill, Planar Profile, Profile 3Dor Solid Profile 3D operation.



[Planar Milling Operation] dialog box®Path Settings

group®Cutting Parameters ®Containmenttab®Blank group®In Process Workpiece list®Use2D IPW

Output Contact/Tracking Data

What is it?

The Output Contact/Tracking Data option is now available for Profile 3D andSolid Profile 3D operations.

Use the Output Contact/Tracking Data option to set Contact Contour cuttercompensation. When you use this option, the cutter compensation is outputfor several tool contact locations rather than one tool end location, for allcutting motions in an NC operation.

Contact Contour is also referred to as full radius cutter compensation ormaterial edge contouring. Use contact contour cutter compensation for toolpaths generated at the circumference of the tool radius.


Use this option when the machine operator will enter the full tool size,instead of the variation from the programmed size.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite The operation must have a finish pass or profile pass.Menu Insert®Operation


Profile 3D, Solid Profile 3D operation dialog box®Non

Cutting Moves ®More tab®Cutter Compensationgroup

Face Milling-Negative Floor Stock

What is it?

You can now specify a negative Final Floor Stock value for the following FaceMilling operation subtypes:


Manufacturing

Face Milling Area

Face Milling

Face Milling Manual

All moves created on the face cutting planes are moved down by the specifiedvalue.


Entering a negative Final Floor Stock value is useful when you have tomake a minor adjustment for a modeled dimension to meet a functionalrequirement. For example, when you have to shorten the height of a faceor move a face into the part.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingMenu Insert®Operation


Manufacturing


Create Operation dialog box®Operation Subtype

group®Face Milling Area /Face Milling /Face

Milling Manual

Face Milling operation dialog box®Path Settings

group®Cutting Parameters ® Stock tab®Stockgroup®Final Floor Stock

Non Cutting Moves Enhancement Smooth Traverse

What is it?

A Traverse Type, Smooth option is added to non cutting moves in fixed andvariable contouring operations.

Traverse Feedrate


Manufacturing

Stepover Feedrate


This traverse type lets the tool merge tangentially from a cut, retract, orapproach move, to the next cut, engage, or approach move without slowingdown.

Where do I find it?


Dialog Box[Surface Contouring Milling] operation®Non CuttingMoves


Transfer/Rapid tab®Between Regions and WithinRegions group®Traverse Type®Smooth

Turning

Automatic detection of rest material

What is it?

Additional options have been added to help you determine how the softwaredetects remaining material (rest material) in a cutting operation. Previouslyyou could only eliminate cut regions that may be too small. You can noweliminate cut regions that are too large.

You can specify:

• The minimum cross-section area size of the cut region.

• The maximum cross-sectional area size of the cut region.


Manufacturing

• The minimum and maximum dimensions of the cut region along the radialand axial axes. The dimensions are measured in the lathe workplane.

• The minimum and maximum values as a percentage from the tool.


Use these options when you want to determine which cut regions you wantto machine, and where material remains uncut.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Insert®Create OperationMenu Insert®OperationLocation in dialogbox Cut Regions dialog box®Automatic Detection group

Automatic Tracking Point Switching

What is it?

You can now automatically switch tracking points when using the FinishAll Cut Strategy.

First tool position

Second tool position

Third tool position


Manufacturing

Fourth tool positionActive Tracking Point 1, Adjust 1,Cutcom 1.Active Tracking Point 2, Adjust 2,Cutcom 2


For close tolerance machining and better surface finishes.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteYou must be in a FINISH_TURN_OD/FINISH_BORE_IDoperation®Cut Strategy group®Strategy®Finish All


[Turning operation] dialog box®Tool group®SelectTracking

Automatic WCS Orientation when editing Turning objects

What is it?

You can define the orientation of the WCS (Work Coordinate System) inrelationship to the MCS (Machine Coordinate System). You need to do thisonly once. The WCS is automatically used for editing turning operations,tools, and geometry, for example changing a spindle setup or tool orientation.


Manufacturing

MCS showing ZM/XM Lathe Work PlaneWCS showning XC/YC Tool Work Plane parallel to theLathe Work Plane

Operations and geometry inherit the WCS from their MCS_SPINDLE group.Tools cannot inherit their WCS. By default the system assigns the firstMCS_SPINDLE group in the Geometry View to a tool. You can also assign adifferent one in the tool’s dialog box.

The XC/YC plane of the tool’s WCS defines the work plane of the turning tool.

You can specify the WCS position and orientation in the following ways:

• Use the ZM Offset or XM Offset options to define the distance between theWCS origin and the MCS origin along the ZM-axis or XM-axis. When youedit a Turning object (operation, tool, or geometry) from the OperationNavigator, the WCS origin is automatically placed at the distance youdefine.

• Use the XC Mapping options to set the direction of the XC-axis of the WCSbased on the orientation of the lathe work plane defining axes of the MCS.

• Use the YC Mapping options to set the direction of the YC-axis of theWCS based on the orientation of the lathe work plane defining axes ofthe MCS. The available YC Mapping options depend on your selectionsfor the XC Mapping options.


Manufacturing

Note

If you modify the orientation of the MCS, the WCS automaticallyadapts to the new orientation.


It is now virtually impossible to have an invalid WCS orientation when youedit a Turning object. The WCS is automatically oriented correctly when youedit Turning operations, tools, or geometry.

Note

• In the MCS Spindle dialog box you define a WCS orientation basedon the MCS.

• In the Tool dialog box you assign a WCS by choosing anMCS_SPINDLE group from the new option menu.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite Insert®Geometry

Toolbar Insert®Create Geometry


Create Geometry dialog box®Typelist®Turning®Geometry Subtypegroup®MCS_SPINDLE®MCS Spindle dialog

box ®Work Coordinate System group

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite Insert®Tool

Toolbar Insert®Create Tool


Create Tool dialog box®Type list®Turning ToolSubtype [any turning tool]®More tab®WorkCoordinate System group

Ignore Members at Concave Corners

What is it?

Use the Concave Corners option in the Ignore Members dialog box todetermine the continuation around adjacent members on a boundary.

You can specify Concave Corners as Extend or Connect linearly.


Manufacturing

ExtendThis example shows a boundary on which two boundary members areignored while two adjacent members are extended tangentially andconnected. Material is removed from the concave corner.

Before After

Connect linearlyThis example shows a boundary on which two boundary members areignored while the two adjacent members are extended by way of a linearconnection. Material is added to the concave corner.

Before After


This option lets you control the tool path around ignored members on theboundary.


Manufacturing

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite You must be in a [Turning] operation dialog box.



(Custom Part Boundary Data dialog box) Edit

®Part Boundaries dialog box®Custom BoundaryData group®Ignore Members button®Ignore Membersdialog box®Concave Corners®Extend/Connectlinearly

(Edit Member dialog box) Ignore Member ®ConcaveCorners®Extend/Connect linearly

Conical and Variable stock

What is it?

Use the Conical and Variable offset method options to offset boundarymembers with multiple stock values. You can adjust your tool path tocompensate for different factors such as part deflection and tool wear.

When you use the Conical option, you can set stock values for individualoffsets at the start and end points of a linear custom boundary member. Thisoption creates a conical shape when seen in 3D.

When you use the Variable option, you can set multiple stocking offset pointsalong a single member of the boundary. You can assign a different stockoffset value to each stocking point. This option creates a partitioning of theboundary member into multiple individually offset portions.


Manufacturing


These options can be helpful when machining long thin shaft type parts andhandling difficult machining conditions where stress and torsion occur.

Where do I find it?





button®Part Boundary dialog box®Edit ®OffsetMethod

(Edit Member dialog box) Main tab®Apply MemberOffset ®Offset Method

Containment using Trim Point Ramp Angles

What is it?

Ramp angle parameters are now available for Trim Point angle options.These parameters help you to specify ramp angles for trim points when youdefine cut regions.

Trim Point with two angles

Trimmed uncut region

Trimmed cut region


Manufacturing

Trim Point with one angle

Note

All manually entered angle values are interpreted relative to the WCS.


Use these parameters to define a cut region that safely guides the cutting toolaway from the part profile.

Where do I find it?



Cut Regions dialog box®Trim Point 1 or Trim Point 2group®Angle Option list®Angle®Ramp Angle Option

Diameter Constant offset stock values

What is it?

Use the Constant stock method option to add stock that is based on thediameter of the part, for custom boundary members that are parallel to thelathe centerline.

When you use this option, you can set Distance to either Nominal or Diameter.

• When you select Nominal, the software interprets values based on theradius value for the diameter members.

• When you select Diameter, the resulting stock offset that is applied to themember on either side of the workpiece is half that of the input value.


Manufacturing


This option provides an easier way to apply stock to the diameter of your part.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite You must be in a [Turning] operation dialog box.


Geometry groupWorkpiece group®Specify or Edit ®Edit®OffsetMethod®Constant®Distance list®Diameter/Nominal


Custom Part Boundary Data®Edit ®StockMethod®Constant®Distance list®Diameter/Nominal

Initial Profile Plunge cut in Finishing and Roughing operations

What is it?

You can now specify an Initial Profile Plungemove in a finish cut or additionalprofile pass.


Manufacturing

Initial Plunge cut.

Right side cleanup cut.

Left side cleanup cut.

Tracking point one.

Tracking point two.


This move helps you prolong tool life and achieve desired surface finishes.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

You must be in a roughing or finishing operation.Strategy must be set to Down Only or Finish All.

(Roughing operation) The Additional Profiling checkbox must be selected in the Cutting Parameters dialogbox.


(Roughing operation) Cutting Parameters®Profilingtab®Path Settings group®Initial Profile Plunge


Manufacturing

Manual Spun Outline

What is it?

You can now manually create a 2D spun outline of Part and Blank turninggeometry from a 3D model. There are two new alternative methods:

• Planes at Angles

• Planes through Points

Both new methods provide functionality for manual definition through theuse of Angles and Points for plane creation.

Note

The Automatic method is automatically create without any userinteraction.


To improve performance or when you are not satisfied with the Automatic 2Dcreation results.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteYou must be in the Geometry View, of the OperationNavigator.

OperationNavigator Right click on any TURNING_WORKPIECE object®Edit.Location in dialogbox Turn Bnd dialog box®Geometry group.

Maximum cut Thickness

What is it?

Use the Thickness option to ensure that no linear or contour rough cutexceeds a specified maximum cut thickness in a Turning operation. Theparameter for the tool is inherited into the operation.


This option is useful for inferring global data from a tool object that controlsthe maximum cut thickness in turning operations.


Manufacturing

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Insert®Create ToolMenu Insert®ToolLocation in dialogbox

[Turning] dialog box®Tool tab®Moregroup®Thickness

N-style Holder for 55 degree diamond lathe tools

What is it?

The Create Tool command now has options that support N-style tool holderswith 55 degree diamond inserts.


The new options give you more flexibility for clearances and a longer toolreach.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Insert®Create ToolMenu Insert®ToolLocation in dialogbox Holder tab®Holder (Shank) group

Output Contact Tracking in Contour Turning operations

What is it?

Use the Output Contact Tracking/Data option to output the tool path atthe circumference of the tool nose radius in Contour Turning operations.Standard Cutter Compensation output generates the tool path related to thetracking point of the tool, for example, the center of the tool nose radius.


Manufacturing

Output Contact/Tracking Data on Standard Cutter Compensationoutput

Note

Available Cutter Compensation parameters apply to:

• Profile passes only for Rough Turn operations.

• Contour passes for Finish operations.


Use Contact Contour output when it is important for the machine operatorto control both the part size during finish passes, and control the radius ofthe tool nose. When you use this type of programming method, the tool noseradius is typically entered into the compensation register of the machinecontroller.

Where do I find it?



Non-Cutting Moves dialog box®More tab®CutterCompensation group

Relief Cut for Linear Roughing

What is it?

You can add additional cutting motions by specifying the Number of Cuts andRelief Cut Distance to any individual straight linear roughing cut.


Manufacturing

Note

Stepover feed rates are applied to the relief cuts.


Use Relief Cuts when cutting part materials that are difficult to machine toavoid tool damage and unwanted tool deflection.

Where do I find it?



Cutting Parameters®Strategy tab®Cuttinggroup®Relief Cuts


Manufacturing

Reorient Tool Holder and Tracking point

What is it?

Use the Rotate Tracking Point with Holder option to either rotate the trackingpoint cluster with the tool holder, or leave the cluster stationary.

Rotate Tracking Point with Holder

Rotate Tracking Point with Holder


Preset device settings for turning tools sometimes do not allow or requirethe tracking point to rotate when the B-axis holder rotation is active. Theability to not rotate the cluster lets you output NC coordinates at a differenttracking point other than P9. For example, you can change the tracking pointto P3 or P4.


Manufacturing

Where do I find it?




[Turning] operation dialog box®Tool Orientationgroup®Rotate Tracking Point with Holder check box

Retract Distance

What is it?

Use the Retract Distance option to specify a retract distance for a drillingtool. This value is different from the Clearance Distance value, and providesan additional control for withdrawing the drilling tool from a hole.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite You must be in a drilling operation dialog box.

Toolbar Insert®Create Operation ®Type group®TurningMenu Insert®OperationLocation in dialogbox Cycle Type group®Retract Distance


Manufacturing

Variable feed rates

What is it?

Use the Variable feed rate option to specify independent acceleration ordeceleration feed rates for cutting motions made along a specific boundarymember.

• You must use this option in combination with the Variable Stock option.

• You can use this option only for feed rate changes along a specific segmentwith a zero stock distance value for the inclined position.

Where do I find it?





button®Part Boundary dialog box®Edit ®ApplyMember Stock®Stock Method list®Variable®FeedRate

Thread Milling

Thread Milling

What is it?

Use the THREAD_MILLING operation type from the hole_making, drill andmill_planar templates to machine internal and external threads.

You can specify thread milling geometry by selecting:

• Points

• Arcs

• Cylindrical edges

• Cylindrical faces

Note

The selection can either be done from within the operation or from thenew HOLE_BOSS geometry object.


Manufacturing

You can do the following to specify common thread data:

• Specify the data manually.

• Select the data from a table.

• Derive the data from the model.

Thread milling tool parameters are defined in the Thread Mill tool dialog box.


This operation type replaces the old thread milling operation which hadlimitations.

Where do I find it?



Type®hole_making/drill/planar_milloperation®Operation Subtype®THREAD_MILLING

Hole/Boss geometry object

What is it?

A new geometry object is added to help you define hole or boss locationswith thread data. You can use this as a parent geometry object forTHREAD_MILLING operations.

You can specify thread milling geometry by selecting any of the following:

• Points

• Arcs


Manufacturing

• Cylindrical edges

• Cylindrical faces

You can select these objects either within the operation or from the newHOLE_BOSS geometry object.


The new geometry object allows you to define holes and bosses with differenttool axes.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Insert®Create GeometryMenu Insert®GeometryLocation in dialogbox

Type group®Hole/Boss/Threaded Hole/ThreadedBoss®Position group®Select Object

Feature-based Machining

Feature-based Machining for Turning

What is it?

You can now create Feature Based Machining processes for Turning. Thestandard Feature Based Machining installation includes an initial set ofpredefined Turning features that are recognized, and the ManufacturingRules for these features.

The set of predefined Turning features includes:

• TURNING_GROOVE_ID

• TURNING_GROOVE_OD

• TURNING_GROOVE_FACE

You can add your own Turning features and define Machining rules for yourfeatures.

Where do I find it?



Manufacturing

MachiningFeature Navigator Right-click in the background®Find FeaturesLocation in dialogbox Find Features dialog box®Features to Recognize

Feature-based Machining for Wire EDM

What is it?

You can now create Feature Based Machining processes for Wire EDM. Thestandard Feature Based Machining installation includes an initial set ofpredefined Wire EDM features that are recognized, and the ManufacturingRules for these features.

The set of predefined Wire EDM features includes:

• WEDM_FREE_SHAPED_STRAIGHT

• WEDM_OBROUND_STRAIGHT

• WEDM_RECTANGULAR_STRAIGHT

• WEDM_ROUND_STRAIGHT

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingMachiningFeature Navigator Right-click in the background®Find FeaturesLocation in dialogbox Find Features dialog box®Features to Recognize

Feature-based Machining Wire EDM start hole data

What is it?

The Machining Feature Navigator now recognizes the following Wire EDMstart hole attributes for the set of predefined Wire EDM features:

• START_HOLE_DIAMETER

This attribute specifies the diameter of the start hole

• START_HOLE_POS_X, START_HOLE_POS_Y

These attributes specify the relative position of the start hole within thefeature. The start hole position is expressed in the coordinate system ofthe feature.


Manufacturing

You must specify a name for the Wire EDM Start Hole Type attribute incustomer defaults. When you create a Wire EDM start hole, the name youspecify is assigned as an attribute of the sketch entity that represents theWire EDM start hole. The default name is PDW_WIRE. The start hole sketcharcs can also be identified independently as manufacturing features.

Where do I find it?

Wire EDM Start Hole Type customer default

Application ManufacturingMachiningFeature Navigator File®Utilities®Customer Defaults


Customer Defaults dialog box®Drafting®HoleTable®Attributes tab

Feature-based Machining for 3 to 5 axis machining

What is it?

In addition to Face Milling and Cavity Milling, the following processors cannow accept Machining Features as input:

• Fixed-axis Surface Contouring

• Variable-axis Surface Contouring (Streamline and Contour Profile drivemethods only)

• Z-Level Milling

• Variable-axis Z-Level Milling

• Planar Milling


Manufacturing

Geometry for 3 to 5 axis machining processors

What is it?

You can define geometry in the Machining Knowledge Editor to be used byNX manufacturing processors.

You can assign geometry for processors as follows:

Mill Area

Use Mill Area geometry to define geometry for the following processors.

• Fixed-axis Surface Contouring

• Variable-axis Surface Contouring (limited to Streamline and ContourProfile Drive Methods)

• Plunge Milling

• Z-Level Milling

• Variable-axis Z-Level Milling

Boundary

Use Boundary geometry to define geometry for the following processors:

• Planar Milling

• Wire EDM — Internal Trim

• Wire EDM — No Core

Parameter Based Geometry

Use Parameter Based Geometry to define Avoidance and Containmentgeometry in the following turning operations:

• Rough Turn

• Finish Turn

Where do I find it?

Geometry Objects come with the standard MACH kit installation and aredefined in the Machining Knowledge Editor Customization.

Machining Rules may now contain definitions of Geometry Parents. Theseare defined by means of a Rule Add-on.


Manufacturing

Solid Edge and user-defined features

What is it?

Solid Edge features and user-defined features are no longer identified whenyou first open the part file in Manufacturing.

The Find Features command now lets you control:• When to identify Solid Edge and user-defined features.

• Which Solid Edge and user-defined features to identify.

User-defined features with the attribute CAM_FEATURE_NAME appearin the Features to Identify list of the Find Features dialog box, and have ahigher priority than the standard manufacturing features.

For example, if you create a user-defined feature that is based on theSIMPLE_HOLE feature, and the value of CAM_FEATURE_NAME isMY_SIMPLE_HOLE:

– MY_SIMPLE_HOLE appears in the Features to Identify list inaddition to the SIMPLE_HOLE entry.

– If you select both the MY_SIMPLE_HOLE and SIMPLE_HOLE checkboxes, only MY_SIMPLE_HOLE is identified.

• Which advanced recognition settings, such as direction filtering, to applyfor Solid Edge and user-defined features.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingMachiningFeature Navigator Right-click in the background®Find Features

Machining Feature Navigator

What is it?

Machining Feature Navigator enhancements include the following:• In the Group View, geometry groups are now shown in the context ofthe workpiece and the MCS.

When you select a geometry group in the Group View of the MachiningFeature Navigator or the Geometry View of the Operation Navigator, itis selected in all locations.

Operation Navigator, GeometryView

Machining Feature Navigator,Group View


Manufacturing

• In the Feature View, machining features can be shown in the context ofthe part or assembly component to which they belong.

Machining Feature Navigator, Show Features Only turned on

Machining Feature Navigator, Show Features Only turned off

• The new Find Related Operations command highlights the operations inthe Operation Navigator that belong to the machining feature or geometrygroup selected in the Machining Feature Navigator.


Manufacturing

Machining Feature Navigator,Feature View

Operation Navigator, Machine ToolView

• The new Find Related Tools command highlights the tools in theOperation Navigator that belong to the machining feature or geometrygroup selected in the Machining Feature Navigator.




Manufacturing

• The new Find Related Features command highlights the machiningfeatures in the Machining Feature Navigator that belong to the program,tool, geometry or operation selected in the Operation Navigator.



• New Freeze Column and Unfreeze Column commands are available tocontrol column visibility when you scroll horizontally.

• You can enter values directly in the Details panel to override an attributevalue. It is no longer necessary to confirm changes by clicking Apply.

• The new Display Direction Vectors customer default lets you see thedirection vectors for selected machining features.

Where do I find it?

Machining Feature Navigator commands



Manufacturing

MachiningFeature Navigator

Right-click on the selected machining feature orgeometry group®Find Related Operations/FindRelated Tools

Right-click on the column heading®FreezeColumn/Unfreeze Column

Operation Navigator commands


Right-click on the selected program, tool, geometry oroperation®Object®Find Related Features

Display Direction Vectors customer default

Application ManufacturingMachiningFeature Navigator File®Utilities®Customer Defaults


Customer Defaults dialogbox®Manufacturing®Geometry®Features tab

Feature-based Machining PMI recognition

What is it?

Manufacturing features update in a part or assembly when the thread dataor other PMI data attached to one of the feature faces or edges is changed ordeleted.

You can choose to show or hide PMI data in the Machining Feature Navigator.

Part Navigator Machining Feature Navigator

PMI

Cylindrical Dimension

Surface Finish

Model feature

STEP1POCKET1

Surface Finish

STEP1POCKET2


Show PMI on


Manufacturing

Part Navigator Machining Feature Navigator

PMI


Surface Finish

Model feature

STEP1POCKET1

STEP1POCKET2

Show PMI off

If you select PMI in the Part Navigator it is also selected in the MachiningFeature Navigator.

Operation Navigator Machining Feature Navigator

Note

Only the Parametric Recognition option reads and interprets PMI data.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite The part must have PMI assigned.MachiningFeature Navigator Right-click in the background®Show PMI

Face color and attribute recognition

What is it?

You can specify any combination of face colors and face attributes to specifyregions of a solid body or sheet body for feature recognition. Face attributesmay also include a value that could determine or influence the recognitionresult.


Manufacturing


You can use color and attribute recognition to help specify regions formachining that may be difficult to recognize by topology or shape.

Where do I find it?

Declaration of feature types

Application Machining Knowledge Editor

WindowsStart®All Programs®NX x.x®ManufacturingTools®Machining Knowledge Editor


Machining Knowledge Editor dialogbox®View®Customization

Definition of ColorAndAttributRecognitionRule


Machining Knowledge Editor dialog box®FeatureRecognition tab

For a complete example, see Chapter 6 of the Machining Knowledge EditorOnline help.

Create Feature Process

What is it?

The Create Feature Process command replaces the Create Geometrycommand for Feature-based Machining. Use the Create Feature Processcommand to automatically create machining operations based on the selectedmanufacturing features. You can do the following:

• Create rule based or template based operations.

• Select the Knowledge Library.

• Specify which Geometry group to place the operations in. There is alsoan Automatic option

• Specify how to create feature groups.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingMachiningFeature Navigator

Right-click the selected machining features®CreateFeature Process


Manufacturing

Accessing objects in Feature-based Machining

What is it?

You can access different objects by defining them as a Rule Add-on. Theobjects that you can define include the following:

• Cycles, such as Break_Chip and Drill_Csink for all Hole Makingoperations.

• Knowledge Fusion (KF) parameters for the attributes of all operationtypes.

• Non Cutting Moves (NCM) for all Milling operations.

• Cut Levels for Cavity Milling operations.

• User Defined Events (UDE) for all operation types.

Where do I find it?




Machining Knowledge Editor dialog box®MachiningKnowledge tab®Add-ons tab

Machining Knowledge Editor available for Windows 64-bit

What is it?

The Machining Knowledge Editor is now available for both Windows 32-bitand Windows 64-bit versions.

Where do I find it?




Manufacturing

Integrated Simulation and Visualization

Tool Path Simulate

What is it?

Use the Tool Path Simulate command to simulate machine tool motion beforethe tool paths have been postprocessed.

The software uses the loaded machine kinematics for simulation and collisiondetection. The Tool Path Simulate command supports IPW and collisionchecking.


This command gives you the ability to simulate tool paths without apostprocessor or machine tool driver, so that you can analyze manufacturingoperations earlier in the programming work flow.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteYou must have a tool path and a machine withkinematics defined.

Toolbar Operations®Simulate MachineMenu Tools→Operation Navigator→Tool Path→Simulate


Manufacturing

OperationNavigatorRight-click an operation®Tool Path→Simulate .Location in dialogbox

Simulation Control Panel dialog box®Animationgroup®Visualization list®Tool Path Simulate

Classifying cutting vs non-cutting areas of a Tool Assembly

What is it?

You can create a new Tool Base Component, and the system automaticallyadds two sub-components, named CUTTING and NON_CUTTTING in theMachine Tool Navigator. You can now add the tooling geometries to therespective sub-components.

For Example:

• For milling tools, the flute length identifies the cutting section of the tool.The shaft and tool holder are considered non-cutting.

• For turning tools, the insert identifies the cutting section of the tool. Thetool holder is considered non-cutting.


Manufacturing

The preceding examples show the following:

Tool Assembly

Cutting insert

Non-Cutting tool holder

Note

ISV uses this information during the tool path simulation.


Precise tooling information provides you with more accurate tool pathsimulation.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite You must be in the Machine Tool NavigatorLocation innavigator Classification column

Generating spinning geometry in a cutting tool

What is it?

Use the Machine Tool Builder to classify the cutting and non-cutting sectionsof a tool assembly. You can then generate spinning geometry on variousparts of the tool.


Manufacturing

Old tool displayed in ISV with no spinning

New tool displayed with spinning

Note

The spinning geometry is added to the tool’s kinematic component aschild with the added system classification of SPINNING and extensionSPUN added to the name located on the Machine Tool Navigator.


Spinning geometry gives you a precise means of verification to check formaterial removal and collision checking during simulation process.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite You must be in the Machine Tool NavigatorLocation in dialogbox Classification column®right click®Spin Geometry

Automatic Part, Blank, and Check geometry in ISV

What is it?

ISV recognizes the Part, Blank and Check geometry defined for an operation.It is not necessary to define the geometry again in the Machine ToolNavigator.


Manufacturing

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

Operations with defined geometry and generated toolpaths.

A defined machine assembly.

Preview Motion

What is it?

Use the Preview Motion command to control the position of each machineaxis and view it relative to the other axes.


Manufacturing


You can view the machine tool motion of all axes from one dialog box withoutsimulating the tool path. You can also dynamically move each axis betweenits limits, as you would move an axis on the real machine tool.

Where do I find it?

Application Manufacturing or Machine Tool BuilderPrerequisite A defined machine assembly.Machine ToolNavigator Right-click in the background®Preview Motion

Synchronization

What is it?

You can now view synchronization status in the Channel column of theOperation Navigator. You can find program groups with synchronizationdata, and delete the synchronization, directly from the Operation Navigator.


This allows you to remove synchronization without opening theSynchronization Manager.


Manufacturing

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingPrerequisite A Program parent group with synchronization data

OperationNavigator

Right-click the Programgroup®Toolpath®Synchronize

Right-click the Program group®Toolpath®RemoveSynchronization



What is it?

NX CMM Inspection Programming is an application that you use to definecomplete, verifiable machine inspection programs for Coordinate MeasuringMachines (CMMs) and NC (Numerical Control) machine tools, withappropriate post-processors or additional software such as CMM InspectionExecution. Using an inspection file that works in synch with the masterNX model file, NX CMM Inspection Programming unites the world of themanufacturing shop floor with manufacturing planning and design so thatshop floor operators and design engineers can easily share unambiguousinspection data.


Manufacturing

Because NX CMM Inspection Programming is fully integrated with NX PMIand Manufacturing, PMI annotations and design updates to the master modelautomatically update in your inspection programs. Annotations are easilyselectable, and can encapsulate requirements as well as part information.

NX CMM Inspection Programming offers these benefits over other inspectionapplications:

• The ability to program against the original NX master model.

• PMI associativity that lets you quickly import inspection features andtolerances, as well as automatic inspection paths for those tolerancesand features.

• Use of an inspection method library to automate inspection paths andparameters using customizable templates.

• Machine and tool library storage.

• Full machine simulation and collision detection.

• Dimensional Measurement Interface Specification (DMIS) compliantsource files that you can use to execute an inspection job and displayoperator work instructions and inspection results at the CMM or NCmachine.


Manufacturing

Where do I find it?

Application NX CMM Inspection ProgrammingMenu File®NewLocation in dialogbox Inspection tab®select a template file

NX CMM Inspection Programming workflow

NX CMM Inspection Programming is based on the NX Manufacturingarchitecture and offers many flexible ways to inspect a model. Although youcan complete many tasks in different orders, the following represents atypical workflow.

1. Open an NX master part file to inspect and optionally, create tolerancesand annotations in PMI.

2. Create an inspection file that references the NX master model.


Manufacturing

Insert, Feature,and TolerancetoolbarsInspectionNavigatorNavigator,Actions, andOperationstoolbars

3. Retrieve a virtual CMM model, probe head, and probe from a library, andalign the master model as necessary.

4. Link to PMI to import:


Manufacturing

• Inspection features for all toleranced solids, based upon modelgeometry.

• GD&T and direct tolerance information.

• Automatic inspection paths on the toleranced features.


Manufacturing

Note

Any tolerance and feature names you define in PMI are retainedin NX CMM Inspection Programming.

5. Add additional elements, including:

• Features, such as points, lines, planes, cylinders, curves, surfaces,patterns, arcs, circles, spheres, cones, closed and open slots and tabs,and tori.

• Tolerances, including:

– Direct tolerances such as distance between, angle between,coordinate, diameter, radius, width, and cone angle.

– Datum definitions and most GD&T tolerances.

• Special features and inspection paths.

Constructedfeatures

Inspectionpaths

Multi-featurepaths

6. Calibrate and simulate your processes using NX collision detection.


Manufacturing

7. Output your processes to a Dimensional Measuring Interface Standard(DMIS) file and then run the program on an actual CMM.

8. In a solution such as Dimensional Planning and Validation (DPV),statistically compare the results file created from your inspection run tothe NX CMM Inspection Programming process.


http://www.plm.automation.siemens.com/en_us/products/tecnomatix/quality_mgmt/dim_plan_val/index.shtml

Manufacturing

9. Edit your process if necessary. You can delete, modify, or add new features,tolerances, probes, and inspection operations.

Manufacturing Teamcenter Integration

Postprocessing time stored in Teamcenter Part Planner

What is it?

The machining time calculated by the postprocessor for the program oroperation in NX, is stored in Part Planner as the Duration attribute of theactivity.

Name Time


Manufacturing

00:11:05

Postprocessed operation in NX Operation Navigator

Line Duration (Sec)012.6

Activity for the saved operation in Teamcenter Part Planner

Note

The Duration time in Part Planner may be different from the Timevalue in NX because the postprocessing calculations may include otherfactors such as dwell time.

Where do I find it?

Product TeamcenterApplication Part Planner

Prerequisite

Teamcenter 8.1 or later

NX 7.0 or laterLocation inTeamcenter Part Planner tab®Activity panel®Operation Activities

Time per tool stored in Teamcenter Part Planner

What is it?

For each tool, the cutting time is the sum of the actual machining times for allManufacturing operations that use the tool.

Name Tool Number Time. 00:21:261005 00:05:321006 00:15:30

Postprocessed program group in NX Operation Navigator, ProgramOrder View

Line Description Duration(Sec) Tool Number

Activity Root Object 0 0UG CAM program group 1262.65 0


Manufacturing

Post 256.99 1005Post 708.06 1006

Postprocessed program group as an activity in Teamcenter PartPlanner

Note

The Duration time in Part Planner may be different from the Timevalue in NX because the postprocessing calculations may include otherfactors such as dwell time.

Where do I find it?

Temporary directory for tool output

Product NXApplication Manufacturing

Prerequisite cam_part_planner_library.dat configurationMenu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Manufacturing®Output®Postprocessingtab®Teamcenter Integration group

View activities in NX


Prerequisite cam_part_planner_library.dat configurationTeamcenterNavigator Manufacturing Activities panel

Product TeamcenterApplication Part Planner

Prerequisite

Teamcenter 8.1 or later

NX 7.5 or laterLocation inTeamcenter Part Planner tab®Operation Activities


Manufacturing

Postprocessors managed in Teamcenter

What is it?

Teamcenter supports managing and distributing postprocessors. To use onlyTeamcenter postprocessors in NX, you must select the Use Postprocessorsand ISV Drivers from Teamcenter customer default.

The postprocessors from Teamcenter are loaded into a specified temporarydirectory when you open a part file in NX.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

The Teamcenter administrator must first importthe postprocessing files and ISV drivers into theTeamcenter database, or you will get an error.



Manufacturing®Output®Postprocessingtab®Teamcenter Integration group®UsePostprocessors and ISV Drivers fromTeamcenter/Temporary Directory

Correct version of Manufacturing templates loaded for NX sessions

What is it?

Teamcenter supports multiple versions of the NX Manufacturing templatesin a single database. The administrator for your Teamcenter installationimports the Manufacturing templates for each release. After you set thetemplate preference in Teamcenter, the correct Manufacturing templates foryour NX version are loaded.

NX75 CAM Setup Templatesmachining_knowledge_metric_NX75MillTurn_Express_metric_NX75DieMold_Express_metric_NX75turning_metric_NX75MillTurn_Express_target_metric_NX75mold_sequences_metric_NX75

Version specific CAM templates in Teamcenter

Release Teamcenter preference string


Manufacturing

NX 7.5

Includes Manufacturing PAX filesupport.

TC_NX_FileNewPAXFiles_NX75

For more information on the existing PAX file support added in NX 6.0.3, seeStoring template PAX files in Teamcenter.

Where do I find it?

Manufacturing setup templates:

Product NX


Prerequisite

Teamcenter 8.0.1 or later

NX 7.5 or later

Menu

File®New®Manufacturing tab

Start®ManufacturingLocation in dialogbox New dialog box®Templates group

Manufacturing operation templates:


Prerequisite

Teamcenter 8.0.1 or later

NX 7.5 or laterMenu Insert®OperationLocation in dialogbox Create Operation dialog box®Type group

Post Builder

Post Builder enhancements for Sinumerik controllers

What is it?

Enhanced Siemens Sinumerik controller support includes:

• Extensive machine testing for the standard Sinumerik 840D templatepost.


Manufacturing

• Improved presentation within groups for Sinumerik cycles UDEs.

• Siemens style inputs for Canned Cycles. and the Macro tab.

• Siemens cycle parameters, such as CYCLE81.

Where do I find it?

Siemens – Sinumerik840D template post

Application Post BuilderMenu File®NewLocation in dialogbox Controller group®Library list

Canned Cycles

Application Post BuilderLocation in dialogbox Program & Tool Path tab®Program tab®Tool Path

Siemens cycle parameters


Manufacturing

Application Post BuilderLocation in dialogbox Program & Tool Path tab®Macro tab

Sinumerik 840D user-defined events



Operation dialog box®Machine Control group®Edit

(Start of Path Events)

Post Builder support for Siemens Sinumerik controllers

What is it?

The following template posts support Siemens Sinumerik controllers:

• Sinumerik_840D supports milling machines with the Sinumerik 840Dcontroller.

Support includes CYCLE800 and TRANS/AROT coordinate rotationoutput.

• Sinumerik_840D_lathe supports 2-axis turning machines with theSinumerik 840D controller.

• Sinumerik_828D supports milling machines with the Sinumerik 828Dcontroller.

• Sinumerik_802D_3axis supports 3-axis milling machines with theSinumerik 802D controller.

You can add the following user-defined start events to support the Siemenscontrollers:

• Add a start event for the Sinumerik 840D controller to a single millingoperation, or to the lowest level program group in the Program view of theOperation Navigator. The default parameter settings in the Sinumerik840D start event dialog box are the same as the default settings in theSinumerik 840D template post.

If you choose Swiveling in the Transformation option of theSinumerik_840D user-defined event, CYCLE800 is output andtransformation is turned off (TRAFOFF), otherwise TRANS/AROT isoutput for coordinate rotation.

The Sinumerik 840D user-defined event is available in theSinumerik_840D template post.


Manufacturing

• Add the DNC Header user-defined event to the top working programgroup under NC_PROGRAM so that the NC file can be accessed by theSiemens MCIS (Motion Control Information System).

The DNC Header user-defined event is available in all milling templateposts.

• Add the Sinumerik Program Control user-defined event to a programgroup so that you can call external subroutines.

The Sinumerik Program Control user-defined event is available in theSinumerik_840D and Sinumerik_828D template post.

Note

DNC Header and Sinumerik Program Control user-defined eventsshould not be assigned to an operation.

You can set the Sinumerik version in Post Builder with the custom commandPB_CMD_set_Sinumerik_Version in Sinumerik_840D postprocessors.

Sinumerik version 6 and later support CYCLE832 high speed machining Gcode output.

Where do I find it?

Post Builder template posts

Application Post BuilderMenu File®NewLocation in dialogbox Controller group®Library list

Custom commands

Application Post BuilderLocation in dialogbox Program & Tool Path tab®Custom Command tab

Sinumerik 840D user-defined events



Operation dialog box®Machine Control group®Edit

(Start of Path Events)


Manufacturing

Improved Post performance

What is it?

You can add the new custom commandPB_CMD_activate_Fanuc_turbo_modeto the Start of Program event of the Program Start Sequence. This commandimproves the postprocessing performance of Fanuc style posts for four andfive-axis machines.

There are also general improvements to NX Post performance.

Where do I find it?

Import the PB_CMD_activate_Fanuc_turbo_mode custom command.

Application Post BuilderLocation in dialogbox

Program & Tool Path tab®Custom Commandtab®Import

File location POSTBUILD/pblib/custom_command/pb_cmd_activate_turbo_mode.tcl

Add the custom command to the Start of Program event.

Application Post BuilderLocation in dialogbox

Program & Tool Path tab®Program tab®ProgramStart Sequence marker

Wire/EDM

Wire/EDM No-core Follow Periphery

What is it?

You can generate a continuous cut using the Follow Periphery cutpattern option. You can either create a thread hole, or have the softwareinfer it. This cut pattern cuts from the inside out to ensure that all materialwithin the boundaries is removed.


Manufacturing


Use this option when the Spiral cut pattern cannot remove all materialwithin the boundaries, or give you the desired surface finish.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

Type must be set to wire_edm in the Create Operationdialog box.

The NOCORE operation subtype must be selected.Location in dialogbox NOCORE®Cut Pattern®Follow Periphery

Fill and Silhouette Fill display options

What is it?

Fill and Silhouette Fill display options are added to help you view the areacut by the wire.

Fill


Manufacturing

Silhouette Fill


It can be difficult to see the area being cut when displaying the tool path in awireframe silhouette. These display options shade the actual cut operation, sothat you can ensure that all the material within a region or boundary is cut.

Where do I find it?

Application ManufacturingLocation in dialogbox

Operation dialog box®Tool Path group®EditDisplay®Path Display


Chapter

12 Digital Simulation

NX 7.5 Advanced Simulation

Solver version support

For each released version of NX, the following tables list the supported solverversions for import, export, and the post-processing of results. Note:

• The version listed in the “Import ASCII” and “Import Binary” rows is thesolver version that was generally available when the NX version wasreleased. In general, the import of the solver ASCII and binary filesshould be upwards compatible. Therefore, you should be able to importthem into the most recent version of NX. However, in general:

– ASCII files are backwards compatible for import into NX. If you importan ASCII file from a newer version of the solver than is officiallysupported, the software simply ignores any new fields/options thataren’t supported in the current NX release.

– Binary files are not backwards compatible. For example, you canimport a binary file created by NX Nastran 5.0 into NX 6.0.2 , butyou might not be able to import a binary file created by NX Nastran6.1 into NX 5.

• The version listed in the “Export ASCII” rows is the solver version thatwas available when the NX version was tested. In general, the exportedsolver input file is upwards compatible for that solver. Backwardscompatibility is not guaranteed. For NX Nastran, the Model SetupCheck function in Advanced Simulation tries to flag potential versionincompatibility issues.

• The version listed in the “Post-processing Results” rows is the version ofthe solver results that was tested in the listed NX version. In general,results from earlier solver versions are also supported.


Digital Simulation

NX 7 releases

Solver File Type NX 7 NX 7.5Import ASCII (.dat) 6.1 7.0

Import Binary (.op2) 6.1 7.0Export ASCII (.dat) 6.1 7.0

NX Nastran

Post-processing of Results 6.1 7.0Import ASCII (.dat) 2008r1 2008r1Import Binary (.op2) 2008r1 2008r1Export ASCII (.dat) 2008r1 2008r1

MSC Nastran

Post-processing of Results 2008r1 2008r1Import ASCII (.inp) 6.8-1 6.9–1Import Binary N/A N/AExport ASCII (.inp) 6.8-1 6.9Post-processing of Results(.fil)

6.8-EF2 6.9.2

Abaqus

Post-processing of Results(.odb)

6.8-EF2 6.9–EF1

Import ASCII (PREP7,CDB)

12 12.1

Import Binary (.rst, .rth) 12 12.1Export ASCII (.inp) 12 12.1

ANSYS

Post-processing of Results 12 12.1Import ASCII N/A N/AImport Binary N/A N/AExport ASCII (.k) 971R3.2.1 971R3.2.1

LS-DYNA

Post-processing of Results N/A N/A

NX 6 releases

Solver File Type NX 6 NX6.0.1

NX 6.0.2 NX 6.0.3 NX 6.0.4 NX6.0.5

ImportASCII (.dat)

6.0 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 7.0

ImportBinary (.op2)

6.0 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 7.0

ExportASCII (.dat)

6.0 6.1 6.1 6.1 6.1 7.0

NXNastran

Post_processing ofResults

6.0 6.0 6.1 6.1 7.0 7.0


Digital Simulation


NX 6.0.2 NX 6.0.3 NX 6.0.4 NX6.0.5

ImportASCII (.dat)

2007r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1

ImportBinary (.op2)

2007r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1

ExportASCII (.dat)

2007r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1

MSCNastran


2007r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1

ImportASCII (.inp)

6.7-1 6.8-1 6.8-1 6.8-1 6.8-1 6.8-1

ImportBinary

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

ExportASCII (.inp)

6.7-1 6.8-1 6.8-1 6.8-1 6.8-1 6.8-1

Post_processing ofResults (.fil)

6.7-5 6.8-1 6.8-3 6.8-EF2 6.8-EF2 6.8-EF2

Abaqus

Post-_processingof Results(.odb)

N/A N/A N/A 6.8-EF 6.8-EF2 6.9-EF2

ImportASCII(PREP7,CDB)

11 11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1 12.0 12.0

ImportBinary (.rst,.rth)

11 11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1 12.0 12.0

ExportASCII (.inp)

11 11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1 12.0 12.0

ANSYS


11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1 12.0 12.1

ImportASCII


ImportBinary


ExportASCII (.k)

971R2 971R2 971R3.2.1971R3.2.1971R3.2.1971R3.2.1

LS-DYNA




Digital Simulation

NX 5 releases


NX5.0.2

NX5.0.3

NX5.0.4

NX5.0.5

NX5.0.6

Import ASCII(.dat)

5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1

Import Binary(.op2)

5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1

Export ASCII(.dat)

5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1

NXNastran

Post-processing ofResults

5.0 5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 6.0

Import ASCII(.dat)

2005 2005 2007 2007 2007 2007 2007r1

Import Binary(.op2)

2005 2005 2007 2007 2007 2007 2007r1

Export ASCII(.dat)

2005 2005 2007 2007 2007 2007 2007r1

MSCNastran


2005 2005 2007 2007 2007 2007 2008r1

Import ASCII(.inp)

6.6 6.6 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1

Import Binary N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/AExport ASCII(.inp)

6.6 6.6 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1

Abaqus


6.6 6.6 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.8-1

Import ASCII(PREP7, CDB)

10 10 11 11 11 11 11

Import Binary(.rst, .rth)

10 10 11 11 11 11 11

Export ASCII(.inp)

10 10 11 11 11 11 11

ANSYS


10 11 11 11 11 11 11 SP1


Digital Simulation

NX 4 releases

Solver File Type NX 4 NX 4.0.1 NX 4.0.2 NX 4.0.3 NX 4.0.4Import ASCII(.dat)

4.0 4.1 4.1 5.0 5.0

Import Binary(.op2)

4.0 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1

Export ASCII(.dat)

4.0 4.1 4.1 5.0 5.0NXNastran

Post-processingof Results

4.0 4.1 4.1 5.0 5.0

Import ASCII(.dat)

2005 2005 2005 2005 2005

Import Binary(.op2)

2005 2005 2005 2005 2005

Export ASCII(.dat)

2005 2005 2005 2005 2005MSCNastran


2005 2005 2005 2005 2005

Import ASCII(.inp)

6.5-1 6.5-1 6.5-1 6.6 6.6

Import Binary N/A N/A N/A N/A N/AExport ASCII(.inp)

6.5-1 6.5-1 6.5-1 6.6 6.6Abaqus


6.5-1 6.5-1 6.5-1 6.6 6.6-3


8 9 9 10 10


8 9 9 10 10

Export ASCII(.inp)

8 9 9 10 10ANSYS


9 9 9 10 10

Multimedia and training content in Help

Beginning with this release, the Advanced Simulation online Help includestwo new types of rich content to help you learn to use Advanced Simulation.

Show-me demonstrations

Short software demonstrations are now included for selected AdvancedSimulation workflows. In each Show me, the steps for a given task aredemonstrated in a recorded movie for you to watch, pause, rewind, orfast-forward as needed.


Digital Simulation

To view a Show me, you must have the Adobe Flash Player installedon your system. You can download the Flash Player (free) athttp://www.adobe.com/products/flashplayer.

Try-it activities

Step-by-step activities are also now provided for selected AdvancedSimulation workflows. Each Try it includes a sample part or simulation fileyou can open directly from the Help topic, as well as the steps for running theexample on your own system.

A Try it is a focused subset of a training activity. After working through thesteps in the Try it, if you need additional information, you can then refer tothe full version of the activity in the self-paced training available on LearningAdvantage.

Where do I find it?

Show mes are available in help topics where you see theShow Me link or from the Show-me demonstrations book at the top of theAdvanced Simulation Help table of contents. Selected Show mes are alsoincluded in What’s New articles.

Try its are available in help topics where you see the Try It link.

Teamcenter Integration for Simulation

Simulation Search View

What is it?

Simulation Search View is an extension of the Simulation File View panelin the Simulation Navigator that allows you to search Teamcenter for CAEitems related to the current item.

To use Simulation Search View, right-click an item revision in the SimulationFile View and choose Find CAE Items:

• If you right-click a master part item revision, the software finds allidealized part item revisions and FEM item revisions related to themaster part.


http://www.adobe.com/products/flashplayer

Digital Simulation

• If you right-click an idealized part item revision, the software finds allFEM item revisions related to the idealized part.

• If you right-click a FEM item revision, the software finds all relatedSimulation item revisions.

Double-click any part in Simulation Search View to load it and display itin the Simulation Navigator.

To return to the Simulation File View, right-click Teamcenter Search Resultsand choose Switch to Session View.


When using the Teamcenter for Simulation data model, you can use the CAEManager in the Teamcenter client to easily find related CAE items, but priorto this release, there was no easy way to find related CAE items in NX. UsingSimulation Search View, you can quickly and easily find all CAE data relatedto the master part without leaving NX.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced Simulation, Design Simulation

PrerequisiteRunning NX with Teamcenter Integration using theTeamcenter for Simulation data model.


Digital Simulation

Resource bar Simulation NavigatorSimulationNavigator

Simulation File View®right-click an itemrevision®Find CAE Items

Clone enhancements

What is it?

The Clone command has been enhanced to include the option of revising themaster part item along with the CAE items. On the Clone dialog box, chooseCreate New Revision from the Action list and select the Include Mastercheck box. The Master file group becomes active, and you can specify a newrevision level for the master part.


By including the master part in the new revision, you set a consistent revisionlevel for each iteration of your CAE data, and establish a clean baseline forfurther analysis.

Where do I find it?



SimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation node® Clone.

Right-click the FEM node ® Clone.

General capabilities

Simulation Navigator enhancements

What is it?

The Simulation Navigator has been enhanced to improve the ability to findand manage analysis data. These enhancements include:

• Material and physical property views.

• Additional entity support.

Material and physical property views

The standard view of data in the Simulation Navigator organizes data byelement order; that is, all 3D mesh collectors are grouped together, and


Digital Simulation

likewise for 2D, 1D and 0D mesh collectors. For large models containingmultiple mesh collectors, it can be difficult to determine how physical andmaterial properties are distributed among meshes.

Beginning in this release, you can now set the Simulation Navigator viewto Physical View or Material View. In these views, the navigator lists alldefined phyisical or material properties in the FEM. You can then expand theproperty to view all mesh collectors that use that property.

To change the view, right-click an empty area in the navigator and choose aview option from the menu.

Additional entity support

You can now view and manage the following entities in the SimulationNavigator:

• Coordinate systems

• Groups

• Fields

• Regions

• DOF sets

Use the Filter command to control which of these entities are displayed in thenavigator. You can remove unneeded categories to reduce clutter.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisites FEM file displayed.

Resource bar Simulation Navigator

SimulationNavigator

Right-click an empty area®Standard View

Right-click an empty area®Material View

Right-click an empty area®Physical View

Right-click an empty area®Filter


Digital Simulation

Coordinate system support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes improved and expanded support for coordinate systems.

Coordinate systems managed in the Simulation Navigator

Use the new CSYS node in the Simulation Navigator to manage the coordinatesystems in your model. The CSYS node is available whether you have anidealized part, FEM file, or Simulation file active. Use the CSYS node to:

• Create new coordinate systems.

• Manage or modify existing coordinate systems

• View the hierarchical relationship between coordinate systems.

• Control the visibility of coordinate systems.

• Set a selected coordinate system as the work coordinate system (WCS).

Managing coordinate systems in the Simulation Navigator is helpful,particularly when you are working with a complex model or assembly FEMthat may contain several hundred coordinate systems.

CSYS1 – Solar Panel Inner CSYS2 – Solar Panel Outer CSYS3 – Telescope Body CSYS

Import and export improvements for coordinate systems

NX now preserves any defined coordinate system hierarchy and coordinatesystem IDs (labels) during import and export. Previously:

• If you exported a model that contained a hierarchy of coordinate systems,the software wrote out the child coordinate systems with respect to theNX absolute coordinate system. Additionally, any assigned IDs for thecoordinate systems in the model were not preserved. However, though the


Digital Simulation

hierarchy and original ID numbers were not retained, the model stillsolved with the same results.

• If you imported a model that contained defined coordinate systems, thesoftware imported them with respect to the NX absolute coordinatesystem. Any assigned IDs for those coordinate systems were notpreserved. However, the model still solved with the same results.

Now, when you export or import a model, the software:

• Preserves any existing coordinate system hierarchy.

• Writes or reads in any assigned coordinate system ID for solvers, such asNastran, that support coordinate system IDs.

Additionally, you can now export multiple coordinate systems that havethe same origin and orientation as long as they are all referenced in eitherthe FEM or Simulation file. Previously, if the software detected multiplecoordinate systems with the same origin and orientation, it would onlyexport a single instance of that coordinate system. Now, for example, if yourmodel contains five coordinate systems superimposed over the NX absolutecoordinate system, the software writes all five systems to the solver input file,provided that they are all referenced in either the FEM or Simulation file.

Circular Edges selection method

What is it?

Use the Circular Edges selection method to select all circular edges on apolygon body or face.

Select a polygon body or polygon face to select all circular edges that matchthe criteria specified in the Smart Selector Options dialog box.


Digital Simulation

Show Me


Use the Circular Edges selection method whenever you are definingconnections or boundary conditions on circular edges. This method isespecially useful when using the new Bolt Connection command. See**Unsatisfied xref title** for more information.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced Simulation

Prerequisite

In a command that supports smart selection, choosePolygon Edge or Polygon Body from the Type Filterin the Selection Bar.


Digital Simulation

Toolbar

Selection Bar®Selection Methods®Circular Edges

Selection Bar®Smart Selector Options

New option for creating a FEM file with visible bodies

What is it?

Now, when you create a new FEM file that is associated with a CAD part,you can use the new All Visible option to create the FEM file using only thecurrently visible bodies. In previous releases, you could either create a FEMfile on all bodies or just on selected bodies.

• If you created a FEM using only selected bodies, and you later added newbodies to the idealized part, the new bodies would not get automaticallyadded to the FEM.

• If you created a FEM using all bodies, you often included more bodies inyour FEM file than were necessary for the analysis. For example, modelsoften include either construction geometry or bodies on hidden layers thatare not relevant to a CAE workflow.

When you select the new All Visible option from the Bodies to Use list in theNew FEM dialog box, the software only adds the bodies that are currentlydisplayed in the FEM file. If you later display additional bodies, the softwareautomatically adds those to the FEM file. Similarly, if you perform operationson the idealized part that create new bodies, the software automaticallyadds those to the FEM file. For example, if you create a midsurface on asolid part, the software automatically adds the new midsurface sheet bodiesto the FEM file.

Note

With the All Visible bodies option, the software does not remove a bodyfrom a FEM file if you later hide the body.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active part or idealized partSimulationNavigator

Right-click the part or idealized part and choose NewFEM


Digital Simulation

Display controls

Model Display

What is it?

The Model Display command replaces the Node and Element Displaycommand found in previous releases. In addition to the node and elementdisplay options found in previous releases, Model Display lets you control thebasis on which colors are assigned to elements in your model. You can use thedefault colors assigned to the mesh collectors, or you can display elementsin different colors based on the physical properties or material propertiesassigned to the mesh.


Digital Simulation

The same model showing (1) default colors based on mesh collectordisplay settings; (2) colors based on physical property tables; and (3)

colors based on material property tables.


When interrogating large or complex models, you can quickly identify by colorwhich meshes share the same physical or material properties by changing


Digital Simulation

the Color Basis option. Likewise, any errors in physical or material propertyassignments are immediately visible. Or, you can use the Color Basis optionsto quickly distinguish different meshes by color without having to manuallyspecify the display settings for each mesh collector individually.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationMenu Preferences®Model Display

Hiding 3D and 2D element edges

What is it?

For 3D and 2D elements, Mesh Display options now include the ability tocontrol the display of element edges in shaded displays.

When you turn off the display of element edges, the elements remainselectable for any element-based operations.


Digital Simulation

(1) Element edges on a fine mesh distort when zoomed out. (2)The same mesh with element edges hidden. (3) Elements remain

selectable when edges are hidden.


For very large models or very fine meshes, the mesh display can becomedifficult to resolve visually when zoomed out. Clear the Display ShadedElement Edges check box on theMesh Display dialog box for a cleaner display.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains 3D or 2D elements.Menu Preferences®Mesh Display


Digital Simulation

SimulationNavigator

In the FEM, right-click the 2D mesh collector or 2Dmesh ® Edit Display. Clear the Display ShadedElement Edges check box.

In the Simulation file, right-click the 2D mesh collectoror 2D mesh ® Create Display Override or EditTemporary Display. Clear the Display Shaded ElementEdges check box.

Persistent 2D mesh offset display

What is it?

NX 7 introduced the capability to display a graphical representation of thethickness of the 2D elements in your model. This release enhances thatcapability to include shell offsets when representing thickness values.

(1) A 2D mesh with persistent thickness display. (2) The same meshwith an offset applied.


Display 2D Element Thickness and Offset builds on the previous releaseby providing more accurate displays of element thickness. You can quicklyidentify missing or inaccurate offset values and 2D mesh discontinuities.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteAn active FEM file that contains 2D elements withdefined thickness and offset values.

Menu Preferences®Mesh Display

SimulationNavigator

In the FEM, right-click the 2D mesh collector or 2Dmesh ® Edit Display. Select Display 2D ElementThickness and Offset.

In the Simulation file, right-click the 2D meshcollector or 2D mesh ® Create Display Override orEdit Temporary Display. Select Display 2D ElementThickness and Offset.

Persistent beam mesh display options

What is it?

This release includes several options to control the persistent display of crosssections for 1D meshes:

• Persistent solid display of cross sections.

• Persistent wireframe display of cross sections.

• Individual display controls for cross section orientation, end releases, andorientation vectors.

You control these display options for 1D meshes on the Mesh Display dialogbox.


Digital Simulation

Persistent solid cross section display

When you choose Solid from the Display Section list on the Mesh Displaydialog box, the software renders beam elements as 3D solids, extrudingsection geometry along the length of the element.

You can use a solid cross section display to quickly and intuitively identifyissues with beam orientation or section definitions. Solid cross sectiondisplays also provide a more realistic rendering of models incorporating beammeshes for documenting and presenting your analysis.


Digital Simulation

Persistent wireframe cross section display

In previous releases, you could generate only a temporary wireframe beamsection display. In this release, you can choose Curves from the DisplaySection list to create a persistent wireframe display showing cross sectiongeometry at each node of your mesh.

Displaying cross section orientation, end releases, and orientation vectors

You can turn off and on the display of symbols indicating a number of beamattributes:

• Display Section Orientation displays the current orientation of beamsections using an XYZ triad at each node.

• Display End Releases represents end releases (also called pin flags)using a symbol at each end of each beam where an end release is defined.


Digital Simulation

Translational end releases are shown as +, rotational releases as 0, andcombined releases as *.

• Display Orientation Vector displays defined orientation vectors using aline segment labeled V extending in the vector direction from each node.

Turn these settings on to confirm beam orientation and attributes, and toidentify any issues. Turn these settings off for a less cluttered display.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteAn active FEM file that contains beam elements withdefined sections and associated data.

MenuPreferences®Mesh Display. From the Type list, select1D Mesh


Digital Simulation

SimulationNavigator

In the FEM, right-click the 1D mesh collector or 1Dmesh ® Edit Display

In the Simulation file, right-click the 1D mesh collectoror 1D mesh ® Create Display Override or EditTemporary Display

Geometry idealization

Split body enhancements

What is it?

This release includes improvements to the Split Body command.

Color coding for sweepable bodies

Use the new Check for Sweepable Body option in the Split Body dialog boxto check whether the software is likely to be able to generate a structured 3Dmesh through the body. When you select Check for Sweepable Body, thesoftware temporarily changes the color of the selected bodies as follows:

• Red indicates that you cannot currently generate a swept mesh on thebody. You must divide the body further before you can generate a sweptmesh.

• Yellow indicates that the software has identified ambiguous target faces.Depending on how you define the source and target faces when you definethe swept mesh, you may be able to generate a hexahedral mesh withoutfurther splitting the body. However, you may still need to divide the bodybefore you can successfully generate a hexahedral mesh.

• Green indicates that you can generate a swept mesh on the body.

While you use the Split Body dialog box, the temporary colors updateautomatically as you divide the geometry. In the following graphic, (A)shows a part with its original colors. (B) shows the part with the Check forSweepable Body check box selected.


Digital Simulation

Simulation options available in the Modeling application

The Split Body command is available in both the Advanced Simulation andModeling applications. By default, Simulation specific options, such as Checkfor Sweepable Body, do not display in the Split Body dialog box in theModeling application. To view these options in the Modeling application:

• Select the Show Simulation-Specific Dialog Items in Modeling optionin the Modeling Preferences dialog box to view the items during yourcurrent NX session.

• Select the Show Simulation-Specific Dialog Items in Modeling option onthe Miscellaneous tab in the Modeling Customer Defaults to view theitems by default in all future NX sessions.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An idealized part active and the body promoted

Toolbar Advanced Simulation®Split Body

Geometry idealization command and workflow changes

What is it?

This release includes changes to both the idealized part workflow and thegeometry idealization commands.

Promotion or WAVE linking is now required for modifications to theidealized part

An idealized part is an assembly that contains lightweight occurrences of allthe components in your original part. You cannot make changes to theselightweight occurrences without first creating an associative copy of the body.

Previously, most geometry idealization commands in Advanced Simulation,such as Midsurface, Suppress Feature, and Idealize Geometry automaticallypromoted all bodies within the idealized part. Now, before you can modifya body within the idealized part, you must use either the Promote Bodycommand or the WAVE Geometry Linker to create an associative copy ofthe geometry. This makes the behavior of the idealized part commandsin Advanced Simulation consistent with the behavior of commands in theModeling and Assemblies applications.

Note

Both the Promote Body and WAVE Geometry Linker commands arenow available on the Advanced Simulation toolbar.


Digital Simulation

Partition Model command has been removed

The Partition Model command has been removed from Advanced Simulationand Design Simulation. With the enhancements to Split Body in thisrelease, Split Body now replaces all the capabilities previously availablewith the Partition Model command. See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

If you created a partition in your model in a previous release, the partitioncontinues to exist in your model in this release. The software does not migratethe partition to a Split Body feature. However, the software does update theexisting partition if the underlying model changes.

Changes to the geometry idealization commands

Most of the geometry idealization commands from previous releases werebased on similar commands from the Modeling application. In recentreleases, improvements have been made to commands in Modeling that werenot reflected in the versions available in Advanced Simulation. The Sewand Subdivide Face commands have been replaced with the equivalentcommands from Modeling.

• The new Sew command offers improved robustness and a streamlineduser interface. In CAE workflows, you can use Sew to join togetherindividual sheet bodies, such as those produced by the Midsurfacecommand, into a single sheet body.

• The Subdivide Face command has been replaced with the Divide Face

command. Divide Face is easier to use than Subdivide Face andprovides better, more consistent results. In CAE workflows, you can useDivide Face to split a face into several smaller faces. This is useful,for example, if you want to subdivide a face into four-sided regions tofacilitate 2D mapped meshing.

Midsurface enhancements

What is it?

This release includes a number of improvements to the Midsurfacecapabilities and the overall midsurface workflow.

In the following graphic, (A) shows a solid body with a number of ribs andfillets. (B) shows the midsurface that was generated on that body using thevarious midsurface improvements from this release. (C) shows a 2D meshon the midsurface. Notice how the thickness of the original body is appliedto the elements.


Digital Simulation

User interface changes

The Midsurface user interface has been redesigned to improve its usability.In previous releases, you used the Midsurface dialog box to define face pairsand generate a midsurface based on a specified method (Face Pair, Offset, orUser Defined). Now:

• All midsurface-related commands are located on the new Midsurfacetoolbar. By default, this toolbar contains the midsurface creationcommands (A), as well as Modeling commands (B), such as Trim andExtend and Sew, that you can use to modify midsurfaces.

New Midsurface toolbar


Digital Simulation

You can also customize the Midsurface toolbar by adding commandsthat you commonly use in a midsurface workflow, such as Promote andThrough Curves. The Midsurface toolbar is available in the AdvancedSimulation and Modeling applications.

• The Face Pair and User Defined methods are separate commands:

Midsurface by Face Pairs and User Defined Midsurface .

• The Offset midsurface method is now only available through the menus(Insert®Model Preparation®Midsurface®Offset). For most cases inwhich you want to create a midsurface by offsetting a surface, you should

now use the Modeling Offset Surface command, which is availableon the Midsurface toolbar.

Promotion or WAVE linking now required prior to midsurface creation

In previous releases, the Midsurface command, like most other geometryidealization commands, automatically promoted all bodies in your idealizedpart. Now, you must explicitly promote or WAVE link a body before you cancreate a midsurface. For more information, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

Face pairing improvements

The Midsurface by Face Pairs command includes a number of enhancementsto help you define face pairs:

• You can now use the Smart Selection options in the Selection bar to selectfaces for pairing.

• When you use one of the automatic face pairing strategies, such asProgressive, you can use the new Faces to Exclude from Pairing optionto exclude selected faces from pairing. For example, you can use thisoption along with the Tangent Faces option on the Selection bar toexclude all fillet or blend faces from pairing. This can significantly reducethe time it takes the software to automatically create face pairs.

• In previous releases, you could only use a single creation method, suchas User Defined, for a given midsurface node in a part’s history. In theMidsurface by Face Pairs dialog box, you can now use multiple methodsto define face pairs within a given midsurface. For example, you canuse the Progressive option in the Strategy list to have the softwareautomatically create face pairs based on a thickness value and then youcan use the Manual option to create additional pairs. You can also usethe Replacement Mid-Sheet option to incorporate mid-sheets that yougenerate with the Offset Surface command into the same midsurface.


Digital Simulation

Show Me

Improved and expanded trimming options

This release includes new trimming options that you can use to adjust thesize of the mid-sheets generated from each individual face pair. In theMidsurface by Face Pairs dialog box:

• Trim to Side 1 Faces trims the pair to the bounds of the face or faces thatcomprise side 1 in the pair.

• Trim to Solid Body trims the pair based on both the bounds of the solidbody on which you created the midsurface and on any neighboringmid-sheets.

• Advanced Trimming trims the pair based on the bounds of the faces thatcomprise both side 1 and side 2 in the pair. This is the default trimmingmethod for all pairs.

Note

If you are not satisfied with the results you receive from theAdvanced Trimming option, you should check the paired facesbefore you change the trimming option. In most cases, problemsthat appear to be trimming errors are actually caused by incorrector incomplete face pairs.

In the Face Pairs list, the software appends the name of the current trimmingstrategy to the name of the face pair. For example, a face pair namedAutomatic Pair Side 1 indicates that pair was created with the Automaticoption and the Trim to Side 1 Faces trimming strategy.

Control over the mid-sheet creation method

You can now control the method the software uses to create the mid-sheetfor a given pair of faces. For each face pair, the software automaticallydetermines the most appropriate mid-sheet creation method. If you are notsatisfied with the previewed mid-sheet, you can use one of the AdvancedMidsurface Tools options to override the creation method for a selectedface pair. For example, you can use the Cloud of Points option to have thesoftware sample the points between sides 1 and 2 in the face pair and then fita surface through those points.

Support for multiple surfaces on side 1 of a midsurface

In the Midsurface by Face Pairs dialog box, when you select Manual pairingfrom the Strategy list, you can now use multiple, tangent continuous facesto define side 1 (the master side) of the pair. Tangent continuous faces arestitched faces in which the angle between the individual faces is less than


Digital Simulation

3°. Previously, although you could select multiple faces to define side 1, thesoftware only used the first face you selected in the pair.

Note

When you select multiple faces to define side 1 of a pair, the softwarecreates the midsurface by offsetting the side 1 faces by 1/2 of thethickness of those faces.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced Simulation or ModelingPrerequisite A part or idealized part activeToolbar MidsurfaceMenu Insert→Model Preparation→Midsurface

Geometry abstraction

Stitch edge enhancements

What is it?

This release includes enhancements to the Stitch Edge command that provideincreased automation for stitching operations as well as geometry replay.

Automated stitching of free edges to faces

You can now use the Stitch Edge command to have the software automaticallystitch free edges to faces in your model. In the Stitch Edge dialog box, whenyou select Automatic from the Method list, you can select:

• The new Edge to Face option from the Geometry to Stitch list to have thesoftware stitch free edges to faces within the selected body.

• The new Both option from the Geometry to Stitch list to have the softwarestitch both free edges to edges and free edges to faces within the selectedbody.

In previous releases, you had to manually stitch free edges to faces. Thiscould be tedious on a large or complex model. The new Automatic option cansignificantly reduce the amount of manual stitching required. In the followinggraphic, (A) shows a midsurface with a number of unstitched edges. (B) showsthe model after the Stitch Edge command was used to automatically stitchthose edges to other edges and faces.


Digital Simulation

Note

In larger models, the automated methods with the Stitch Edgecommand work best when you use them to stitch edges within a limitednumber of bodies at a time.

Replay of automatic stitching operations after geometry updates

The Automatic method with the Stitch Edge command is now supportedfor geometry replay. The software stores information about automaticallystitched edges or faces in a new CAE Geom Recipes node in the SimulationNavigator. In each recipe, the software stores the labels of the edges and/orfaces that were stitched in that operation. If you use the Stitch Edgecommand to automatically stitch edges or faces in a FEM file, and the CADgeometry in either the master or the idealized part updates, the softwareuses the recipe to try to recreate the stitching operations with the updatedpolygon geometry.

CAE Geom Recipes


Digital Simulation

1 – stitch thin ribs within housing2 – stitch free edges in control arm

You can also use the CAE Geometry Recipes node to:

• Rename the stitch recipes.

• Display the locations of the automatically stitched edges or faces.

• Delete selected automatic stitching recipes.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file

Toolbar Model Cleanup®Stitch Edge

Creating circular imprints around holes

What is it?

Use the new Circular Imprint command to create a circular edge around aselected:

• point

• circular or elliptical edge

With Circular Imprint, you first select the face to imprint and then specify thepoint or hole around which you want to create the new circular polygon edge.You can specify an absolute diameter for the imprinted circle, or you can havethe software size the circular imprint relative to a specified scale factor. Whenyou click OK in the Circular Imprint dialog box, the software subdivides theselected face and creates the new circular edge.

In the following graphic, (A) shows a hole in a previously meshed surface. (B)shows the updated mesh after a circular imprint has been created aroundthe hole.


Digital Simulation

Use Circular Imprint to control the distribution of elements around holes inyour model. Circular Imprint is particularly useful when you use the new BoltConnection command to model bolts as finite element entities. For example,you can use Circular Imprint to create circular edges around the bolt holes inthe contact surfaces at the bolt’s head, nut, or junction plane. By imprintingan additional circle around the ends of the bolt hole, you ensure that the legsof the spider elements created at the bolt’s head and nut have sufficient nodesin the surrounding mesh to which to connect.

For more information, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

Show Me

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file

Toolbar Model Cleanup®Circular Imprint

Material and physical properties

Enhancements for materials

What is it?

As part of the ongoing enhancements to the NX materials capabilities, anumber of functional enhancements have been added. You can now:

• Enter the value for a material property as an Expression (that is, aformula, function, reference, or constant value) or as a Field (a table orformula).

• Plot tabular material property values using the XY Graphing capability.


Digital Simulation

• Specify units for any material property. For example, you can set theunits for a stress-strain curve.

• Enter a description for a material.

• Assign a label (integer value) to a material record.

• View all material properties in the Information view for a given material.

• View a material record in the material dialog box (using the Inspect

Material command).

The standard NX materials library is now stored in MatML xml format. Thename of the NX material library is now physicalmateriallibrary.xml.

In addition, the user interface for creating new isotropic or fluid materialshas been improved for better usability.

Where do I find it?

Application AllMenu Tools®Material PropertiesToolbar Design SimulationAdvanced Simulation

toolbar®Material Properties

Enhancements to Element Associated Data

What is it?

Several enhancements have been made to your ability to assign properties toindividual elements within a mesh. You can now:

• Assign an offset to a shell element. The new Z Offset option correspondsto the Nastran ZOFFS field. It is a distance to offset the element planefrom the element’s connection points in the direction of the elementcoordinate system’s positive Z-axis.

• Define an offset to either or both ends of a beam or bar element’s crosssection.

• Define the orientation of a beam element cross section by vector orreference node.

• Define the orientation of a Spring-Damper element (CBUSH) by vectoror node.

• Define the orientation of a Gap element (CGAP) by vector, coordinatesystem, or node.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationToolbar Element Operations toolbar®Element Modify

Associated DataMenu Edit®Element®Modify Associated Data

Meshing

Newly supported element types

What is it?

This release includes support for new element types for the Abaqus andANSYS solvers.

New Abaqus Element Type

Element Name DescriptionSPRING1 Spring between a node and ground, acting in

a fixed direction

New ANSYS Element Types

Element Name DescriptionLINK180 3D finite strain spar (or truss) elementPLANE182 2D 4-node structural solidPLANE183 2D 8-node or 6-node structural solid elementSHELL281 8-node finite strain shell

SOLID185 8-node structural solid or layered solidelement

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file with the appropriate solver specifiedToolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar®1D Mesh , 2D Mesh

, 3D MeshMenu Insert→Mesh→1D Mesh, 2D Mesh, 3D Mesh


Digital Simulation

New 1D Mesh selection option for beam orientation

What is it?

In the 1D Mesh dialog box, use the new Auto Chain Selection option toensure that the beam elements are:

• Correctly oriented.

• Properly connected from start to end so that the B node of one elementconnects to the A node of the next element.

• Numbered sequentially.

Every edge or curve has a defined mesh direction. When you create a meshof 1D elements, the direction of the curve controls the direction in which thesoftware generates the 1D elements.

When you select each edge or curve for 1D meshing, the software usestemporary arrow graphics to indicate each curve’s mesh direction. Thisallows you to preview the direction in which the software will generate the1D elements. If these temporary graphics point in conflicting directions, theresulting beam elements will also be oriented in the directions indicated.

• When you select the curves or edges manually, the location at which youclick your mouse controls the direction in which the elements will begenerated. The software draws the arrow to point away from of the endof the curve that is closest to your selection point. The selection point isthe location on the curve where you click the mouse. To generate theelements in the opposite direction, click the Reverse Direction buttonin the 1D Mesh dialog box.

In the following graphic, the red circle indicates the selection point. Noticehow the direction of the arrow changes depending upon the location ofthe selection point.


Digital Simulation

• When you use area selection to select a group of edges or curves, theresulting directions may be inconsistent (A). When you generate the meshon those curves, the beam elements are oriented inconsistently (B).

Now, if you select the Auto Chain Selection option and then select the edgesor curves, the software uses the direction of the first curve or edge in theselection to control the direction of all others. With the option selected, thedirections along the geometry are oriented consistently (C). Consequently, anybeam elements generated along that geometry are also oriented consistently(D).

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM fileToolbar

Advanced Simulation®1D Mesh


Digital Simulation

Beam meshing enhancements

What is it?

This release introduces a new workflow for defining the cross section for abeam mesh and for orienting the beam mesh relative to the cross section.This enhancement includes:

• An expanded list of standard beam cross section types.

• A consistent workflow for assigning the cross section to the mesh for allsolvers. You now assign the cross section to the mesh through the physicalproperty table and mesh collector.

Show Me

• A consistent workflow for orienting the cross section for all solvers. Youorient the beam section using the mesh associated data.

Show Me

• A better workflow for defining offsets. You can define the offset relativeto any point on the beam section.

Show Me

• User-defined solid sections for defining non-standard shapes.

• A persistent 3D display of beam sections in the graphics window. Formore information, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

• Better information query capability for beam mesh. The Informationwindow now lists the cross section used and cross section properties.

• End release support for ANSYS and LS-DYNA solvers.

Post-processing capabilities for analyzing beam results have also beenenhanced. For more information, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.


Digital Simulation

3D display of cross section

Where do I find it?

Cross section definition

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file.Toolbar Insert→1D Element Section

Assignment of cross section to element

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file.Toolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar®Physical Properties

Definition of orientation and offset

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file.Toolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar®Mesh Associated Data


Digital Simulation

Modeling bolted connections

What is it?

Use the new Bolt Connection command to model the following types of boltedconnections with finite elements:

• A bolt that is held in place with a nut.

Show Me

• A bolt in a tapped (threaded) hole.

Show Me

• A bolt-type connection that is represented by only a spider element at thejunction plane between two mating bodies. A spider element is a specialtype of connection element that consists of a single central node withmultiple leg nodes that connect into the surrounding mesh.

In previous releases, you could use the 1D Connection command to create theelements necessary to model a bolt. However, that process involved a numberof steps and could be cumbersome and repetitive for complex assemblies.Bolt Connection is tailored to the special requirements of representing boltswith finite elements.

Finite element modeling details of bolt connections are solver specific

Bolts are typically modeled as a combination of:

• Beam elements to model the bolt shanks.

• Rigid or constraint elements to connect those beams to the nodes in thesurrounding mesh in a spider-like pattern.

With Bolt Connection, how the software models the bolt depends upon yourspecified solver environment:

Solver Bolt Shank Spider-type ConnectionNastran 1D elements,

such as CBARor CBEAMelements

Created with RBE2 orRBE3 elements

Abaqus 1D elements,such as B31 orB21 elements

Created with a*KINEMATICCOUPLING constraint

ANSYS 1D elements,such as BEAM44or BEAM188elements

Created with CERIG,CPconstraint equations


Digital Simulation

The following graphic shows an assembly in the Nastran environment that isconnected together by bolts in several tapped bolt holes. (A) shows the modelwith meshes created on the individual components.

(B) shows the model with the bolt connections generated in the bolt holes. Inthis model, RBE3 elements connect the CBAR elements along the bolt’s shankto the CTETRA elements in the components’ meshes. (C) shows only the boltconnection including the beam cross section shape defined for the PBARLphysical property table assigned to the CBAR element. For more informationon rendering beam elements as solid elements, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

Bolt connection options

You can use options in the Bolt Connection dialog box to control how thesoftware creates the connection. For example, you can use the Add Spiderat Junction option to create an additional spider-type connection along thebeam’s shank at an intermediate junction plane between the mating bodies.You can also select the Use Spring element to connect Head to Nut option


Digital Simulation

to model the bolt’s shank using a zero-length spring element instead of abeam element.

Additional tools to facilitate bolt modeling and definition

This release contains additional tools to facilitate the modeling of boltedconnections:

• The new Circular Edges smart selection method lets you easily selectcircular edges in your model. This is helpful when you select the holeedges that define the bolt’s head and nut. For more information, see**Unsatisfied xref title**.

• The new Circular Imprint geometry abstraction command subdivides aface and creates a circular polygon edge around either a selected point oran existing circular or elliptical edge. When you model bolted connections,you can use Circular Imprint to create circular edges around the bolt holesin the contact surfaces (at the bolt’s head, nut, or junction plane). Theresult is a more structured, layered mesh around the bolt hole. For moreinformation, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file with Nastran, Abaqus, or ANSYS

as the specified solverToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Bolt Connection

Hexahedral meshing enhancements

What is it?

This release includes enhancements to the 3D Swept Mesh command.

Ability to sweep a mesh from multiple source faces

You can now use 3D Swept Mesh to sweep a hexahedral mesh from multiple,connected source faces to a target face. Previously, you could only sweep amesh from a single source face to a single target face. To select multiplesource faces, you must select the Until Target option from the Type list.

The following graphic shows an example of geometry in which you can sweepa mesh from multiple source faces to a single target face. (A) shows thesource faces on one side of the part, while (B) shows the target face on theopposite side of the part.


Digital Simulation

When the mesh is generated, the software sweeps the mesh of hexahedralelements from the source faces (C) to the target face (D).

Show Me

New edge mapping option

Use the new Edge Mapping option in the 3D Swept Mesh dialog box to havethe software project any vertices along the boundaries of the source face orfaces to the target face. This allows you to control the appearance of the meshalong the wall faces. In the following graphic, (A) shows the mesh on the wallfaces when the Edge Mapping check box is not selected. (B) shows the meshthe software generates on the wall faces when the Edge Mapping check box isselected. Notice that the resulting mesh in (B) appears more orthogonal whenthe software projects the key vertices.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®3D Swept Mesh

Mapped meshing enhancements

What is it?

This release includes enhancements to the 2D Mapped Mesh command.

Diagonal consistency improvements

The software now tries to ensure that in a triangular mapped mesh, theelements’ diagonals (hypotenuse) point in a consistent direction across faces.If you need to change the direction of the diagonals in a selected mesh, you canedit the mesh and use the new Flip Diagonals option to reverse the diagonals.

In the following graphic, (A) shows an example of a triangular mapped mesh.The diagonals in the highlighted area are inconsistent with the diagonals inthe rest of the mesh. (B) shows the mesh after the Flip Diagonals option wasused on the highlighted face.


Digital Simulation

Connectivity consistency improvements

When you create a 2D mapped mesh, the software now ensures consistentelement connectivity throughout the mesh. This means that the firstedge of each element is consistent across the mapped mesh. With thisenhancement, you can use the new Element connectivity option with theSplit Element command to divide elements based on their connectivity. Formore information, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

New option for projecting vertex locations

Use the new Edge Mapping option in the 2D Mapped Mesh dialog box toproject vertices along the edges of a face to the opposite edge. This forces thecreation of nodes at the projected locations on the opposite edge and canresult in a more uniform mesh.

In the following graphic, (A) shows a mapped mesh that was created withthe Edge Mapping check box cleared. (B) shows the mapped mesh that wascreated with the Edge Mapping check box selected.

Note

The software may be unable to project vertices that lie in closeproximity to each other relative to the specified element size.


Digital Simulation

Ability to add or remove faces from an existing mapped mesh

When you edit a mapped mesh, you can now easily add or remove faces fromthat mesh. In previous releases, there was no straightforward way to removea face from an existing mesh. You first had to delete the entire mesh and thenremesh the remaining faces without the unwanted face.

Now, when you right-click on an existing mesh in the graphics window andchoose Edit, you can use the Select Objects option in the 2D Mapped Meshdialog box to add faces to the mesh or remove faces from the mesh. When youclick OK, the software adds or removes the selected face.

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®2D Mapped Mesh

Surface Coat associativity

What is it?

A 2D mesh that you create with the Surface Coat command can now beassociated to the 3D mesh on which you define it. When you select the newGeometry option from the Mode list in the Surface Coat dialog box, theresulting 2D coat mesh is associated to both the underlying 3D mesh and thegeometry. If either the geometry or the underlying 3D mesh updates, then thesoftware updates the 2D mesh based on the modified geometry or 3D mesh.This gives you the flexibility to update a surface coating of shell elements ona solid mesh if, for example, the underlying CAD geometry changes.

The update behavior for 2D surface coat meshes generated with the Geometryoption is different from that of all other 2D meshes.

• The software updates a 2D surface coat mesh based on changes to the3D mesh. In all other cases, the software updates a 2D mesh first andthen updates any underlying 3D mesh based on the new nodal locationsof the 2D mesh.

• If you want to create a surface coat of elements on a 3D mesh that isassociated to the underlying geometry, you can only select the Geometryoption. This ensures that the 2D surface coat updates if any changesoccur to either the underlying 3D mesh or the geometry.

In previous releases, the Surface Coat command was located on the ElementOperations toolbar. Because meshes generated by the Surface Coat commandnow update, the command is now located with the meshing commands onthe Advanced Simulation toolbar.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®Surface CoatMenu Insert→Mesh→Surface Coat

Nodal reference coordinate systems

What is it?

You can now assign a nodal reference coordinate system to nodes or polygongeometry. Node coordinates (grid positions) in your solver input file arewritten with respect to the assigned nodal reference coordinate system.

To assign nodal reference coordinate systems, choose Edit®Node®AssignNodal Coordinate System, and then select Reference from the Type list.

You can use Identify Nodal Coordinate System to find assigned nodalreference coordinate systems in existing models.

Assign Nodal Coordinate System and Identify Nodal Coordinate Systemreplace the Assign Nodal Displacement Coordinate System and InterrogateNodal Displacement Coordinate System commands found in previousreleases.


Once you have assigned a nodal reference coordinate system to a set of nodes,you can easily move those nodes (and the attached elements) by repositioningor reorienting the reference coordinate system. This is useful, for example,when working with appended meshes.

When node locations are written to the solver input file with respect to thenodal reference coordinate system, the resulting file can be more readableand easier to edit.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Node Operations toolbar®Assign Nodal Coordinate

System

Node Operations toolbar®Nodal Coordinate System


Digital Simulation

Menu

Edit®Node®Assign Nodal Coordinate System

Information®Advanced Simulation®NodalCoordinate System

Element Extract

What is it?

The Element Extract command allows you move selected elements out ofan existing mesh into a new mesh.


• You can extract elements from a mesh and create a new mesh collector toapply different physical or material properties to selected elements.

• When working with imported meshes, you can extract elements toseparate meshes in order to better organize and manage your model.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisites A FEM file with meshes displayed.

Toolbar Element Operations toolbar®Element ExtractMenu Edit®Element®Extract


Digital Simulation

Deforming a mesh based on results

What is it?

You can now use the Node Translate command to translate the location ofnodes in a mesh based on the displacement results from a structural analysis.For example, this allows you to alter dissimilar meshes on the same structurebetween multiple, iterative multi-physics analyses.

To translate nodes based on results, you must:

1. Perform a structural analysis on a model.

2. Use the displacement results from the structural analysis to create anew field that stores the X, Y, and Z locations of the nodes along with themagnitude of the displacement at each node.

3. Use the new By Field option in the Type list of the Node Translate dialogbox to deform the mesh based on the displacement results.

In the graphic below, (A) shows the original mesh on the bottle. (B) showssome of the displacement results from the original nonlinear analysisof the structure. (C) shows the deformation of the mesh based on thosedisplacement results.


Digital Simulation

Coordinate system considerations

When you use a field to deform a mesh, the results you use to create the fieldmust be in the global Cartesian coordinate system.

Where do I find it?


Node Operations®Node Translate

Splitting elements based on their connectivity

What is it?

You can now use the Split Element command to divide elements in a mappedmesh based on their connectivity. This method ensures that the split occursuniformly across a large number of elements. When you select either Quad to2 Triangles or Quad to 2 Quads from the Type list, you can use the new SplitPattern option to control how the software splits the elements.

• Select Element connectivity if the elements to split are in a mapped(structured) mesh. Because the connectivity of elements in a mappedmesh is always consistent, the software can use the connectivity of theelements to define the split line. For example, if you select Quad to 2Quads from the Type list, the software generates the split line eitherbetween edge 1 and edge 3 or between edge 2 and edge 4 of the elements.Click Flip Split Line to reverse the direction of the previewed split line.

• Select Seed element if the elements to split are in a free (unstructured)mesh. With this option, the software splits the elements based on thelocation of the first edge of the first element you select.

Where do I find it?


Element Operations®Split Element

Modifying the properties of multiple meshes

What is it?

You can now use the Mesh Associated Data dialog box to modify theproperties of multiple meshes simultaneously. In previous releases, you couldonly modify the Mesh Associated Data of a single mesh at a time.


Digital Simulation

The Mesh Associated Data dialog box now includes a Filter option that letsyou select multiple meshes of a specific type, such as 2D or 1D. After youselect a specific type of mesh from the Filter list, when you select the meshesin the graphics window, the properties of the first mesh you select appear asthe current values for the Element Property options, even though the currentproperties of the meshes you select may not be identical.

You can then use the Element Property options to change the properties of allthe selected meshes. This is useful, for example, when you want to changethe Thickness Source to Midsurface for all 2D meshes in your model. Youcan also use this technique when you want to apply a uniform Shell Offsetvalue to all selected meshes.

The software only updates the Mesh Associated Data properties that youmodify. For example, if you change the Thickness Source but do not changethe Shell Offset value, the software only applies the new Thickness Sourcesetting to the selected meshes.

Note

If you select Any or Mesh from the Filter list, you can only select asingle mesh at a time.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file with existing meshes of the same typeMenu Tools→Mesh Associated Data

Changes to element quality thresholds

What is it?

This release includes improvements to the element quality checks used bythe Model Check command.

Changes to default quality threshold values

Some of the default quality threshold values in the Nastran solverenvironment have been updated to better reflect the values required by theNastran solver.


Digital Simulation

Element type inThreshold Valuesdialog box

CorrespondingNastran element type

Default qualitythreshold updates

Tria3 and Tria6 CTRIA3 and CTRIA6 • The 2D MinimumAngle has changedfrom 20 to 10.

• The 2D MaximumAngle has changedfrom 120 to 160.

Quad4 and Quad 8 CQUAD4 and CQUAD8 • The 2D MinimumAngle has changedfrom 45 to 30.

• The 2D MaximumAngle has changedfrom 135 to 150.

Tetra4 and Tetra10 CTETRA(4) andCTETRA(10)

The Aspect Ratio haschanged from 20 to 100.

Hex8 and Hex20 CHEXA(8) andCHEXA(20)


Wedge6 and Wedge15 CPENTA(6) andCPENTA(15)


New quality checks available for pyramid elements

In this release, you can now set threshold values for the following types ofquality checks for pyramid elements:

• Aspect Ratio

• Jacobian Ratio

• Jacobian Zero

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM or Simulation fileToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Model CheckMenu Analysis→Finite Element Model Check


Digital Simulation

Controlling the maximum tetrahedral mesh size for undo operations

What is it?

You can now control the maximum size of a tetrahedral mesh on which youcan use the Undo command. Using the Undo command to recursively undoan existing mesh and then remesh can consume a large amount of availablememory. The memory required by the Undo command also increases with thesize of the mesh. On very large meshes, the Undo command can cause thesystem to run out of memory.

Now, you can use the new Maximum Mesh Size for Undo default to set anupper limit on the number of nodes a mesh can contain and be valid for anUndo operation. To access this option:

1. From the File menu, choose Utilities®Customer Defaults.

2. In the Customer Defaults dialog box, choose Simulation®Meshing.

3. On the 3D Tetrahedral Mesh tab, specify the maximum size of atetrahedral mesh on which you want to allow use of the Undo command.

Assembly FEM

Merging component nodes

What is it?

In the previous release, you could use the Duplicate Nodes check on theFinite Element Model Check to merge duplicate nodes in an assembly FEM.However, this command processes only the nodes created in the activeassembly FEM. It can merge a node created in the assembly FEM with anode in a component FEM, but cannot merge coincident nodes that may existbetween adjacent component FEMs.

You can now use the new Assembly Model Edit command to merge coincidentnodes between adjacent component FEMs within the context of an assemblyFEM.

Merged node data is stored only in the assembly FEM file. The original nodelocations and numbering are preserved in the component FEMs.


Digital Simulation

Merging nodes at edge-face and edge-edge locations. Coincidentnodes are highlighted in yellow.

For best results, use Assembly Model Edit to merge nodes only when nodelocations in adjacent FEMs are fully coincident. Adjacent component FEMsare more likely to have coincident node locations when they are modeled withtechniques such as manual meshes, mesh controls, 2D mapped meshes, 3Dswept meshes, and in the case of cyclic symmetry models, 2D dependentmeshes.


In previous releases, you could only connect component FEMs by using1D Connection to define connection meshes of 1D elements, by manuallycreating connecting elements. These operations add to the node and elementcount of your model and increase its complexity. Alternatively, you coulddefine surface-to-surface gluing in the corresponding Simulation file, butthese gluing simulation objects must be redefined for each Simulation basedon the assembly FEM. By using Assembly Model Edit to merge nodes incomponent FEMs, you can create robust connections while reducing theoverall node count in the assembly FEM.

Typical applications of this functionality include:

• Joining beam-based components, such as struts or frames, to beam, shell,or solid components.


Digital Simulation

Merge nodes to connect the cross strut component to the verticalstrut components.

• Creating edge-edge or edge-face connections between adjoining shellmeshes.

• Connecting multiple instances of a cyclic symmetry component FEM torepresent the complete part geometry.


Digital Simulation

A non-associative assembly FEM containing multiple instances of acyclic symmetry model. Duplicate nodes are highlighted in yellow

prior to merging.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An assembly FEM as the displayed part.Menu Assemblies®Model Edits®Merge Duplicate Nodes

Boundary Conditions

Expanded support for Abaqus boundary conditions

What is it?

This release includes support for new loads and constraints in the Abaqusenvironment.

Contact Interference

Use the new Contact Interference command to define time-dependentallowable interferences for contact pairs and contact elements. ContactInterference is useful for solving problems in which there are largeoverclosures between the contacting bodies.


Digital Simulation

The Contact Interference command corresponds to the Abaqus *CONTACTINTERFERENCE keyword.

Tie Surface command

Use the new Tie Surface command to create a surface-based constraint thatties two surfaces together. You can use Tie Surface to make the translationaland rotational motion equal for a pair of surfaces.

The Tie Surface command corresponds to the Abaqus *TIE keyword.

Surface Based Coupling command

Use the new Surface Based Coupling command to create a coupling betweena reference node and a group of nodes called the coupling nodes. You canuse Surface Based Coupling to constrain a group of coupling nodes to therigid body motion of a single node. The Definition list in the Surface BasedCoupling dialog box controls the type of coupling constraint you create:

• *KINEMATIC creates kinematic constraints that eliminatedegrees-of-freedom at the coupling nodes.

• *DISTRIBUTING creates distributed coupling constraints. These constrainthe motion of the coupling nodes to the translation and rotation of thereference node. This type of constraint distributes loads such thatthe resultants of the forces (and moments) at the coupling nodes areequivalent to the forces and moments at the reference node. With the*DISTRIBUTING option, you can specify a weighting method that controlsthe default weight distribution at the coupling nodes.

The Surface Based Coupling command is useful when you need to constraina group of coupling nodes to the rigid body motion of a single node. Forexample, you can use a *KINEMATIC type of Surface Based Coupling todefine a twisting motion for a model without constraining the radial motion.

The Surface Based Coupling command corresponds to the Abaqus *COUPLINGkeyword with either the *DISTRIBUTING or *KINEMATIC keywords.

Where do I find it?

Contact Interference

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisites A Simulation file with an Abaqus solution active

Toolbar Advanced Simulation®Contact Interference

Tie Surface


Digital Simulation


Toolbar Advanced Simulation®Tie Surface

Surface Based Coupling


Toolbar Advanced Simulation®Surface Based Coupling

Import Simulation Entities

What is it?

Use the new Import Simulation Entities command to import loads,constraints, solutions and other simulation entities from a source Simulationinto a target Simulation. The Import Simulation Entities command supportsthe following simulation entities:

• Loads

• Constraints

• Simulation objects

• Materials

• Physical properties

• Modeling objects

• Fields

• Groups

• Regions

• Solutions

• DOF sets


Digital Simulation

Bolt pre-loads defined on a simulation of a component FEM.

Bolt pre-loads imported into a simulation of an assembly FEM.

When you import simulation data, the software performs a correspondencecheck between the FEM or assembly FEM referenced by the source simulationand the FEM, component FEM, or assembly FEM referenced by the targetsimulation. If the source and target match, the software automaticallyreattaches any imported simulation entities to the corresponding geometry ormesh entities in the target.


Digital Simulation

If the source and target do not match, the software still imports the entities,but does not attach them to geometry or mesh entities. You can edit theimported entities to reattach them as needed.


Typically, you use the Import Simulation Entities command when workingwith simulations referencing assembly FEMs. By importing simulationentities previously defined for existing component FEMs or subassemblyFEMs, you can create a de facto “assembly simulation.” Using the ImportSimulation Entities command, you can:

• Import simulation entities defined for component FEMs, such as complexloads or boundary conditions. You can also import materials and physicalproperty tables to use as overrides.

• Reuse simulation entities in multiple component instances. For example,you can define a bolt pre-load once for a single bolt, and then import thatbolt pre-load to an array of bolt occurrences in the assembly FEM.

• Import simulation entities defined for a subassembly FEM to thesimulation referencing the parent assembly FEM. For example, supposeyou create an assembly FEM and then create a simulation in which youdefine multiple surface-to-surface glue or contact simulation objects. Ifyou subsequently map this assembly FEM into a parent assembly FEM,you can import the glue or contact objects into the parent assembly FEM’ssimulation.

The Import Simulation Entities command is also useful for sharing andreusing simulation entities when working with simulations that reference asingle FEM file. Depending on the types of analyses you perform, simulationentities such as solutions, fields, or solver-specific modeling objects may betime-consuming to set up and configure. Using Import Simulation Entities,you can share and reuse highly configured simulation entities among multiplesimulations, even if the referenced FEMs do not correspond.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite The Simulation file must be displayed.Menu File®Import®Simulation EntitiesSimulationNavigator

Right-click a component FEM and choose ImportSimulation Entities


Digital Simulation

Reusable regions for contact and glue definitions

What is it?

Use the new Simulation Region command to create a region. A region is areusable collection of homogenous entities, such as polygon faces or elementfaces. You can use regions to define the source or target faces in certain typesof boundary conditions. For example, you can create a region and then usethat region as both the Source Region in a Surface-to-Surface Contactdefinition and the Target Region in a Surface-to-Surface Glue definition.When you export or solve your model, the software writes out the region toyour solver input file only once, even if that region is referenced by multipleglue or contact definitions.

Show Me

Regions are managed in the Simulation Navigator

After you create a region, the software stores it in the new Regions node inthe Simulation Navigator. The Regions node is available when a Simulationfile is active.

Regions1 – Top Bracket Inside Faces2 – Top Bracket Outside Faces3 – Bottom Bracket

You can use the Regions node to:• Highlight the entities that belong to a selected region in the graphicswindow.

• Rename, edit, delete, or list information about a selected region.

Regions are solver specific

When you export or solve your model, the syntax the software uses to writea region out to your solver input file depends upon the specified solver forthe active solution.

Solver Corresponding solver syntaxNX Nastran Either a BSURF or BSURFS bulk data entry,

depending on whether the region contains the faces of2D or 3D elements

Abaqus *SURFACE keywordANSYS CMBLOCK coded database file command

For more information, see the Programmer’s Manualfor ANSYS.


Digital Simulation

Regions can also include parameters

For NX Nastran and Abaqus solutions, you can also use the SimulationRegion dialog box to assign a set of parameters to the entire region.

• With NX Nastran solutions, you can specify certain fields from theBCRPARA bulk data to apply to the region. For example, if the region iscomprised of 2D elements, you can use the Surface option to specify thecontact side of the shells.

• With Abaqus solutions, you can specify certain parameters for *RIGIDBODY keyword.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisitesA Simulation file with an NX Nastran, Abaqus, orANSYS solution active

Toolbar Advanced Simulation®Simulation Region

Changes for NX Nastran contact and glue definitions

What is it?

This release includes improvements to the user interface for defining NXNastran glue and contact boundary conditions.

Note

Because of the changes to the contact and glue commands in NX 7.5,existing journal applications that contain contact or glue definitionsare not supported in NX 7.5. Both the fundamental object structurefor contact and glue boundary conditions and how those boundaryconditions interact with solutions have changed. However, NX willmigrate existing models that contain contact and glue definitions.

Using regions in contact and glue definitions

You can now create reusable regions to manually define the source and targetfaces in glue and contact definitions. A region is a collection of homogenousentities, such as polygon faces or element faces. For more information, see,**Unsatisfied xref title**.


Digital Simulation

Defining contact parameters globally and then overriding select parameterslocally

The NX Nastran 7.0 release introduced the ability to define multiple contactor glue definitions through multiple BCTSET/BCTPARM or BGSET/BGPARMbulk data entries. This makes it possible for you to define certain contact orglue parameters globally for all contact or glue pairs and then locally overridevalues of specific parameters on select pairs.

In NX, the user interface for surface-to-surface contact and glue definitions inAdvanced Simulation has been modified to let you take advantage of this newNX Nastran capability. You can now

• Create a Contact Parameters–Linear Global or Glue Parameters–LinearGlobal modeling object to control the behavior of the contact or gluealgorithm for all Surface-to-Surface Contact or Surface-to-SurfaceGluing definitions in a given solution. You use the Global GlueParameters option on the Case Control tab in the Solution dialog boxto assign a Contact Parameters–Linear Global modeling object to yoursolution. The software then applies those parameters globally to allcontact and glue definitions you include in the solution.

• Create a Contact Parameters–Linear Pair Override or GlueParameters–Linear Pair Override modeling object to locally overridea selected global contact or glue parameters for individual contactor glue definitions. You use the Local Contact Parameters or LocalGlue Parameters options in the Surface-to-Surface Contact orSurface-to-Surface Gluing dialog boxes to assign an override modelingobject to a contact or glue definition.

Note

You can only define glue and contact parameters as either global orlocal if you use NX Nastran 7.0 or higher as your solver.

Advanced nonlinear contact user interface changes

You can now use the Surface-to-Surface Contact command to create contactdefinitions for NX Nastran advanced nonlinear analyses. In previous releases,you had to use the separate Advanced Nonlinear Contact command. Now:

• You use the Nonlinear Contact Parameters options in the New Regiondialog box to specify whether the target region type is FLEX (flexible)or RIGID.

• You use the Advanced Nonlinear Parameters option in theSurface-to-Surface Contact dialog box (Local Contact Pair Parametersgroup) to assign an Advanced Nonlinear Parameters modeling object tothe contact pair. As in previous releases, you use the Advanced Nonlinear


Digital Simulation

Parameters dialog box to specify options to control the contact algorithm(BCTPARA bulk data entry).

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisites A Simulation file with an NX Nastran solution active

Changes for ANSYS contact definitions

What is it?

This release includes improvements to the user interface for definingsurface-to-surface contact in the ANSYS environment.

Note

Because of the changes to the contact commands in NX 7.5, existingjournal applications that contain contact definitions are not supportedin NX 7.5. Both the fundamental object structure for contact boundaryconditions and how those boundary conditions interact with solutionshave changed. However, NX will migrate existing models that containcontact definitions.

Using regions in contact and glue definitions

You can now create reusable regions to manually define the source and targetfaces in glue and contact definitions. A region is a collection of homogenousentities, such as polygon faces or element faces. For more information, see,**Unsatisfied xref title**.

New CONTA174 ET and CONTA174 Real Constants modeling objects

In previous releases, you could define a subset of the ANSYS contact optionsin the Surface-to-Surface Contact dialog box. In this release, most of thoseoptions, plus a number of new contact options are now available in the newCONTA174 Real Constants and CONTA174 ET modeling object dialog boxes.

You can use the CONTA174 Real Constants and CONTA174 ET modelingobjects to define the real constants and element KEYOPTS that control thecontact behavior for ANSYS surface contact elements.

• Create a CONTA174 Real Constants modeling object to define propertiesof the surface contact elements, such as the initial contact closure andallowable elastic slip.

• Create a CONTA174 ET modeling object to specify options that control thecontact behavior. For example, you can specify the contact algorithm andwhether to include the effects of shell thickness in the analysis.


Digital Simulation

Once you create CONTA174 Real Constants and CONTA174 ET modelingobjects, you can reuse them in multiple Surface-to-Surface Contactdefinitions.

Note

You still define the Static Friction Coefficient value in theSurface-to-Surface Contact dialog box.

For more information, see Set the Real Constants and Element KEYOPTS inthe Surface-to-Surface Contact chapter of the ANSYS Contact TechnologyGuide.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisites A Simulation file with an ANSYS solution active

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation®Surface-to-Surface Contact

Degree of Freedom Sets

What is it?

Use a degree of freedom (DOF) set to specify a list of nodes and define degreesof freedom individually for each node. For each node, you can specify eachdegree of freedom as 1 (on) or 0 (off).

DOF sets are also used when you import a Nastran input file that containsthem.


You can use DOF sets:


Digital Simulation

• To define ASETs in the Correlation application. For more information, see**Unsatisfied xref title**.

• To define connection degrees of freedom when defining an externalsuperelement. For more information, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisites A Simulation file activeSimulationNavigator Right-click the DOFSets node and choose New DOF Set.

Boundary conditions applied to a group

What is it?

Many boundary condition commands, such as the Force command, now have aGroup Reference option that lets you apply the load or constraint to a group.

In the boundary condition dialog box, select Group Reference, and thenselect a group from a list. Next, from the Filter Type list, select the entities inthe group to use. For example, you can select Nodes to apply the boundarycondition to nodes.


Groups enable you to organize your model into subsets. If you have groupsdefined, you can apply the boundary condition to a group, rather thanselecting individual nodes, elements, faces, meshes, and so on.

If a group is modified, the boundary condition applied to it is automaticallyupdated.

Where do I find it?


ToolbarA boundary condition tool such as Force or FixedConstraint.

SimulationNavigator

Right-click the Load Container node and choose NewLoad.

The same process applies to constraints and Simulationobjects.


Digital Simulation

Fixed and Free Boundary Degrees of Freedom constraints

What is it?

Two new constraints, Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom and FreeBoundary Degrees of Freedom, are available for the following NX Nastransolutions:

• SESTATIC 101 – Superelement (Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedomonly)

• SEMODES 103 – Superelement

• SEMODES 103 – Flexible Body

For more information, see **Unsatisfied xref title** and **Unsatisfied xreftitle**.


You can use these constraints to define degrees of freedom for the boundarywhere a component is connected to other components in the structure.

• Use a Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom constraint to define theconnection degrees of freedom for the boundary. For example, in a flexiblebody solution, this is where the component is connected to the mechanismthrough a joint or bushing.

• Use a Free Boundary Degrees of Freedom constraint to define the loaddegrees of freedom for the boundary. For example, in a flexible bodysolution, this is where a force, torque, spring, or damper is applied tothe component.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active simulation file and supported solution.

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar®Fixed Boundary

Degrees of Freedom or Free Boundary Degrees

of Freedom

SimulationNavigator

Under the active solution, right-click Constraints®NewConstraint®Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom orFree Boundary Degrees of Freedom.


Digital Simulation

Durability Wizard

What is it?

Use the Durability Wizard to perform a structural fatigue analysis on yourstatic stress analysis solution.

The Durability Wizard replaces the Durability capabilities available inprevious releases.

The wizard computes the following results:

• Strength safety factor

• Fatigue safety factor

• Fatigue life

Fatigue safety factor

The wizard guides you through the necessary steps to assess durabilityof your model. You need to:

1. Choose the structural solution containing the loading conditions.

2. Define the cyclic loadings that define the duty cycle of the part over itslifetime.

3. Set up parameters and analyze the durability performance.

4. Review analyzed results on your model.


Digital Simulation

5. Display the selected result type.

6. Prepare a technical durability report in a spreadsheet or a browser.


The Durability Wizard helps you check whether in-service loadings arelikely to cause an early failure of your part. Typically, durability analysis isperformed for metal parts that are subjected to heavy vibration, or to cyclicloads in rotating machinery.

Where do I find it?

Application Design Simulation, Advanced Simulation

PrerequisiteAn active Simulation file with static stress analysissolution

Menu Tools ® Durability Wizard

Advanced Durability

What is it?

NX Advanced Durability is a new Advanced Simulation solution process. Usethe Durability solution process to validate the structural integrity of yourstructural model over its entire life cycle.

This new Durability solution process completely replaces the Durabilitycapabilities available in previous releases. A streamlined version of this newsolution process is available in Design Simulation as the new DurabilityWizard.

The Durability solution process can contain multiple static and transientevents. An event is comprised of:

• A stress analysis solution

• Static or transient loads

• Durability event solver settings

There are two types of event:

• Static event — Determines the strength safety factors, fatigue safetyfactors, and fatigue life of your structural model with respect to a staticsolution on which loading patterns are superimposed. A static eventreferences results from the following solutions:

– NX Nastran or MSC Nastran: SESTATIC 101 — Single Constraintand SESTATIC 101 — Multi Constraint


Digital Simulation

– ANSYS: Linear Statics

– Abaqus: Static Perturbation

• Transient event — Determines the strength safety factors, fatigue safetyfactors, and fatigue life of your structural model with respect to transientloading. A transient event references results from the following solutions:

– NX Nastran: SEDTRAN 109 and SEMTRAN 112

– Response Simulation solution process (.rs2 files that contain geometryinformation)

– NX Nastran SEMODES 103 - Flexible Body solution with FlexibleBody Recovery Option defined

– NX Nastran advanced nonlinear: ADVNL 601,129 and ADVNL 701(linear stresses and strains)

Fatigue safety factor results for a transient event

The Durability solution process can calculate the strength and fatigue resultsfor:

• Each static and transient event separately

• All the active events in the Durability solution process

Durability 1Static Event 1Load Pattern 1Load Pattern 2Static Event 1


Digital Simulation

Transient Event 1Transient Event 1Transient Event 2Transient Event 2

Durability 1


Perform a durability analysis to evaluate a design’s structural worthinessunder various simple or complex loading conditions.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteA structural analysis solution with stress and/or strainresults

Toolbar Durability ® New Durability SimulationMenu Insert ® Durability ® SimulationSimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation node ® New SolutionProcess ® Durability

Thermal and Flow, Electronic Systems Cooling, and Space SystemsThermal


Varying the thickness of 2D elements

What is it?

You can now specify the thickness attribute for all elements in a 2D shellmesh as mesh-associated data. You have three attributes to choose from.

• Physical Property Table lets you use the constant thickness value definedin the associated physical property table.

• Midsurface lets you use the midsurface thickness that is generated fromthe geometry.

• Field lets you use a table field to define a spatially variable thickness.

You can also override the mesh-associated data by any element-associateddata when you select Use Element Associated Data.


Digital Simulation

Supported solvers and analysis types

Solver Analysis Type Solution TypeCoupled Thermal-Flow Electronic Systems

Cooling

Advanced Thermal/Flowwith ESC

NX Electronic SystemsCooling

Mapping Thermal-FlowThermal Space Systems ThermalNX Space Systems

Thermal Mapping ThermalThermal Thermal

Advanced ThermalFlow Flow

Advanced FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Thermal-Flow

Advanced Thermal-FlowAxisymmetric Thermal Axisymmetric Thermal

Advanced AxisymmetricThermal

Mapping Thermal-Flow

NX Thermal and Flow

Axisymmetric Mapping Thermal

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Mesh Associated DataMenu Tools ® Mesh Associated DataSimulationNavigator

Right-click the 2D mesh node® Edit Mesh AssociatedData


Thickness Source group® Thickness Source list

Element Associated Data group ® Use ElementAssociated Data

New material orientation definition methods

What is it?

New methods have been added for defining material orientation for shell,solid, and axisymmetric elements in the 2D and 3D Mesh Collector dialogboxes when you select an orthotropic material.


Digital Simulation

• Tangent Curve (Shell or solid elements) — Lets you define the materialorientation by selecting a curve or edge on your geometry. For eachelement, the software finds the closest point on the selected curve or edgeto the element centroid and sets the primary direction of the materialcoordinate system as tangent to that curve or edge.

In the following example, the material orientation represented by the

yellow arrows was defined by selecting the edge .

Note

When you define the material orientation for shell elements, youorient only the X-axis and Y-axis in the plane of the element. TheZ-axis is fixed and is normal to the element. The orthogonality of X,Y, and Z means you only need to orient the X-axis. The right-handrule applies. For solid elements, orienting two axes automaticallyderives the third.

• Vector (Shell or solid elements) — Lets you define the material orientationvector either by selecting an edge in the geometry to infer a vector (seefirst example below) or by using the NX vector tools to define the vector(see second example below).


Digital Simulation

Vector inferred from edge (1)


Digital Simulation

Vector specified as X direction

• Orientation Angle (Shell and axisymmetric elements) — Lets you definethe material orientation by defining the angle between the first edge ofthe element and the desired X-axis of the material coordinate systemthat you are defining.

• Surface Normal (Solid elements only) — Lets you define the materialorientation by selecting a surface on the geometry. For each element, thesoftware finds the closest point on the face to the element centroid andthen sets the primary direction as normal to the face at that point.


Digital Simulation

Primary direction normal to selected face (1)

• Spatial Fields (Solid elements only) — Lets you define the materialorientation by spatially distributing the first and second coordinatevectors. The two coordinate vectors must not be parallel as they definethe XY plane.



Cooling










NX Thermal and Flow



Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file.Toolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar®Mesh CollectorsMenu Insert®Mesh CollectorSimulationNavigator

Right-click a 2D or 3D mesh collector node® Edit

Main conduction plane and direction in Cartesian coordinate system

What is it?

You must now define the main conduction plane and direction when definingmaterial orientation using the Cartesian coordinate system for the following:

• 2D shell mesh collectors

• 2D axisymmetric shell mesh collectors

• Non-uniform layer modeling objects

To orient the material orientation vector of shell elements and layers, thesoftware projects the main direction vector on the shell element or the layer.The software determines the three components of the thermal conductivity asfollows:

• The software projects the main direction vector on the shell element. Thedirection of the main direction vector determines Kelem1, which is themain conductivity of the element.

– Kelem1 = K1 when the main direction vector is X.

– Kelem1 = K2 when the main direction vector is Y.

– Kelem1 = K3 when the main direction vector is Z.

• The conductivity in the direction of the element normal, Kelem3, is theconductivity normal to the main plane.

– Kelem3 = K1 when the main plane is the X plane.

– Kelem3 = K2 when the main plane is the Y plane.

– Kelem3 = K3 when the main plane is the Z plane.

• The third component of the conductivity, Kelem2, is the remainingconductivity and its direction is the remaining direction to complete theright-hand side coordinate system.


Digital Simulation

For example, you define one orthotropic material with a large conductivity inthe X direction. You take that material and drape it onto each face of a cube.For the three visible faces the large conductivity is oriented as follows:

• On the right and top faces of your cube, the large conductivity is in theX direction.

• On the front face of your cube, the large conductivity is in the Z direction.

— Right face of thecube

— Front face of thecube

— Top face of thecube

For the three visible faces, you need to create three 2D mesh collectors withthe same orthotropic material defined and set the Main Conduction Planeand Direction list to the following options:

• For the right face 2D mesh collector, select Y plane, X direction.

• For the front face 2D mesh collector, select X plane, Z direction.

• For the top face 2D mesh collector, select Z plane, X direction.



Cooling




Thermal Mapping Thermal


Digital Simulation

Thermal Thermal






NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?

2D mesh collector

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file with 2D mesh collectors pointing

to an orthotropic material.Toolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar®Mesh CollectorsMenu Insert®Mesh CollectorSimulationNavigator

Right-click a 2D mesh collector node® Edit


Material Orientation Method list® Coordinate System® Material Orientation Type list® Cartesian

Layer modeling object


PrerequisiteAn active FEM file with a Multi-Layer ShellNon-Uniform type of 2D mesh collectors.

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Modeling Objects ®Layer ® Create

Menu Insert ® Modeling Objects ® Layer ® CreateLocation in dialogbox

Material Orientation Method list® Coordinate System® Material Orientation Type list® Cartesian


Digital Simulation

Group support for boundary conditions

What is it?

For all boundary conditions, you can now select, define, or modify groups tospecify the region where that boundary condition applies.


When you define groups, you can quickly select the same regions for differentboundary conditions.



Cooling










NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?

All Simulation Object Types, Constraint Types, and Load Types

Application Advanced SimulationLocation in dialogbox Region group


Digital Simulation

Generic entity selection

What is it?

When you create or edit solutions, you can now select the Generic Entitymodeling objects that you want applied to each solution in a Simulation.

Previously, all Generic Entity modeling objects present in the Simulationwere applied to all solutions in that Simulation.


You do not need to delete an existing Generic Entity modeling object whenyou do not want to use it. You just need to remove it from the modeling objectmanager list.


Solver Analysis Type Solution TypeNX Electronic SystemsCooling

Coupled Thermal-Flow Electronic SystemsCooling


NX Space SystemsThermal

Thermal Space Systems Thermal

Thermal Thermal



Advanced Thermal-Flow

NX Thermal and Flow

Axisymmetric Thermal Axisymmetric Thermal


Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click the solution node ® Edit

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Solve ® Edit SolutionAttributes

Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solution Attributes


Solution Details tab ® Advanced group ® GenericEntity (#) ®


Digital Simulation

Import error/warning group UNV files

What is it?

You can now import groups that contain elements associated to warning orerror messages in a solution. You can import these groups from any solutioninto a previously created FEM file or Simulation file. These groups help youto verify and post process your model.

The groups information is saved in a groups.unv file. This file is created inthe run folder each time you run any of the following simulations:

• NX Thermal and Flow

• NX Electronic Systems Cooling

• NX Space Systems Thermal

After you import the groups, they are available under the Groups node in theSimulation Navigator.

Simulations containing assembly FEMs are not supported.


After you run a simulation, you can observe the groups of elements related towarnings or errors and correct your model.



Cooling




Thermal Mapping Thermal


Digital Simulation

Thermal Thermal






NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?

All Simulation Object Types, Constraint Types, and Load Types

Application Advanced SimulationMenu File ® Import ® Simulation


Select Solver list® NX Thermal / Flow, NX ElectronicSystems Cooling, or NX Space Systems Thermal

File type option list® Solution Error/Warning Groups

Importing function based material properties from I-deas using unv files

What is it?

When you import I-deas models into NX, you can now also import UNV filesthat contain material properties that were defined using functions in NXI-deas.

The properties are imported into NX as a table with a resolution of 20 points.

Function based material properties defined in I-deas with more than onevariable are not supported.


This new enhancement saves you time when you import I-deas models intoNX.


Solver Analysis Type Solution Type


Digital Simulation






Thermal Thermal




NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active part, FEM, or Simulation.Menu File ® Import ® Simulation

New results sampling option

What is it?

You can now use a table to specify the desired results sampling intervals atspecified times.

For example, if you want the results sampling performed at the followingtimes:

0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0

Create the following table:

Time Interval0.0 1.010.0 2.020.0 3.4

The last interval number in the table is a placeholder.


Digital Simulation


This option gives you more flexibility to output results at desired times.







Thermal Thermal




NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?





Transient Setup tab ® Results Sampling group ®Results Type / Thermal Results Type / Flow ResultsType ® Time Varying

Solver version and date displayed

What is it?

NX now displays the version number and date of the thermal and flow solver(TMG).




Digital Simulation











NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click the solution node® Edit Solver Parameters

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Solve ® Edit SolutionParameters

Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solution Parameters

Location in dialogbox Parameters group ® Version Number

Thermal capabilities

Override Set — Thermal Properties

What is it?

Use the new Override Set — Thermal Properties simulation object to overridethe specific thermal properties of a part of your model with constant, time,temperature, or spatially varying values. You can override the followingthermal properties:

• Thermal Conductivity


Digital Simulation

• Orthotropic Thermal Conductivity

• Specific Heat

• Electrical Resistivity

• Emissivity

• Solar Absorptivity

Note

Override of Solar Absorptivity is only available for Advanced solutiontypes.







Thermal Thermal

Advanced ThermalCoupled Thermal-Flow Thermal-Flow


NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


SimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Override Set — ThermalProperties

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Override Set — Thermal

Properties


Digital Simulation

Merge Set simulation object

What is it?

Use the Merge Set command to merge the calculation points for the elementsof the selected region. Defining the Merge Set simulation object collects theselected elements into a single calculation point, forcing their temperaturesto be identical. The capacitances and applied heat loads of these elementsare automatically combined, and any conductances to these elements areconnected to the merged element.

You can assign a label to the merged set or let NX assign a label at run time.

After the solve, NX recovers the temperature results of all elements.


This command helps to reduce the solution time of your thermal model bymerging high conductance or low capacitance elements.


Solver Analysis Type Solution TypeNX Space SystemsThermal


Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Merge Set

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Merge Set

Temperature varying current and voltage type of Joule Heating simulationobject

What is it?

You can now specify both voltage and current as temperature varyingelectrical boundary conditions for a Joule Heating simulation object. Inprevious releases, you could only define voltage or current as a constant valueor time varying electrical boundary condition.


The ability to define temperature varying voltage and current broadens therange of applications for the Joule Heating simulation object.


Digital Simulation







Thermal Advanced ThermalNX Thermal and FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Advanced Thermal-Flow

Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Joule Heating

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Joule HeatingLocation in dialogbox Type group® Current / Voltage ® Magnitude group

Temperature or time varying current and voltage type of Peltier Coolers

What is it?

You can now specify both voltage and current as time or temperature varyingelectrical boundary conditions for the Peltier Cooler simulation object. Inprevious releases, you could only define voltage or current as a constant value.

To define the voltage as varying with time or temperature:

1. From the Electrical Boundary Condition list, select Voltage.

2. From the Voltage list, select Field.

3. From the Specify Field list, select Table Constructor to define a tablewith the independent variable as time or temperature.

Use the same procedure to define the current as varying with time ortemperature. Instead of Voltage, select Current from the Electrical BoundaryCondition list.


Digital Simulation


The ability to define time varying or temperature varying voltage and currenttype of Peltier Coolers broadens the range of applications for the PeltierCooler simulation object.








Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Peltier Cooler

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Peltier CoolerLocation in dialogbox

Parameters group ® Electrical Boundary Conditionlist ® Voltage / Current

Surface-to-Surface Contact enhancements

What is it?

In the Surface-to-Surface Contact dialog box, the Manual option is nowcalled Manual Pairing.

For the Manual Pairing type of Surface-to-Surface Contact simulation object,the selection of the primary and secondary regions is changed. Use the NewRegion to create the regions or Edit to modify existing regions.

You can now swap the primary and secondary region selections using the

Swap Regions option.




Digital Simulation






Thermal Thermal

Advanced Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow

Coupled Thermal-Flow Thermal-Flow


Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Surface-to-Surface Contact

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Surface-to-Surface Contact

Location in dialogbox Type group ® Manual Pairing

Across Gap Convection Coupling enhancement

What is it?

A Between Large Parallel Horizontal Plates correlation option is availablefor the Across Gap Convection Coupling type of Thermal Coupling —Convection simulation object.

The Between Large Parallel Plates correlation type is renamed BetweenLarge Parallel Inclined Plates.


This new correlation simplifies the procedure to specify a convection couplingbetween two large horizontal plates that are parallel. You no longer needto define the gravity vector.



Coupled Thermal-Flow Advanced Thermal/Flowwith ESC




Digital Simulation

Flow Advanced FlowThermal Advanced Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow

Coupled Thermal-Flow Advanced Thermal-Flow

Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Thermal Coupling — Convection

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Thermal Coupling —

ConvectionLocation in dialogbox Type group® Across Gap Convection Coupling

Negative heat loads in Thermostat and Active Heater Controller

What is it?

For cooling purposes, you can now set negative heat loads in the ThermalLoads dialog box and control them using either a Thermostat simulationobject or an Active Heater Controller simulation object.

Negative heat loads are activated when the temperature of the sensor isabove the cut-in temperature and deactivated when the temperature is belowthe cut-off temperature.


This enhancement lets you specify the amount of heat being removed in aheater controlled transient cooling simulation.








Digital Simulation

Thermal Thermal




NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Thermal LoadsSimulationNavigator

Right-click the Load Container node ® New Load ®Thermal Load


Heater Control group® Control Heater ®

Thermostat or Active Heater Controller

Specify projection direction for overlapping elements

What is it?

You can now choose to use either the normal of the primary elements orthe normal of the secondary elements, when you select the Only ConnectOverlapping Elements option using following simulation objects:

• Surface-to-Surface Contact

• Thermal Coupling

• Thermal Coupling — Advanced

• Thermal Coupling — Radiation


This enhancement allows you to more accuretely represent the shape ofthe coupled area. It also gives you more control over the elements that areconnected using thermal couplings.




Digital Simulation



AdvancedThermal/Flow withESC

NX Space Systems Thermal Thermal Space Systems ThermalThermal Thermal

Advanced ThermalCoupled Thermal-Flow Thermal-Flow

AdvancedThermal-Flow

NX Thermal and Flow


AdvancedAxisymmetric Thermal

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

Select the Only Connect Overlapping Elements in oneof the following thermal couplings: Surface-to-SurfaceContact, Thermal Coupling, Thermal Coupling —Advanced, or Thermal Coupling — Radiation

SimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Surface-to-Surface Contact,Thermal Coupling, Thermal Coupling — Advanced, orThermal Coupling — Radiation.

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Surface-to-Surface Contact

Advanced Simulation ® Thermal Coupling


Advanced


RadiationLocation in dialogbox

Parameters or Additional Parameters ® OverlapProjection Direction


Digital Simulation

Define total thermal coupling conductance per element

What is it?

You can now define the conductance of the thermal coupling at the elementlevel. When you create a Thermal Coupling simulation object, you can definethe total conductance value per element.

The Per Element check box is available only if you select Uniform from theMethod list in the Distribution group.

You can only select the Per Element check box if you select Total Conductancefrom the Type list. If you select any other option from the Type list and thentry to select the check box, a message appears.


You can import UNV files that have thermal coupling boundary conditionswith conductance per element defined.







Thermal Thermal

Advanced ThermalAxisymmetric Thermal Axisymmetric Thermal


NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Thermal Coupling

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Thermal Coupling


Digital Simulation

Location in dialogbox Distribution group® Per Element check box

Ablation-Charring modeling object support axisymmetric elements

What is it?

You can now define a material that ablates or chars on 3D meshes withaxisymmetric solid elements.



Coupled Thermal-Flow AdvancedThermal/Flow withESC

NX Space Systems Thermal Thermal Space Systems ThermalThermal Advanced ThermalCoupled Thermal-Flow Advanced

Thermal-Flow

NX Thermal and Flow

Axisymmetric Thermal AdvancedAxisymmetric Thermal

Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar®Modeling Objects®Ablation-Charring ® Create

MenuInsert ® Modeling Objects ® Ablation-Charring ®Create

Temperature locking in transient phase change calculation

What is it?

You can enable temperature locking in the calculation of the transient phasechange. This technique overcomes slow convergence or lack of convergence oftransient phase change simulations with implicit time integration methods.

To enable this technique, set the new TEMPERATURE LOCKING IN PHASECHANGE advanced parameter.


This advanced parameter significantly reduces the solve time in cases thatcould otherwise have many iterations per time step or not converge at all.


Digital Simulation

For example, this parameter is helpful when you have large integration timesteps during phase change.

However, this advanced parameter can increase the computational time forsimulations with only a few iterations per time step. For example, whenyou set small integration time steps, the algorithm may take more time toconverge.




AdvancedThermal/Flow withESC

NX Space Systems Thermal Thermal Space Systems ThermalThermal Thermal

Advanced Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationToolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar®Modeling Objects®Advanced Parameters ® Create

Menu Insert ® Modeling Objects ® Advanced Parameters® Create

Location in dialogbox Catalog ® Thermal ® Thermal Solver ®

TEMPERATURE LOCKING IN PHASE CHANGE

Allow all elements to shadow for orbital and solar heating requests

What is it?

You can now specify which elements participate in shadowing checks fororbital and solar heating requests. The new Allow all elements to shadow fororbital and solar heating requests option enables you to do this.

• If you select the option, all elements with appropriate thermal propertiesto participate in shadowing checks.


Digital Simulation

• If you do not select the option, only the elements selected in orbital andsolar heating requests to participate in shadowing checks.

Caution

Selecting this option increases the computation time of your thermalanalysis.


You should not use this option for the vast majority of thermal analyses.

This option is helpful when you want elements that are not in the enclosuredefined by the request to participate in shadowing. If the enclosure containsspecularly reflective or transmissive elements, this option allows otherelements to receive reflected or transmitted energy. An example for when youwould use this option is when solar radiation accidentally falls on a telescopeaperture, passing through to the electronics inside.







Thermal Thermal



NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar ® Solve ® EditSolver Parameters

Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solver Parameters


Digital Simulation


Radiation Parameters tab® View Factor Calculationgroup® Allow all elements to shadow for orbital andsolar heating requests

Articulation performance improvements

What is it?

The performance and accuracy of the thermal solver is improved for modelswith articulation:

• The algorithm that handles articulation computes only once theenclosure view factor requests and thermal coupling requests involvingnon-articulating nodes.

• If an articulating model with an orbit defined has a rotation angle ortranslation position that varies with time, the solver sets the articulationtime calculation points to include both the orbit time calculation pointsand articulation movement time points. This allows the solver toaccurately capture articulation movements between calculation pointsderived only from the orbit definition.







Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Articulation

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Articulation


Digital Simulation

Usability improvements for the segregated radiation solver

What is it?

You can now activate the segregated radiation solver directly in the SolverParameters dialog box without using Advanced Parameters. To activate it,select the Use Segregated Radiation Solver check box.

The segregated radiation solver separates the solution of radiative heattransfer from the solution of all other thermal physics. The segregated solvercreates two matrix equations, one formed by the network of conductances toOppenheim elements and a second matrix containing all other terms. Thesolutions of both matrices are passed back and forth to each other until thesolution converges.


The segregated radiation solver improves solver performance, particularlywhen the radiation matrix is very non-linear, or when the solid matrix isill-conditioned. The improvement increases when you are modeling cryogenictemperatures.






Thermal Advanced ThermalAxisymmetric Thermal Advanced Axisymmetric

Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar ® Solve ® EditSolver Parameters

Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solver ParametersLocation in dialogbox

Radiation Parameters tab® View Factor Calculationgroup® Use Segregated Radiation Solver


Digital Simulation

Generic orbit enhancement

What is it?

You can now specify the distance between a generic celestial body and the sunusing the Sun-Planet Distance option.


The distance definition between the Sun and a generic celestial body allowsyou to use the Orbit Visualizer to display the orbit you define.




Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteDefine an Orbit modeling object by selecting Genericfrom the Planet list.

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Modeling Objects ®Orbit ® Create

Menu Insert ® Modeling Objects ® Orbit ® CreateLocation in dialogbox

Sun Planet Characteristics tab® Planet Data group®Sun-Planet Distance

Periodic convergence for spacecraft transient thermal analyses

What is it?

You can now choose to run your orbital heating analysis for a specifiednumber of orbits, or stop it when the temperature change between orbitsconvergences to a value you set.

Select the Enable Periodic Convergence option to stop your transientanalysis if it has periodically converged before the Maximum Number ofOrbits has been analyzed.


This enhancement can save you solution time because it gives you theflexibility to analyze a model for a specific number of orbits, or to stop thesimulation when the periodic orbital convergence has been achieved.


Digital Simulation




Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

Set a transient solution in the Edit Solution or CreateSolution dialog boxes, and in the Transient Setup tab,select Based on Orbit Period from the End list.


SimulationNavigator Right-click the Simulation Objects node® EditLocation in dialogbox Transient Setup tab® Enable Periodic Convergence

Orbit Visualizer enhancements

What is it?

In addition to the triad showing the absolute CSYS of the model, theOrbit Visualizer window displays also the aim, align, satellite-sun, andsatellite-planet vectors.

You can also control the CSYS display size

1 — Aim vector

2 — Align vector

3 — Satellite Sun vector

4 — Satellite Planet vector

5 — X direction of the triad

6 — Y direction of the triad

7 — Z direction of the triad


Digital Simulation

A Default button is added to the Display Options dialog box of the OrbitVisualizer. Click this button to return the options selection to the defaultstate.





Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite Define a Orbit modeling objectSimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Orbital Heating

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Orbital HeatingLocation in dialogbox View group ® Display

Import and export STEP-TAS radiation model

What is it?

You can now import a STEP-TAS radiation model into the NX Space SystemsThermal solver environment. You can also export an NX Space SystemsThermal model to a STEP-TAS radiation model.

You can exchange the following entities:

• All primitives


Digital Simulation

• Shell elements

• Material properties

• Thermo-optical properties

STEP-TAS (Thermal Analysis for Space) is an open, neutral, and efficientstandard for the exchange, processing, and long term archiving of spacethermal analysis models and results. The standrad was developed by theEuropean Space Agency. ISO 10303, also known as STEP, is the foundation ofSTEP-TAS.


This enhancement allows you to exchange NX Space Systems Thermal (TMG)thermal models with other thermal analysis tools that support the openstandard STEP-TAS, such as Thermal Desktop and ESARAD.




Where do I find it?

Import



NX SPACE SYSTEMS THERMAL ® File Type list® Radiation Model ® Radiation Model Type list ®Step-Tas

Export


PrerequisiteYou must be in the NX Space Systems Thermal solverenvironment.

Menu File ® Export ® SimulationLocation in dialogbox

File Type list ® Radiation Model ® Radiation ModelType list ® Step-Tas


Digital Simulation

Heat maps report enhancement

What is it?

When you create a Heat Maps type of Report simulation object in a thermalmodel that has a radiative environment or a duct network, the reportadditionally includes the heat flow from the groups you defined to thefollowing two groups:

• SPACE— This group represents the radiative environment.

• AMBIENT— This group represents the ambient environment of the ductnetwork.


This information lets you know how much heat flow a specific region ofyour model exchanged with the radiative environment and the ambientenvironment of the duct network.







Thermal Thermal



NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Report

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® ReportLocation in dialogbox Type group ® Heat Maps


Digital Simulation

Between region report enhancement

What is it?

When you create a Between Region type of Report simulation object in athermal model, you can override the secondary region with the radiativeenvironment or fluid ambient environment.

The new Use list has two options:

• Radiative Environment processes and reports thermal data from theprimary region to the radiative environment temperature.

• Fluid Ambient processes and reports thermal data from the primaryregion to the fluid ambient temperature.


This information lets you know how much heat flow a specific region ofyour model exchanged with the radiative environment or the fluid ambientenvironment.







Thermal Thermal



NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Report

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Report


Digital Simulation


Type group® Between Regions ® Secondary RegionOverride group ® Override Secondary Region checkbox

Text change in Orbit modeling object

What is it?

In the Orbit dialog box, the following names are changed:

Old name New nameArgument of Perigee Argument of PeriapsisPerigee PeriapsisApogee Apoapsis

This nomenclature is consistent when supporting celestial bodies other thanearth.




Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Modeling Objects ®Orbit ® Create

Menu Insert ® Modeling Objects ® Orbit ® CreateLocation in dialogbox Orbit Parameters tab® Argument of Periapsis

Changes in the Joint dialog box

What is it?

There are several changes to the Properties group in the Joint dialog box.

Old interface New interfaceTranslational Speed list Translation Rate Type listThe text box that appeared whenTranslational Speed was set toExpression had no name

Translation Speed text box

Section had no name Position versus Time Table section


Digital Simulation

Rotation Rate list Rotation Rate Type listThe text box that appeared whenRotation Rate was set to Expressionhad no name

Rotation Rate text box

Section had no name Angular Position versus Time Tablesection



Coupled Thermal-Flow AdvancedThermal/Flow withESC

NXSpace Systems Thermal Thermal Space Systems ThermalThermal Advanced ThermalNX Thermal and FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Advanced

Thermal-Flow

Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Modeling Objects ®Joint ® Create

Menu Insert ® Modeling Objects ® Joint ® Create

Duct modeling capabilities

Enhancements to ducts with thick walls

What is it?

When you specify a user defined beam section for a Duct with Thick Wall typeof 1D mesh collector, you can now specify the following:

• Solid Area which represents the cross-sectional area of the duct’s thickwalls.

• Fluid Area which represents the cross-sectional area of the inside of theduct containing the fluid.

• External Perimeter which represents the external duct perimeter andis used for radiation calculation.

• Wetted Perimeter which represents the internal duct perimeter and isused for convection calculation.


Digital Simulation


The solver now uses both the wetted and the external perimeters incalculating convection and radiation on a duct with thick walls.







Thermal Advanced ThermalNX Thermal and FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Advanced

Thermal-Flow

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite A Duct with Thick Wall type of 1D mesh collector

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® 1D Element SectionMenu Insert ® 1D Element Section

SimulationNavigator

Right-click a duct mesh collector node® Edit ® Showsection manager

Displaying duct orientation

What is it?

You can now display the orientation of duct elements using an XYZ triad ateach node. The new Display Section Orientation option enables you to do this.


Digital Simulation

For other new display options for duct meshes, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.


This option helps you to determine the flow direction in the duct network.






Thermal Advanced ThermalFlow Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteAn active FEM file that contains duct elements withdefined sections.

SimulationNavigator

Right-click the 1D mesh collector or 1D mesh node ®Edit Display

Location in dialogbox Display Section Orientation check box

Multiple 1D ducts connected to same 3D flow face

What is it?

When connecting multiple ducts to the same 3D flow face, you can now createone Duct to 3D Flow Connection type of Duct Flow Boundary Conditionssimulation object.

Previously, you needed to first split the 3D flow face into as many regions asyou had ducts on that face.


The workflow for connecting multiple ducts to the same 3D flow face wasgreatly improved.





Digital Simulation




NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Duct Flow Boundary Conditions

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Duct Flow Boundary

ConditionsLocation in dialogbox Type group® Duct to 3D Flow Connection

Duct Fan/Pump text change

What is it?

In the Duct Flow Boundary Conditions dialog box, the following names arechanged.

Old name New nameVolume Flow Rate Volume Flow (per Element)Mass Flow Mass Flow (per Element)







NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Duct Flow Boundary Conditions


Digital Simulation

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Duct Flow Boundary

ConditionsLocation in dialogbox

Type group ® Duct Fan/Pump ® Parameter group ®Mode list® Volume Flow Rate / Mass Flow

Flow capabilities

New mixing plane boundary condition

What is it?

Use the Mixing Plane command when you want to interface a fluid regionwith rotating flow with a fluid region with non-rotating flow.

A mixing plane averages:

• The velocity on the upstream plane of the mixing plane and applies itto the downstream plane.

• The pressure on the downstream plane of the mixing plane and applies itto the upstream plane.

You can specify the following types of Mixing Plane:

• Mixing Plane with Joint Mesh Interface—When you use this type, youneed to specify only one region.

• Mixing Plane with Disjoint Mesh Interface—When you use this type, theupstream and downstream regions do not need to touch, but for betterresults these two regions should be parallel.

You must specify:

• The velocity direction. You need to do this only for the Mixing Plane withJoint Mesh Interface type.

• The averaging method. You can specify this either along the radius byspecifying the radial direction, or along vector by specifying a directionon the mixing plane.

• The number of segments over which the software averages the flowquantities.


Digital Simulation


The mixing plane helps you to simulate flow problems where averaging theflow over parts of the rotor interface is useful, such as when a rotor interactswith a stator.




Flow Advanced FlowNX Thermal and FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Advanced

Thermal-Flow

Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Mixing Plane

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Mixing Plane

Homogeneous Gas Mixture modeling object

What is it?

The new Homogeneous Gas Mixture modeling object replaces the Generaltype of Scalar modeling object.You can define up to 5 gases in the mixture, including the primary gas.

The new workflow for modeling homogeneous gas mixtures is different fromthe previous workflow which used the general Scalar modeling object. Now,you define a Homogeneous Gas Mixture modeling object in the 3D meshcollector or in the Fluid Domain simulation object. See Model a homogeneousgas mixture for more information.

Note

The Scalar modeling object is removed from NX.


Use the Homogeneous Gas Mixture modeling object to model a gas-gasmixture that contains miscible species, such as carbon monoxide in air.




../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/homogeneous_gas_mixture_pr.html&vars=-aux

../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/homogeneous_gas_mixture_pr.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation



Flow Advanced FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Advanced Thermal-Flow

Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Modeling Objects ®Homogeneous Gas Mixture ® Create

MenuInsert ® Modeling Objects ® Homogeneous GasMixture ® Create

Tracer Fluid modeling object

What is it?

The new Tracer Fluid modeling object replaces the Passive type of Scalarmodeling object.

The new workflow for modeling tracer fluids is the same workflow thatused the passive Scalar modeling object. See Model a tracer fluid for moreinformation.

Note

The Scalar modeling object is removed from NX.


Use the Tracer Fluid modeling object to model a gas-gas or a liquid-liquidmixture that contains miscible species where the main fluid properties arenot affected by the other species, such as a dye in water.




Flow Advanced FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Advanced Thermal-Flow

Where do I find it?



../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/tracer_fluid_pr.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Modeling Objects ®Tracer Fluid ® Create

Menu Insert ® Modeling Objects ® Tracer Fluid ® Create

Mixture and tracer fluid initial, ambient, and boundary conditions

What is it?

With the introduction of the new Homogeneous Gas Mixture and TracerFluid modeling objects that replace the Scalar modeling object, the followingchanges are also introduced in the boundary condition and solution settings:

• The new Initial Mixture - 3D Flow and Initial Tracer Fluid - 3D Flow typeoptions are added to the Initial Conditions dialog box. They replace the oldInitial Scalar - 3D Flow type options present in the previous version of NX.Use the new options to specify the initial mass fractions of gases in thehomogeneous gas mixture or tracer fluid on selected regions of your model.

• In the Flow Boundary Condition dialog box, for the Inlet Flow andOpening types, the Tracer Fluid and Mixture groups replace the old Scalargroup. Use the new options to specify the mass fractions of gases in thetracer fluid or homogeneous gas mixture on regions that enter or exitthe fluid enclosure.

• On the Initial Conditions tab of the Solution dialog box, the Tracer Fluidand Mixture lists replace the old Scalar list. Use the new options tospecify the uniform initial mass fractions of gases in the tracer fluid orhomogeneous gas mixture on the complete fluid region of your model.

• On the Ambient Conditions tab of the Solution dialog box, the Humidityand Mixture group replaces the old Humidity and Scalar group. Use theoptions in the new group to specify the mass fractions of gases in thetracer fluid and homogeneous gas mixture of the ambient environment.





Flow Advanced FlowNX Thermal and FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Advanced Thermal-Flow


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Initial Conditions constraint


Right-click the Constraints node ® New Constraint® Initial Conditions

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Initial ConditionsLocation in dialogbox

Type group ® Initial Mixture - 3D Flow/Initial TracerFluid - 3D Flow

Flow Boundary Condition simulation object


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Flow Boundary Condition

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Flow Boundary Condition

Location in dialogbox Type group ® Inlet Flow/Opening

Solution settings



Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solution AttributesLocation in dialogbox Ambient Conditions tab / Initial Conditions tab

Condensation and evaporation modeling

What is it?

You can now model condensation and evaporation from both the CreateSolution and Edit Solution dialog boxes.

1. On the Solution Details tab, select Condensation/Evaporation.

2. From the Solution Type list, select Transient.


Digital Simulation

For condensation, humidity must be present in the model. You can specifythe humidity in:

• Ambient conditions

• Initial conditions

• Boundary conditions through external conditions

You can also specify initial water content. See **Unsatisfied xref title** formore information.






Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click the solution node ® EditToolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Solve ® Edit SolutionAttributes

Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solution AttributesLocation in dialogbox Solution Details tab® Solve Options group

Water content initial condition

What is it?

A new Initial Water Content - 3D Flow type option is added to the InitialConditions dialog box. Use this option to specify the initial water content onthe top and bottom surfaces of your model.

You can specify the water content as:

• A film thickness

• A total mass


Digital Simulation

• A surface density


Use this option when you model condensation and evaporation.






Where do I find it?


Right-click the Constraints node ® New Constraint® Initial Conditions

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Initial ConditionsLocation in dialogbox Type group® Initial Water Content - 3D Flow

Water thickness results for the condensation and evaporation simulations

What is it?

You can recover the following results sets for condensation and evaporationmodeling:

• Temperature – Nodal

• Temperature – Elemental

• Relative Humidity – Elemental-Nodal

• Specific Humidity – Elemental-Nodal

• Film Thickness – Elemental-Nodal— In this results set, the calculatedfilm thickness is the accumulated water film thickness at the surface.

• Water Cumulation – Elemental-Nodal— In this results set, the calculatedvalue is the water surface density in mass per unit area.


Digital Simulation

The last two results sets are new and specific to condensation and evaporationmodeling.

These results sets are available when you select theCondensation/Evaporation check box in the Create Solution orEdit Solution dialog boxes.






Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click the solution node ® EditToolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Solve ® Edit SolutionAttributes

Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solution AttributesLocation in dialogbox Results Options tab ® 3D Flow group ®

Condensation/Evaporation

New 3D flow results

What is it?

You can now recover the following results sets in flow modeling:

• Relative Pressure and Shear Resultant — In this results set, thecalculated pressure is relative to ambient pressure.

• Absolute Pressure and Shear Resultant — In this results set, thecalculated pressure is absolute pressure.

Both of these results sets are forces per area vector data sets evaluated atnodes of free faces surrounding a fluid volume.

These results sets are available when you select the Pressure and ShearResultants check box in the Create Solution or Edit Solution dialog boxes.


Digital Simulation


These results sets help you to map the flow pressures to a structuralsimulation.





Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?



Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solution AttributesLocation in dialogbox

Results Options tab® 3D Flow group® Pressure andShear Resultants

Y+ results at all nodes in the flow domain

What is it?

You can now recover y+ results at all nodes in the flow domain when you runflow analysis with the Turbulence Model option set to either of the following:

• Shear Stress Transport-SST

• K-Omega

The y+ results are available when you select Y+ in the Create Solution orEdit Solution dialog boxes.

After solving, in the Post Processing Navigator, a Y+ – Element-Nodal resulttype appears under the Solution results node in addition to the previouslyavailable Y+ on +ve Side – Nodal result type.


Digital Simulation

Y+ – Element-Nodal results in a flow around a cylinder


Use these y+ results to help you construct the boundary layer mesh (alsocalled skin mesh) for the turbulence modeling.





Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar ® Solve ® EditSolution Attributes



Digital Simulation


Solution Details tab ® Solve Options group ®Turbulence Model list® Shear Stress Transport-SST /K-Omega

Results Options tab® 3D Flow group® Y+

Fractional step time integration scheme

What is it?

Fractional step is a new time integration scheme that can be used for flowanalysis.

In the fractional step time integration scheme, the velocity calculation isdecoupled from the pressure calculation. The velocity is first predictedby solving the momentum equations. The pressure is then predicted bysolving the continuity equation. The velocity is corrected using the predictedpressure. The fractional step time integration scheme solves the flow analysisusing an adaptive time step.

If you select Fractional Step from the Transient — Time Integration Schemelist, you can choose between the following stability criteria:

• Von Neumann calculates the adaptive time step automatically.

• CFL calculates the adaptive time step using the CFL number that youspecify.

• None ensures that the time step is constant.

Previously, only one time integration scheme was available. To use the timeintegration scheme that was previously available, select Implicit from theTransient — Time Integration Scheme list.


Because it is usually faster than the implicit time integration scheme, thefractional step integration scheme saves you time when you work on longtransient problems.






Digital Simulation

Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Solve ® Edit SolverParameters

Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solver Parameters


3D Flow Solver tab® Convergence Control group®Transient — Time Integration Scheme ® FractionalStep

Rotating and translating surfaces in shear

What is it?

In a Flow Surface simulation object, you can now specify if a given flowsurface is rotating or translating when you select the Rotating/TranslatingSurface in Shear check box.If the surface is rotating, you need to specify the axis of rotation and theangular speed.

If the surface is translating, you need to specify the direction and the speedof the velocity vector.

The rotating or translating movement of the surface must follow that surface,as shown in the following graphics.

Translating surfaceRotating surface

Flow field

Translating surface velocity vector


Digital Simulation

Rotating surface angular velocity

Previously, you could specify whether a flow surface should rotate or translatein the Moving Frame of Reference simulation object. See **Unsatisfied xreftitle** for more information.


You can use a translating or rotating flow surface when you want to simulatea moving surface with respect to other stationary parts of your model.





Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Flow Surface

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Flow SurfaceLocation in dialogbox Rotation/Translation Parameters group

Moving Frame of Reference changes

What is it?

When you create a Moving Frame of Reference simulation object, you specifya fluid volume that is in a rotating frame of reference. You need to specify anaxis of rotation and an angular speed.

Previously, you could select:

• A Translating Frame of Reference or a Rotating Frame of Reference inthe Type group. The Type group is removed from the Moving Frame ofReference dialog box.


Digital Simulation

• Polygon surfaces, polygon bodies, 2D elements, faces of 3D elements, and3D elements. Now you can only select polygon bodies and 3D elements.

You can define a rotating or translating flow surfaces in the Flow Surfacesimulation object. See **Unsatisfied xref title** for more information.





Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Objects node ® NewSimulation Object ® Moving Frame of Reference

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation ® Moving Frame of Reference

Usability improvements for the Carreau non-Newtonian model

What is it?

You can now select the Carreau non-Newtonian model directly in theNon-Newtonian Fluid dialog box.





Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Modeling Objects ®Non-Newtonian Fluid ® Create

MenuInsert ® Modeling Objects ® Non-Newtonian Fluid® Create


Digital Simulation

Location in dialogbox Non-Newtonian Model group® Type list® Carreau

Mapping capabilities

Mapping’s element support

What is it?

The mapping solver now supports the following ANSYS elements:

• LINK180

• SHELL281(6), SHELL281(8)

• SOLID185(4), SOLID185(6), SOLID185(8)

• PLANE182(3), PLANE182(4)

• PLANE183(6), PLANE183(8)





Mapping Thermal

Mapping Thermal-FlowNX Thermal and FlowAxisymmetric Mapping Thermal

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite Two FEM with models that are geometrically congruentSimulationNavigator

Right-click the simulation file node® New Solution

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar® Solution

Menu Insert ® SolutionLocation in dialogbox

Analysis Type list® Mapping or Axisymmetric Mapping


Digital Simulation

Laminate Composites

Laminate 2D to 3D Extrusion

What is it?

Use the new Extrusion command to create 3D meshes from global layups andANSYS 2D meshes. A 3D mesh that can contain bricks and wedges is createdfor each combination of ply and 2D mesh. Ply drop-offs are extruded usingcombinations of wedge, tetrahedron, and pyramid elements.

Note

The Extrusion command currently creates 3D meshes only in theANSYS environment.


When you extrude each ply to create 3D elements, the structural resultsyou get from the analysis are more accurate in the normal direction of the2D mesh.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite ANSYS solver environment

Toolbar Laminates ® ExtrusionMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Extrusion

Imported Layup

What is it?

Use the Imported Layup command to import FiberSIM layups onto selectedfaces. The FiberSIM layup file has the extension .xml.

In the Import Layup dialog box, you can override the imported layup namewhich appears in the Simulation Navigator.


Digital Simulation

For the imported layup, you can access all the commands as for any otherlayup, except the View Flat Patterns command. You can re-import the layupusing the Reimport Layup command.


This command enables you to work with FiberSIM imported layups in NX.

Where do I find it?

Import a FiberSIM layup


Toolbar Laminates ® Imported LayupMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Imported Layup

Re-import a FiberSIM layup

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click an imported layup node® Reimport Layup

Layups on 2D meshes

What is it?

You can now assign global plies to element faces of a 2D mesh. In previousversions, you could only select polygon faces.

To select the whole mesh, do the following:

1. In the Draping Data dialog box, from the Method list, select RelatedElements.

2. From the Type Filter list, select Mesh.

3. In the graphics window, select the 2D mesh.


This option allows you to drape meshes on models for which you do nothave the geometry, for example, imported FEMs. It also allows you to makemodifications to the layup without modifying the geometry.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

SimulationNavigator Right-click a global ply node ® EditLocation in dialogbox Draping Parameters group® Select 2D Objects

Primary draping orientation using seed curve

What is it?

You can now use a seed curve to define the primary draping orientation.To construct the seed curve, select polygon edges and element edges. Theconstructed seed curve must be one continuous curve.

Seed curve constructed byselecting one polygon edge and

six element edges

Unidirectional fibers followingthe seed curve

Previously, you could only select a vector to define the primary drapingorientation.

From the Draping Path list, select:

• Geodesic to define the primary draping orientation by selecting a vector.

• Seed Curve to define the primary draping orientation by constructing aseed curve.


This option allows you to align fibers with a geometric feature such as theedge of a face.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click a global ply node ® EditLocation in dialogbox

Draping Parameters group® Draping Path list® SeedCurve

Set draping mesh properties

What is it?

In the new Draping Mesh Properties group of the Draping Data dialog box,you can specify the draping element size as follows:

• Select the Specify Element Size check box and type a value in theElement Size box.

• Move the Percentage of Mesh Size slider to define the draping elementsize as a percentage of the average element size of the 2D mesh.

Coarse draping mesh size Fine draping mesh size

A draping element is a square element where one side represents the primarydraping orientation.


This new option provides you with more control.

• To speed up the draping process, increase the mesh size.

• To increase the accuracy of the draping process, decrease the mesh size.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click a global ply node ® EditLocation in dialogbox Draping Mesh Properties group

Select cut curves along element edges

What is it?

You can now select cut curves along element edges when you drape globalplies. Previously you could only select polygon edges.


This option allows you to define a cut without modifying the geometry.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click a global ply node ® EditLocation in dialogbox Draping Parameters group® Select Cuts


Digital Simulation

Persistent draping results

What is it?

When you save the FEM that contains global layups, the draped fiberorientations are also saved with the FEM. Therefore, you do not have toupdate the global plies when you open an existing FEM file that containsglobal layups.

Fiber Orientation Display Options

What is it?

You can now specify how the fiber shear angle colors are displayed. In theFiber Orientation Options dialog box, from the Spectrum list, select:• Stoplight to display the fiber shear angle as a function of the lock angle.

• Structural to display the fiber shear angle as a percentage of 90°.

Ply fiber orientation as functionof the lock angle

Ply fiber orientation aspercentage of 90°

Where do I find it?


Right-click a global layup node ® Display FiberOrientation Options


Digital Simulation

Show ply orientations when no draping solver is selected

What is it?

You can now display ply fiber orientation even if you set the draping solver toNone in the Draping Data dialog box.

The fiber orientation is calculated from the material orientation and theply angle.

Warning

When you set the 2D mesh material orientation to Inherited fromLayup, make sure that the material orientation of the layups is notdefined by a ply using the None draping solver.


Ply-based modeling now always shows the fiber orientations, regardless ofthe draping solver selected.

Where do I find it?

Set the draping solver to none

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click a global ply node ® Edit


Digital Simulation

Location in dialogbox Draping Parameters group® Solver list® None

Display ply fiber orientation


Right-click a global layup node ® View FiberOrientations

Quick Post Report

What is it?

Use the Quick Post Report command to export the results summaries to anExcel spreadsheet or a CSV file. The following result types are supported:

• Shell Stress Resultants

• Ply Stresses

• Ply Strains

• Ply/Bond Failure Indices

• Ply/Bond Strength Ratios

You can select one or more results sets with specific loadcase and iteration forwhich you want to see the results.

You can select one or more enveloping rules that are used to create thesummaries:

• Max & Min

• Min

• Max

• Abs. Max


The Quick Post Report command queries the results sets without accessingthe FEM, and therefore the report is processed quickly. This command isespecially useful for large and/or numerous solutions.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Toolbar Laminates ® Quick Post ReportMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Quick Post Report

Enveloping rules for Laminate Post Report

What is it?

When you create a Laminate Post Report metasolution, you can now selectthe following enveloping rules:

• Max & Min

• Min

• Max

• Abs. Max

In the previous releases, the enveloping rule was hardcoded to absolutemaximum (Abs. Max). Now, in Post Processing Navigator, the results labelshows your selected enveloping rule.

Laminate Post Report 1Max Abs. Bond Failure Index — ElementalScalarMax Abs. Failure Index — ElementalMax Abs. Ply Failure Indices — ElementalPly 1Scalar

Ply 2Ply 3Ply 4Max Abs. Ply Bond Failure Indices — Elemental


This enhancement gives you more control on the rules that are used toenvelope your results.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Laminates ® Graphical Post ReportMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Graphical Post Report


Digital Simulation

Location in dialogbox Output Control group

Laminate Post Report node commands in the Simulation Navigator

What is it?

The right-click commands for the Laminate Post Report metasolution nodeare changed.

Old right-click menu New right-click menuEdit Attributes EditRename This command is no longer available.

Delete DeleteModel Check This command is no longer available.

Solve Generate ReportInformation Information

You can still rename your Laminate Post Report metasolution. The textis editable when you click once on the Laminate Post Report metasolutionnode in the Simulation Navigator.

Caution

If you rename or edit the Laminate Post Report metasolution, theResults node in the Simulation Navigator is deleted.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Laminates ® Graphical Post ReportMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Graphical Post Report

Improvements in zone creation

What is it?

The following improvements are introduced in the computation of zones:

1. When you compute zones, the solver creates one zone for each regularlaminate physical property that is not inherited from the layup.

ZonesLaminate_layup


Digital Simulation

Laminate_PPTZone 1 (773 elements)

2. Elements of the same zone do not need to touch.

3. When the solver computes zones, the following problematic elements areshown:

• Overlap elements — These are the elements that are referenced bymore than one global layup. When the draping solver encountersthese elements, it issues an error in the Information window and stopscomputing zones.

• Orphan elements — These are the elements that have a laminatephysical property that you set on the mesh collector using theInherited from layup option, and that do not have any ply defined.When the draping solver encounters these elements, it issues an errorin the Information window and computes zones for other elements.

— Overlap elements

— Orphan elements


Digital Simulation

4. A single zone can now span more than one polygon face.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Laminates ® Update Global Layups and ZonesSimulationNavigator Right-click the Zones node® Compute ZonesMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Update Global Layups and Zones

Create a Design Variable — Composite Property modeling object

What is it?

You can now create Design Variable — Composite Property modeling objectsfor the Nastran DESOPT 200 solution from the following type of laminatedesign variables:

• Ply Angle

• Ply Thickness

For both of these laminate design variables, select Continuous from theDomain Type list in the Design Variable Specification dialog box. TheDiscrete domain type is not supported.


It is much easier to create the ply design variables in the Laminate Modelerdialog box, than it is in the Nastran DESOPT 200 solution setup.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

You must delect Enable Optimization in the LaminateModeler, and create and assign an angle or thicknesscontinuous design variable.

Toolbar Laminates ® Physical PropertyMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Physical Property


Design Variable Manager group ® select an angle orthickness continuous design variable ® Export asModeling Object


Digital Simulation

Change ply ID number

What is it?

You can now change the ID of each laminate ply and global ply. Type theply’s ID in the Global ply id box of either the Layup Manager dialog box orthe Laminate Manager dialog box.Previously, the software was assigning the ply ID each time the FEM file wasreopened. Now the ply ID is saved with the FEM file.


You can renumber plies to better suits your needs.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Laminates ® Physical Property / Global Layup

SimulationNavigator

Right-click Layups node ® New Layup

Right-click a global layup node ® EditMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Physical Property / Global LayupLocation in dialogbox Global ply id

Export laminate data to CSV file

What is it?

You can now export data to a CSV file or an Excel spreadsheet. In theLaminate Modeler dialog box, you can export the following data:• In the Ply Layup group, you can export the laminate layup with each linerepresenting one ply. For each ply, the material name, the thickness, andthe orientation angle values are exported.

• In the Validation group, you can export the laminate information such asmass, stiffness, stability, and thermal properties of the laminate.

• In the Optimization group, you can export the information for the originallaminate and the five candidates.

In the Laminate Strength Analysis dialog box, you can export the effect of theloads on your laminate in terms of ply stresses and strains, failure indices,and margins of safety.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Laminate Modeler dialog box


Toolbar Laminates ® Physical PropertyMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Physical PropertyLocation in dialogbox Ply Layup group® Export Layup to CSV File

Laminate Strength Analysis dialog box

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite You must select a failure theory.



Validation group ® Analyze Laminate Strength

® Export to CSV File

Import laminate layup from CSV file

What is it?

You can now import a laminate layup from a CSV file. Each line in the CSVfile contains the following information for one ply:

• The ply material name

• The ply thickness

• The ply orientation angle

In the previous releases, you could import laminate layups only from an Excelspreadsheet.

Where do I find it?




Digital Simulation

Location in dialogbox Ply Layup group® Import Layup from CSV File

Journaling improvements

What is it?

You can now save in a journal the laminate physical property or the globallayup that you create from the Laminate Modeler and Layup Modeler dialogboxes. The laminates are saved when you click either OK or Apply in thesedialog boxes.

All new Laminates commands for NX 7.5 support journaling.

Laminate node enhancements in the Simulation Navigator

What is it?

In the Simulation Navigator, the following node names are changed.

Old name New namePly Faces (#) 2D Objects (#)Cut Curves (#) Cuts (#)

In addition, the Cuts (#) nodes under ply nodes are now only displayed whenyou select Cut Curves in the Draping Data dialog box. Previously, evenif no cut curves were defined, a Cut Curves (0) node was displayed in theSimulation Navigator.

LayupsLayup OffsetMaterial Orientation

Mud_guardPly 10 (symmetric 3)Ply 9 (symmetric 6)Ply 62D Objects (5)Ply 32D Objects (6)Cuts (1)


Digital Simulation

Additional commands on the Laminates toolbar

What is it?

Laminates toolbar in the FEM Laminates toolbar in theSimulation file

The following new commands are available on the Laminates toolbar in theFEM:

Extrusion — Use this command to open the Laminate 2D-to-3DExtrusion dialog box.

Imported Layup — Use this command to open the Import Layupdialog box.

The following new command is available on the Laminates toolbar in theSimulation file:

Quick Post Report — Use this command to open the Laminate QuickPost Summary dialog box.

In addition, these two commands have new icons:

• Laminate Physical Property

• Global Layup

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationToolbar Laminates


Digital Simulation

FE Model Correlation

Pre-Test Planning

What is it?

Pre-Test Planning is a solution process in NX FE Model Correlation. Pre-TestPlanning uses the finite element model and a normal mode solution to assistin selecting optimal sensor locations for modal testing.

You first prepare the finite element model for structural analysis by definingthe mesh and material properties. Next, you solve one of the following normalmode solutions:

• NX or MSC Nastran: SEMODES 103

• ANSYS: Modal

• ABAQUS: Frequency Perturbation Substep

Then, you insert a new Pre-Test Planning solution process referencing thenormal mode solution to perform pre-test planning tasks.

Pre-test sensors’ locationconfiguration

Auto MAC of the sensors’configuration

With Pre-Test Planning in NX, you can:

• Specify the modes to consider. You can assign a weight to each mode inorder to emphasize the most important modes.


Digital Simulation

• Specify required and candidate degrees-of-freedom (DOF) sets for sensorselection.

• Create, manage, and solve multiple sensor selection configurationssimultaneously. You can, for example, compute sensor sets with differentnumbers of uniaxial and/or triaxial sensors.

• Visualize selected sensor locations and measurement directions in themodel view.

• View the AutoMAC for the candidate modes, considering all DOF, therequired DOF, the candidate DOF, or a sensor selection configuration DOF.

• Easily compare multiple sensor selection configurations in a detailview. The view is in a table format, and lists key properties such as thenumber of sensors and the maximum off-diagonal AutoMAC entry foreach configuration.

• Export sensor selection configurations to a Simulation DOF Set as aprerequisite to obtaining a test-analysis model (TAM).

• Export pre-test planning results to an Excel spreadsheet or a CSV file.


Sufficiently accurate and complete modal test data are a prerequisite forsuccessful FE model correlation and FE model updating. The Pre-TestPlanning solution process maximizes the effectiveness of a modal test byensuring good observability of model’s modal properties.

Pre-test planning generally precedes modal testing. The goal of pre-testplanning is to make sure that, during the modal test:

• All normal modes of interest are excited.

• The sensors are placed so that the mode shapes are easily distinguishablefrom each other.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation file with modal analysis solution

Toolbar Pre-Test Planning ® New Pre-TestMenu Insert ® Pre-Test Planning


Digital Simulation

Side-by-side modal results

What is it?

You can now display paired mode shapes side-by-side in post processing.

For each mode pair in the Correlation Details View, you can select:

• Side-by-Side Display

• Side-by-Side Animation


Digital Simulation

To return the model in a single viewport to the graphics window, right-click amode pair in the Correlation Details View and choose Return to Model.


Digital Simulation


You can easily compare mode shape results from the work and referencesolutions for the same mode pair.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

You need an active Simulation file with an up-to-datecorrelation. The Mode Pairs [#] node must be selectedin the Simulation Navigator.

SimulationNavigator

Correlation Details View subpanel® right-click a modepair® Side-by-Side Display / Side-by-Side Animation/ Return to Model

Cross-orthogonality correlation matrix

What is it?

You can obtain the cross-orthogonality matrix for the mass-weighted modeshapes if the work solution contains a reduced mass matrix.

Cross-orthogonality matrix shown as a heat map

When you select X-ORTHO from the Method list in the Correlate dialog box,you can view the cross-orthogonality matrix results in any of the followingways:

• As a heat map plot when you select Show results heat map .


Digital Simulation

• In text format in the Information window when you select Show results

info window .

• In an Excel spreadsheet when you select Show results spreadsheet .

• In the comma-separated value format in a CSV file when you select Show

results to csv file .

Before it displays the cross-orthogonality matrix results, the software firstperforms cross-orthogonality related checks. If it encounters problem incomputing the metric, it displays detailed information in an Informationwindow.

Note

Only work solutions solved with Nastran can contain a reduced massmatrix.


In a modal model of an undamped or proportionally damped MDOF system,the mode shapes are mutually orthogonal when weighted by the mass orstiffness matrix. The cross-orthogonality metric quantitatively comparesthe work mode shapes to the reference mode shapes involving the reducedmass matrix. The cross-orthogonality metric represents a more accuratecorrelation metric than the MAC, because the mass matrix is absent in theMAC calculation.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

An active Simulation file with a correlation specifiedand a work solution that contains a reduced massmatrix

Toolbar Correlation ® X-OrthoMenu Tools ® Correlation ® Plot X-OrthoSimulationNavigator Right-click a correlation node® CorrelateLocation in dialogbox Method list ® X-ORTHO


Digital Simulation

MSF correlation matrix

What is it?

You can now obtain modal scale factor (MSF) matrix results.

Modal scale factor matrix shown as a heat map

When you select MSF from the Method list in the Correlate dialog box, youcan view the modal scale factor matrix results in any of the following ways:

• As a heat map plot when you select Show results heat map .

• In text format in the Information window when you select Show results

info window .

• In an Excel spreadsheet when you select Show results spreadsheet .

• In the comma-separated value format in a CSV file when you select Show

results to csv file .


The modal scale factor relates two mode shape vectors in terms of themagnitude of their components. It can be interpreted as the slope of the beststraight line fit that goes through the origin when you graph the componentsof one mode shape vector over the component of another.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation file with a correlation specified


Digital Simulation

SimulationNavigator Right-click correlation node® CorrelateLocation in dialogbox Method list ® MSF

Sensor user interface enhancements

What is it?

A new sensors detail view is now accessible in the Correlation Detail Viewsubpanel, when you select Sensors [#] in the Simulation Navigator. Thesensors’ location and their node number are displayed in the graphics window.

In the sensors detail view, you can:

• Activate or deactivate the selected sensors.

• Enable or disable X, Y, Z directions, or all directions of the selected sensorswhen errors occur in the test data.

• Reverse the sign of sensor DOF in order to compensate for errors in theshape data that result from measurements accidentally taken in thewrong direction.

When you select one or more sensors in the Correlation Detail View subpanel,the corresponding sensors’ directions are enlarged in the graphics window.

Sensors’ locationSensors’ location with sensors 10,

13, and 14 enlarged

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Prerequisite

You need an active Simulation file with a correlationspecified and a test reference solution. The Sensors [#]node must be selected in the Simulation Navigator.

SimulationNavigator

Select and/or right-click one or more sensors in theCorrelation Details View subpanel

Generating a matching simulation DOF set

What is it?

You can now generate a DOF set that matches the node map between thework and reference solutions.

• When the reference solution is a test solution, the generated DOFset matches the current node map and active or inactive sensor DOFsettings. Sensor DOFs are mapped to simulation DOFs with the sameaxis direction.

• When the reference solution is an analysis solution, the generated DOFset matches the current node map using all translational DOFs.


You can use the generated simulation DOF set in another Correlation solutionprocess for calculating cross-orthogonality results or in a Model Updatesolution process.

Where do I find it?


Right-click Sensors [#] node or Node Map [#] node ®Generate Matching DOF Set

Correlation toolbar

What is it?

Correlation toolbar

Correlation commands are now available on the new Correlation toolbar.

• Use the Test Reference command to import a test reference solution.


Digital Simulation

• Use the Analysis Reference command to import an analysisreference solution.

• Use the Alignment command to align the reference and work models.

• Use the New Correlation command to create a new correlation.

• Use the Plot MAC command to display correlation modal assurancecriteria (MAC) results as a heat map.

• Use the Plot X-Ortho command to display correlation crossorthogonality (X-ortho) results as a heat map.

• Use the Refresh Correlation Results command to update thecorrelation after modifying the work solution, reference solution, activemodes, node map, or mode pairing.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationToolbar Correlation

Simulation Navigator enhancements

What is it?

In the Simulation Navigator, the following new nodes are available under acorrelation node:

• The Sensors [#] node is located under the reference solution results node.This node is displayed when the reference model is a test data model. Thenumber in the square bracket indicates the number of sensors.

• The A-Set DOF [#] node is located under the work solution results node.It is displayed when an Analysis (ASET) DOF set exists. The A-SetDOF should be compatible with the DOFs of the test sensors in order toenable the cross-orthogonality shape correlation metric. This node is onlysupported for NX Nastran and MSC Nastran.

• The Maa [# x #] node is located under the work solution results node. It isdisplayed when an Analysis (ASET) DOF set exists and a correspondingreduced mass matrix is found in the OP2 result file indicating that a


Digital Simulation

reduced mass matrix exists for the work solution. This node is onlysupported for NX Nastran and MSC Nastran.

• The Node Map [#] node is located directly under the correlation node. Thenumber in the square bracket indicates the number of nodes that arepaired between the work model and reference model.

Correlation 1 ActiveSolution 2 Results ReferenceNormal Modes [10] ReadySensors [30]

Solution 1 Results WorkNormal Modes [90] ReadyA-Set DOF [90]Mr [90 x 90]Node Map [30]Mode PairingMode Pairs [9]

These new nodes allow you quick access to related commands and information.

Where do I find it?


Alignment workflow enhancement

What is it?

You can now display an imported reference test model including the sensors,and align it with the work model prior to creating a new correlation.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteAn active Simulation file with a modal analysis worksolution and a test reference solution

Toolbar Correlation ® AlignmentMenu Tools ® Correlation ® AlignmentSimulationNavigator Right-click work solution node ® Align


Digital Simulation

Out-of-date indicators

What is it?

A new results icon now appears in the Simulation Navigator when youmake changes in your model, simulation, or solution properties that couldrequire a resolve and a reload of the work solution or reference solution.

An update icon now appears in the Simulation Navigator when either thenode map or the mode pairing needs to be updated.

Correlation 1 ActiveSolution 2 Results ReferenceNormal Modes [10] ReadySensors [27]

Solution 1 Results WorkNormal Modes [15] Ready

Node Map [17]Mode PairingMode Pairs [8]

To reload the work solution and reference solution results, right-click theSolution Results node and choose Reload. To continue using the currentresults if you are sure your changes did not affect the solution results, chooseIgnore Changes.

Note

Reload the solution’s results if you have made changes that affect themodal solution. You need to rerun the solver before you reload theresults.

You can update node map and mode pairs in one of these ways:

• On the Correlation toolbar, click Update Correlation .

• Choose Tools ® Correlation ® Update Correlation.

• In the Simulation Navigator, right-click either the Node Map [#] or ModePairs [#] nodes, and choose Update.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

More flexible test data unit handling

What is it?

You can now specify the unit system when importing test data from an UNVfile.

You can select units separately for:

• Geometry data

• Mode shape data

• Frequency response function data

You can select the following unit systems:

• Automatic

• Meter (Newton)

• Foot (pound f)

• Meter (kilogram f)

• Foot (poundal)

• mm (milli newton)

• cm (centi newton)

• Inch (pound f)

• mm (kilogram f)

• mm (newton)


The ability to specify the unit system is useful when the 164 dataset is eithermissing or incorrect in your UNV file.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Correlation ® Test Reference

Menu

File ® Import ® Simulation

Insert ® Solution


Digital Simulation

SimulationNavigator Right-click the Simulation node® New Solution

Export mode pairs to a spreadsheet or CSV file

What is it?

You can now export mode pairing information to an Excel spreadsheet or aCSV file.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation file with a correlation specifiedSimulationNavigator

Right-click Mode Pairs [#] node ® Export to ExcelSpreadsheet / Export to CSV file

Access correlation commands through the menu bar

What is it?

You can now access some correlation commands through the Insert andTools menu.

The following correlation commands are available on the Insert ® Correlationmenu:

• New Test Reference Solution

• New Analysis Reference Solution

• New Correlation

The following correlation commands are available in the Tools ® Correlationmenu:

• Alignment

• Plot MAC

• Plot X-Ortho

• Update Correlation


Digital Simulation

Dialog box text changes

What is it?

In the Import Modal Test Data dialog box, the names of the three Import TestFile options are now unique.

Old name New nameFirst Import Test File Geometry FileSecond Import Test File Modes FileThird Import Test File FRF File

Where do I find it?


NX FE Model Updating

What is it?

NX FE Model Updating is an advanced correlation tool designed to updatefinite element models to match real life test data as closely as possible. Thistool is an add-on to NX FE Model Correlation.

To create a Model Update solution process, you reference the following:

• DESOPT 200 — Model Update analysis results. These results representthe analysis model you would like to modify.

• Modal test data results or another set of analysis results. These resultsrepresent the target results you would like to match.

DESOPT 200 — Model Update is a new NX Nastran solution type designed tointegrate with NX FE Model Updating.

The following figure illustrates the model update workflow.

Create a DESOPT 200 — Model Updatesolution

Create design variables

Specify DOF for model reductionModel Updatesolution

process


Digital Simulation

Solveand refresh

DESOPT200 — ModelUpdate (work)solution

Referencesolution(modal testdata oranalysissolutions)

Update designvariables &

bounds

Correlateworksolution withreferencesolution &review errors

OptimizeModifydesignvariablesand bounds,targets,targetweights, andsettings

Update

FEMDONE

NX FE Model Updating allows you to:

• Create a DESOPT 200 — Model Update analysis solution, a modal testdata solution, and a Model Update solution process.

• Create design variables which you predict are sensitive to the FE modelstiffness/mass, and in effect are sensitive to the normal mode results.Example design variables are a physical property such as a shell elementthickness, or a material property such as a modulus or density value.

• Select frequencies and mode shapes to be included in the optimizationtarget function, with any combination of weights.

• Select modal or physical (Guyan) model reduction to obtain a reducedanalysis model that can be solved rapidly using the embedded eigenvaluesolver of the Model Update solution process. This allows you to accountfor design variable changes during the optimization process withouthaving to resolve for the full model.

• Graphically display sensitivities for each design variable with respect toeach frequency or mode shape target.


Digital Simulation

• Select one of the following optimization algorithms:

– Least squares

– Steepest descent

– Genetic

• Select shape correlation based on Modal Assurance Criteria (MAC) orcross-orthogonality (X-Ortho).

• Export model update results to an Excel spreadsheet or a CSV file.

• Update the initial values and bounds of the design variable modelingobjects with the current optimized design variable values of the activeModel Update solution process.

• Update the material and element properties referenced by the designvariable modeling objects in the FEM and Simulation file with the currentoptimized design variable values of the active Model Update solutionprocess.


Engineers often rely on previous experience or estimated properties formodeling bolted connections, bonded joints, and welds. Model Update solutionprocess increases confidence in those approximations by finding the beststiffness and damping values for each finite element variable to better matchthe test results.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteAn active Simulation file with a DESOPT 200 — ModelUpdate solution and a modal test data solution

Toolbar Model Update ® New Model UpdateMenu Insert ® Model UpdateSimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation file node ® New SolutionProcess ® Model Update


Digital Simulation

Post-processing

Post-processing enhancements

What is it?

Advanced Simulation post-processing enhancements include:

• Consistent presentation of stress and strain results in thePost-Processing Navigator across element types.

• The ability to control the numeric format used for results values.

• The ability to display component-based deformation.

• The ability to select nodes to define the center of rotation for post viewdisplays.

• Support for PLOTEL elements.

• The ability to add user-derived results to existing results for the samemodel.

Left: Deformation magnitude, showing twisting. Right: Z-axisdeformation only.


Digital Simulation

Consistent presentation of stress and strain across element types

In previous releases, solid, shell, and beam stresses were listed and managedseparately in the Post-Processing Navigator. Thus, in order to displaystresses and strains across element types, you had to create and overlaymultiple post views. In this release, single sets of Stress – Element-Nodaland Strain – Element-Nodal results are presented in the Post-ProcessingNavigator for all element types.

You now specify results locations for shells and beams through the SetResults dialog box.

For example, to quickly display stress across multiple element types:

1. In the Post-Processing Navigator, right-click Stress – Element-Nodaland choose Plot.

2. Click Set Result .

3. In the Location group in the dialog box, specify the results location foreach element type:

• From the Beam list, choose a stress recovery point, or derived results,such as the minimum or maximum across all stress recovery points.

• From the Shell list, choose a shell layer (Top or Bottom) or derivedresults such as the minimum, maximum, or average across layers.

Consistent presentation of stress and strain results provides a single,consistent workflow for displaying stress data regardless of element type.For models consisting of multiple element types, it enables you to quicklydisplay all stress data in a single post view, and to specify stress locationsin a single operation.

Numeric format for results values

You can now control the numeric format used to display results values in thecolor bar, legend, Min/Max markers, and so on. In the Post View dialog box,click the Annotation tab. From the Format list, choose from the following:

• Automatic — The software chooses a numeric format based on theabsolute difference between consecutive color bar levels.

• Fixed Point—Displays results in decimal notation with a fixed number ofdecimal places you specify.

• Scientific—Displays results in scientific notation using a fixed number ofdecimal places you specify.


Digital Simulation

Component-based deformation

You can now display the XYZ components of displacement, rotation, force,and moment as deformation plots. Right-click a post view and choose SetDeformation. In the Deformation dialog box, choose the X, Y, or Z component.The default deformation display is Magnitude.

Specify the center of rotation in post view displays

In past releases, you needed to specify a point on geometry to set the center ofrotation when orienting your model. Because by default there is no selectablegeometry in a post view display, you could not easily set a rotation point. Youcan now select nodes to set the center of rotation.

To specify the center of rotation, right-click in the Graphics window andchoose Set Rotate Point. Then select a node to specify a center of rotation.

Support for PLOTEL elements

PLOTEL elements are now displayed as lines in your post view. To controlthe visibility of PLOTEL elements, expand the post view node and use thevisibility check box under the 1D Elements node.

Add user-derived results

If you use additional processing to derive custom results data for youranalyses, you can use Add Companion Result Data to incorporate theseresults into a target solution results set. You can then post-process thesederived results alongside standard solution results. Derived results must bein an NX-readable format (such as a universal file), and the results must befrom the same model. Derived results files must contain only results data;node and element geometry is retrieved from the target results set.

To add user-derived results, right-click the results node in SimulationNavigator and choose Add Companion Result Data.

Where do I find it?

Displaying stress and strain locations

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite Analysis results data.

Resource bar Post Processing Navigator

Toolbar Post-Processing®Set ResultMenu Tools®Result®Set Result


Digital Simulation

SimulationNavigator

Right-click a post view®Set Result

Right-click a post view®Edit®Result (Color Display)Location in dialogbox Location group

Displaying deformation components

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite Analysis results data.


Toolbar Post-Processing®EditMenu Tools®Results®Edit

Post-ProcessingNavigator

Right-click a post view®Set Deformation.

Right-click a post view®Edit®Result (Deformation)

Beam post-processing

What is it?

This release significantly enhances your ability to view and interrogateresults for models containing 1D beam elements:

• If element forces are included in the solution output, you can chooseto calculate beam stresses and strains from element forces and beamgeometry.

• If element forces are included in the solution output, you can generatebeam section displays showing stresses or strains across beam geometryfor selected elements.

To use these new beam post-processing features, your results must includeelement forces. Be sure to include a Force output request in your solutionbefore solving your model. Beam element forces are also used to calculatebeam resultants. Beam resultants are available in the Post-ProcessingNavigator. Beam force resultants are always displayed in the element (local)coordinate system.


Digital Simulation

Calculating beam stresses and strains

Standard FE solvers do not output a complete stress tensor for beamelements. This means that stress displays using solver output are incomplete,and derived results such as von Mises stress may be inaccurate. If youinclude a force output request in your solution, you now have the option ofcalculating more complete and accurate beam stresses and strains fromoutput forces and beam geometry.

To use calculated beam stresses and strains:

1. Create a post view of your beam results.

2. On the Post-Processing toolbar, click Set Result .

3. From the list, choose Stress – Element-Nodal or Strain – Element-Nodal.

4. Select Calculate Beam Results from Forces and Geometry.

Displaying results on beam sections

If you include a force output request in your solution, you can calculate anddisplay stresses and strains on selected beam sections.

To display calculated stress or strain results on beam sections, click

Cross-Section View on the Post-Processing toolbar. On the Selectiontab, you select the beam element to display, either interactively or by elementID. You can display results at the Fore or Aft end of the selected element and


Digital Simulation

preview the resulting display. The remaining tabs on the Cross-Section Viewdialog box are similar to the tabs in the Post View dialog box, and allow youto specify the display type and results, set color bar options, and so on, as youwould when setting up a standard post view.

Beam cross-section views are always displayed in the element (local)coordinate system.

Where do I find it?

Calculating beam stresses and strains


Prerequisites

A structural analysis of a model containing beamelements

A force output request in your structural beam solution

A post view showing stress or strain results

Toolbar Post-Processing®Set ResultMenu Tools®Results®Set Result

SimulationNavigator

Right-click a post view®Set Result

Right-click a post view®Edit®Result (Color Display)

Displaying results on beam sections


Prerequisites

A structural analysis of a model containing beamelements.

A force output request in your structural beam solution.

Toolbar Post-Processing®Cross-Section ViewMenu Tools®Result®Cross-Section View

Bar graph option

What is it?

You can now create a bar graph using the NX Functions and Graphing tools.

After you plot a graph, you can choose Bar as the Graph Style when youedit the graph curve.


Digital Simulation

Force graph displayed with Bar option

Same graph displayed with default Line option

Where do I find it?

Application Motion Simulation or Advanced Simulation


Digital Simulation

Prerequisites A plotted function.Toolbar

XY Graph toolbar®Edit ®double-click the graphcurve


Curve Options dialog box®Graph Style list®Bar.

Solvers and solutions

Changes to handling of thermal energy units

What is it?

In previous releases, thermal energy units in NX were always expressed inBTUs (British thermal units) rather than in inch-lbf units. This meant thatthe units for thermal energy were inconsistent with the rest of the Britishbase unit system in NX. This created problems if you created a model in asoftware package that used consistent units, such as NX I-deas, and thenimported the model in NX. For example, if you created a finite element modelin NX I-deas using inch-lbf units and then imported it into NX, NX treatedthe units as BTUs. If you then solved the model and post-processed thethermal energy results in NX, the results were numerically correct but werelabelled as BTUs. Therefore, the results were off by a factor of 9338.03.

In this release, the thermal energy units are now expressed in inch-lbf unitsand are consistent with the British base unit system. When you importa model into NX and select lbf-ft from the Input Units list in the ImportSimulation dialog box, you can select the new Use BTU as thermal energyunit option to control whether to express thermal energy in BTUs in NX.

If you export or solve an NX Nastran model, the software writes out thePARAM,UNITSYS bulk data entry. PARAM,UNITSYS documents thecurrent system for the model. Additionally, if the exported model uses theBritish base unit system, the software writes out the PARAM,UNITBTU,YESbulk data entry.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisites A Simulation file activeMenu File→Import


Digital Simulation

Universal file support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes expanded import and export support for I-deasUniversal file data.

Importing and exporting I-deas permanent groups

NX now supports the import and export of I-deas Universal file dataset 2477.This allows you to import and export I-deas permanent groups that containnodes and elements.

• When you import a universal file that contains dataset 2477, NX importsany groups that contain node or element data and creates a correspondinggroup in the Simulation Navigator. Currently, only nodes and elementsare supported for import. Additionally, node and element color data is notpreserved during import.

• When you export an NX model that contains groups, NX exports anygroups in your FEM file that contain node or element data to dataset 2477.You can then import that dataset into NX I-deas 6.1 and later releases.

Note

NX only exports groups defined in your FEM file. Any groupsdefined in your Simulation file are not currently exported.

Importing and exporting I-deas beam cross sections

NX now supports importing and exporting I-deas Universal file dataset 776.This allows you to import and export standard I-deas beam cross sections.The standard beam cross section types that are currently supported forimport and export are:

• Angle

• Box

• Channel

• Circular Pipe/Round Tube

• Hat

• Polygon

• Rectangle

• Rectangular Tube


Digital Simulation

• Tee

• Wide Flange

• Zee

You can export any standard beam cross sections that you create in NX toI-deas in dataset 776. You can also use dataset 776 to import beam crosssections that you create in I-deas into NX.

• NX exports any NX General Geometry or User Defined Properties typesections to dataset 776 as I-deas key-in sections. The software importsany key-in type beam cross sections from dataset 776 as NX User DefinedProperties sections.

• NX imports any I-deas General Geometry type sections into NX as UserDefined Properties type sections. The software does not import the actualgeometry for those sections.

Importing and exporting I-deas element associated data

When you import an I-deas Universal file, NX now imports any elementassociated data for linear beam elements (I-deas element type 21) as elementassociated data in NX. The following types of data are supported for import:

• Beam orientation

• Beam offsets

• Beam end releases

For linear beam elements in NX, you can now export orientation data,offsets, and end release information to I-deas dataset 2438 as I-deas elementassociated data.

Note

Currently, tapered beam elements (I-deas element type 22) are notsupported for import or export.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisitesA Simulation or FEM file active with IDEAS UNV asthe specified solver

Menu File→Import


Digital Simulation

Importing additional loads as spatial fields

What is it?

If you are working in the Nastran, Abaqus, or ANSYS solver environment,the Import Selective Loads as Field Data customer default now also controlswhether these types of additional loads are imported as spatial fields:

Solver Solver syntax Load type

Nastran PLOAD2 and PLOAD4bulk data

Uniform static pressureload

Abaqus DLOAD Distributed load

ANSYS SFE Surface loads onelements

For these loads, if you select the Import Selective Loads as Field Data, thesoftware now combines all the loads of that type into a single spatial field inthe Fields node in the Simulation Navigator. For example, if you import anNX Nastran input file that contains 200 separate PLOAD2 bulk data entries,the software imports those loads as a single field.

When you import complex models with many different boundary conditions,the Import Selective Loads as Field Data option improves performance andusability. Clearing the Import Selective Loads as Field Data option mayresult in slower import processing. You may also need to do a large amount ofscrolling to view all the boundary conditions in the Simulation Navigator.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisitesA Simulation active with Nastran, Abaqus, or ANSYSas the specified solver

Menu File→Utilities→Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox Simulation→General→Environment tab

Importing material orientation vectors as spatial fields

What is it?

If you are working in the Nastran or Abaqus solver environment, you can usea new option on the Import Simulation dialog box to control whether thesoftware imports material orientation vectors for solid elements as spatialfields.

• Select the new Import 3D MOVs as field data check box to import anymaterial orientation vector data for solid elements as a single spatial field.


Digital Simulation

• Clear the Import 3D MOVs as field data check box to import materialorientation vector data for solid elements as physical property table data.In NX, there is a one to one relationship between physical property tablesand mesh collectors. If your model contains a large number of materialorientation vectors, it will contain a large number of physical propertydefinitions. When you import the model, NX creates a large numberof corresponding mesh collectors in the Simulation Navigator. Havingnumerous mesh collectors can make your model difficult to manage.

Note

If a coordinate system is only used in a solver input file to provide theorientation for a 3D material orientation vector, the software does notimport the coordinate system into NX. This ensures that the softwaredoes not import numerous coordinate systems that are not requiredfor the analysis.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisitesA Simulation or FEM file active with Nastran orAbaqus as the specified solver

Menu File→Import

Nastran support enhancements

Support for SOL 107 and SOL 110 analyses

What is it?

This release introduces support for the following types of Nastran complexmodal solutions:

• SOL 107, direct complex eigenvalue analysis, which is available as thenew SEDCEIG 107 option in the Solution Type list in the Solution dialogbox.

• SOL 110, modal complex eigenvalue analysis, which is available as thenew SEMCEIG 110 option in the Solution Type list in the Solution dialogbox.

You perform complex eigenvalue analysis to compute the damped modesof structures and assess the stability of systems modeled with transferfunctions, such as servomechanisms and rotating systems.

• In a SOL 107 analysis, the equations are of the same size as the numberof physical variables.


Digital Simulation

• In a SOL 110 analysis, the software first computes the undamped modesand then uses them to transform the matrices from physical to modalvariables.

New Complex Eigenvalue modeling object

In Nastran, you control complex eigenvalue analysis with the EIGC bulk dataentry. In Advanced Simulation, you can create Complex Eigenvalue typeof modeling object to specify the options required to define an EIGC entry,such as the complex eigenvalue extraction method and the desired numberof modes.

Where do I find it?

Solution Sequences 107 and 110

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with NX Nastran or MSC

Nastran as the specified solverSimulationNavigator

Right-click an existing Simulation®New Solution

Menu Insert®New Solution

Complex Eigenvalue modeling object

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM or Simulation with NX Nastran or MSC

Nastran as the specified solverToolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar®Modeling ObjectsMenu Insert®Modeling Objects

Support for SOL 200 optimization analyses

You can now perform NX Nastran SOL 200 optimization analyses inAdvanced Simulation. Optimization allows you to improve a proposed designto achieve the best possible product for the minimum cost. In contrastto manual design sensitivity analyses, in which you can typically changeonly one parameter at a time, optimization in Nastran uses sophisticatednumerical algorithms to search the design space and find the combination ofparameters that yield the optimal design or performance.

Benefits of optimization include:

• Reducing the design risk by helping you better understand therelationships between design parameters and how design changes affectthose relationships.


Digital Simulation

• Improving your confidence that the design will perform to specificationsunder a variety of operating conditions and manufacturing tolerances.

Defining an optimization analysis in Advanced Simulation

You can use the DESOPT 200 solution type in the Solution dialog box todefine an optimization analysis in Advanced Simulation. In a DESOPT 200analysis, you define the design model, which is a formal statement of theallowable changes that can be made to the model in the search for an optimaldesign. During this process, you place limits on the allowable changes andon the structural responses.

In a DESOPT 200 analysis, you must:

• Define the objective the software uses to provide a scalar measure of thedesign. You can choose whether to minimize or maximize a particulardesign response. For example, you can minimize the weight of the model.In Nastran, you use the DESOBJ case control command to define designobjectives. In Advanced Simulation, you create a Design Objectivemodeling object that references a selected Design Response Quantitiesmodeling object.

• Define the design variables the software can modify in its search foran improved design. You can vary physical properties, materials, andelement connectivity. You must also define the relationship betweenthese variables and the properties of the model. In Nastran, you use theDESVAR and DVPREL1 bulk data entries to specify this information. In


Digital Simulation

Advanced Simulation, you create a Design Variable modeling object todefine these variables and specify their relationships to the design.

• Define the constraints that place bounds on the design responses. InNastran, you use the DCONSTR bulk data entry to define the constraints.In Advanced Simulation, you create a Design Constraint modeling objectthat references a selected Design Response Quantities modeling object.

• Identify the design responses, such as weight or stress. Currently,Advanced Simulation supports DRESP1 type (first-level) responses.In Advanced Simulation, you create a Design Response Quantitiesmodeling object to specify the design responses.

• Specify any additional parameters to control the analysis. In Nastran, youset options on the DOPTPRM bulk data entry. In Advanced Simulation,you specify additional parameters with a Design Optimization Parametersmodeling object.

Current limitations

The DESOPT 200 solution in Advanced Simulation does not provide supportto the full complement of optimization capabilities that are available inNastran. Currently, you can use DESOPT 200 to perform property-basedoptimization only. Shape sensitivity analyses are not yet supported.

DESOPT 200 only supports optimization analyses at the component FEMlevel. Optimizations of assembly FEM models and superelements are notyet supported.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with NX Nastran as the specified

solver and DESOPT 200 as the specified solution typeSimulationNavigator



Support for external superelements

What is it?

In Advanced Simulation, you can now perform superelement reductions onFE components. The software implements these solutions by writing out theEXTSEOUT case control command to the solver input file. After solving, youcan use the reduced matrices to represent the components in a system FEmodel in NX Nastran.


Digital Simulation

Two new NX Nastran solution types have been added to perform thesereductions.

• SESTATIC 101 – Superelement

• SEMODES 103 – Superelement

For both solutions, you use sets to define degrees of freedom for the boundarywhere the component is connected to other components in the structure.

• Analysis (ASET): This set contains all boundary degrees of freedom of thesuperelement. It is considered fixed by default.

• Fixed Boundary (BSET): This subset of the ASET contains all fixedboundary degrees of freedom.

• Free Boundary (CSET): This subset of the ASET contains all freeboundary degrees of freedom.

Note

You can use DOF Sets to define ASET, BSET, and CSET explicitly.Reference the defined DOF Sets in the DOF Sets group on the BulkData tab in the Edit Solution dialog box. However, you can also definethe sets using the Fixed Boundary Degrees of Freedom and FreeBoundary Degrees of Freedom constraints, which are described below.

SESTATIC 101 – Superelement

With this static condensation reduction, all stiffness, mass, and damping isreduced to the superelement boundary (that is, to the ASET). All boundarydegrees of freedom are fixed.

Define the fixed degrees of freedom for the boundary using the FixedBoundary Degrees of Freedom constraint.

SEMODES 103 – Superelement

This solution generates a Craig-Bampton reduction (also referred to asComponent Modal Synthesis) to represent the component’s dynamic behavior.The boundary degrees of freedom can be fixed or free.

• Define the fixed boundary degrees of freedom using the Fixed BoundaryDegrees of Freedom constraint.

• Define the free boundary degrees of freedom using the Free BoundaryDegrees of Freedom constraint.

In an SEMODES 103 – Superelement solution, you must also create SPOINTsto store the reduced modes in the QSET. To do this, define a value in the


Digital Simulation

Number of Generalized DOF box in the Case Control tab of the Edit Solutiondialog box. NX writes out this value to the Nastran input file as follows:

QSET1, 0, N1, THRU, N2

SPOINT, N1, THRU, N2

Where

N1 = round up to nearest 100000 integer from the highest node numberin the model + 1

N2 = N1 + Number of Generalized DOF – 1

For example, if the highest node number in the model is 121366, and Numberof Generalized DOF is 300, the bulk data is written as

QSET1, 0, 200001, THRU, 200300

SPOINT, 200001, THRU, 200300

The total number of SPOINTs must be more than the number of requestedmodes plus all of the fixed boundary degrees of freedom.

Note

For more information, see the NX Nastran Superelements User’s Guide.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with Nastran as the specified

solver and the appropriate solution type selectedSimulationNavigator



Export support for flexible bodies in motion and control systems software

What is it?

This release introduces a new solution sequence, SEMODES 103 – FlexibleBody, that you can use to do the following:

• Export model data to NX Motion Simulation to represent a flexible bodyin a mechanism.

• Export modal data to RecurDyn and ADAMS multi-body dynamicssoftware.

• Export state-space data to control system software.


Digital Simulation

• Recover results from RecurDyn and ADAMS multi-body dynamicssimulations.

For more information about flexible bodies in NX Motion Simulation, see**Unsatisfied xref title**.

For more information about NX Nastran support for multi-body dynamicssoftware and control systems, see “Multi-body Dynamics and Control SystemSoftware Interfaces” in the NX Nastran Advanced Dynamic Analysis User’sGuide.

Where do I find it?





Flexible bodies dynamic solution

What is it?

Typical motion simulations represent mechanisms using rigid bodiesthat move in prescribed degrees of freedom according to constraints.These rigid-body motion simulations cannot represent certain dynamiccharacteristics, especially those resulting from conditions such as sharpimpacts, sudden changes in motion, or if the component is flexible enoughto affect the motion of the mechanism. For these situations, you can use aflexible body analysis to combine both elastic deformation and rigid bodymotion.

This type of analysis requires NX Motion Simulation with the RecurDynsolver and NX Advanced Simulation with the NX Nastran solver.


Digital Simulation

To set up a flexible body analysis, you define one or more components inyour mechanism as flexible, and define stiffness at the points where thecomponents are connected to the mechanism (typically at joint locations). TheNX Nastran SEMODES 103 – Flexible Body solution reduces the dynamicbehavior of the flexible component to a set of mode shapes, which are storedin an output file.

After you solve this modal solution, you associate the flexible body outputfile (.rfi file) with the link on which the component is defined in the motionsimulation. When you solve the motion simulation, the RecurDyn solvercommunicates with NX Nastran and recovers the FE results. When youanimate the mechanism, the contour plot for the flexible component isanimated along with the rigid body animation.

For more information, see Flexible body workflow in the Motion Simulationonline Help.

Where do I find it?

In Advanced Simulation:


Prerequisite

An active Simulation with NX Nastran as the specifiedsolver and SEMODES 103 – Flexible Body as thespecified solution.

SimulationNavigator Right-click an existing Simulation®New SolutionMenu Insert®New Solution

In Motion Simulation:

Application Motion Simulation


Digital Simulation

Prerequisite

A Dynamic simulation with Flexible Body Dynamicsselected under Advanced Solution Options and asolution with Flexible Body as the specified solution type

Menu Insert®Flexible Link

Toolbar Motion toolbar®Flexible Link

Expanded support for iterative solver options

What is it?

This release includes improved support for iterative solutions in Nastran.

Support for global iterative solutions

Advanced Simulation now supports the Nastran global iterative solver. InNX, the Nastran global iterative solver is supported in SOLs 106, 108, 111,and 153. With the global iterative solver, the software assembles the systemstiffness matrix. In previous releases, only the element iterative solver wassupported in Advanced Simulation.

Note

Currently, NX does not support the global iterative solver in NXNastran and MSC Nastran SOL 101 analyses.

New modeling objects for specifying convergence parameters

This release includes two modeling objects that you can use to control theconvergence parameters for Nastran’s iterative solver. You can:

• Create an Element Iterative Solver Options object to specify options forNX Nastran’s element iterative solver. For example, you can specify aconvergence tolerance, which controls when the solution terminates. Youcan also limit the maximum number of iterations the solver performs. Theoptions in the Element Iterative Solver Options dialog box correspond tofields on the ITER bulk data entry. In previous releases, you could requestthat the software use the element iterative solver for an analysis, but youcould not specify any of the convergence criteria.

Note

The element iterative solver is supported only in SOL 101(SESTATIC 101) analyses. For a complete list of restrictions onusing the element iterative solver, see ITER in the NX NastranQuick Reference Guide.

• Create a Global Iterative Solver Options object to specify options for theNastran global iterative solver. For example, you can control whether the


Digital Simulation

solver uses a preconditioning matrix to reduce the number of iterationsneeded.

Where do I find it?





Support for shell thickness output in advanced nonlinear analyses

What is it?

Use the options on the new Shell Thickness tab in the Structural OutputRequests dialog box to request the output of shell thickness results for SOL601 and 701 analyses. When you create a Shell Thickness type of outputrequest, the software creates a SHELLTHK case control command in yourNX Nastran input file.

Note

The software only outputs shell thickness results for large strainanalyses (analyses in which you set parameter PARAM,LGSTRN,1).See SHELLTHK in the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide for moreinformation and additional requirements.

Requesting shell thickness output by default

Use the new Shell Thickness customer default to control whether the EnableSHELLTHK Request option on the Shell Thickness tab is selected by default.To access this option:


2. In the Customer Defaults dialog box, choose Simulation®NASTRAN.

3. On the Solution tab, under Structural Output Requests, select the ShellThickness check box.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM or Simulation file with NX Nastran as

the specified solverToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Modeling Objects


Digital Simulation

Menu Insert®Modeling Objects

Option to treat CGAP elements as linear contact elements

What is it?

In SOL 101 analyses, you can use the new Treat CGAP as Linear ContactElements option (General tab of the Solution dialog box) to have the softwarehandle any CGAP elements in your model as linear contact elements. If youselect this option, when you export or solve your model, the software creates aBCSET bulk data entry in your solver input file, even if your model does notinclude a Surface-to-Surface contact simulation object.

Note

If you select the Treat CGAP as Linear Contact Elements option,system cell (412) OLDGAPS must be set to 0, which is its default value.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite A Simulation file with Nastran as the specified solver

and SESTATIC 101 – Single Constraint or SESTATIC 101– Multiple Constraint as the analysis type

SimulationNavigator

Right-click an existing Simulation®New Solution orright-click an existing solution®Edit


Changes to the handling of temperature dependent material properties

What is it?

The NX 6.0.1 release included changes to how NX handles temperaturedependent material properties for Nastran analyses. Beginning in NX 6.0.1,the software always evaluates temperature dependent materials at thematerial’s specified reference temperature. In NX, you use the Temperature(TREF) option on the Thermal/Electrical tab of the Materials dialog box todefine a material’s reference temperature. If you do not specify a value forthe Temperature (TREF) option, NX exports the material with a referencetemperature of 0°.

Prior to the NX 6.0.1 release, if you did not specify the Temperature (TREF)option, the software used the value specified for the Default Temperature orDefault Initialization Temperature (SOL 153 only) option (Solution dialog box)as the material’s reference temperature.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Prerequisite A Simulation file with Nastran as the specified solverfor the active solution

Change for the maximum solution time default

What is it?

The value for the Maximum Job Time option in the Solution dialog box isnow blank by default. The Maximum Job Time option corresponds to theNastran TIME executive control statement. It controls the maximum allowedexecution time for the solution. Previously, the default value for MaximumJob Time was set to 999 CPU minutes, which could be insufficient for largecontact or nonlinear models. Now, when you export or solve your model, if youdo not specify a maximum time value, the software uses Nastran’s defaultvalue for the TIME statement, 1.89E9 seconds.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite A Simulation file with Nastran as the specified solver

for the active solutionSimulationNavigator



Nastran import and export support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes improved import and export support for Nastran bulkdata entries and case control commands.

Newly supported system cells

This release includes enhanced support for Nastran system cells. System cellsare Executive System operational parameters specified by the NASTRANstatement. When you create a System Cells type of Modeling Object, thesenewly supported system cells now appear in the System Cells dialog box.

SystemCell Name Description

416 INP4FMT When using an ILP-64 executable type, determines if 32-bit OP4 files areconverted to 64-bit during import.

1 (32-bit OP4 files are converted to 64-bit during import) is now the defaultvalue for this system cell.

446 RDSCALE A factor to modify the selected frequency range in the EIGRL specificationfor eigensolutions of each substructure in RDMODES.

462 Controls options for SOL 111.


Digital Simulation

SystemCell Name Description

465 NREC474 Determines the CROD and CBAR element lumped mass calculation. The

“old” calculation before NX Nastran 6.1 was inconsistent with the CBEAM.476 If a non-converged contact condition occurs in a SOL 101 analysis, determines

if Nastran continues with a warning or ends with an error.480 Determines the linear contact processing defaults. See the BCTPARM bulk

entry.

Newly supported bulk data entries and case control commands

Name NX Nastranimport/exportsupport

MSCNastran

import/exportsupport

Notes For moreinformation,

see

ASET Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**

ASET1 Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**

BGADD Yes No **Unsatisfiedxref title**

BNDFIX Yes Yes This entryimports asboth a DOFset and aconstraint.

**Unsatisfiedxref title**

BNDFIX1 Yes Yes This entryimports asboth a DOFset and aconstraint.


BNDFREE Yes Yes This entryimports asboth a DOFset and aconstraint.



Digital Simulation

BNDFREE1 Yes Yes This entryimports asboth a DOFset and aconstraint.


BSET Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**.

BSET1 Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**.

CMETHODcase controlcommand

Yes No **Unsatisfiedxref title**

CSET Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**

CSET1 Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**

DCONADD Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.


DCONSTR Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.

Currently,you canonly use aDCONSTRentry to referto a DRESP1entry.


DESGLBcase controlcommand

Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.


DESOBJcase controlcommand




Digital Simulation

DESSUBcase controlcommand



DESVAR Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.


DOPTPRM Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.


DRESP1 Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.

PTYPE set toELEM is notyet supported.The ALLqualifier forthe WEIGHTfield is not yetsupported.


DTI,UNITS Yes (exportsupport only)

No **Unsatisfiedxref title**

DVCREL1 Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.

Currently,a singleDESVARentry andassociatedcoefficientis supported(DVID1 andCOEFF1).All otherDESVARentries aredropped.


DVMREL1 Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.

Currently,a singleDESVARentry andassociatedcoefficientis supported(DVID1 andCOEFF1).All otherDESVAR



Digital Simulation

entries aredropped.

DVPREL1 Yes Not supportedfor exportto MSCNastran.

Currently,a singleDESVARentry andassociatedcoefficientis supported(DVID1 andCOEFF1).All otherDESVARentries aredropped.

Negative FIDvalues areunsupported.A positive FIDvalue is onlysupported forthe PBAR,PDAMP,PELAS,PGAP,PMASS,PROD,PSHEAR,PSHELL,PTUBE,and PVISCentries.


EIGC Yes Yes Only a singlecontinuationline issupported.The alternateformat(KEYWORD1–<value>KEYWORD2=<value>...) is


Digital Simulation

notsupported.

EXTSEOUT Yes Yes Currently,EXTSEOUTis onlysupported forexport.


MDBEXPORTcase controlcommand

Yes Yes FLEXBODY,FLEXONLY,OUTGSTRS,PSETID,OUTGSTRN,andCHECK arecurrently notsupported.


MBDRECVRcase controlcommand

Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxref title**

OMIT Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**.

OMIT1 Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**.

PCOMG Yes Yes PCOMGis onlysupportedin NXLaminatesComposites.

QSET Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**.


Digital Simulation

QSET1 Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**

RSMETHODcase controlcommand

Yes Yes Yes **Unsatisfiedxref title**

SHELLTHKcase controlcommand

Yes No **Unsatisfiedxref title**

SUBCOMcase controlcommand

Yes Yes TEMP andDEFORMcase controlcommandrequests fromreferencedsubcasesare notsupported.

SUBSEQcase controlcommand

Yes Yes

Enhancements for previously supported bulk data entries and case controlcommands

Name NX Nastranimport/exportsupport

MSCNastran

import/exportsupport

Newlysupportedfields andother

enhancements

Notes

ANALYSIS Yes Yes In this release,the softwarenow parses butdoes not usethe SAERO,DIVERGE,and FLUTTERdescribers.


Digital Simulation

CBAR Yes Yes • CID, G0,and V vectorare nowsupportedas ElementAssociatedData

• Beam endoffsetsare nowsupportedas ElementAssociatedData


CBUSH(node-to-node)

Yes Yes • CID, G0,and V vectorare nowsupportedas ElementAssociatedData



CBUSH(node-to-ground)

Yes Yes • G0 is nowsupported




Digital Simulation

CGAP(node-to-node)

Yes Yes • CID, G0,and V vectorare nowsupportedas ElementAssociatedData



CQUAD4 Yes Yes Shell offsets arenow supportedas ElementAssociatedData.


CORD1C Yes Yes The coordinatesystemhierarchy is nolonger flattenedon import.


CORD1R Yes Yes The coordinatesystemhierarchy is nolonger flattenedon import.


CORD1S Yes Yes The coordinatesystemhierarchy is nolonger flattenedon import.


CORD2C Yes Yes The coordinatesystemhierarchy is nolonger flattenedon import.


CORD2R Yes Yes The coordinatesystemhierarchy is nolonger flattenedon import.



Digital Simulation

CORD2S Yes Yes The coordinatesystemhierarchy is nolonger flattenedon import.






CQUADR Yes Yes Shell offsets arenow supportedas ElementAssociatedData.


CTRIA3 Yes Yes Shell offsets arenow supportedas ElementAssociatedData.


CTRIA6 Yes Yes Shell offsets arenow supportedas ElementAssociatedData.


CTRIAR Yes Yes Shell offsets arenow supportedas ElementAssociatedData.


GRID Yes Yes The softwarenow places anyimported nodesthat do not havea defined CPor CD fieldin a group.Additionally,any fluid nodes(GRID entrieswhere the CDfield=-1) are


Digital Simulation

also placed in agroup on import.

PARM Yes Yes PARAM,SIGMAis currently notimported.

PCOMP Yes Yes For the NXLaminateCompositesbasic product,the SOUT fieldis now imported.

PCOMPG Yes Yes This bulk dataentry is onlysupportedfor the NXLaminateCompositesadvancedproduct.Currently,PCOMPG isimported as aPCOMP bulkdata entry.If the SOUTfield=1 for anyply, the softwaresets SOUT=1 forall plies.

PLOAD2 Yes Yes You can nowimport PLOAD2entries asspatial fields.


PLOAD4 Yes Yes You can nowimport PLOAD4entries asspatial fields.

Nodalpressures (P1,P2, P3, andP4) must allbe equal.



Digital Simulation

PSOLID Yes Yes You cannow importa materialorientationvector (CORDMfield) as aspatial field.


USET Yes Yes USET,U2–U8USET1,U3 Yes Yes USET,U3

precision wasadded in thisrelease.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationMenu File→Import

Abaqus support enhancements

Abaqus import and export support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes improved import and export support for a number ofAbaqus keywords as well as support for Abaqus standard beam cross sections.

Keyword support enhancements

This release includes support for keywords related to the new Abaqusboundary conditions introduced in this release. For more information, see**Unsatisfied xref title**.

Keyword Supportedparameters

Import support Exportsupport

*CONTACTINTERFERENCE

All Not currentlysupported forimport

Yes

*COUPLING All Not currentlysupported forimport

Yes

*DISTRIBUTING All Not currentlysupported forimport

Yes

*TIE All Not currentlysupported forimport

Yes


Digital Simulation

Beam cross section shape support

The following Abaqus standard beam section shapes are now supported forboth import and export:

• BOX for a rectangular, hollow box section

• CIRC for a solid, circular section

• HEX for a hollow, hexagonal section

• I for an I-beam section

• L for an L-beam section

• PIPE for a hollow, circular section

• RECT for a solid, rectangular section

• TRAPEZOID for a trapezoidal section

For more information on the beam cross section enhancements included inthis release, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisites FEM file displayedMenu File→Import

Significant enhancements to results support

What is it?

This release contains significantly expanded support for Abaqus resultsoutput. These improvements include:

• New Abaqus Structural Output Request and Abaqus Thermal OutputRequest modeling objects that you can use to define output options forstructural and thermal analyses. You can reuse those options in differentsolution steps and solutions.

• Support for generating Abaqus message files and status files.

• Support for a number of new Abaqus output variables and an expandedrange of options you can specify to control that output.

• The ability to request output on a select group of either nodes or elements.


Digital Simulation

New modeling objects for Abaqus output

Use the new Abaqus Structural Output Request and Abaqus ThermalOutput Requestmodeling objects to specify both the types of results to outputas well as output options. All the new Abaqus results capabilities introducedin this release are available in the Abaqus Structural Output Request andAbaqus Thermal Output Request dialog boxes. After you create an outputrequest modeling object, you can reuse that object in any solution step. Inprevious releases, you could only control a limited number of options forAbaqus results, and you had to define those options in each solution step.

Message and status files

Use the new MSG/STA file output control options to control whether thesoftware generates an Abaqus message file (.msg) and a status file (.sta)during the solve.

• The message file is a text file that contains diagnostic or informativemessages about the progress of the solution. It also contains any errors orwarnings. You can request detailed information on:

– Adaptive mesh smoothing. This includes information about themagnitude of the maximum displacement as well as the labels of thenodes at which geometric feature changes occur.

– Contact conditions during iteration, such as information about whichpoints are contacting or separating.

– Model change operations (removal and reactivation) at the start of anew solution step.

– The labels and integration points of elements for which the plasticityalgorithms fail to converge during an iteration.

– Equilibrium residuals during equilibrium iterations.

– The number of equations being solved and the amount of memoryrequired for each iteration.

• The status file is a text file that contains information about the progressof the analysis. Abaqus writes information to the status file as it performsthe analysis. Because you can view the status file while Abaqus solves asolution, you can use the status file to monitor the progress of the analysis.

New Abaqus output variables and options

You can now output a much broader range of Abaqus output variables.For example, while in previous releases you could output strain, you cannow output selected strain components, such as plastic strain (PE) or


Digital Simulation

nominal strain (NE). Similarly, while you could previously output stressand Mises equivalent stress, you can now output values such as transverseshear stresses (TSHR) and all failure measure components for laminates(CFAULURE).

In addition to these new output variables, you can also specify additionaloptions for the results, such as:

• The section points at which to calculate results for beams, shells, orlayered solid elements.

• The location at which the software calculates the output variables, suchas element integration points or centroids.

• The frequency at which the software outputs the results. By default, thesoftware outputs the results at the last increment in each step.

Output on selected nodes or elements

For a given output variable, such as reaction forces, you can now request thatthe software generate output only on selected groups of element nodes orelements. In previous releases, you could only select output on your entiremodel.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM or Simulation with Abaqus as the

specified solverToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Modeling ObjectsMenu Insert®Modeling Objects

Including comments or files in an Abaqus input file

What is it?

You can now include specific text in an Abaqus input file. Use the new UserDefined Text modeling object to specify one of the following:• The text to add and whether to add it to the beginning or end of the inputfile section.

• The name of the external file to merge into the appropriate section ofthe input file.

If you want to include a file, the software inserts it in the appropriate sectionof the input file with an Abaqus *INCLUDE keyword. After you define aUser Defined Text modeling object, you can then insert it either into a givensolution step or into the solution itself.


Digital Simulation

For example, you can use the User Defined Text modeling object to insertan external file that contains a portion of your Abaqus input file. The filecan include, for example, model definition data, comment lines, or otherreferences to external files.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM or Simulation with Abaqus as the

specified solverToolbar


Changes to handling of stress-strain material data

What is it?

This release includes changes to how the software export stress-strain datafor Abaqus *PLASTIC materials.

In Abaqus, the *PLASTIC keyword specifies stress-dependent materialproperties for use in applications involving nonlinear materials. In NX, ifyou are working in the Abaqus solver environment and define an isotropicmaterial with a Stress/Strain table, the software writes out the *PLASTICkeyword when you export or solve your model.

Abaqus requires that the starting point for a stress-strain curve be at thematerial’s Yield Strength value (located on the Strength tab of the Materialsdialog box). Previously, if you did not specify a Yield Strength value, thesoftware would not export the *PLASTIC keyword and did not issue awarning message to indicate there was an issue with the material data.

Now, when stress-strain data is defined for an Isotropic material:

• If the starting point of the stress-strain curve is located at (0, 0), thesoftware looks to see if a Yield Strength value is defined.

– If a Yield Strength value is defined and is non zero, then the softwaremakes the first point on the stress-strain curve (0, Yield Strengthvalue). Note that the stress value at the Yield Strength point is equalto the material’s stress at the Yield Strength value. For the otherpoints the curve, the strain value is the same, but the stress value isequal to the material’s stress at the Yield Strength value less thanthe starting point.

– If a Yield Strength value is not defined or is defined as zero, thesoftware does not export the stress-strain data and issues a warningmessage in the Abaqus diag file.


Digital Simulation

• If the starting point of the stress-strain curve is not located at (0, 0), thesoftware looks to see if a Yield Strength value is defined.

– If a Yield Strength value is defined and is non zero, the softwaremakes the first point on the curve (0, Yield Strength value). Note thatthe stress value at the Yield Strength point is equal to the material’sstress at the Yield Strength value. For the other points the curve, thestrain value is the same, but the stress value is equal to the material’sstress at the Yield Strength value less than the starting point.

– If a Yield Strength value is not defined or is defined as a value of 0, thesoftware exports the stress-strain data as it was defined.

ANSYS support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes improved support for ANSYS capabilities in AdvancedSimulation.

Newly supported elements

This release includes support for additional ANSYS elements. For moreinformation, see **Unsatisfied xref title**.

Shell offset support

NX now supports the import and export of the Location option for theSECOFFSET command. This allows you to define shell offsets for SHELL181and SHELL 281 elements. When you export or solve your model, the format is:

SECOFFSET, <Location>, <offset1>, <offset2>

where <Location> can be set to TOP, MID, BOT, or USER.

Note

For beam element offsets, <Location> is hard coded to USER.

Improved support for node and element groups

This release includes expanded support for using node and element groups inan ANSYS solution.

• The <node> and <elem> options are now supported for import and exportwith the DDELE, FDELE, and BFDELE commands. Additionally,<elemt> is supported for the BFEDEL command.

For example:

FDELE,<node>.

where <node> is the name of a group that contains node labels (IDs).


Digital Simulation

BFEDELE,<elem>

where <elem> is the name of a group that contains element labels (IDs).

• The <node> and <elem> options are now supported for import and exportwith the OUTRES and OUTPR output control commands.

For example:

OUTRES,NSOL,<node>, where <node> is the name of a group that containsnode labels (IDs).

OUTRES,ESOL,<elem>, where <elem> is the name of a group that containselement labels (IDs).

Support for beam end releases

You can now define end releases for BEAM 188 elements. NX now supportsthe import and export of the ENDRELEASE command with the followingoptions:

ENDRELEASE,,<tol>,dof1,dof2,dof3,dof4

ENDRELEASE defines end releases on any two connected beam elementswhose angle at connection exceeds the specified tolerance.

Note

In NX, <tol> is always hard coded to -1.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisitesAn active FEM or Simulation file with ANSYS as thespecified solver

Menu File→Import

NX 7 Advanced Simulation

Solver version support

For each released version of NX, the following tables list the supported solverversions for import, export, and the post-processing of results. Note:

• The version listed in the “Import ASCII” and “Import Binary” rows is thesolver version that was generally available when the NX version wasreleased. In general, the import of the solver ASCII and binary filesshould be upwards compatible. Therefore, you should be able to importthem into the most recent version of NX. However, in general:


Digital Simulation

– ASCII files are backwards compatible for import into NX. If you importan ASCII file from a newer version of the solver than is officiallysupported, the software simply ignores any new fields/options thataren’t supported in the current NX release.

– Binary files are not backwards compatible. For example, you canimport a binary file created by NX Nastran 5.0 into NX 6.0.2 , butyou might not be able to import a binary file created by NX Nastran6.1 into NX 5.

• The version listed in the “Export ASCII” rows is the solver version thatwas available when the NX version was tested. In general, the exportedsolver input file is upwards compatible for that solver. Backwardscompatibility is not guaranteed. For NX Nastran, the Model SetupCheck function in Advanced Simulation tries to flag potential versionincompatibility issues.

• The version listed in the “Post-processing Results” rows is the version ofthe solver results that was tested in the listed NX version. In general,results from earlier solver versions are also supported.

NX7

Solver File Type NX 7Import ASCII (.dat) 6.1Import Binary (.op2) 6.1Export ASCII (.dat) 6.1NX Nastran

Post-processing of Results 6.1Import ASCII (.dat) 2008r1Import Binary (.op2) 2008r1Export ASCII (.dat) 2008r1MSC Nastran

Post-processing of Results 2008r1Import ASCII (.inp) 6.8-1Import Binary N/AExport ASCII (.inp) 6.8-1Abaqus

Post-processing of Results 6.8-EF2Import ASCII (PREP7, CDB) 12Import Binary (.rst, .rth) 12Export ASCII (.inp) 12ANSYS

Post-processing of Results 12Import ASCII N/AImport Binary N/AExport ASCII (.k) 971R3.2.1LS-DYNA

Post-processing of Results N/A


Digital Simulation

NX 6 releases

Solver File Type NX 6 NX 6.0.1 NX 6.0.2 NX 6.0.3Import ASCII(.dat)

6.0 6.1 6.1 6.1

Import Binary(.op2)

6.0 6.1 6.1 6.1

Export ASCII(.dat)

6.0 6.1 6.1 6.1NXNastran


6.0 6.0 6.1 6.1

Import ASCII(.dat)

2007r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1

Import Binary(.op2)

2007r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1

Export ASCII(.dat)

2007r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1MSCNastran


2007r1 2008r1 2008r1 2008r1

Import ASCII(.inp)

6.7-1 6.8-1 6.8-1 6.8-1

Import Binary N/A N/A N/A N/AExport ASCII(.inp)

6.7-1 6.8-1 6.8-1 6.8-1Abaqus


6.7-5 6.8-1 6.8-3 6.8-EF2


11 11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1


11 11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1

Export ASCII(.inp)

11 11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1ANSYS


11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1 11 SP1

Import ASCII N/A N/A N/A N/AImport Binary N/A N/A N/A N/AExport ASCII (.k) 971R2 971R2 971R3.2.1 971R3.2.1LS-DYNAPost-processingof Results

N/A N/A N/A N/A


Digital Simulation

NX 5 releases


NX5.0.2

NX5.0.3

NX5.0.4

NX5.0.5

NX5.0.6

ImportASCII(.dat)

5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1

ImportBinary(.op2)

5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1

ExportASCII(.dat)

5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1

NXNastran


5.0 5.0 5.1 5.1 5.1 5.1 6.0

ImportASCII(.dat)

2005 2005 2007 2007 2007 2007 2007r1

ImportBinary(.op2)

2005 2005 2007 2007 2007 2007 2007r1

ExportASCII(.dat)

2005 2005 2007 2007 2007 2007 2007r1

MSCNastran


2005 2005 2007 2007 2007 2007 2008r1

ImportASCII(.inp)

6.6 6.6 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1

ImportBinary

N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

ExportASCII(.inp)

6.6 6.6 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1Abaqus


6.6 6.6 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.7-1 6.8-1

ImportASCII(PREP7,CDB)

10 10 11 11 11 11 11

ImportBinary(.rst, .rth)

10 10 11 11 11 11 11

ExportASCII(.inp)

10 10 11 11 11 11 11

ANSYS


10 11 11 11 11 11 11SP1


Digital Simulation

NX 4 releases

Solver File Type NX 4 NX 4.0.1 NX 4.0.2 NX 4.0.3 NX 4.0.4Import ASCII(.dat)

4.0 4.1 4.1 5.0 5.0

Import Binary(.op2)

4.0 4.1 4.1 4.1 4.1

Export ASCII(.dat)

4.0 4.1 4.1 5.0 5.0NXNastran


4.0 4.1 4.1 5.0 5.0

Import ASCII(.dat)

2005 2005 2005 2005 2005

Import Binary(.op2)

2005 2005 2005 2005 2005

Export ASCII(.dat)

2005 2005 2005 2005 2005MSCNastran


2005 2005 2005 2005 2005

Import ASCII(.inp)

6.5-1 6.5-1 6.5-1 6.6 6.6

Import Binary N/A N/A N/A N/A N/AExport ASCII(.inp)

6.5-1 6.5-1 6.5-1 6.6 6.6Abaqus


6.5-1 6.5-1 6.5-1 6.6 6.6-3


8 9 9 10 10


8 9 9 10 10

Export ASCII(.inp)

8 9 9 10 10ANSYS


9 9 9 10 10

Gasket analysis support

What is it?

For NX Nastran, ANSYS, and Abaqus models, this release includesenhancements that make it possible for you to model and analyze gaskets.Gaskets are relatively thin components which you can place between twobodies to create a sealing effect and prevent the leakage of fluid. Gasketscan be made of many different materials, such as rubber or composites. Thegasket material itself is usually under compression.


Digital Simulation

To support gasket modeling, this release includes:

• For NX Nastran or ANSYS, a new Gasket material type option in theAssign Material dialog box. When you select Gasket as the material type,you can then use the new Gasket Material dialog box to define all thenecessary properties for modeling a gasket material.

• A new Gasket Results page in the Structural Output Requests dialog boxto request the output of gasket results for NX Nastran analyses. See**Unsatisfied xref title** for more information.

• For Abaqus, support for several different types of Abaqus gasket elements,as well as support for a new Gasket Section type of physical propertytable and Gasket Behavior material. See **Unsatisfied xref title** for acomplete list of the supported elements.

General gasket modeling process

Although the details of the process for modeling and analyzing gaskets differdepending on your specified solver, the overall process fairly standard. Ingeneral, you model a gasket as a very thin solid body that lies between twoother solid bodies.

You mesh the gasket itself, along with the bodies on either side, with solidelements. Generally, the mesh on the gasket is only a single layer of solid


Digital Simulation

elements. To ensure the proper connectivity in a gasket analysis, you mustensure that the nodes from the gasket mesh are connected to the nodes inthe meshes on the surrounding bodies. The specific requirements for how youestablish this connection depend on your solver. In general, you can either:

• Ensure that the elements from the gasket mesh share nodes with theelements on the two adjacent bodies. In Advanced Simulation, you canuse a Glue Coincident type of Mesh Mating Condition, for example, toensure that the nodes are shared. You can also merge nodes betweenthe adjacent bodies.

• Connect the nodes on the gasket mesh to the nodes on the surroundingbodies with constraints, such as an MPC type of Manual Coupling.


Command Finder for CAE

What is it?

Command Finder is a search tool that helps you find a specific NX commandassociated with the words or phrases you enter.

For this release, Command Finder now supports all commands in theAdvanced Simulation and Design Simulation applications.

From the list of commands, you can:

• Display the command location.

• Launch the command, if it is available in the current application.

• Display the Help information for the command.

For boundary conditions, you can also search on the solver input name, suchas PLOAD4 for an NX Nastran Pressure load.


Digital Simulation

Use customer defaults for the Command Finder to:

• Save a cached file of all menu and toolbar commands.

• Identify a location for a custom list of words and phrases associated withspecific commands.

• Search for a command using a secondary language.

Where do I find it?

Command Finder customer defaults

Menu File→Utilities→Customer Defaults→Gateway→UserInterface


Command Finder tab

Command Finder command

Application Advanced Simulation or Design SimulationMenu Help®Command FinderToolbar

Standard toolbar®Command Finder


Digital Simulation

Display controls

Displaying 2D element thickness values

What is it?

You can use the new Thickness Information command in the SimulationNavigator to display the 2D element thickness values in your model. Thislets you verify the thickness values the software will apply when you eitherexport or solve your model. Advanced Simulation provides you with a varietyof ways to define the thickness of 2D elements. For example, the thicknessvalues can be derived from the thickness of a midsurface or specificallyassigned through either Element Associated Data or a physical propertytable. Because of the multitude of methods for specifying element thickness,you need a way to verify that those thickness values are defined correctlyprior to solving your model. You can also use Thickness Information to createa spatial field of the 2D element thickness values.

Creating a display of element thickness values

Thickness Information creates a color-coded line display that shows thegeneral statistical distribution of the thickness values across your 2D mesh.The following example shows a turbine blade model (A) which we used tocreate and mesh a midsurface (B). (C) shows the thickness display for the 2Delements on that midsurface.

• The lines represent the actual thickness values of the elements. Thesoftware draws those lines along each element’s normal at the element’scenter of gravity. You can use the Line Scale option in the ThicknessInformation dialog box to control the overall length of the lines.

• The colors represent the range of thickness values across the model.These colors let you visually verify that the thickness values are properlydistributed across the mesh. You can use options in the Thickness


Digital Simulation

Information dialog box to control the colors the software assigns to eachthickness range.

– Mid Range Thickness elements have a thickness that is within onestandard deviation (s) either above or below the mean thickness valuefor the mesh.

– Max Range Thickness elements have a thickness that is greater thanone standard deviation above the mean thickness value for the mesh.

– Min Range Thickness elements have a thickness that is less than onestandard deviation below the mean thickness value for the mesh.

– Zero Thickness elements do not have an assigned thickness value.

You can use a thickness display to quickly identify:

• Any sudden changes in color that may indicate incorrectly assignedthickness values.

• Elements that do not have an assigned thickness.

Creating fields from element thickness displays

You can also use the Thickness Information command to create a spatial fieldof thickness values from the 2D elements in your model. In the ThicknessInformation dialog box, when you select the Create Field option, the softwaregenerates a new field and places it in the Fields node in the SimulationNavigator.

Creating a thickness field can be helpful if you are working with a model inwhich the thickness of mesh is being derived from a midsurface. On a largemodel, the derivation of thickness data from a midsurface can be time andresource intensive since the software must recalculate the thickness eachtime you use Thickness Information to generate a display. If you are iteratingthrough the meshing process with different element sizes, you can use thenew Create Field option to generate a field from the midsurface data the firsttime you use the Thickness Information command. You can edit the MeshAssociated Data for that mesh and change the specified Thickness Sourcefrom Midsurface to Field. You can then select the newly created thicknessfield.

The ability to create a thickness field from a display of your 2D elementthicknesses also allows you to edit or copy that thickness data. You can thenreuse that modified data in either the same model or another model. Forexample, you can import a Nastran bulk data file that contains a coarse meshin which the element thickness values are defined directly on the CQUAD4elements. You can then use the new Create Thickness Field capability togenerate a thickness field from that data. If you then remesh the model with


Digital Simulation

a finer mesh, you can use that thickness field to map the original thicknessvalues to the new mesh

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains a 2D meshSimulationNavigator

Right-click the appropriate 2D mesh collector or 2Dmesh and choose Thickness Information

Persistently displaying 2D element thickness

What is it?

Use the Display 2D Element Thickness option in the Mesh Display dialogbox to display a graphical representation of the thickness of the 2D elementsin your model. When you select this option, the software displays the 2Delements as if they were solid elements. The software continues to display thethickness of the elements until you turn this option off.

With the Display 2D Element Thickness option, the software displays athickness for all 2D elements in the model, regardless of how the thickness isdefined. For example, the software displays element thicknesses that are:

• Derived from a midsurface’s thickness

• Defined in a physical property table

• Defined as Element Associated Data for selected elements

• Defined as a field.


Digital Simulation


You can create a display of the element thicknesses to verify that thethickness values are defined correctly for the model. An element thicknessdisplay can also help you locate areas in your model in which the 2D elementshave no defined thickness values.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains 2D elements with

defined thickness values.Menu Preferences®Mesh DisplaySimulationNavigator

In the FEM, right-click the 2D mesh collector or 2D meshand choose Edit Display. Select Display 2D ElementThickness.

In the Simulation file, right-click the 2D mesh collectoror 2D mesh and choose Create Display Override orEdit Temporary Display. Select Display 2D ElementThickness.

Boundary conditions

Improvements to constraint resolution

What is it?

Improvements have been made to the method in which the software handlestwo constraints defined on shared geometry or nodes. Also, for Simulationfiles created in Advanced Simulation, the constraint resolution workflow hasbeen changed so that you are now in control of initiating the resolution.

Constraints on shared geometry or nodes resolve correctly

In previous releases, two constraints defined on shared geometry or nodes,regardless of the constrained degrees of freedom, were considered to be inconflict. However, in some cases, the degrees of freedom affected by twointersecting constraints are not actually in conflict, as shown in the examplebelow.


Digital Simulation

Edge indicated by (1) is shared by both constraints

User Defined Constraint (blue,defined on outer face)

Pinned constraint (red, definedon inner face)

DOF1=FreeDOF2=FixedDOF3=FreeDOF4=FreeDOF5=Free

DOF6=Free

A pinned constraint uses a cylindricalcoordinate system.

R and Z directions are fixed

Theta (rotating) direction is free

All rotational DOF are also free

In this example, the Cartesiancoordinate system for the UserDefined constraint is oriented suchthat the Y direction is parallel withthe Z direction in the cylindricalcoordinate system for the Pinnedconstraint.

In previous releases, the software resolved the above condition using incorrectdegrees of freedom. In this release, the software resolves this conditionusing a new constraint resolution rule: Ignore Conflict. With this rule, thesoftware applies the degrees of freedom values for both constraints to thecommon nodes.

You can also apply the new Ignore Conflict rule to other resolved constraintobjects if you want the degrees of freedom of all the intersecting constraintsto be taken into account for the common geometry or nodes.

The Ignore Conflict rule is used only when the intersecting constraints areboth defined on the same type of object (for example, two edges, two faces, ortwo constraints on the same point). For other types of intersecting constraints


Digital Simulation

(such as a face constraint and an edge constraint that share an edge or node),the appropriate resolution rule, such as Use Object Precedence, will beapplied.

New workflow for resolving constraints

In Advanced Simulation, when the software detects a constraint conflict, it nolonger initiates the constraint resolution automatically. Instead, icons nowappear in the Simulation Navigator next to the conflicting constraints toindicate the conflict, as shown in the example below.

This feature alerts you to conflicting constraints and gives you control overresolving them appropriately. To resolve the constraints, do one of thefollowing:

• In the Advanced Simulation toolbar, click Update Finite Element Model

.

Note

This button also updates any pending mesh updates.

• Right-click the solution node and choose Resolve Constraints.

• Use the Exclude option in the constraint dialog box to exclude theoverlapping geometry and avoid the intersecting constraint.

As in previous releases, a Resolved Constraint Group node that contains theresolved constraint objects appears in the Simulation Navigator.


Digital Simulation

Enforced Displacement Constraints now available in axisymmetric structuralsolutions

What is it?

If Abaqus, ANSYS, or Nastran is your specified solver, you can now use theEnforced Displacement Constraint command in Axisymmetric Structuraltype solutions. You can use Enforced Displacement Constraint to apply aknown displacement to your model.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation file with Axisymmetric Structural

as the selected analysis type and Abaqus, ANSYS, NXNastran, or MSC Nastran as the specified solver.

Toolbar Advanced Simulation®Enforced Displacement

Constraint

Nastran

Bolt pre-loads now supported for Response Simulation analyses

What is it?

You can use the Bolt Pre-Load command to to apply a pre-load to a boltmodeled with CBAR or CBEAM type beam elements in a Response Simulation(SEMODES 103 - Response Simulation) analysis. Bolt pre-loads are onlysupported in the first two subcases in a Response Simulation:

• Static Offset

• Stress Stiffening

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with NX Nastran as the specified

solver and SEMODES 103 - Response Simulation as thesolution type and with either Subcase - Static Offsetor Subcase - Stress Stiffening active in the SimulationNavigator

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation®Bolt Pre-Load


Digital Simulation

Abaqus

Bolt pre-loads now supported for solid elements

What is it?

In the Abaqus solver environment, you can now define a pre-load on a boltmodeled with solid (continuum) elements. In previous releases, you couldonly define a bolt pre-load on a bolt modeled with beam (B31) elements.

In the Bolt Pre-Load dialog box, use the new Force on 3D Elements optionin the Type list to define a pre-load on solid elements. With this option, youselect either elements or faces that define a pre-tension section.

In Abaqus, a pre-tension section is defined as a surface inside the bolt thatbisects the bolt. The software transmits the specified pre-load force acrossthe pre-tension section by means of a pre-tension node that you specify. Thispre-tension node must not be attached to any element in your model.

Note

If you do not specify a pre-tension node, the software creates apre-tension node for you when you export or solve your model.

The software applies the load along a vector that is normal to the pre-tensionsection. The new Section Normal option lets you control how the softwarecomputes this normal.

• If you select Average Surface Normal, the software computes an averagenormal to the section that faces away from the underlying continuumelements.

• If you select User Defined, you can define the vector to specify the normal.This option is useful when the direction in which you want to apply theload is different from the average normal to the pre-tension section.

The following graphic shows an example of a bolt created with solid elements.(A) shows the pre-tension section, (B) shows the pre-tension node, and (C)shows the normal to the pre-tension section.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with Abaqus as the specified solverToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Bolt Pre-Load

Initial clearance values for contact and bolt contact analyses

What is it?

You can use the new Contact with Clearance and Bolt Contact with Clearancesimulation objects to define precise initial clearance or overclosure (initialpenetration) values for the nodes on the slave (dependent) surface in a contactpair. With both Contact with Clearance and Bolt Contact with Clearance,the initial clearance or overclosure value you specify overwrites the initialclearance or overclosure value that the software calculates at each slave node.

• Use Contact with Clearance to define initial clearances or overclosureswhen you model contact between two surfaces.

• Use Bolt Contact with Clearance to define initial clearances oroverclosures when you model contact between a single-threaded bolt anda bolt hole.

Contact with clearance for threaded bolts

The Bolt Contact with Clearance dialog box includes additional ClearanceDefinition options that let you model the thread characteristics of a bolt evenif detailed thread geometry is not included in the model. These options letyou specify details about the bolt threads, including the half thread angle(a), pitch (p, or the thread-to-thread distance), and major (d) and mean (md)bolt diameters. You also use the Bolt Axis options to define two points (a


Digital Simulation

and b) along the bolt’s axis. The software uses these points to generate thebolt’s contact normal directions.

Clearance or overclosure value can be uniform or spatially varying

In the Contact with Clearance and Bolt Contact with Clearance dialog boxes,you can use the Clearance Definition options to define the clearance oroverclosure value as either uniform or spatially varying for the contact pair.From the Value list:• If you select Expression, you can specify a uniform clearance oroverclosure value for the contact pair. A positive value indicates aclearance value, and a negative value indicates an overclosure value.

• If you select Field, you can specify spatially varying clearances oroverclosures. With this option, you use a table field to specify theclearance at a single node or set of nodes on the slave surface. In thetable field, the node ID is the independent variable, while the clearanceor overclosure value is the dependent variable. You can also specify aScale Factor to apply to the field.

Contact with clearance is supported only in small-sliding contact analyses

You can only use the Contact with Clearance or Bolt Contact with Clearancecommands when you are using the small-sliding contact formulation in youranalysis. In Abaqus, you use the *CONTACT PAIR keyword to specify


Digital Simulation

the contact formulation. In Advanced Simulation, you use a Contact Pairmodeling object to specify the parameters for the *CONTACT PAIR keyword:

1. In the Contact Pair dialog box, select Small from the Sliding Type list touse the small-sliding formulation instead of the finite-sliding formulation.

2. In the Contact with Clearance or Bolt Contact with Clearance dialogbox, use the Contact Pair option to associate the Contact Pair modelingobject with the simulation object.

Associated Abaqus keywords

When you export or solve your model, the software uses the options youspecify in the Contact with Clearance dialog box to define the *CONTACTPAIR and *CLEARANCE keywords in your Abaqus input file. For moreinformation, see Adjusting Initial Surface Positions and Specifying InitialClearances in Abaqus/Standard Contact Pairs in the Abaqus Analysis User’sManual and *CLEARANCE and *CONTACT PAIR in the Abaqus KeywordsReference Manual.

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®Contact with Clearance or

Bolt Contact with Clearance

New thermal conductance boundary condition

What is it?

When you are working with Abaqus as your solver, you can use the newSurface-to-Surface Thermal Conductance simulation object to modelconductive heat transfer between proximate or contacting surfaces.

In the Surface-to-Surface Thermal Conductance dialog box, you can use theConductance Dependency options to model the conductive heat transferas a function of:

• The clearance between the contacting surfaces (Clearance option).

• The contact pressure at the interface between the contacting surfaces(Pressure option).

• Both the clearance and the contact pressure (Clearance and Pressureoption).


Digital Simulation

In Advanced Simulation, you use fields to define how the heat transfer varieswith the clearance and/or contact pressure.

When you export or solve your model, the software uses the options youspecify in the Surface-to-Surface Thermal Conductance dialog box to definethe *GAP CONDUCTANCE keyword in your Abaqus input file. For moreinformation, see Thermal Contact Properties in the Abaqus Analysis User’sManual and *GAP CONDUCTANCE in the Abaqus Keywords ReferenceManual.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with Abaqus as the specified solver

and Thermal as the selected analysis typeToolbar Advanced Simulation®Surface-to-Surface Thermal

Conductance

ANSYS

Solver parameter to group face pressure loads

What is it?

A new Create ANSYS components (CM) for similar loads option has beenadded to the Solver Parameters dialog box. When you export or solve yourmodel, this option controls whether the software uses the ANSYS CMcommand to group all elements that have the same face Pressure load into acomponent.

• If you select this option, the software uses the CM command to group allthe elements with the same face Pressure load and only writes out asingle face pressure (SFE) command in your ANSYS input file.

• If you clear this option, the software writes out individual single facepressure (SFE) commands for each element in your ANSYS input file.

You may want to select the Create ANSYS components (CM) for similarloads option if you plan to work with your ANSYS input file outside ofAdvanced Simulation. For example, if you select this option, you can laterselect the surface pressures by their component name in the ANSYS pre- andpost-processing software. Additionally, the Create ANSYS components (CM)for similar loads option creates fewer SFE commands, so you may want toselect the option to make manually editing your input file easier.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Prerequisite An active Simulation with ANSYS as the specified solverSimulationNavigator

Right-click a solution®Solver Parameters

New options to control the deletion of loads at the end of a step

What is it?

A new Delete load options tab has been added to the Create Solution Stepand Edit Solution Step dialog boxes. The options on this tab control whetherforces and moments, body loads, and element body loads are kept or deletedby ANSYS at the end of the current solution step. These options correspondto the ANSYS DDELE, FDELE, BFDELE, and BFEDELE commands.

Note

Currently, you can only use these options to delete the loads orconstraints on all nodes or elements to which they are applied.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation file with ANSYS as the specified

solverSimulationNavigator

Either right-click a solution and select Create Step, orright-click the appropriate solution step and select EditSolution Step

Cumulative loading options now preserved on import

What is it?

When you import an ANSYS input file into Advanced Simulation, thesoftware now preserves the settings of any cumulative option commands(DCUM, FCUM, SFCUM, and BFCUM). In ANSYS, you use these commandsto specify whether the software should add (ADD), replace (REPL), or ignore(IGNO) a repeated load or constraint on a particular degree-of-freedom.In previous releases, the software always imported any cumulative optioncommand with a setting of “replace” (REPL), regardless of what you actuallyspecified in the input file. Now, the software correctly preserves the specifiedcumulative option setting when you import the file.

Note

Advanced Simulation does not import any cumulative options as aSolution Step attribute. Instead, the software converts the load orboundary condition data into an equivalent load or boundary conditionwith the appropriate cumulative option setting.


Digital Simulation

For example, suppose you have the following constraints on node ID2:

• Step 1: UX = 1mm, UZ= 1.2mm

• Step 2: UX = 1.5mm, UY=1

In step 2 of the analysis, how the software resolves the constraint on nodeID2 depends on the setting of the DCUM command:

• If the DCUM option is set to REPL, the resolved constraint for node ID2is UX = 1.5, UY = 1 (UZ is removed)

• If the DCUM option is set to ADD, the resolved constraint for node ID2 isUX = 2.5, UY = 1, UZ = 1.2

Where do I find it?


solverMenu File®Import®Simulation

Support for importing loads and constraints from binary files

What is it?

When you import an ANSYS binary file into Advanced Simulation,the software now imports any loads (forces/moments) and constraints(displacements and temperatures) defined in that file.

Where do I find it?



Groups

Node and element sets replaced by groups

What is it?

In this release, node and element sets have been completely replaced bygroups. The Sets command has been removed from the product. Previously,you could use the Node Set and Element Set capabilities to create namedcollections of either nodes or elements. However, you could only create a set ofa homogeneous collection of entities, and sets were only supported in a subsetof the Advanced Simulation commands. Compared to sets, groups:


Digital Simulation

• Allow you to create named collections of heterogeneous types of entities.

• Are supported by a wider array of commands.

• Offer you greater flexibility and control over how and where they arecreated.

Commands now let you select groups instead of sets

All commands that previously allowed you to select node or element setsnow allow you to select groups. For example, the Nastran Structural OutputRequest and Thermal Output Request modeling object dialog boxes havebeen modified to allow you to select groups of nodes or elements on whichto output results.

Migration of existing node and element sets to groups

If you have a model from a previous release that contains node or elementsets, the software automatically migrates those sets to groups when you openyour model for the first time in this release.

Nastran SETS now imported as groups

In previous releases, if you imported a Nastran input file, any SET casecontrol commands were imported as either a node set or as an element set.Now, the software imports SETs as groups. For details, see Understandingthe import of Nastran SETs.

Grouping enhancements

What is it?

This release includes a number of enhancements to the grouping capabilitiesin Advanced Simulation.

Access to groups from the Simulation Navigator

A new Groups folder has been added the Simulation Navigator. The folderallows you to easily view and manage all existing groups. In the Groupsfolder, you can use right-click menu options to:

• Create new groups.

• Access the Group Manager dialog box where you can modify existinggroups.


../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/nastran_set_import.html&vars=-aux

../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/nastran_set_import.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation

New Add to Group and Remove from Group commands

New Add to Group and Remove from Group commands are nowavailable. You can access these commands from either the Group Managerdialog box or the right-click menu when you highlight a group in theSimulation Navigator. You can use these commands to quickly:

• Add new entities to a selected group.

• Remove selected entities from a selected group.

Initial support for group labels

When you create or import a group, Advanced Simulation now assigns aunique label (ID) to that group. Currently, you cannot change the label orspecify criteria used to initially assign the label. The labels appear in the newLabel column in the group list in the Group Manager dialog box. Because youcan have groups defined in both the FEM and Simulation files, or in differentFEM files within an assembly FEM, the software automatically resolves anyconflict between the labels to enforce uniqueness.

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM, Simulation, or assembly FEM fileSimulationNavigator

Right-click a selected group.

Menu Format®Group®Manage

Fields

General field enhancements

What is it?

This release includes several enhancements to fields. In AdvancedSimulation, you use fields to define variant functions that specify magnitudesor properties in terms of other variables, such as time.

Fields now available from the Simulation Navigator

You can now manage fields from the Simulation Navigator as well as the PartNavigator. You can use the new Fields node in the Simulation Navigator tocreate, plot, edit, export, copy, rename, or delete a field. The Fields node isalways visible, regardless of which Simulation part or file is currently active.Because fields have so many applications in Advanced Simulation, having theFields node in the Simulation Navigator makes it easier for you to work withfields in the context of a CAE analysis.


Digital Simulation

Descriptions for fields

Description boxes are now available in the Formula Field, Table Field, andLinked Field dialog boxes. When you create a field, use the Description box toenter a description of the field.

Default bounds for independent domain variables

You can now define default bounding ranges for your named independentvariables. These bounds are then used for all independent variables, so youdo not need to define them each time you create a field, unless you want tochange the default bounds. In the Named Variables dialog box, right-click avariable and choose Default Bounds. In the Default Named Variable Boundsdialog box, you can define the default Minimum, Maximum, Default value,and the Number of Points.

Ability to display spatial fields

What is it?

You can now create displays of the spatial fields in your model. Spatial fieldsdefine how a boundary condition or the thickness of elements map to an areaof your model. Creating a display of a spatial field lets you visually verify thatthe distribution of the data is correct across the model.

Controlling the display of fields from the Simulation Navigator

You can control whether a field is displayed directly from the SimulationNavigator.

Fields

Temperature

Force vs Time Formula

You can:

• Use the check boxes adjacent to individual fields to turn on or off thedisplay of selected fields.

• Use the check box adjacent to the main Fields node to turn on or off thedisplay of all fields.

Controlling the appearance of field displays

You can use the options in the new Field Display Properties dialog box tocontrol how the software displays the spatial fields. For example, you canuse the Display Type option in the Dependent Domain group to control the


Digital Simulation

display of the data in the dependent field. Below, (A) shows a Surface typedisplay of a spatial temperature field, while (B) shows a Symbol type display.

The available display options differ depending on whether you are workingwith the independent domain or the dependent domain. They also differdepending upon the type of display you create. For example, if you selectSurface from the Display Type list in the Dependent Domain group, you canuse the Offset option to control the degree to which the software offsets thedata from the independent domain. Below (A) shows a surface with no offset,while (B) shows a surface with a much larger offset.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation or FEM fileSimulationNavigator

Right-click the field in the Fields node®Edit Display

Ability to map a field to an isoparametric plane or line

What is it?

Two new methods of mapping variable data to a location have been added.You can now map field data to an abstract combination of faces or lines in


Digital Simulation

your model. You can then use this field as a boundary condition or as avariable thickness on the elements in your mesh.

Parametric Plane

Using the new Parametric Plane spatial map type, available with theParameter Plane spatial domain, you can map a field to a 2D arbitrarysurface whose principal coordinate directions lie between 0,0 and 1,1. Thecoordinate directions are labeled U and V.

For example, you can use this method to define a varying temperature (foruse in a boundary condition) or element thickness across a complex surface.

Temperature varying according to parametric plane

You define the U and V coordinates, which range from 0 to 1, by selectingpoints or edges in your model. You can define the U coordinates and allowthe software to infer the V coordinates, or you can define both the U and Vcoordinates explicitly.


Digital Simulation

Example: U coordinates defined by selecting edge (1) and edge (2); Vcoordinates inferred

Data mapped to U and V coordinates

You can define the U and V coordinates using one of these methods:

• Iso Section— You define at least two U “sections” by selecting points oredges in the model (the first section you define is 0% and the last one is100%). The software creates the remaining U sections on the surfacebased on the sections you define. The software then infers the V sectionsfrom your U sections. This method works well when the geometry is linearin the direction of the V sections.

• Iso Lines— You define both the U and V sections. The definition processis the same as it is for the Iso Section mapping, except you define theV sections rather than letting the software infer them. This option isnecessary when the model contains curved faces in the direction of the Vsections


Digital Simulation

For more information, see Mapping a field to an isoparametric plane.

Parametric Line

Using the Parametric Line spatial map type, you can map variable data toa line. You can select points, edges, and curves to define a U section thatdefines a parametric line in Cartesian space. The software uses all objectsyou select to define a single curve with the starting point mapped to 0% andthe end point mapped to 100%. This feature is useful for applying variabledata spatially along an edge.

For example, you can use a parametric line field as a spatial scaling factorin a Force load:

This feature is also useful for defining a boundary condition or thickness thatis varying in only one direction. For example, you can apply the above forcedistribution across the 2D faces using the same parametric line field:

For more information, see Mapping a field to an isoparametric line.

Where do I find it?

Parametric Plane


Right-click the Fields node®New [field type]


Domain®Parameter Plane®SpatialMap®Type®Parametric Plane


../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/adv_create_parametric_plane.html&vars=-aux

../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/adv_create_parametric_line.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation

Parametric Line


Right-click the Fields node®New [field type]


Domain®Parameter®Spatial Map®Type®ParametricLine

Geometry idealization and abstraction

Midsurface improvements

What is it?

This release includes several improvements to the Midsurface command.

Improved usability for Midsurface dialog box

This release includes enhancements to the Midsurface dialog box to improveits usability.

• In previous releases, the Midsurface dialog box closed automatically afteryou generated a single midsurface. Now, the dialog box remains activeuntil you explicitly close it.

• If you select the Automatic Progression check box, you can now createmidsurfaces on multiple bodies without exiting the Midsurface dialog box.If you select Automatic Progression, when you generate a midsurfaceon a body, the software automatically displays only the new sheet bodyin the graphics window. In a model that contains multiple solid bodies,this helps you visually distinguish between the bodies that have definedmidsurfaces and those that do not. You can then more easily select thenext solid body on which to create a midsurface.

Improvements to automatic pairing and overall performance

When you use the Face Pair method with the Auto Create option,improvements have been made to the algorithm the software uses toautomatically pair faces. On certain types of parts, the software now producesmore accurate face pairs as well as more accurately trimmed surfaces.

Additionally, there are significant performance improvements in the timeit takes the software to generate a midsurface on certain types of parts.These improvements occur when you create a midsurface with the AdvancedCreation and Trimming check box cleared.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active idealized partToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Midsurface

Split Body creates mesh mating conditions

What is it?

When you use the Split Body command to divide geometry into multiplebodies, use the new Auto Create Mesh Mating Conditions option in the SplitBody dialog box to create mesh mating conditions between those bodies.With this option, when you switch from the idealized part to the FEM file,the software automatically creates a glue coincident mesh mating conditionbetween the bodies. The mesh mating condition ensures that the meshesare continuous from one body to the other. Previously, you had to manuallycreate mesh mating conditions between any bodies created by the Split Bodycommand.

Note

If you use the Split Body command in the Modeling application, theAuto Create Mesh Mating Conditions option is called Keep ImprintedEdges. If you select Keep Imprinted Edges, the software creates meshmating conditions between the bodies when you switch to the AdvancedSimulation application.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite The idealized part activeToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Split Body

Split Edge improvements

What is it?

The Split Edge command now includes options that you can use to definethe location where the software divides the edge. To facilitate theseimprovements, the Split Edge dialog bar available in previous releases hasbeen converted to a new Split Edge dialog box.

The Type menu lets you select the method to use to split the edge:

• Use Location on Edge to divide the edge at a point you select. In previousreleases, this was the only available method for splitting an edge.


Digital Simulation

• Use Project Point on Edge to divide the edge by projecting a point ontothe edge. The software uses a closest point method to project the selectedpoint to the edge. The software splits the edge at the location of theprojected point.

• Use Project Point Along a Vector to divide the edge by projecting a pointonto the edge along a specified vector. The software splits the edge at thelocation that represents the closest point projection of the point alongthe vector.

Where do I find it?


Model Cleanup®Split Edge

Materials

Support for external material libraries

What is it?

The process for using an external, custom material library in NX has beenimproved. You can now:

• Maintain two separate custom material libraries. Custom libraries arestored as XML files in the MatML schema version 3.1.5. For schemadetails, see http://www.matml.org.

• Restrict display and editing access to the two custom librariesindependently.

• Create, edit, or delete your custom library materials directly within NX.

• Export local materials (materials created in NX and saved with a model)to a custom material library.

• Import material libraries generated from external sources that adhere tothe MatML schema.

The new Material Library Manager dialog box lets you export materials to acustom library and edit or delete the custom materials.


http://www.matml.org

Digital Simulation

Use customer defaults for the Materials function to define the default folderlocation of the material libraries, as well as configure access to each library.


• Custom material definitions can be used in multiple NX models, and thesecustom materials are preserved when you upgrade to a newer version ofNX.

• Editing your materials in the NX user interface is much easier thanediting the phys_material.dat file.

Where do I find it?

Materials customer defaults


Gateway®General®Materials tab

Material Library Manager command

Application AllMenu Tools®Material Library Manager


Digital Simulation

SimulationNavigator

Advanced Simulation toolbar®Material Library

Manager

Enhancements for isotropic and fluid materials

What is it?

As part of the ongoing enhancements to the NX materials capabilities,isotropic and fluid materials now support a number of functionalenhancements. With these materials, you can now:

• Enter the value for a material property as an Expression (that is, aformula, function, reference, or constant value) or as a Field (a table orformula).



• Enter a description for any material.



Orthotropic and anisotropic materials will offer the same capabilities ina future release.

Where do I find it?

Application AllMenu Tools®Material PropertiesSimulationNavigator Advanced Simulation toolbar®Material Properties

Material damping support

What is it?

Material damping is now supported for relevant Nastran and ANSYSmaterials. This allows you to include structural damping in dynamic analyses.

• For Nastran, the GE field is now supported for the MAT1, MAT2, MAT3,MAT8, and MAT9 bulk data entries.

• For ANSYS, the DAMP option is now supported for the MP command.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM, idealized part, or partToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Material Properties

Nastran

New hyperelastic material models

What is it?

This release includes support for new NX Nastran hyperelastic materialmodels. Hyperelastic materials let you model materials that are nearlyincompressible but which undergo large strains.

Hyperelastic MaterialModel

Corresponding ANSYS Command

Arruda-Boyce MATHE bulk data entry with Model field =Aboyce

Foam MATHE bulk data entry with Model field =Foam

Mooney-Rivlin MATHE bulk data entry with Model field =Mooney

Ogden MATHE bulk data entry with Model field =Ogden

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM, idealized part, or part with NX Nastran



Abaqus


What is it?

This release includes support for an expanded range of Abaqus hyperelasticmaterial models, including several models in which you can use test data todefine certain material properties. This release also includes support for anew Gasket Behavior material.

• Hyperelastic materials let you model materials that are nearlyincompressible but which undergo large strains.


Digital Simulation

• The Abaqus Gasket Behavior material lets you model gasket behaviorproperties, such as elastic properties for the membrane and transverseshear behaviors of a gasket, for gasket analyses.

New materials

Material Corresponding KeywordArruda-Boyce *HYPERELASTIC keyword with both the

ARRUDA-BOCYE parameter (constantsoption)

Arruda-Boyce Test Data *HYPERELASTIC keyword with theARRUDA-BOCYE and TEST DATA INPUTparameters

Foam *HYPERFOAM keyword (constants option)Foam Test Data *HYPERFOAM keyword with the TEST

DATA INPUT parameterGasket Behavior *GASKET BEHAVIOR keywordMarlow *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the

MARLOW parameterMooney-Rivlin *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the

MOONEY-RIVLIN parameter (constantsoption)

Neo Hooke *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the NEOHOOKE parameter (constants option)

Neo Hooke Test Data *HYPERELASTIC keyword with both theNEO HOOKE and TEST DATA INPUTparameters

Ogden *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the OGDENparameter (constants option)

Ogden Test Data *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the OGDENand TEST DATA INPUT parameters

Polynomial *HYPERELASTIC keyword with thePOLYNOMIAL parameter (constants option)

Reduced Polynomial *HYPERELASTIC keyword with theREDUCED POLYNOMIAL parameter(constants option)

Van Der Waals *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the VANDER WAALS parameter

Yeoh *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the YEOHparameter (constants option)

Yeoh Test Data *HYPERELASTIC keyword with both theYEOH and TEST DATA INPUT parameters


Digital Simulation

Defining material constants using test data

With the test data material types, you can use a field to specify thedeformation modes that define the material constants with test (experimental)data.

• Use the UNIAXIAL Tension/Compression option to specify uniaxial testdata. This option corresponds to the Abaqus *UNIAXIAL TEST DATAkeyword. With UNIAXIAL Tension/Compression, you define a table fieldin which you list the material’s nominal stress (TU) and nominal strainvalues (εU) on each line.

• Use the BIAXIAL Tension option to specify biaxial test data. This optioncorresponds to the Abaqus *BIAXIAL TEST DATA keyword. WithBIAXIAL Tension, you define a table field in which you list the material’snominal stress (TB) and nominal strain values (εB) on each line.

• Use the PLANAR - Pure Shear option to specify planar (or pure shear)data. This option corresponds to the Abaqus *PLANAR TEST DATAkeyword. With PLANAR - Pure Shear, you define a table field in whichyou list the material’s nominal stress (TS) and nominal strain in thedirection of loading (εS) on each line.

• Use the Pure Volumetric Compression option to specify volumetricloading test data to include user-defined material compressibility.With Pure Volumetric Compression, you define a table field in whichyou list the material’s pressure (p) and the volume ratio, J (currentvolume/original volume) on each line.

Depending upon the material’s type, you can use one or more of these optionsto define the experimental stress-strain data.

• With the Arruda-Boyce Test Data,Marlow, and Foam Test Datamaterials,you can only use one of the test data options to define the experimentaltest data. If you use more than one, when you export or solve your model,the software only writes out the first applicable test data curve. Theorder in which the software searches for the appropriate test data optiondepends on the material type, as follows:

– Arruda-Boyce Test Data: BIAXIAL Tension then UNIAXIALTension/Compression

– Marlow: BIAXIAL Tension, then PLANAR - Pure Shear, thenUNIAXIAL Tension/Compression

– Foam Test Data: PLANAR - Pure Shear, then UNIAXIALTension/Compression, then Pure Volumetric Compression


Digital Simulation

• With the Mooney-Rivlin Test Data, Neo Hooke Test Data, Ogden TestData, Reduced Polynomial, Van Der Waals, and Yeoh Test Data materialtypes, you can use up to four of the options to define the experimentaltest data. If you use more than one, when you export or solve yourmodel, the software writes out the test data option in the followingorder: BIAXIAL Tension, then PLANAR - Pure Shear, then UNIAXIALTension/Compression, then Pure Volumetric Compression.

For more information, see:

• *HYPERELASTIC, *UNIAXIAL TEST DATA, *BIAXIAL TEST DATA,*PLANAR TEST DATA, and *VOLUMETRIC TEST DATA in the AbaqusAnalysis Keywords Manual.

• Hyperelastic behavior of rubberlike materials in the Abaqus AnalysisUser’s Manual.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM, idealized part, or part with Abaqus as



ANSYS


What is it?

This release includes support for a number of new ANSYS hyperelasticmaterial models. Hyperelastic materials let you model materials that arenearly incompressible but which undergo large strains.



Arruda-Boyce TB command with the HYPER,,,,BOYCEoption

Foam TB command with the HYPER,,,,FOAM orHYPER,,,,BLATZ options

Gent TB command with the HYPER,,,,GENT optionMooney-Rivlin TB command with the HYPER,,,,MOONEY

optionNeo Hooke TB command with the HYPER,,,,NEO optionOgden TB command with the HYPER,,,,OGDEN

optionPolynomial TB command with the HYPER,,,,POLY option


Digital Simulation

Yeoh TB command with the HYPER,,,,YEOH option

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM, idealized part, or part with ANSYS as



Meshing

Newly supported element types

What is it?

This release includes support for additional NX Nastran and Abaqus elementtypes.

New NX Nastran Element Type

Advanced Simulation now supports the CPYRAM element. For moreinformation, see:

• **Unsatisfied xref title** for details on how to include pyramid elementsin your model.

• CPYRAM in the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide

New Abaqus Element Types

This release includes support for the following types of Abaqus gasketelements:

Abaqus Element DescriptionGK3D6 6-noded, three-dimensional gasket elementGK3D6N 6-noded, three-dimensional gasket element

with thickness-direction behavior onlyGK3D8 8-noded, three-dimensional gasket elementGK3D8N 8-noded, three-dimensional gasket element

with thickness-direction behavior only

How you create the gasket elements depends upon the element’s type:

• To create GK3D8 or GK3D8N type elements, use the 3D Swept Meshcommand.


Digital Simulation

• To create GK3D6 or GK3D6N type elements, first create a 2D mesh ofeither linear or parabolic triangular elements. Then, use the 3D SweptMesh command to generate the GK3D6 or GK3D6N elements.

For more information on modeling and analyzing gaskets, see **Unsatisfiedxref title**.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file with the appropriate solver specifiedToolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar® 3D Tetrahedral Mesh

or 3D Swept MeshMenu Insert®Mesh®3D Tetrahedral Mesh or 3D Swept Mesh

Improved tetrahedral meshing algorithm

What is it?

This release includes improvements to the tetrahedral meshing algorithm.The most significant of these is how the algorithm manages memory duringmesh generation. Specifically:

• The algorithm no longer has a contiguous memory requirement.Previously, if the memory on your machine was fragmented, the meshingalgorithm could only utilize the largest contiguous free block of memory.Now, the software utilizes all available memory. This means that thesoftware can now take advantage of all available smaller blocks ofmemory on your machine.

• The algorithm’s memory allocation is now tuned for 64-bit precision.Because the algorithm has been tuned to take advantage of the increasedprecision, the overall robustness of the algorithm has increased.Previously, the software could allocate an array past the 32-bit limit, butall the floating point calculations were still performed with 32-bit floats.

These improvements are most noticeable when you generate meshes on largemodels or when you iteratively reduce the element size on a smaller model.

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®3D Tetrahedral MeshMenu Insert®Mesh®3D Tetrahedral Mesh


Digital Simulation

Quadrilateral only meshing

What is it?

You can use new options in the 2D Mesh, 2D Mapped Mesh, and 3D SweptMesh dialog boxes to create a quadrilateral only mesh. A quadrilateral onlymesh is a special class of free mesh that does not contain any triangularelements. Quadrilateral only meshes are sometimes necessary in analyses inwhich the presence of triangular elements is considered either undesirableor unacceptable.

Quadrilateral only 2D free meshes

Use the new Attempt Quad Only option in the 2D Mesh dialog box tocontrol whether the software tries to generate a mesh that contains onlyquadrilateral elements. With a quadrilateral only mesh:

• If you select On – Zero Triangles, the software creates a mesh that doesnot contain any triangular elements. With this option, if the softwarecannot create a mesh with only quadrilateral elements, it does notgenerate a mesh.

• If you select On – Minimum Triangles, the software creates a mesh thatcontains, at most, a single triangular element per selected face. With thisoption, the software only inserts a triangle if it cannot establish nodalparity (an even number of nodes) along the boundary of the face.

To create a quadrilateral only mesh, you must first clear the Attempt FreeMapped Mesh check box.

Quadrilateral only 2D mapped meshes for three-sided faces

Use the new Quad Only on 3 Sided Faces option in the 2D Mapped Meshdialog box to create a mesh that does not contain any triangular elements ona three-sided face. If you select this option, the software tries to generate anall quadrilateral mesh for faces that have only three sides. With this option,if the software is unable to maintain nodal parity due to constraints fromexisting meshes on the surrounding faces, it creates a mapped mesh with asingle triangular element. In previous releases, if you created a mappedmesh on a three-sided face, the mesh always degenerated into triangularelements at a selected corner.

The following graphic shows a mapped mesh generated with the Quad Onlyon 3 Sided Faces check box cleared. Notice how the quadrilateral meshdegenerates into triangular elements at the uppermost corner.


Digital Simulation

This graphic shows a mapped mesh on the same geometry generated with theQuad Only on 3 Sided Faces check box selected. This mesh is comprised ofonly quadrilateral elements.

Quadrilateral only source faces for 3D hexahedral meshes

Use the new Attempt Quad Only options in the 3D Swept Mesh dialog boxto have the software generate a quadrilateral only mesh on the source face.Having an all quadrilateral element mesh on the source face ensures that theswept mesh through the volume will not contain any wedge elements.

Use the options in the Attempt Quad Only list to control whether the softwarecreates a mesh on the source face that either does not include any trianglesor that only contains one triangle.

With the 2D Mesh dialog box, the Attempt Free Mapped Mesh and AttemptQuad Only options are mutually exclusive. However, with the 3D Swept Meshdialog box, if you select both Attempt Free Mapped Mesh and either On – ZeroTriangles or On – Minimum Triangles from the Attempt Quad Only list, thesoftware proceeds through the options sequentially. First, it tries to generatea free mapped mesh. If that mesh fails, it then tries to create a quadrilateralonly mesh. The software retains the first successful mesh it generates.

If the software cannot successfully generate either a quadrilateral only meshor a free mapped mesh, it uses the Paver meshing method to generate a freemesh on the source face.


Digital Simulation

The following graphic shows a hexahedral mesh generated with the AttemptFree Mapped Mesh check box selected and the Attempt Quad Only option setto Off. Notice that the mesh on the source face contains several triangularelements.

This graphic shows a hexahedral mesh on the same part generated with theAttempt Free Mapped Mesh check box cleared and the Attempt Quad Onlyoption set to On – Zero Triangles.

New customer defaults

New customer defaults let you control the default settings for the AttemptQuad Only options in the 2D Mesh and 3D Swept Mesh dialog boxes and theQuad Only on 3 Sided Faces option in the 2D Mapped Mesh dialog box.To set these defaults:



3. Click the 2D Free Mesh, 2D Mapped Mesh, or 3D Mapped Mesh page andset the appropriate option.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®2D Mesh, , 2D Mapped

Mesh , or 3D Swept MeshMenu Insert®Mesh®2D Mesh, 2D Mapped Mesh, or 3D Swept

Mesh

Creating a surface coat of 2D elements

What is it?

Use the new Surface Coat command to create a surface coating of 2Delements on top of existing 3D (solid) elements. You can create a surfacecoat on either the free faces of selected solid elements or on an entire solidmesh. The resulting 2D mesh:

• Uses the nodes and the connectivity of the solid mesh on which it isdefined.

• Can be linear or parabolic if the solid mesh is parabolic. For example, youcan create a surface coating of either linear or parabolic quadrilateralelements on a mesh of parabolic quadrilateral elements. However, if thesolid mesh is linear, then the resulting 2D mesh can only be linear.

• Is not associated to the underlying 3D mesh. If you delete or modify eitherthe 2D mesh or the 3D mesh, the other mesh is unaffected.

• Is not associated to the underlying geometry.

There are a number of different reasons why you might want to create asurface coating of 2D elements on your model. For example, you can create asurface coating of 2D elements to:

• Model an actual surface coating on the underlying part.

• Add mass to your model.

• Facilitate post-processing in cases, for example, where you are chieflyinterested in the stress results on the surface of the part.

• Ensure that loads are correctly transferred between adjacent shell andsolid meshes. For example, imagine a model that contains a thin ribthat intersects the main body of a solid part. The rib is meshed with 2Delements, with 6 degrees-of-freedom each, while the part itself is meshedwith 3D elements, with 3 degrees-of-freedom each. Suppose you need to


Digital Simulation

apply a bending load to the end of the rib. To ensure that the momentstransfer correctly from the 2D elements to the 3D elements, you cancreate a surface coating of 2D elements on the 3D elements that surroundthe location where the rib intersects the part.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains a 3D meshToolbar

Element Operations®Surface CoatMenu Insert®Element®Surface Coat

Modifying the order of elements in a mesh

What is it?

Use the new Element Modify Order command to change the order of allelements in a selected mesh. For meshes that are associated to theirunderlying geometry, Element Modify Order lets you modify the elementorder without regenerating the entire mesh. You can change:

• A mesh of parabolic elements to a mesh of linear elements.

• A mesh of linear elements to a mesh of parabolic elements.

Modifying the order of elements with the Element Modify Order command isfaster than changing the order of elements by editing an existing mesh.

In the following graphic, we used Element Modify Order to modify a mesh oflinear hexahedral elements (A) to a mesh of parabolic hexahedral elements(B).


Digital Simulation

When you use Element Modify Order:

• The software does not change either the location or label of the cornernodes in the mesh.

• In a mesh that is associated to the underlying geometry, any midnode thatthe software inserts along an edge or face is associated to that edge or face.

Note

You cannot use Element Modify Order to modify the order of eithera pyramid element mesh or a hexahedral or tetrahedral mesh thatadjoins a pyramid element mesh.

Modifying the Midnode Method for parabolic elements

For a mesh of parabolic elements, you can also use Element Modify Order tochange the specified Midnode Method for the mesh. The Midnode Methodlets you control how the software projects the elements’ midnodes onto thegeometry.


Digital Simulation

For example, suppose you select Mixed from the Midnode Method list whenyou create the mesh. With the Mixed option, the software projects themidnodes on an element to the geometry unless the projection would causethe element’s Jacobian value to exceed the Maximum Jacobian thresholdspecified in the 2D Mesh dialog box. You could later use Element ModifyOrder to change the method to either Curved or Linear. However, if you selecta parabolic mesh that is not associated to the underlying geometry, such as amesh created with commands on the Element Operations toolbar, you canonly change the Midnode Method to Linear.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains a 2D or 3D meshToolbar

Element Operations®Element Modify OrderMenu Edit®Element®Modify Order

Varying the thickness of 2D elements

What is it?

This release includes several enhancements that allow you to vary thethickness of 2D elements. You can:

• Use options in the Mesh Associated Data dialog box to vary the thicknessof all the 2D elements in a mesh.

• Use options in the Element Associated Data dialog box to vary thethickness values within an individual element.

Improved user interface for defining the source of a 2D element’s thickness

In the Mesh Associated Data dialog box, the Ignore Midsurface Thicknessoption from previous releases has been replaced by the new ThicknessSource list. Use the Thickness Source list to specify the source of the datathe software uses to assign the elements’ thickness values. For example, ifyou select Physical Property Table, the software applies the thickness valuedefined in the associated physical property table to the mesh. In contrast, ifyou select Midsurface, the software applies the thickness of the midsurfaceto the mesh.

Ability to use fields to vary the thickness of elements across a mesh

In the Mesh Associated Data dialog box, the Field option in the ThicknessSource list lets you use a spatial field to vary the thickness of the elementsacross a mesh. You can use:


Digital Simulation

• A formula field to vary the thickness of the elements using an NXexpression (mathematical function).

• A table field to vary the thickness of the elements using a table ofindependent and dependent variables. With a table field you can importan external comma separated (.csv) text file that defines the appropriatethickness values to use as input for the table.

The following graphic shows a part with a 2D mesh generated on the part’smidsurface. A table field defines the thickness of the elements along thetop surface.

The following table lists the types of elements for each solver for which youcan create a spatial field to vary the thickness.

Solver Element Types that SupportThickness Fields

Nastran CQUAD4, CQUAD8, CQUADR, CTRIA3,CTRIA6, CTRIAR

Abaqus SHELL63, SHELL93, SHELL181, PLANE42,PLANE82

ANSYS S3, S3R, STRI3, STRI65, S4, S4R5, S8R, S8R5

Ability to specify different nodal thickness values for a single element

Use the new Corner Node Thickness options in the Element Associated Datadialog box to specify different thickness values for selected corner nodes. Any


Digital Simulation

thickness values you specify with the Element Associated Data dialog boxtake precedence over the thickness value assigned to the overall mesh.

Where do I find it?

Mesh Associated Data

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM fileMenu Tools®Mesh Associated DataSimulationNavigator

Right-click the appropriate mesh®Edit Mesh AssociatedData

Element Associated Data

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM fileMenu Edit®Element®Modify Associated DataToolbar

Element Operations®Element Associated Data

New method for orienting 2D element normals

What is it?

Use the new 2D Element Normal by Seed option in the Model Check dialogbox to orient the normals of 2D elements to match the normal of a selectedseed element. You can:

• Change the normals of all connected elements in the mesh to which theseed element belongs.

• Change the normals of all connected elements in all currently displayed2D elements.

With 2D Element Normal by Seed, you select an element whose orientationis in the desired direction. When you click either OK or Apply, the softwaremodifies the elements’ orientation.

You can use 2D Element Normal by Seed to quickly modify the normalsof elements so that they are consistent. Consistent element normals areimportant, for example, to ensure the proper post-processing of elementstress and strain results.


Digital Simulation

Note

If you want your selection to stop at the end of a non-manifold edge, youshould first merge any coincident nodes before you use the 2D ElementNormal by Seed option. To merge coincident nodes, select the Nodesoption in the Model Check dialog box and then select Merge DuplicateNodes.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains a 2D meshToolbar Advanced Simulation®Finite Element Model Check

Initial pyramid element support for NX Nastran

What is it?

This release contains the initial implementation of pyramid element supportfor NX Nastran models. In Advanced Simulation, if you are working in the NXNastran solver environment, you can now use pyramid elements to transitionbetween hexahedral and tetrahedral meshes on adjacent bodies (volumes).You can also import existing NX Nastran models that contain pyramidelements and work with those elements in Advanced Simulation. Previously,pyramid elements were only supported in the ANSYS solver environment.

NX Nastran uses the CPYRAM bulk data entry to define the pyramidelements. The CPYRAM element is only supported in Advanced Nonlinear(SOL 601 and SOL 701) analyses. A CPYRAM element can have 5 or 13nodes. For more information, see CPYRAM in the NX Nastran QuickReference Guide.

Creating pyramid elements at hexahedral-tetrahedral interfaces

When you generate a tetrahedral mesh on a body (volume) that is adjacentto a body with an existing hexahedral mesh, you can use the Use Pyramidsfor Transition option in the 3D Mesh dialog box to have the softwareautomatically create transitional pyramid elements between the meshes. Forthe software to create transitional pyramid elements:

• The adjacent body must have an existing mesh of hexahedral elements.

• A Glue Coincident type of Mesh Mating Condition must be defined at theinterface between the two bodies to ensure that the nodes on the adjacenthexahedral and tetrahedral meshes match exactly.


Digital Simulation

For more information about using pyramid elements with the NX Nastranenvironment, see Using pyramid transitions with NX Nastran in theAdvanced Simulation help.

The following example shows transitional pyramid elements at the interfaceof hexahedral and tetrahedral meshes on a section of a wheel hub. The outersection of the hub is meshed with tetrahedral elements, while the innersection is meshed with hexahedral elements. (A) shows the two meshestogether, with the transitional pyramid elements highlighted in orange. (B)shows a view of just the pyramid elements with the tetrahedral elements.


Pyramid elements ensure a conforming mesh as they provide a directtransition from hexahedral elements to tetrahedral elements. In contrast,interface connection methods rely on either rigid elements or multi-pointconstraint equations to connect the nodes. Using pyramid elements to joindissimilar meshes offers advantages in greater solution accuracy and reducedsolution time compared to rigid elements or multi-point constraint equations.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file with NX Nastran as the specified

solver


../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/pyramid_elem_nastran.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation®3D Tetrahedral Mesh

Menu Insert®Mesh®3D Tetrahedral Mesh

New option for retaining free meshes in mapped mesh failures

What is it?

In previous releases, if the software was unable to generate a mapped meshon one or more of the faces you selected with the 2D Mapped Mesh command,it generated a free mesh on them instead. Now, you can use the new StoreFree Mesh if Mapped Mesh Fails option to control whether the softwareretains that free mesh. For example, you may want to clear the Store FreeMesh if Mapped Mesh Fails check box when you want to see clearly any faceson which the software failed to generate a mapped mesh.

A new customer default lets you control the default setting for the Store FreeMesh if Mapped Mesh Fails option. To access this default:



3. Click the 2D Mapped Meshing tab and either select or clear the KeepFree Meshes check box.

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®2D Mapped Mesh

Improved selection of nodes and elements within a solid mesh

What is it?

When you select entities within a solid mesh, you can now control whetherthe software includes any internal nodes and elements in your selection. TheNode and Element Display dialog box has a new Include Internal Nodes andElements in Selection option that lets you include nodes and elements in theinterior of a solid mesh in your selection regardless of whether those internalnodes and elements are currently displayed. In previous releases, you couldonly select internal nodes and elements if the Display Internal Edges optionin the Mesh Display dialog box was selected.

The Include Internal Nodes and Elements in Selection option works with allselection operations, including area selection, smart selection, and select all.By default, this option is turned on.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced Simulation, Design SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file.Menu Preferences®Node and Element Display

Split Shell now splits a single triangle into four

What is it?

You can use the new Triangle to 4 Triangles option in the Type menu ofthe Split Shell dialog box to divide a single triangular element into fourtriangular elements. You can use Triangle to 4 Triangles when you need tolocally refine a region within a triangular mesh.

Where do I find it?


Element Operations®Split ShellMenu Edit®Element®Split Shell

Material orientation

New material orientation definition methods

What is it?

New methods have been added for defining material orientation for shelland solid elements in the Mesh Associated Data dialog box, for the Nastranand Abaqus solvers.

• Tangent Curve (Shell or solid elements) — Lets you define the materialorientation by selecting a curve or edge on your geometry. For eachelement, the software finds the closest point on the selected curve or edgeto the element centroid and sets the primary direction of the materialcoordinate system as tangent to that curve or edge.

In the following example, the material orientation represented by the

yellow arrows was defined by selecting the edge .


Digital Simulation

Note

When you define the material orientation for shell elements, youorient only the X-axis and Y-axis in the plane of the element. TheZ-axis is fixed and is normal to the element. The orthogonality of X,Y, and Z means you only need to orient the X-axis. The right-handrule applies. For solid elements, orienting two axes automaticallyderives the third.

• Vector (Shell or solid elements) — Lets you define the material orientationvector either by selecting an edge in the geometry to infer a vector (seefirst example below) or by using the NX vector tools to define the vector(see second example below).


Digital Simulation

Vector inferred from edge (1)


Digital Simulation

Vector specified as X direction

• Surface Normal (Solid elements only) — Lets you define the materialorientation by selecting a surface on the geometry. For each element, thesoftware finds the closest point on the face to the element centroid andthen sets the primary direction as normal to the face at that point.


Digital Simulation

Primary direction normal to selected face (1)

Note

You can view and control the display of the material orientationarrows in the graphics window using the Finite Element ModelCheck command. For more information, see **Unsatisfied xreftitle**.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file.Toolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar®Mesh Associated Data

Menu Tools®Mesh Associated Data

View options for material orientation on solid elements

What is it?

A new option, 3D Element Material Orientation, has been added to the ModelCheck dialog box that lets you view the material orientation display in thegraphics window for solid elements.

After defining material orientation, you can view the material coordinatesystem for each element in the graphics window. You can view the first,second, and third directions of the material coordinate systems independently,or all three simultaneously. You can also choose the colors in which to displaythe directions of the material coordinate systems.


Digital Simulation

Only first direction shown (first direction is tangent to the curvedgeometry)

Complete coordinate systems shown (green is first direction; redis second direction)

In addition to using color, you can identify the first, second, and thirddirections in a material coordinate system by looking at the size of the arrowheads. In the following graphic, the first, second, and third directions areidentified.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains solid elements with

material orientation defined.Toolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar®Finite Element Model

CheckMenu Analysis®Finite Element Model Check

Assembly FEM

Map to individual components in a subassembly

What is it?

The Unmap command has been renamed to Map at Next Level.

Within an assembly FEM, you can use the Map at Next Level commandto associate a component FEM with an individual component in a CADsubassembly without associating it with the entire subassembly.

This command changes the status of the CAD subassembly to Not Mappedand the status of the components to Ignored . Then you can right-click anindividual component and select Map New or Map Existing to associate thecomponent with a component FEM.


Digital Simulation

(1) Mapped subassembly; (2) Same subassembly after Map at NextLevel command; (3) Individual component mapped to a FEM

You can also use the Map Sub Assemblies at Next Level command to performthe same function on the top-level CAD assembly. This command changesthe status of all CAD subassemblies to Not Mapped and the status of allCAD components to Ignored.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active assembly FEM with the assembly loadedSimulationNavigator

Right-click a CAD assembly node®Map at Next Level

Right-click the top-level CAD assembly node®Map SubAssemblies at Next Level

Usability improvements to Assembly Label Manager

What is it?

When defining an assembly FEM, you can specify offsets for the identifierlabels the software generates for nodes, elements, and coordinate systemsacross component FEMs. Several usability enhancements have been made tothe Assembly Label Manager dialog box to make the process of specifyingthese offsets easier.

There are three methods for specifying how the automatic label offsets areapplied:

• Same Offsets in Component— One value is used for Offset to Nearest.For each component, the offset is the same for nodes, elements, andcoordinate systems. The software calculates the highest-needed offset


Digital Simulation

and applies it uniformly to all offsets within the component. The nodes,elements, and coordinate systems start with the same ID number in eachcomponent. This is a new type.

• Same Nearest Value for All— One value is used for Offset to Nearest.For each component, the offset is calculated independently for nodes,elements, and coordinate systems.

• Separate Nearest Value for All — Lets you specify different Offset toNearest values for nodes, elements, and coordinate systems. For eachcomponent, the offset is calculated independently for nodes, elements, andcoordinate systems.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active assembly FEMSimulationNavigator

Right-click the assembly FEM node and chooseAssembly Label Manager.

Assembly FEM model checks improved

What is it?

Features have been added to the Finite Element Model Check dialog boxspecifically for Assembly FEMs.

Model Setup check

With an assembly FEM loaded and you open the Model Check dialog box, thefollowing new Model Setup options are available.

Assembly Check

• Label — Checks for conflicts in node, element, and coordinate systemlabels across component FEMs and reports the label range in which theconflict occurs.

• Connectivity— Checks for component FEMs that are not connected.

• Comprehensive— Includes both the Label and Connectivity checks.

Assembly Load

• All Components— Includes all components associated with the assemblyFEM in the model check, regardless of load status.

• Fully Loaded Components— Includes only fully loaded components inthe model check.


Digital Simulation

Duplicate Nodes check and merge

The Duplicate Nodes check has been added for assembly FEMs. Thiscommand works as it does in component FEMs. However, it processes onlythe nodes that were created in the active assembly FEM and can merge anode created in the assembly FEM with a node in a component FEM.

• Show Duplicate Nodes — Displays the duplicate nodes in the activeassembly FEM. The duplicate nodes are displayed in yellow.

• Merge Duplicate Nodes— Merges parent nodes in the active assemblyFEM with any child nodes in the active assembly FEM or in a componentFEM.

Duplicate nodes indicated with yellow circles

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active assembly FEMToolbar Advanced Simulation®Finite Element Model Check

Menu Analysis®Finite Element Model Check

Move Component command replaces Reposition Component

What is it?

You can change the position of a non-associative component FEM withinan assembly FEM. For consistency with the Assemblies application, theReposition Component command has been replaced with the standard MoveComponent command.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active assembly FEM


Digital Simulation

SimulationNavigator

Right-click a component FEM®Move Component

Nastran environment

Updates to Strategy Parameters and Contact Parameters modeling objects

What is it?

This release includes updates to the NX Nastran Strategy Parameters andContact Parameters modeling objects.

Strategy Parameters updates

In the Strategy Parameters dialog box:

• On the Analysis Options tab, a new Automatic option has been addedto the Stiffness Matrix Stabilization Factor (MSTAB) list. With theAutomatic option, the software automatically uses matrix stabilization ifthe ratio of maximum/minimum diagonal of factorized matrix is greaterthan 1.0E10.

• On the Contact Control tab, a new Tensile Contact Forces (TNSLCF)option has been added. Use this option to indicate whether tensileconsistent contact forces on quadratic 3D contact segments are allowed.

See NXSTRAT in the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide for moreinformation.

Contact Parameters updates

In the Contact Parameters dialog box:

• Use the new Include Shell Element Z-Offset option to control whether thesoftware includes any shell element z-offset when determining the contactsurfaces. This option corresponds to the ZOFFSET field in the BCTPARMBulk Data entry.

• Use the new All Contact Elements Can Become Inactive option tocontrol whether all the contact elements can become inactive. This optioncorresponds to the CSTRAT field in the BCTPARM Bulk Data entry.

See BCTPARM in the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide for moreinformation.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Prerequisite An active FEM or Simulation file with NX Nastran asthe specified solver

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation®Modeling Objects



What is it?

This release includes support for new NX Nastran hyperelastic materialmodels. Hyperelastic materials let you model materials that are nearlyincompressible but which undergo large strains.



Arruda-Boyce MATHE bulk data entry with Model field =Aboyce

Foam MATHE bulk data entry with Model field =Foam

Mooney-Rivlin MATHE bulk data entry with Model field =Mooney

Ogden MATHE bulk data entry with Model field =Ogden

Where do I find it?




Changes to the handling of MATS1 data

What is it?

When you export or solve a Nastran input file, Advanced Simulation nowhandles any defined material stress-strain (MATS1) data differently thanin previous releases. In Advanced Simulation, you use the options in theStress-Strain Related Parameters group in the Isotropic Material dialogbox to define the stress-strain data.

These changes are:

• Depending on the option you select from the Yield Function Criterion (YF)list, you must now specify either a value in the Initial Yield Point (LIMIT1)or the Initial Friction Angle (LIMIT2) box.


Digital Simulation

– If you choose von Mises or Tresca, you must specify an InitialYield Point (LIMIT1) value. In Nastran, LIMIT1 should contain thematerial’s Yield Strength (Ys) value.

– If you choose Mohr-Coulomb or Drucker-Prager, you must specifyan Initial Yield Point (LIMIT1) value and an Initial Friction Angle(LIMIT2) value.

Importantly, none of the materials in the NX material library currentlyhave the LIMIT1 value defined. If you need to use a library material in aNastran analysis, you must make a copy of that material and then editthe material to define the Initial Yield Point (LIMIT1) value.

• Advanced Simulation no longer corrects defined stress-strain curves tomeet Nastran requirements. Previously, the software verified that yourstress-strain curve had its first point at (0,0) and its second point at (Ys/E,Ys). If the data did not meet those requirements, the software fixed itautomatically. Now, Advanced Simulation leaves the stress-strain data asyou defined it. If the stress-strain data is not defined correctly when yousolve your model, Nastran issues a fatal error.

Where do I find it?




Bolt pre-loads now supported for Response Simulation analyses

What is it?

You can use the Bolt Pre-Load command to to apply a pre-load to a boltmodeled with CBAR or CBEAM type beam elements in a Response Simulation(SEMODES 103 - Response Simulation) analysis. Bolt pre-loads are onlysupported in the first two subcases in a Response Simulation:

• Static Offset

• Stress Stiffening

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Prerequisite An active Simulation with NX Nastran as the specifiedsolver and SEMODES 103 - Response Simulation as thesolution type and with either Subcase - Static Offsetor Subcase - Stress Stiffening active in the SimulationNavigator

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation®Bolt Pre-Load

New weld-like glue algorithm

What is it?

Advanced Simulation now supports the new weld-like glue algorithm that wasintroduced in the NX Nastran 6.1 release. A surface-to-surface glue conditionon non-coincident shell or solid faces can introduce artificial rotational energyinto the solution. Generally, the problem occurs because the spring-like glueelements do not transfer moments at the glue interface when glued faces arenon-coincident and/or when loads are not normal to the glued faces. This isparticularly noticeable in a normal mode solution when modes are found thatcontain an artificial rotational energy due to the glue condition. The new NXNastran algorithm eliminates this artificial rotational energy.

In NX Nastran 6.1, two new fields were added to the BGPARM bulk dataentry to allow you to specify and work with this new algorithm. In AdvancedSimulation, the Glue Parameters modeling object has been updated tosupport the new BGPARM fields. In the Glue Parameters dialog box:

• The Alternate Glue Formulation option corresponds to the newGLUETYPE field on the BGPARM bulk data entry. Use this option tocontrol the glue algorithm that NX Nastran uses.

– SelectWeld-Like Connection to use the new weld-like glue algorithm.

– Select Normal and Tangential Springs to use the original, spring-likeglue algorithm.

• The Unitless Scale Factor for the Stiffness option corresponds to thenew PENGLUE field on the BGPARM bulk data entry. Use this option tospecify the penalty factor for the weld-like glue algorithm.

Note

With the Normal and Tangential Springs option, use the PenaltyNormal Direction and Penalty Tangential Direction options tospecify the penalty factor.

In most cases, the new weld-like glue algorithm represents the connectionstiffness more accurately than the spring-like glue algorithm because ittransfers moments at the glue interface.


Digital Simulation

For more information, see New Weld-Like Glue Method in the NX Nastran 6.1Release Guide and BGPARM in the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

Where do I find it?


the specified solver.Toolbar


PBUSH structural damping enhancements

What is it?

For NX Nastran models, new options have been added to the Damping tab inthe PBUSH physical property table dialog box. Use these options to definestructural damping for each degree-of-freedom for CBUSH elements. Theability to define direction-dependent structural damping for the PBUSHbulk data entry was introduced in the NX Nastran 6.1 release. Previously,you could only define a single, structural damping value (GE1) that appliedto all 6 degrees-of-freedom.

The new options in the PBUSH dialog box let you specify separate structuraldamping values for the X, Y, and Z translations and rotations. The values youspecify correspond to the GE1, GE2, GE3, GE4, GE5, and GE6 fields in thePBUSH bulk data entry. If you define a value for any of the Structural optionson the Damping tab, you should define a value for all degrees-of-freedom thatare critical to the result, because a blank field defaults to a value of zero.

This release also includes support for the new BSHDAMP parameter, whichlets you optionally ignore any of the GE2-GE6 fields and only use the GE1field. By default, the software considers the new GE2-GE6 fields. The newBSHDAMP list in the Solution Parameters dialog box (available from theModeling Objects Manager dialog box) lets you control the setting for thisparameter:

• If you select SAME (PARAM, BSHDAMP=SAME), the software ignores theGE2-GE6 fields and only considers the single, structural damping valuedefined in the GE1 field. This corresponds to the behavior available inprevious releases.

• If you select DIFF (PARAM, BSHDAMP=DIFF), the software considers theGE2-GE6 fields.

For more information, see the NX Nastran 6.1 Release Guide and PBUSH inthe NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite A FEM file active with NX Nastran as the specified solverToolbar

Advanced Simulation®Physical PropertiesMenu Insert®Physical Properties

PSHELL structural damping enhancements

What is it?

Beginning with the NX Nastran 6.1 release, the PSHELL bulk data entrysupports including the structural damping coefficient (GE) on the associatedmaterials:

• MID1 = membrane material

• MID2 = bending material

• MID3 = transverse shear

• MID4 = membrane-bending coupling

Previously, NX Nastran used the structural damping coefficient defined onthe MID1 material for all materials associated with the PSHELL entry.

Advanced Simulation now supports the new NX Nastran SHLDAMPparameter. You use the SHDAMP parameter to turn the structural dampingcoefficient capability on and off for a given analysis. The new SHLDAMP listin the Solution Parameters dialog box (available from the Modeling ObjectsManager dialog box) lets you set this parameter.

• If you select SAME (PARAM, SHLDAMP=SAME), which is the default, thesoftware uses the structural damping coefficient (GE) defined on the MID1material for the PSHELL entry for all MIDi materials for that PSHELL.

• If you select DIFF (PARAM, SHLDAMP=DIFF), the software uses the structuraldamping coefficient (GE) defined on each MIDi for the PSHELL entry,provided that the GE field is defined for any of the MID2, MID3, and/orMID4 materials in at least one PSHELL entry in the input file. Withthis option, if any structural damping coefficient (GE) value is blank, NXNastran treats it as having a value of zero.

For more information, see the PSHELL Structural Damping in the NXNastran 6.1 Release Guide and SHLDAMP in the NX Nastran QuickReference Guide.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?


the specified solver.Toolbar


End releases for beam and bar elements

What is it?

You can now define end releases (also known as pin flags) at either end of aNastran CBEAM or CBAR element in the Element Associated Data dialogbox. Previously, you could define pin flags only at the Mesh Associated Datalevel.

In a beam, end releases remove connections between a node and selecteddegrees of freedom. The degrees of freedom are defined in the elementcoordinate system. For the following example, a force is defined on thehorizontal span. Because end releases are defined at the ends of the bracingbeams, the solver does not transfer the moment load from the horizontalbeam to the bracing beams. The moments are transferred across the otherelements in the horizontal span.

Bridge model. (1) and (2) represent the end releases; force appliedto horizontal span

Bridge model; deflected shape with end releases


Digital Simulation

Bridge model; deflected shape without end releases

In the Element Associated Data dialog box, under the End Releases group(for End A and or End B of the element), you can set DOF1–6 to On todisconnect the following forces:

• DOF1 — axial force in Plane 1

• DOF2 — shearing force in Plane 1

• DOF3 — shearing force in Plane 2

• DOF4 — axial torque in Plane 2

• DOF5 — moment in Plane 2

• DOF6 — moment in Plane 1

Note

Plane 1 is the XY plane formed by the X and Y axes in the elementcoordinate system. Plane 2 is the XZ plane formed by the X and Z axes.

In the previous example, DOF6 is set to On at the ends of the bracing beams(the model is shown in the XY plane).

For more information, see Element associated data overview in the AdvancedSimulation help.


You can define a release at the ends of beam or bar elements to model hingedor pinned connections.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains CBEAM or CBAR

elements.Toolbar

Element Operations®Element Associated DataMenu Edit®Element®Modify Associated Data


../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/element_assoc_data_ov.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation

Optional torsional mass moments of inertia for CROD and CBAR elements

What is it?

Advanced Simulation now supports the new TORSIN parameter that wasintroduced in the NX Nastran 6.1 release. The TORSIN parameter lets youoptionally include the torsional mass moment of inertia in the CROD andCBAR element mass matrices. By default, NX Nastran does not calculatetorsional mass for CROD or CBAR elements, though it does for CBEAMelements. This can lead to differences when you compare results betweenequivalent models.

The new TORSIN box in the Solution Parameters dialog box (available fromthe Modeling Objects Manager dialog box) lets you control the setting forthis parameter:

• If you enter 0, the software does not include the torsional mass moment ofinertia for CROD and CBAR elements (the default).

• If you enter 1, the software includes the torsional mass moment of inertiafor CROD and CBAR elements.

• If you enter 2, the software includes the torsional mass moment of inertiafor CBAR elements only.

• If you enter 3, the software includes the torsional mass moment of inertiafor CROD elements only.

For more information, see the NX Nastran 6.1 Release Guide and PBUSH inthe NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

CBAR axial torsional mass moment of inertia calculation

NX Nastran calculates the CBAR axial torsional mass moment of inertiasimilarly to the CBEAM element using the equation:

Ixx = rL(I1+I2)

where:

Ixx = torsional mass moment of inertia

r = density

L = the length of the element

I1 and I2 = area moments of inertia

CROD axial torsional mass moment of inertia calculation

NX Nastran calculates the CROD axial torsional mass moment of inertiausing the equation:


Digital Simulation

Ixx = rLIxwhere Ix = J = torsional constant.

Where do I find it?




Specifying additional keywords and system cells

What is it?

A new Additional Keywords option has been added to the nastran CommandKeywords options on the Solve Options page of the Solver Parameters dialogbox. The nastran Command Keywords options include a subset of frequentlyused keywords for the nastran command, such as sdirectory and old. You canuse the new Additional Keywords option to manually specify any additionalkeywords for the nastran command or any system cells for the NASTRANexecutive control statement. The ability to manually specify specific keywordsor system cells gives you greater control over how Nastran solves your model.

For more information, see the nastran command and the NASTRAN statementin the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide for a complete list of the supportedkeywords and system cells.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with NX Nastran or MSC Nastran

as the specified solverSimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation®New Solution, or right-clickthe current solution®Edit Solution

Menu Insert®Solution

Results support enhancements

Support for nonlinear stress results output

What is it?

Use the options on the new Nonlinear Stress tab in the Structural OutputRequests dialog box to request the output of nonlinear element stressesfor SOL 106 (NLSTATIC 106) analyses. These options let you control howthe software presents the tabular listing of results, the location where the


Digital Simulation

results are output, as well as the elements for which the software calculatesthe stresses. When you create a Nonlinear Stress type of output request,the software creates an NLSTRESS Case Control entry in the Case Controlsection of your Nastran input file.

A new customer default lets you control whether the Enable NLSTRESSRequest option on the Nonlinear Stress tab is selected by default. To setthis default:



3. Click the Solution tab and either select or clear the Nonlinear Stressoption.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM or Simulation file with NX Nastran or

MSC Nastran as the specified solverToolbar


Shell thickness output for advanced nonlinear analyses

What is it?

Use the options on the new Shell Thickness tab in the Structural OutputRequests dialog box to request the output of shell element thickness valuesfor SOL 601 and 701 (ADVNL 601 and 701) analyses. NX Nastran onlyoutputs shell thickness results for large strain analyses (analyses in whichyou include the parameter PARAM,LGSTRN,1). To set this parameter, selectthe new Large Strains check box on the Parameters page of the CreateSolution or Edit Solution dialog box.

When you create a Shell Thickness type of output request, the softwarecreates a SHELLTHK Case Control entry in the Case Control section of yourNastran input file. For more information on shell thickness results, seeSHELLTHK in the NX Nastran Quick Reference Guide.

A new customer default lets you control whether the Enable SHELLTHKRequest option on the Nonlinear Stress tab is selected by default. To setthis default:




Digital Simulation

3. Click the Solution tab and either select or clear the Shell Thicknessoption.

Where do I find it?


the specified solver and ADVNL 601,106, ADVNL 601,129, or ADVNL 701 as the solution type

SimulationNavigator

Either right-click a Simulation and select CreateSolution, or right-click the appropriate solution andselect Edit Solution

Support for gasket results output

What is it?

Use the options on the new Gasket Result tab in the Structural OutputRequests dialog box to request the output of gasket results for SOL 601(ADVNL 601,106 and ADVNL 601,129) analyses. Gasket results includegasket pressure, gasket closure, plastic gasket closure, gasket yield stress,and gasket status. When you create a Gasket Results type of output request,the software creates an GKRESULTS Case Control entry in the Case Controlsection of your Nastran input file.

A new customer default lets you control whether the Enable GKRESULTSRequest option on the Gasket Results tab is selected by default. To set thisdefault:


2. In the Customer Defaults dialog box, choose Simulation®Nastran.

3. Click the Solution tab and either select or clear the Gasket Results option.

Where do I find it?


the specified solver and ADVNL 601,106 and ADVNL601,129 as the solution type

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation®Modeling Objects



Digital Simulation

Import and export enhancements

Nastran import and export support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes enhancements to the import and export support forNastran Bulk Data entries and Case Control commands.

Newly supported bulk data entries and case control commands

Name NXNastranImport/ExportSupport

MSCNastranImport/ExportSupport

Notes

CDAMP3 andCDAMP4

Yes(importsupportonly)


See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

CELAS3 andCELAS4




CMASS3 andCMASS4




CPYRAM Yes No See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

GKRESULTS(Case Controlcommand)

Yes No See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

MATG Yes Yes See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

MATHE Yes No See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

MATS1 Yes Yes See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

MEFFMASS(Case Controlcommand)

Yes YesMEFFMASS is now supported forimport into Advanced Simulation.

NLSTRESS(Case Controlcommand)

Yes Yes See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

SHELLTHK(Case Controlcommand)

Yes No See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.


Digital Simulation

SUPORT Yes No See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

USET Yes Yes See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

USET1 Yes Yes See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

Enhancements for previously supported bulk data entries and case controlcommands

Name NX NastranImport/ExportSupport


NewlySupportedFields

and OtherEnhancements

Notes

BCRESULTS(CaseControlcommand)

Yes No SET, SEPDIS

BGPARM Yes No GLUETYPE,PENGLUE

See **Unsatisfiedxref title** formore information.

BLSEG Yes Yes

For export, thesoftware nowsupports the useof both increasingand decreasingTHRU options.

CBAR Yes Yes PA, PB

Pin flags arenow supportedas ElementAssociated Data.See **Unsatisfiedxref title** formore information.

MAT1 Yes Yes GE

• The MCSIDfield is not yetsupported.

• See**Unsatisfiedxref title**for moreinformation.


Digital Simulation

MAT2 Yes Yes GE • The MCSIDfield is not yetsupported.

• See**Unsatisfiedxref title**for moreinformation.

MAT3 Yes Yes GESee **Unsatisfiedxref title** formore information.



PBUSH Yes Yes GE2–GE6

This release addssupport for theGE2-E6 fieldsfor NX Nastran.These fieldswere previouslysupported forMSC Nastran.See **Unsatisfiedxref title** formore information.

PLOADX1 Yes Yes

For export,the softwarenow supportstime-dependentpressure loads.

TABLES1 Yes Yes

You can nowdefine TABLES1data in thecontext of MATS1material data.Previously, youcould only defineTABLES1 datain the context ofa MATHP typematerial.


Digital Simulation

See **Unsatisfiedxref title** formore information.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationMenu File®Import®Simulation

Nastran parameter support updates

What is it?

Support has been added for a number of new NX Nastran and MSC Nastranparameters, and the default values of several existing parameters have beenchanged. When you create a Solution Parameters type of Modeling Object,these newly supported parameters now appear in the Solution Parametersdialog box.

For more information on MSC Nastran parameters, see the MSC NastranQuick Reference Guide.

Newly supported parameters

Name NXNastranImport/ExportSupport


Notes

ALPHA1FL N/A YesALPHA2FL N/A YesARBMASP N/A YesARBMFEM N/A YesARBMPS N/A YesARBMSS N/A YesARBMSTYP N/A YesAUTOGOUT N/A Yes

BSHDAMP Yes N/A See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

CFDIAGP N/A YesCFRANDEL N/A YesCORITAN N/A YesCQC N/A YesDIROUT N/A YesDREPONLY Yes N/ADV3PASS N/A YesENFMETH N/A Yes


Digital Simulation

ESLFSAV N/A YesFASTFR N/A YesFULLSEDR N/A YesHTOCITS N/A YesHTOCPRT N/A YesHTOCTOL N/A YesMDOPT14 N/A YesMDOTM N/A YesMDOTMFAC N/A YesMDOF Yes N/AMGRID Yes N/AMHRED N/A YesNEWMARK N/A YesOSETELE N/A YesOSETGRD N/A YesPATPLUS N/A YesPERCENT N/A YesRADMOD N/A YesRANCPLX Yes N/AROTSYNC Yes N/ARSTTEMP N/A Yes

SHLDAMP YesYes(introducedin NX 5)


SPARSEPH N/A YesSQSETID N/A Yes

SRCOMPS YesYes(introducedin NX 5)

SRCOMPS controls the computationand printout of ply strength ratios.

TCHECK N/A YesTDMIN N/A YesTFSTMFAC N/A Yes

TORSIN Yes N/A See **Unsatisfied xref title** for moreinformation.

WRH N/A YesZROVEC N/A Yes

NX Nastran Parameters with updated default values

Parameter New Default Value Previous DefaultValue

BOLTFACT 1.0E7 1.0E6K6ROT 100.0 0.0 and 100SUBID 1 0


Digital Simulation

MSC Nastran Parameters with updated default values

Parameter New Default Value Previous DefaultValue

DESPCH1 0 6ERROR -1 0

Where do I find it?


MSC Nastran specified as the solverToolbar


Nastran system cell support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes enhanced support for Nastran system cells. System cellsare Executive System operational parameters specified by the NASTRANstatement. These enhancements include:

• Import support for NX Nastran and MSC Nastran system cells. Whenyou import a Nastran input file, Advanced Simulation now imports anysystem cell settings defined in that file. In previous releases, AdvancedSimulation did not import any system cells specified in your Nastraninput file.

• Support for new NX Nastran and MSC Nastran system cells, as well asupdates to currently supported system cells. When you create a SystemCells type of Modeling Object, these newly supported system cells nowappear in the System Cells dialog box.

NX Nastran system cell support updates

System Cell Name Notes

206 DCMPSEQ Default value = 4210 None252 None357 RSEQCONT

370 QRMETH Acceptable values: 3 or5

404 None413 OP2FMT415 OP4FMT


Digital Simulation

416 INP4FMT

424 SPCHOL Acceptable values: 4 or5

444 TEMPWARN461 None462 None463 None464 None

For more information about these system cells, see the NX Nastran QuickReference Guide.

MSC Nastran system cell support updates

System Cell Name Notes

205 None219 None220 None221 None274 DBCFACT311 TBCMAG408 DEF_DENS410 DEF_TECO411 DEF_TEIJ412 DEF_DAMP428 None

431 NONLRGAP

The name of the systemcell is NONLRGAPand not NLRGAP, asdocumented by MSC.

445 MNLQ4C

Where do I find it?


MSC Nastran specified as the solverToolbar



Digital Simulation

Extended mesh validity checking available during import

What is it?

A new Enable extended data checking option has been added to theAdvanced Options group in the Import Simulation dialog box. When youimport a Nastran .dat or .op2 file, select Enable extended data checking tohave the software check for the existence of each node on a given element inyour input file. If any of an element’s nodes are missing from the input file,the software:

• Does not import the element.

• Issues an error message when it first encounters an element with missingnodes.

• Clearly lists that the element failed to import in the Analysis of Importreport as shown below.

In previous releases, if you imported a Nastran input file in which even asingle node was missing, the import operation appeared to proceed normally,though the software did not import the mesh. The software did not issue anyerror messages in the import summary, and it created a mesh node in theSimulation Navigator. The only indication of a problem was the absence of adisplayed model in the graphics window.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Enhanced import support for connection elements

What is it?

You can now import the following additional types of Nastran CDAMP,CELEAS, and CMASS connection elements from Nastran .dat and .op2 filesinto Advanced Simulation:

• CDAMP3 and CDAMP4

• CELAS3 and CELAS4

• CMASS3 and CMASS4

Currently, these types of elements are not directly supported in AdvancedSimulation. During the import process, the software converts these elementsto the most closely related, supported element types, as shown in thefollowing table:

Nastran Element Type Type Converted to During ImportCDAMP3 CDAMP1CDAMP4 CDAMP2CELAS3 CELAS1CELAS4 CELAS2CMASS3 CMASS1CMASS4 CMASS2

For more information on these types of elements, see the NX Nastran QuickReference Guide and the NX Nastran Element Library Reference Manual.

Where do I find it?


Import changes for SPOINT entries

What is it?

Nastran uses the SPOINT bulk data entry to define scalar points. Scalarpoints have a single degree-of-freedom. In Nastran:

• You can explicitly define a scalar point by creating an SPOINT entry inthe bulk data section of your input file.

• You can implicitly define a scalar point by referencing the ID of a scalarpoint on a CDAMP1/2/3/4, CMASS1/2/3/4, or CELAS1/2/3/4 element entry.If you specify a scalar point on one of these entries, you do not need toinclude an SPOINT entry in the bulk data section of your input file.


Digital Simulation

Advanced Simulation now allows you to import implicitly defined SPOINTbulk data entries. If your .dat file contains CDAMP1/2/3/4, CMASS1/2/3/4,or CELAS1/2/3/4 elements that reference an SPOINT, the software importsthat SPOINT as a node, places its location at the origin, and fixes DOF 23456.The software gives the new node the same ID as the original SPOINT, andit modifies any element definitions that originally referenced the SPOINTto reference the new node instead. If you later export this model back toNastran, the software writes this node out using a Nastran GRID bulk dataentry that is fixed in DOF 23456.

For more information on SPOINTs, see the SPOINT in the NX NastranQuick Reference Guide and Understanding Scalar Points in the NX NastranUser’s Guide.

Where do I find it?


Import support for HAT1 beam cross sections

What is it?

For the PBARL and PBEAML beam cross section property bulk data entries,you can now import the Nastran HAT1 beam cross section type (TYPE field=HAT1). This allows you to import bar and beam elements that have a HAT1type cross section defined in your input file. In previous release, only ROD,TUBE, I1, CHAN, BOX, and BAR type sections were supported.

Note

Because the Section dialog box in Advanced Simulation does notsupport HAT1 as a standard beam cross section shape, AdvancedSimulation imports HAT1 cross sections as user-defined thin walledsections.

When you solve your model, the software computes the following propertiesfor HAT1 cross sections:

• Area

• Iz, Iy, Iyz

• K

• Yelem and Zelem

• The X and Y components of stress recovery points C, D, E, and F


Digital Simulation

Definition of HAT1 beam cross section geometry and stress recoverypoints

For more information, see PBARL and PBEAML in the NX Nastran QuickReference Guide.

Where do I find it?


Additional import support for Response Simulation

What is it?

You can now import the following loads and boundary conditions used in SOL103-Response Simulation analyses:

• Fictitious Support (SUPORT)

• Enforced Motion Location (USET,U2 and USET1,U2)

• Nodal Force Location (USET,U3 and USET1,U3)

For more information, see SUPORT, USET, and USET1 in the NX NastranQuick Reference Guide.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Abaqus environment

Abaqus keyword support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes improved import and export support for the followingAbaqus keywords:

Command SupportedParameters

ImportSupport

ExportSupport

For MoreInformation

*CLEARANCE Yes Yes See**Unsatisfiedxref title**for moreinformation.

*GAPCONDUCTANCE

Yes Yes See**Unsatisfiedxref title**for moreinformation.

*GASKETBEHAVIOR

NAME Yes Yes See**Unsatisfiedxref title**

*GASKETELASTICITY

COMPONENT,VARIABLE

Yes Yes See**Unsatisfiedxref title**

*GASKETSECTION

ELSET,BEHAVIOR,MATERIAL,ORIENTATION,STABILIZATIONSTIFFNESS


*GASKETTHICKNESSBEHAVIOR

DIRECTION,TENSILESTIFFNESSFACTOR,TYPE,VARIABLE,SLOPEDROP, YIELDONSET



Digital Simulation

*HYPERELASTICARRUDA-BOYCE,MARLOW,MOONEY-RIVLIN,NEO HOOKE,OGDEN,POLYNOMIAL,REDUCEDPOLYNOMIAL,TEST DATA,VAN DERWAALS,YEOH

No Yes See**Unsatisfiedxref title**

*HYPERFOAM TEST DATA No Yes See**Unsatisfiedxref title**

*INCLUDE INPUT Yes No See**Unsatisfiedxref title**

*OUTPUT/*NODEOUTPUT/*ELEMENTOUTPUT

Yes Yes See**Unsatisfiedxref title**for moreinformation.

Enhancements for previously supported keywords

Name Newly SupportedParameters

Notes

*ORIENTATION NAME, SYSTEM

The *ORIENTATIONkeyword is now supportedfor import. Previously,*ORIENTATION was onlysupported for export.

See **Unsatisfied xreftitle** for more information.

*PRE-TENSIONSECTION

SURFACE See **Unsatisfied xreftitle** for more information.

Support for new element types

This release also includes support for several new types of Abaqus elements.See **Unsatisfied xref title** for more information.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationMenu File®Import®Simulation or File®Export®Simulation


Digital Simulation


What is it?

This release includes support for an expanded range of Abaqus hyperelasticmaterial models, including several models in which you can use test data todefine certain material properties. This release also includes support for anew Gasket Behavior material.

• Hyperelastic materials let you model materials that are nearlyincompressible but which undergo large strains.

• The Abaqus Gasket Behavior material lets you model gasket behaviorproperties, such as elastic properties for the membrane and transverseshear behaviors of a gasket, for gasket analyses.

New materials

Material Corresponding KeywordArruda-Boyce *HYPERELASTIC keyword with both the

ARRUDA-BOCYE parameter (constantsoption)

Arruda-Boyce Test Data *HYPERELASTIC keyword with theARRUDA-BOCYE and TEST DATA INPUTparameters

Foam *HYPERFOAM keyword (constants option)Foam Test Data *HYPERFOAM keyword with the TEST

DATA INPUT parameterGasket Behavior *GASKET BEHAVIOR keywordMarlow *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the

MARLOW parameterMooney-Rivlin *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the

MOONEY-RIVLIN parameter (constantsoption)

Neo Hooke *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the NEOHOOKE parameter (constants option)

Neo Hooke Test Data *HYPERELASTIC keyword with both theNEO HOOKE and TEST DATA INPUTparameters

Ogden *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the OGDENparameter (constants option)

Ogden Test Data *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the OGDENand TEST DATA INPUT parameters

Polynomial *HYPERELASTIC keyword with thePOLYNOMIAL parameter (constants option)

Reduced Polynomial *HYPERELASTIC keyword with theREDUCED POLYNOMIAL parameter(constants option)


Digital Simulation

Van Der Waals *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the VANDER WAALS parameter

Yeoh *HYPERELASTIC keyword with the YEOHparameter (constants option)

Yeoh Test Data *HYPERELASTIC keyword with both theYEOH and TEST DATA INPUT parameters

Defining material constants using test data

With the test data material types, you can use a field to specify thedeformation modes that define the material constants with test (experimental)data.

• Use the UNIAXIAL Tension/Compression option to specify uniaxial testdata. This option corresponds to the Abaqus *UNIAXIAL TEST DATAkeyword. With UNIAXIAL Tension/Compression, you define a table fieldin which you list the material’s nominal stress (TU) and nominal strainvalues (εU) on each line.

• Use the BIAXIAL Tension option to specify biaxial test data. This optioncorresponds to the Abaqus *BIAXIAL TEST DATA keyword. WithBIAXIAL Tension, you define a table field in which you list the material’snominal stress (TB) and nominal strain values (εB) on each line.

• Use the PLANAR - Pure Shear option to specify planar (or pure shear)data. This option corresponds to the Abaqus *PLANAR TEST DATAkeyword. With PLANAR - Pure Shear, you define a table field in whichyou list the material’s nominal stress (TS) and nominal strain in thedirection of loading (εS) on each line.

• Use the Pure Volumetric Compression option to specify volumetricloading test data to include user-defined material compressibility.With Pure Volumetric Compression, you define a table field in whichyou list the material’s pressure (p) and the volume ratio, J (currentvolume/original volume) on each line.

Depending upon the material’s type, you can use one or more of these optionsto define the experimental stress-strain data.

• With the Arruda-Boyce Test Data,Marlow, and Foam Test Datamaterials,you can only use one of the test data options to define the experimentaltest data. If you use more than one, when you export or solve your model,the software only writes out the first applicable test data curve. Theorder in which the software searches for the appropriate test data optiondepends on the material type, as follows:

– Arruda-Boyce Test Data: BIAXIAL Tension then UNIAXIALTension/Compression


Digital Simulation

– Marlow: BIAXIAL Tension, then PLANAR - Pure Shear, thenUNIAXIAL Tension/Compression

– Foam Test Data: PLANAR - Pure Shear, then UNIAXIALTension/Compression, then Pure Volumetric Compression

• With the Mooney-Rivlin Test Data, Neo Hooke Test Data, Ogden TestData, Reduced Polynomial, Van Der Waals, and Yeoh Test Data materialtypes, you can use up to four of the options to define the experimentaltest data. If you use more than one, when you export or solve yourmodel, the software writes out the test data option in the followingorder: BIAXIAL Tension, then PLANAR - Pure Shear, then UNIAXIALTension/Compression, then Pure Volumetric Compression.

For more information, see:

• *HYPERELASTIC, *UNIAXIAL TEST DATA, *BIAXIAL TEST DATA,*PLANAR TEST DATA, and *VOLUMETRIC TEST DATA in the AbaqusAnalysis Keywords Manual.

• Hyperelastic behavior of rubberlike materials in the Abaqus AnalysisUser’s Manual.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM, idealized part, or part with Abaqus as



Including data from an external file in Abaqus input files

What is it?

Advanced Simulation now supports the *INCLUDE keyword when you importan Abaqus input file. The *INCLUDE keyword lets you specify the name ofan external file that contains a portion of your input file. The external filecan include model definition data, comment lines, or even references to otherexternal files. See the Abaqus Analysis User’s Manual and Abaqus KeywordsReference Manual for more information.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Solver parameter to export group data

What is it?

A newWrite out group data option has been added to the Solver Parametersdialog box. When you export or solve your model, this option controls whetherthe software exports any groups in your model using the Abaqus *NSET and*ELSET commands.

• If you select this option, the software writes out the group data in yourmodel to the Abaqus input file using the *NSET and *ELSET commands.

• If you clear this option, the software does not write out the group data inyour model to the Abaqus input file.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with Abaqus as the specified solverSimulationNavigator


Bolt pre-loads now supported for solid elements

What is it?

In the Abaqus solver environment, you can now define a pre-load on a boltmodeled with solid (continuum) elements. In previous releases, you couldonly define a bolt pre-load on a bolt modeled with beam (B31) elements.

In the Bolt Pre-Load dialog box, use the new Force on 3D Elements optionin the Type list to define a pre-load on solid elements. With this option, youselect either elements or faces that define a pre-tension section.

In Abaqus, a pre-tension section is defined as a surface inside the bolt thatbisects the bolt. The software transmits the specified pre-load force acrossthe pre-tension section by means of a pre-tension node that you specify. Thispre-tension node must not be attached to any element in your model.

Note

If you do not specify a pre-tension node, the software creates apre-tension node for you when you export or solve your model.

The software applies the load along a vector that is normal to the pre-tensionsection. The new Section Normal option lets you control how the softwarecomputes this normal.

• If you select Average Surface Normal, the software computes an averagenormal to the section that faces away from the underlying continuumelements.


Digital Simulation

• If you select User Defined, you can define the vector to specify the normal.This option is useful when the direction in which you want to apply theload is different from the average normal to the pre-tension section.

The following graphic shows an example of a bolt created with solid elements.(A) shows the pre-tension section, (B) shows the pre-tension node, and (C)shows the normal to the pre-tension section.

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®Bolt Pre-Load

Initial clearance values for contact and bolt contact analyses

What is it?

You can use the new Contact with Clearance and Bolt Contact with Clearancesimulation objects to define precise initial clearance or overclosure (initialpenetration) values for the nodes on the slave (dependent) surface in a contactpair. With both Contact with Clearance and Bolt Contact with Clearance,the initial clearance or overclosure value you specify overwrites the initialclearance or overclosure value that the software calculates at each slave node.

• Use Contact with Clearance to define initial clearances or overclosureswhen you model contact between two surfaces.

• Use Bolt Contact with Clearance to define initial clearances oroverclosures when you model contact between a single-threaded bolt anda bolt hole.


Digital Simulation

Contact with clearance for threaded bolts

The Bolt Contact with Clearance dialog box includes additional ClearanceDefinition options that let you model the thread characteristics of a bolt evenif detailed thread geometry is not included in the model. These options letyou specify details about the bolt threads, including the half thread angle(a), pitch (p, or the thread-to-thread distance), and major (d) and mean (md)bolt diameters. You also use the Bolt Axis options to define two points (aand b) along the bolt’s axis. The software uses these points to generate thebolt’s contact normal directions.

Clearance or overclosure value can be uniform or spatially varying

In the Contact with Clearance and Bolt Contact with Clearance dialog boxes,you can use the Clearance Definition options to define the clearance oroverclosure value as either uniform or spatially varying for the contact pair.From the Value list:

• If you select Expression, you can specify a uniform clearance oroverclosure value for the contact pair. A positive value indicates aclearance value, and a negative value indicates an overclosure value.

• If you select Field, you can specify spatially varying clearances oroverclosures. With this option, you use a table field to specify theclearance at a single node or set of nodes on the slave surface. In the


Digital Simulation

table field, the node ID is the independent variable, while the clearanceor overclosure value is the dependent variable. You can also specify aScale Factor to apply to the field.

Contact with clearance is supported only in small-sliding contact analyses

You can only use the Contact with Clearance or Bolt Contact with Clearancecommands when you are using the small-sliding contact formulation in youranalysis. In Abaqus, you use the *CONTACT PAIR keyword to specifythe contact formulation. In Advanced Simulation, you use a Contact Pairmodeling object to specify the parameters for the *CONTACT PAIR keyword:

1. In the Contact Pair dialog box, select Small from the Sliding Type list touse the small-sliding formulation instead of the finite-sliding formulation.

2. In the Contact with Clearance or Bolt Contact with Clearance dialogbox, use the Contact Pair option to associate the Contact Pair modelingobject with the simulation object.

Associated Abaqus keywords

When you export or solve your model, the software uses the options youspecify in the Contact with Clearance dialog box to define the *CONTACTPAIR and *CLEARANCE keywords in your Abaqus input file. For moreinformation, see Adjusting Initial Surface Positions and Specifying InitialClearances in Abaqus/Standard Contact Pairs in the Abaqus Analysis User’sManual and *CLEARANCE and *CONTACT PAIR in the Abaqus KeywordsReference Manual.

Where do I find it?


Advanced Simulation®Contact with Clearance or

Bolt Contact with Clearance

New thermal conductance boundary condition

What is it?

When you are working with Abaqus as your solver, you can use the newSurface-to-Surface Thermal Conductance simulation object to modelconductive heat transfer between proximate or contacting surfaces.

In the Surface-to-Surface Thermal Conductance dialog box, you can use theConductance Dependency options to model the conductive heat transferas a function of:


Digital Simulation

• The clearance between the contacting surfaces (Clearance option).

• The contact pressure at the interface between the contacting surfaces(Pressure option).

• Both the clearance and the contact pressure (Clearance and Pressureoption).

In Advanced Simulation, you use fields to define how the heat transfer varieswith the clearance and/or contact pressure.

When you export or solve your model, the software uses the options youspecify in the Surface-to-Surface Thermal Conductance dialog box to definethe *GAP CONDUCTANCE keyword in your Abaqus input file. For moreinformation, see Thermal Contact Properties in the Abaqus Analysis User’sManual and *GAP CONDUCTANCE in the Abaqus Keywords ReferenceManual.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with Abaqus as the specified solver

and Thermal as the selected analysis typeToolbar Advanced Simulation®Surface-to-Surface Thermal

Conductance

Initial support for Abaqus output database files

What is it?

On Windows platforms, this release includes initial support for Abaqusoutput database files (*.odb) files. In this release, you can:

• Import results into Post-Procressing and create displays.

• Output results from selected analysis steps to an ODB file.

In previous releases, Advanced Simulation only supported the Abaqus resultsfile (*.fil).

Customer default setting necessary to activate ODB support

ODB file support in Advanced Simulation is controlled through a newABAQUS File Extension customer default. To activate ODB support:


2. In the Customer Defaults dialog box, choose Simulation®ABAQUS.


Digital Simulation

3. Click the Results File tab and select ODB as the ABAQUS File Extensiondefault.

The next time you start NX, Advanced Simulation links the Abaquslibraries that are necessary for working with ODB files.

With the ABAQUS File Extension default:• If you select FIL, you can only import and work with Abaqus results (*.fil)files.

• If you select ODB, you can import and work with both Abaqus results(.*fil) files and ODB files.

Customer default setting also controls default Abaqus result file type

When you select ODB as the ABAQUS File Extension default, the softwarealso sets your default output file type for all Abaqus analyses to ODB. Withthe ODB default selected:• On the Output tab in the Create Solution Step dialog box, the Written to

ODB option is selected by default.

• In both the Results node in the Simulation Navigator and in thePost-Processing Navigator, the software looks for files in your currentdirectory that have the .odb extension. If your directory only contains aFIL file and not an ODB file, the software does not display any results.

Note

To display results from a FIL file when ODB is selected as theABAQUS File Extension default, use the File®Import®Simulationcommand.

Supported ODB version

Advanced Simulation currently supports Abaqus 6.8-EF2 version outputdatabase (ODB) files on Windows platforms. You can import files in ODB6.8-EF2 format and earlier. Advanced Simulation exports any results to anODB file in the 6.8-EF2 format. If you try to import an ODB file from anearlier version of Abaqus, such as Abaqus 6.7-5 or 6.8-2, NX prompts you toconvert the file to the 6.8-EF2 version.

Ability to animate across load cases

What is it?

For solutions that include multiple load cases, you can now animate theresults across the load cases. The Animation dialog box includes two options:Result and Iterations. The Iterations option lets you specify a Start LoadCase, Start Iteration (if the starting load case contains iterations), and End


Digital Simulation

Load Case, as well as a Step increment to determine the number of framesin the animation.

For example, suppose you have three load cases (1, 2, and 3 in the picturebelow) and you want the animation to start at the first load case and endafter the last load case.

In this example, you would choose Load Case 1 as the Start Load Case andLoad Case 3 as the End Load Case. The following animated picture showsthe result. The first and last load cases each have one static step and thesecond load case has 10 iterations. The Step option is set to 1, which meansthe animation includes a frame for each step and iteration between the startand end load case. Therefore, the animation contains 12 frames. Note theload case and iteration number indicated by the arrow in the picture.


Digital Simulation

Note

In this example, all iterations in Load Case 2 were includedautomatically because it was not the starting or ending load case. Youcan specify a Start Iteration only if the load case that contains iterationsis specified as either the Start Load Case or the End Load Case.

Where do I find it?


Post-Processing®Animation

New option to control the import of ELSETs

What is it?

A new option in the Import Simulation dialog box lets you control whetherthe software imports any implicitly defined Abaqus ELSETs in your inputfile as Advanced Simulation groups. In Abaqus, you can implictly definean ELSET by specifying that all elements of a specific type comprise thatset. For example, the following syntax creates an ELSET named set1 thatcontains all the C3D4 type elements in the model:

*ELEMENT, TYPE=C3D4, ELSET=set1,1,2


Digital Simulation

In contrast, you create an explicitly defined ELSET by directly listing theelements that form that set. For example, the following syntax creates anELSET named set2 that contains elements 6, 7, 8, 17, and 26:

*ELSET, NAME=set26,7,8,17,26

If your input file contains implicitly defined ELSETs, you can use the newImport implict ELSET as group option in the Advanced Options group tocontrol how the software imports those sets.

• If you select Import implicit ELSET as group, the software imports anyimplicitly defined ELSETS in your input file. It uses those ELSETS tocreate groups.

• If you clear the Import implicit ELSET as group check box, the softwaredoes not import any implicitly defined ELSETS as groups.

Clearing the Import implicit ELSET as group check box can improve theimport performance of your input file.

Where do I find it?


ANSYS environment

ANSYS command support enhancements

What is it?

This release includes improved import and export support for ANSYScommands.

Command SupportedOptions orArguments

Unsupportedor PartiallySupportedOptions

Location inAdvancedSimulationUser

Interface

For MoreInformation


Digital Simulation

TB, GASKET MAT, NPTS,TBOPT

• NTEMPis notsupportedforloading orunloadingcurves

• EOSOPTiscurrentlyunsupported

Materialsdialog box

See**Unsatisfiedxreftitle** and**Unsatisfiedxref title**

TB, HYPER MAT, NPTS,TBOPT*

• NTEMPandEOSOPTarecurrentlyunsupported

• Thefollowingparametersfor TBOPTaresupported:MOONEY,OGDEN,BLATZ,FOAM,BOYCE

Materialsdialog box

See**Unsatisfiedxref title**

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationMenu File®Import®Simulation or File®Export®Simulation


What is it?

This release includes support for a number of new ANSYS hyperelasticmaterial models. Hyperelastic materials let you model materials that arenearly incompressible but which undergo large strains.




Digital Simulation

Arruda-Boyce TB command with the HYPER,,,,BOYCEoption

Foam TB command with the HYPER,,,,FOAM orHYPER,,,,BLATZ options

Gent TB command with the HYPER,,,,GENT optionMooney-Rivlin TB command with the HYPER,,,,MOONEY

optionNeo Hooke TB command with the HYPER,,,,NEO optionOgden TB command with the HYPER,,,,OGDEN

optionPolynomial TB command with the HYPER,,,,POLY optionYeoh TB command with the HYPER,,,,YEOH option

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM, idealized part, or part with ANSYS as



Solver parameter to group face pressure loads

What is it?

A new Create ANSYS components (CM) for similar loads option has beenadded to the Solver Parameters dialog box. When you export or solve yourmodel, this option controls whether the software uses the ANSYS CMcommand to group all elements that have the same face Pressure load into acomponent.

• If you select this option, the software uses the CM command to group allthe elements with the same face Pressure load and only writes out asingle face pressure (SFE) command in your ANSYS input file.

• If you clear this option, the software writes out individual single facepressure (SFE) commands for each element in your ANSYS input file.

You may want to select the Create ANSYS components (CM) for similarloads option if you plan to work with your ANSYS input file outside ofAdvanced Simulation. For example, if you select this option, you can laterselect the surface pressures by their component name in the ANSYS pre- andpost-processing software. Additionally, the Create ANSYS components (CM)for similar loads option creates fewer SFE commands, so you may want toselect the option to make manually editing your input file easier.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with ANSYS as the specified solverSimulationNavigator


New options to control the deletion of loads at the end of a step

What is it?

A new Delete load options tab has been added to the Create Solution Stepand Edit Solution Step dialog boxes. The options on this tab control whetherforces and moments, body loads, and element body loads are kept or deletedby ANSYS at the end of the current solution step. These options correspondto the ANSYS DDELE, FDELE, BFDELE, and BFEDELE commands.

Note

Currently, you can only use these options to delete the loads orconstraints on all nodes or elements to which they are applied.

Where do I find it?


solverSimulationNavigator

Either right-click a solution and select Create Step, orright-click the appropriate solution step and select EditSolution Step

Cumulative loading options now preserved on import

What is it?

When you import an ANSYS input file into Advanced Simulation, thesoftware now preserves the settings of any cumulative option commands(DCUM, FCUM, SFCUM, and BFCUM). In ANSYS, you use these commandsto specify whether the software should add (ADD), replace (REPL), or ignore(IGNO) a repeated load or constraint on a particular degree-of-freedom.In previous releases, the software always imported any cumulative optioncommand with a setting of “replace” (REPL), regardless of what you actuallyspecified in the input file. Now, the software correctly preserves the specifiedcumulative option setting when you import the file.


Digital Simulation

Note

Advanced Simulation does not import any cumulative options as aSolution Step attribute. Instead, the software converts the load orboundary condition data into an equivalent load or boundary conditionwith the appropriate cumulative option setting.

For example, suppose you have the following constraints on node ID2:

• Step 1: UX = 1mm, UZ= 1.2mm

• Step 2: UX = 1.5mm, UY=1

In step 2 of the analysis, how the software resolves the constraint on nodeID2 depends on the setting of the DCUM command:

• If the DCUM option is set to REPL, the resolved constraint for node ID2is UX = 1.5, UY = 1 (UZ is removed)

• If the DCUM option is set to ADD, the resolved constraint for node ID2 isUX = 2.5, UY = 1, UZ = 1.2

Where do I find it?



Support for importing loads and constraints from binary files

What is it?

When you import an ANSYS binary file into Advanced Simulation,the software now imports any loads (forces/moments) and constraints(displacements and temperatures) defined in that file.

Where do I find it?




Digital Simulation

LS-DYNA environment

LS-DYNA keyword support

What is it?

Advanced Simulation now provides export support for the following LS-DYNAkeywords:

Keyword For More Information*CONTROL_SHELL See **Unsatisfied xref title***INTEGRATION_SHELL See **Unsatisfied xref title***MAT_COMPOSITE_DAMAGE See **Unsatisfied xref title***PART_COMPOSITE See **Unsatisfied xref title***SET_NODE_LIST See **Unsatisfied xref title***SET_NODE_BEAM See **Unsatisfied xref title***SET_DISCRETE See **Unsatisfied xref title***SET_SHELL_LIST See **Unsatisfied xref title***SET_SOLID See **Unsatisfied xref title***SET_TSHELL See **Unsatisfied xref title**

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file with LS-DYNA as the specified solverToolbar File®Export®Simulation

Support for laminates

What is it?

You can now use the NX Composite Laminates capabilities to createlaminates in an LS-DYNA model.

Laminate physical properties enhancements

For LS-DYNA models, two new laminate options have been added to the Typelist in the Physical Property Tables Manager dialog box:

• The PART (laminate shell) type for shell elements (*ELEMENT_SHELL).

• The PART (laminate thick shell) type for solid elements(*ELEMENT_TSHELL).

Select the appropriate option from the Type menu and then click Create toopen the Laminate Modeler dialog box.


Digital Simulation

In the Laminate Modeler dialog box, you can then use the newKeyword Option menu to select either the *PART_COMPOSITE or*INTEGRATION_SHELL keywords to define the laminate properties.• If you select *PART_COMPOSITE, you do not need to create a

SECTION_SHELL type of modeling object. When you export or solveyour model, the software writes the ply data (thicknesses, materialIDs, and angle) you define in the Laminate Modeler dialog box out asa *PART_COMPOSITE keyword.

• If you select *INTEGRATION_SHELL, you must create a SECTION_SHELLtype of modeling object. When you export or solve your model, the softwareconverts ply thicknesses that you define in the Laminate Modeler dialogbox to weighting factors and writes out an *INTEGRATION_SHELLkeyword. The number of plies is the number of integration points throughthe thickness. When you export or solve your model, the software writesthe ply orientation angle to the *SECTION_SHELL keyword. Formaterials:

– If you select the Use NX Composite Material option, the softwaredoes not write out any material information when you export or solveyour model. This is because LS-DYNA composite materials are notcurrently supported in Advanced Simulation.

– You can use the LSDYNA Composite Material ID box to specify the IDof an LS-DYNA composite material that exists outside of NX.

For more information, see the LS-DYNA Keyword User’s Manual.

Inheriting a laminate from a layup

Currently, when you inherit a laminate from a layup, only the*PART_COMPOSITE option is supported.

Inheriting material orientation from a layup

For shell (2D) elements, you can specify that they inherit their materialorientation from the layup. To do this:

• In the Mesh Associated Data dialog box, select Set Material Orientationfrom the Keyword Option list.

• From the Material Orientation Definition list, select MCID Inherited fromLayup.

• Click OK.

Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation

Prerequisite An active FEM file with LS-DYNA as the specified solver

Export support for groups

What is it?

If you create groups in your FEM file, you can now export those groups whenyou export your model to an LS-DYNA keyword file. To facilitate this, thesoftware now exports the following LS-DYNA keywords:

• *SET_NODE_LIST

• *SET_NODE_BEAM

• *SET_DISCRETE

• *SET_SHELL_LIST

• *SET_SOLID

• *SET_TSHELL

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file with LS-DYNA as the specified solverToolbar File®Export®Simulation

Thermal and Flow, Electronic Systems Cooling, and Space SystemsThermal


3D transitional elements

What is it?

When you have both a hexahedral mesh and a tetrahedral mesh, you canspecify the use of pyramid elements as transitional elements from one meshto the other as shown in the following figures.


Digital Simulation

Visible tetrahedral mesh Invisible tetrahedral mesh

The purple pyramid elements are the transitional elements between thehexahedral mesh in green and the tetrahedral mesh in blue.

To specify the use of pyramid elements, you must select the Transition withPyramid Elements option in the 3D Tetrahedral Mesh dialog box. This optionis available only when you have a hexahedral mesh present next to the solidbody which will be meshed with tetrahedral elements and a mesh matingcondition between the two bodies.


Use the pyramid elements for the transition between hexahedral andtetrahedral meshes to improve flow results for computational fluid dynamicssimulations.








Digital Simulation

Thermal Thermal


Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar ®3D Tetrahedral Mesh

Menu Insert ® Mesh ® 3D Tetrahedral MeshLocation in dialogbox

Mesh Parameters group ® Transition with PyramidElements

Material orientation vector and element thickness for individual elements

What is it?

You can use the Element Associated Data command to define a materialorientation vector and element thickness for individual elements with thefollowing physical properties:

• Thin Shell

• Multi-layer Uniform Shell with orthotropic material

This allows you to define material orientation and element thickness thatvary across different elements. In previous releases, you could only specify auniform set of properties across an entire mesh.

You can define material orientation property by specifying one of the following:

• The Coordinate System— The software uses the X-axis of the selectedcoordinate system as the material orientation vector. The X-axis vector isprojected onto the plane of the selected element to determine the materialorientation.

• The Vector Projection— The software projects the specified vector ontothe plane of the selected element to determine the material orientation(the vector becomes the X-axis).


Digital Simulation

You must set the corner node thickness to specify the thickness of theelement. This shell thickness overrides the thickness defined in the mesh.







Thermal Thermal


Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM file that contains elements for which

element associated data is supported.Toolbar

Element Operations ® Element Associated DataMenu Edit ®Element ®Modify Associated Data


Digital Simulation

Report thermal results on both sides of 2D Shell elements

What is it?

You can now specify on which side of 2D shell elements you want to calculatethermal results when using a Report simulation object of following types:

• Per Element

• Per Region

• Between Regions

• Heat Maps

You can ask for results on the following sides of 2D shell elements:

• Top and Bottom

• Top

• Bottom

For a Between Regions type of Report, you can separately set the side forelements in the primary and secondary regions.







Thermal Thermal


Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Right-click the simulation object container ® NewSimulation Object ® Report


Digital Simulation

Toolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar® Report

Group import

What is it?

When you import NX THERMAL / FLOW, NX SPACE SYSTEMS THERMAL,NX ELECTRONIC SYSTEM COOLING, or IDEAS UNV simulations, thesoftware now also imports any groups containing elements and nodes.







Thermal Thermal


Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

An active FEM or SIM with NX THERMAL / FLOW,NX SPACE SYSTEMS THERMAL, or NX ELECTRONICSYSTEM COOLING solver

Menu File ® Import ® Simulation

Thermal Coupling simulation objects name change

What is it?

Some simulation objects were renamed:

Old name New nameAdvanced Thermal Coupling Thermal Coupling — AdvancedConvection Coupling Thermal Coupling — ConvectionRadiation Thermal Coupling Thermal Coupling — Radiation


Digital Simulation



Coupled Thermal-Flow Electronic SystemsCooling (ThermalCoupling — Radiationonly)




Thermal Thermal (ThermalCoupling — Radiationonly)

Advanced Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow

Coupled Thermal-Flow Thermal-Flow (ThermalCoupling — Radiationonly)


Where do I find it?


Right-click the simulation object container and chooseNew Simulation Object

Toolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar® Simulation Object Type

Dialog box text changes

What is it?

The following minor text changes were made in this release:

Dialog box name Group name Old text New text

Flow BoundaryCondition

Flow Directionand Flow Return

Normal toTangentialVelocity Angle

Normal toResultant VelocityAngle

Particle Injection Parameters Mass per Seconds Mass per UnitTime

Thermo-OpticalProperties —Advanced

InfraredProperties,Solar Properties,and Non GrayProperties

Transparency Transmissivity


Digital Simulation







Thermal Thermal


Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Advanced Simulation toolbar® Simulation Object Type

Advanced Simulation toolbar® Modeling Objects

Orthotropic thermal conductivity in cylindrical or spherical coordinates

What is it?

You can now specify orthotropic materials with thermal conductivity definedin cylindrical or spherical coordinates. In the 2D and 3D Mesh Collectordialog boxes, when you specify an orthotropic material, you have the followingchoices for the Material Orientation Type:

• Cartesian to specify that the orthotropic conductivity is defined inCartesian coordinates.

• Cylindrical to specify that the orthotropic conductivity is defined incylindrical coordinates.

• Spherical to specify that the orthotropic conductivity is are defined inspherical coordinates.

The following table shows the correspondence between the ThermalConductivity X, Thermal Conductivity Y, and Thermal Conductivity Z values


Digital Simulation

you enter in the Materials dialog box and their values in all three coordinatesystems:

MaterialOrientation Type

ThermalConductivity X

ThermalConductivity Y

ThermalConductivity Z

Cartesian kx ky kzCylindrical kr kq kzSpherical kr kq kf

For 2D mesh collectors, when you select Cylindrical or Spherical as thematerial orientation type, you must also specify the Main Conduction Planeand Direction for the heat transfer. The software determines the threecomponents of the thermal conductivity as follows:

• The software projects on the shell element the main direction vector,and the conductivity in that direction is the main direction vector’sconductivity.

• The conductivity in the direction of the element normal is the mainconduction plane conductivity.

• The third component of the conductivity is the remaining conductivityand its direction is the remaining direction to complete the right-handside coordinate system.

For example, suppose you want to model temperature distribution on thefollowing cylindrical object with orthotropic thermal conductivity using thinshell elements. You drape the cylinder with a material that has the thermalconductivity of 0.1 W/m°C in the radial direction on the dark green surfacesand also in the angular direction on the cyan surface (Thermal ConductivityX), that has the thermal conductivity of 10 W/m°C in the axial direction(Thermal Conductivity Y) and 0.0001 W/m°C in the remaining direction(Thermal Conductivity Z).


Digital Simulation

You need to create two 2D Mesh Collectors with the Cylindrical option for theMaterial Orientation Type list and:

• For the mesh collector with cyan color, select the R plane, Theta directionoption for the Main Conduction Plane and Direction list.

• For the mesh collector with dark green color, select the Theta plane, Rdirection option for the Main Conduction Plane and Direction list.







Thermal Thermal


Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow




Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Mesh CollectorMenu Insert ® Mesh CollectorLocation in dialogbox Material group

UNV import of axisymmetric thermal models

What is it?

You can now import UNV models that contain axisymmetric elements into athermal model.

Previously UNV models containing axisymmetric elements were alwaysimported into an axisymmetric thermal model.

When importing UNV models, if axisymmetric elements are detected, thefollowing message appears in the Model Information text box of the ImportOptions dialog box:Axisymmetric elements were detected

The Set Simulation Analysis Type To list has the following options:• Coupled Thermal-Flow (appears for Thermal and Flow or ElectronicSystems Cooling)

• Thermal (appears for Space Systems Thermal)

• Axisymmetric Thermal

If you select Coupled Thermal-Flow or Thermal, the software importsaxisymmetric elements as normal elements and creates:

• A generic entity named Converted_Axi_Shells to reference axisymmetricshell elements.

• A generic entity named Converted_Axi_Solids to reference axisymmetricsolid elements.






Digital Simulation



NX Thermal and FlowCoupled Thermal-Flow Thermal-Flow


Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar®Modeling Objects®Advanced Parameters ® Create

MenuInsert ® Modeling Objects ® Advanced Parameters® Create

Thermal capabilities

Articulation modeling enhancement

What is it?

You now have more flexibility when defining time step options for thearticulation movement. You can select one of the following four options in theTime Step Option list of the Articulation Parameters group on the TransientSetup page of the Create Solution or Edit Solution dialog box:

• At Constant Time Intervals— you control the starting and ending timesfor the articulation as well as the calculation interval.

• Total Number — you control the starting and ending times for thearticulation as well as the number of time steps.

• At Specified Times— you specify the articulation movement times in alist of the Articulation Times dialog box by clicking .

• Interval versus Time Table— you specify a table containing the desiredcalculation intervals at specified times. For example:

Time Interval0.0 1.010.0 2.020.0 3.4

The thermal calculation for the articulation movement is performed atfollowing times:

0.0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0 9.0 10.0 12.0 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0


Digital Simulation

The last row of the table indicates the articulation end time; thecalculation interval is a dummy number.

In previous releases, the only available time step control option was AtConstant Time Intervals.







Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click the solution node and choose Solve


Hemicube method enhancements

What is it?

Two enhancements have been made to the algorithm for the view factorcalculation using the Hemicube method. The algorithm now includes

• A more robust algorithm that determines the near and far cutting planesfor perspective projections in rendering-based view factor calculations.

• A filtering algorithm that addresses situations where numerical noisecould create spurious view factors, which, even though very small, couldcause enclosure leakages.




Thermal Thermal

Advanced Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow




Digital Simulation

Element subdivision in Hemicube view factor calculation

What is it?

When you use the Hemicube method to calculate view factors, you can nowunconditionally enforce the use of elemental subdivisions.

By default, the element subdivision is performed when one of the view factorsseen through:

• The top viewing plane is greater than 0.03.

• The side viewing plane is greater than 0.3.

To ensure that the software always performs the element subdivision, youcan set the new ENFORCE MESH IN HEMIVIEW advanced parameter.

Note

You set the Element Subdivision parameter in one or more of theseplaces:

• The Radiation Parameters page of the Solver Parameters dialog box

• The Radiation simulation object

• The Radiative Element Subdivision simulation object


Use the new parameter if there are any significant deviations of view factorsums from unity. This option ensures higher accuracy of view factor results atthe expense of increased computation time.




Thermal Thermal

Advanced Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Modeling Objects ®Advanced Parameters ® Create


Digital Simulation


Enhancements to Thermal Coupling — Convection simulation object

What is it?

In this version, there are two new enhancements to the Thermal Coupling —Convection simulation object:

• The Coupling Resolution option to control the accuracy of the coupling isnow available for all three types:

– Forced Convection Coupling

– Free Convection Coupling

– Across Gap Convection Coupling

Two different approaches are available: One to One resolution and aseries of five resolution settings ranging from Coarse to Finest. TheCoupling Resolution option gives you greater control for the convectivethermal coupling calculation.

• For the Free Convection Coupling type, the Secondary Region isrenamed Fluid Ducts. The convecting fluid is the fluid in the 1D ductnetwork.







NX Thermal and Flow


Where do I find it?


Right-click the simulation object container ® NewSimulation Object ® Thermal Coupling — Convection

Toolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar ® Thermal Coupling —

Convection


Digital Simulation

Enhancement to Radiative Element Subdivision simulation object

What is it?

When selecting elements to which to apply the local Radiative ElementSubdivision settings, the Element Selection Filtering is enhanced. You cannow select from the Filter Type list:

• 1D Elements (previously available) — lets you select only 1D elements.

• 2D Elements (previously available) — lets you select only 2D elements.

• Element Edges (new) — lets you select 1D elements and the edges of2D elements.

• Element Faces (new) — lets you select 2D elements and the faces of 3Delements.

You must first set Type Filter on the Selection bar to Element.


Use these new options to easily select elements to which you want to applylocal element subdivision for radiation calculations.







Where do I find it?


Right-click the simulation object container ® NewSimulation Object ® Radiative Element Subdivision

Toolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar ® Radiative Element

Subdivision


Digital Simulation

Coupling Resolution option

What is it?

You can control the accuracy of the coupling using the Coupling Resolutionoption.

The Coupling Resolution option is added to the following simulation objects:

• Electrical Coupling type of Joule Heating

• Surface to Surface Contact

• Thermal Coupling — Advanced

Two different approaches are available: One to One resolution, and a seriesof five resolution settings ranging from Coarse to Finest.

• With One to One resolution, the solver calculates a single conductancefrom each primary element to the nearest secondary element. Someinaccuracy may be introduced in the exact location of the conductanceon the larger surface, but the general trend of in-plane conductance ismaintained. This is adequate for most applications.

With One to One resolution, you can improve the coupling’s accuracy by:

– Using a finer mesh on the secondary surface than on the primarysurface.

– Matching the meshes on the two surfaces so that there is a one to onecorrespondence between nodes, and so that each primary elementshadows only one secondary element. The nodes do not have to matchperfectly.

• With the settings Coarse through Finest, each primary element isdivided into a progressively larger number of sub-elements. For eachsub-element, an area proportional conductance is created to the nearest ofthe secondary elements. Once conductances from each of the sub-elementsare calculated, they are merged and parallel conductances are combined.The result is area-proportional couplings which are distributed among thesecondary elements based on element overlap.




Digital Simulation


Coupled Thermal-Flow Electronic SystemsCooling (Joule Heatingand Surface to SurfaceContact only)


Thermal Thermal (Surface toSurface Contact only)

Advanced Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow

Coupled Thermal-Flow Thermal-Flow (Surfaceto Surface Contact only)

Advanced Thermal-FlowNX Space SystemsThermal


Where do I find it?


Right-click the simulation object container ® NewSimulation Object® Joule Heating, Surface to SurfaceContact, or Thermal Coupling — Advanced

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar ® Joule Heating ,

Surface to Surface Contact , or Thermal Coupling

— AdvancedLocation in dialogbox Additional Parameters group

Only Connect Overlapping Elements option

What is it?

You can establish couplings only along a path that is normal to each primarysub-element using the Only Connect Overlapping Elements option.

The Only Connect Overlapping Elements option is added to the followingsimulation objects:

• Electrical Coupling type of Joule Heating

• Surface to Surface Contact


Digital Simulation


The Only Connect Overlapping Elements option can be useful when someprimary elements have no overlapping secondary elements.

• When this option is not selected, the software establishes a conductancefrom each primary sub-element to the nearest secondary element asshown in (A) below.

• When you select this option, the software only establishes couplings alonga path that is normal to each primary sub-element. No conductance iscreated for primary sub-elements that have no overlapping secondaryelement, as shown in (B) below.

Primary elements are shown in blue.

Only ConnectOverlapping Elementscleared.

Only ConnectOverlapping Elementsselected.

Note

Secondary elements with no overlapping primary elements are neverconnected.



Coupled Thermal-Flow Electronic SystemsCooling, AdvancedThermal/Flow withESC

Thermal Thermal (Surface toSurface Contact only)

Advanced Thermal

NX Thermal and Flow

Coupled Thermal-Flow Thermal-Flow (Surfaceto Surface Contact only)

Advanced Thermal-FlowNX Space SystemsThermal



Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?


Right-click the simulation object container ® NewSimulation Object ® Joule Heating or Surface toSurface Contact

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar ® Joule Heating or

Surface to Surface ContactLocation in dialogbox Additional Parameters group

Duct modeling capabilities

Duct Opening enhancement

What is it?

When you specify external conditions for a Duct Opening type of the DuctFlow Boundary Conditions simulation object, you can now specify onlythe pressure of the fluid or you can also specify the temperature of thefluid. In previous versions, you needed to specify both the pressure and thetemperature at the same time.

A Temperature check box now appears when you select Specify from theExternal Conditions list.

• By selecting the Temperature check box, you specify the TemperatureValue at the duct opening.

• By clearing the Temperature check box, the temperature of the fluid atthe duct opening is the Fluid Temperature value defined in the AmbientConditions page of the Create Solution or the Edit Solution dialog box.

In both cases, you must specify the Total Pressure — Gauge value for thepressure of the fluid at the duct opening.







NX Thermal and Flow



Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?


Right-click the simulation object container ® NewSimulation Object ® Duct Flow Boundary Conditions

Toolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar ® Duct Flow Boundary

Conditions

New results on duct elements

What is it?

On duct elements, in addition to the existing results, you can now recover:

• Density

• Mass flow

To recover these results from the analysis, select Densities or Mass Flows inthe Duct Flow group of the Results Options page of the Create Solution orEdit Solution dialog boxes.

After solving, in the Post Processing Navigator, a Fluid Density — Elementaland/or Mass Flow — Elemental result type appears under the Solutionresults node as seen in the following graphic.

Solution 1 NX THERMAL / FLOW, Thermal,Advanced Thermal’Temperature - ’Nodal’Temperature - ’Elemental’Total Heat Load - ’Elemental’Total Heat Flux - ’Elemental

’Fluid Density - ’ElementalScalar’Mass Flow - ’ElementalScalar







NX Thermal and Flow



Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click the solution node and choose Edit Solution


Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solver Attributes

Location in dialogbox Duct Flow group on the Results Options page

Flow capabilities

Export flow model and boundary conditions to CGNS

What is it?

You can export nodes, elements, and the following boundary condition data inthe CFD General Notation System (CGNS) format:

• Temperature

• Inlet information: velocity, mass flow, volume flow, or pressure rise

• Outlet information: velocity, mass flow, volume flow, or pressure rise

• Opening information: pressure

For the element on free faces where you apply boundary conditions, thesoftware creates boundary elements with a normal pointing into the fluid.Any pyramid elements are converted to wedge elements.

CGNS export does not support table data. For temperature, velocity, massflow, volume flow, or pressure varying in time, the software exports theboundary condition into the CGNS format with a value equal to 0. Thesoftware does not export any boundary condition values that are definedwith NX spatial fields.

CGNS is a standard format for recording computational fluid dynamics(CFD) analysis data.






Digital Simulation


Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationMenu File ® Export ® SimulationLocation in dialogbox File Type list ® CGNS

Relaxation factor for turbulence equations

What is it?

You can now specify the Turbulence relaxation factor in the RelaxationFactors group on the 3D Flow Solver page of the Solver Parameters dialogbox.

The solver applies this relaxation parameter to the turbulence equationswhen you set one of the following two-equation models in the TurbulenceModels option on the Solution Details page of the Create Solution or EditSolution dialog boxes:• K-Epsilon

• Shear Stress Transport-SST

• K-Omega

The value that you set for the turbulence relaxation factor should always bepositive and less than or equal to 1.

Reducing this value slows down the convergence rate and should be usedwhen convergence cannot be achieved otherwise.


This feature is particularly useful when divergence occurs early in theiterative process soon after the turbulence equations become active. The mainpurpose of this relaxation factor is to prevent wrong values of k or ε or w in ornear the boundary layer from affecting the other variable.






Digital Simulation

Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click the Solution node® Solver Parameters

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation ® Solve ® Edit SolverParameters

Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solver ParametersLocation in dialogbox Relaxation Factors group on the 3D Flow Solver page

Spectral attenuation report

What is it?

When you solve a flow or coupled transient analysis, you can now request thecreation of spectral attenuation graphs.

The spectral attenuation, SA, is a function of frequency, f, and is given bythis equation:

Where:

Pem(f) is the complex number of the fast Fourier transform of the emittedpressure at frequency f.

Pre(f) is the complex number of the fast Fourier transform of the receivedpressure at frequency f.

P*re(f) is the complex conjugate of Pre(f).

In the Between Regions type of Report simulation object, select:

• The region that has the emitted signal as your Primary Region.

• The region that has the received signal as your Secondary Region.

• The Spectral Attenuation check box.


Digital Simulation

Note

To create a spectral attenuation report, you must select constant timesteps, because the software calculates the discrete frequencies usingthe time step value it assumes to be constant. To select constant timesteps, select Constant from the Time Step Option list on the TransientSetup page of the Create Solution or Edit Solution dialog boxes to letthe software calculate the discrete frequencies.

After the solve, the software saves the following graphs in the run directory:

• The emitted and received pressures as functions of time in flowsppsig.png.

• The fast Fourier transform of the emitted and received pressures asfunctions of frequency in flowsppspec.png.

• The spectral attenuation as a function of frequency in flowspatt.png.


Digital Simulation

The above data is also saved into the GroupReport.htm and GroupReport.csvfiles.


Digital Simulation


You should request the creation of the spectral attenuation report when youwant to simulate noise reduction or acoustic wave propagation.





Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Object container ® NewSimulation Object ® Report

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® ReportLocation in dialogbox 3D Flow Data group

Periodic fluid domain mesh

What is it?

You can now create periodic fluid domain meshes when applying periodicboundary conditions.

To create a periodic fluid domain mesh, you need to:

1. Create a 3D periodic model.

2. Create a Fluid Domain simulation object.

3. Create a Periodic Boundary Condition simulation object.

4. Create meshMatching.dat file in the same folder as the Simulation filewith the following format:

############################################################################################ This file should be used to define periodic boundary conditions to the mesher.# The format is as follow:## Periodicity LBC NAME


Digital Simulation

# Trans_x Trans_y Trans_z Axis_x Axis_y Axis_z Center_x Center_y Center_z Theta## Where:## Trans Translation# Axis Axis of rotation# Center Center of rotation# theta Angle of rotation (degrees)############################################################################################Periodic Boundary Condition(1)0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0Periodic Boundary Condition(2)0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0Periodic Boundary Condition(3)0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0

The software generates the periodic fluid domain mesh when you solve themodel.





Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


Right-click the Simulation Object container ® NewSimulation Object ® Fluid Domain

Toolbar Advanced Simulation ® Fluid Domain

Bivariate fluid properties

What is it?

You can have the following fluid properties varying with both temperatureand pressure:

• Density

• Specific heats at constant pressure


Digital Simulation

• Specific heats at constant volume

• Dynamic viscosity

• Conductivity

• Thermal expansion coefficient

Use a Generic Entity modeling object to specify bivariate fluid properties. Forcomplete instruction on how to specify bivariate fluid properties, see Definea bivariate fluid material property.





Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar ® Modeling Object® Generic Entity ® Create

Menu Insert ® Modeling Objects ® Generic Entity ® Create

Convection Properties option

What is it?

The behavior of the Convection Properties option has changed. You can nowdefine convection properties even when you select the Slip Wall check box inthe following dialog boxes:

• Flow Surface

• Flow Blockage

• Create / Edit Solution


../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/bivariate_fluid_prop_pr.html&vars=-aux

../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/bivariate_fluid_prop_pr.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation





Flow Flow

Advanced Flow

NX Thermal and Flow



Where do I find it?

Simulation objects


Right-click the simulation object container ®NewSimulation Object ® Flow Surface / Flow Blockage

ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar ® Flow Surface /

Flow BlockageLocation in dialogbox

Flow Surface dialog box® Convection Properties

Flow Blockage dialog box ® Solid Blockage type ®Convection Properties

Create or edit simulation


• Right-click the simulation® New Solution

• Right-click the solution® Edit SolutionLocation in dialogbox

3D Flow page® Default Convection Properties

Redlich-Kwong Real Gas Equation of State

What is it?

You can now model gases using the Redlich-Kwong Real Gas Equation ofState:


Digital Simulation

where

• P is the pressure of the gas.

• T is the temperature of the gas.

• Vm is the molar volume of the gas.

• R is the universal gas constant (8.314472 J/(mol·K)).

The constants a and b are defined as:

where

• PC is the critical pressure of the gas.

• TC is the critical temperature of the gas.

You use an Advanced Parameters modeling object to specify theRedlich-Kwong real gas equation of state. For complete instructions onhow to specify the Redlich-Kwong equation, see Define a gas using theRedlich-Kwong equation of state.


Use the Redlich-Kwong Real Gas Equation of State at high pressure as it ismore realistic than the ideal gas law.

The Redlich-Kwong equation should be used when the ratio of the pressure tothe critical pressure is less than about one-half of the ratio of the temperatureto the critical temperature:






../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/redlich_kwong_pr.html&vars=-aux

../../ugdoc/html_files/advanced/index.html?goto=advanced/redlich_kwong_pr.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation


Where do I find it?


ToolbarAdvanced Simulation toolbar®Modeling Objects®Advanced Parameters ® Create


Mapping capabilities

Automatic detection of mapping source analysis type

What is it?

In the Create Solution dialog box with the Solver list set to NX THERMAL/ FLOW or NX ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS COOLING, when you select theMapping from the Analysis Type list, the source model analysis type isdetected automatically from the BUN file associated with the source analysis.

In the Mapping Details page of the Create Solution or Edit Solution dialogboxes, the Source Model Analysis Type field is now non-editable.




NX Thermal and Flow Mapping Thermal-Flow

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationSimulationNavigator Right-click the solution node and choose Edit Solution


Menu Analysis ® Solve ® Edit Solver Attributes


Data Source and Destination group on the MappingDetails page


Digital Simulation

Automatic creation of mapping solutions

What is it?

All Mapping and Axisymmetric Mapping solutions in NX THERMAL / FLOW,NX SPACE SYSTEMS THERMAL, and NX ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS COOLINGsolvers allow you to automatically create a complete NX solution with allthe appropriate steps, subcases, and loads defined for the Nastran, ANSYS,and Abaqus solvers.

To create complete NX solutions, in the Optional Output page of the CreateSolution or Edit Solution dialog box, select the Create Nastran Solution,Create Ansys Solution, or Create Abaqus Solution check box.

The mapping solver creates the following NX solutions:

• SESTATIC 101 — Single Constraint for NX Nastran only

• Linear Statics for ANSYS

• General Analysis for Abaqus

When the Analysis Type is Mapping, the loads the mapping solver createsdepends upon the Source Model Analysis Type and the setting of the Data toMap option (Mapping Details page of the Create Solution and Edit Solutiondialog boxes).

• When the Source Model Analysis Type is Thermal or Coupled and Datato Map is set to Solid Temperatures, the software creates structural NodeID Table Temperature loads.

• When the Source Model Analysis Type is Flow or Coupled and Data toMap is set to Flow Values, the software creates structural Node ID TableForce loads.

When the Analysis Type is Axisymmetric Mapping, the software createsstructural Node ID Table Temperature loads.

You can create more than one solution at the same time, such as one for bothNastran and ANSYS. In that case, the mapping solver creates one set of loadsthat are shared between the solutions.


The automatic creation of mapping solutions for Nastran, ANSYS, andAbaqus simplifies the mapping of transient solutions.




Digital Simulation




Mapping Thermal


Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite Two FEM with models that are geometrically congruentSimulationNavigator Right-click the simulation file node® New Solution

Toolbar Advanced Simulation toolbar® SolutionMenu Insert ® SolutionLocation in dialogbox Analysis Type ® Mapping or Axisymmetric Mapping

Mapping’s element support

What is it?

The mapping solver now supports all elements which support temperatureand pressure data for the following solvers:

• Nastran

• ANSYS

• Abaqus





Mapping Thermal


Where do I find it?



Digital Simulation


Axisymmetric to 3D temperature mapping

What is it?

You can now map temperature data from an axisymmetric model to a 3Dmodel.

The following graphic shows:

• On the left, the temperature on 1D elements that model thermal analysison an axisymmetric pipe.

• On the right, the same temperatures mapped on the shell elements ofa full pipe.




Digital Simulation




Mapping Thermal


Where do I find it?



Laminate Composites

Smart selection in draping

What is it?

Smart selection methods are now available in draping. Smart selectionmethods enable you to select entities according to specified criteria or entityrelations.

Smart selection methods are available from the following dialog boxes:

• Ply draping data

• Layup Offset

• Laminate Default Orientation

When selecting entities, you can use the Method list on the Selection bar toselect related entities.

The Selection Bar, showing (1) the Type Filter list, (2) the Methodlist, and (3) the Smart Selector Options button


Digital Simulation


Smart selection is most useful when working with complex geometry ormeshes containing a large number of nodes and elements. If you use smartselection when selecting nodes, for example, you can easily select a largenumber of related nodes, either by their underlying polygon geometryfeatures or by element tangency or feature angle. When working with modelswith complex geometry, you can use smart selection to quickly select all filletfaces, cylindrical faces, or sliver faces, as well as tangent or adjacent faces.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteAn active FEM file with one or more ply-based laminatelayups defined

SimulationNavigator

• Right-click the ply node ® Edit

• Right-click the Layup Offset node ® Create a newuser defined layup offset rule

• Right-click the Material Orientation node ® CreateNew Orientation

Update icon in Simulation Navigator

What is it?

A red update icon now appears in the Simulation Navigator when eitherthe layup or the ply needs to be updated.

Where do I find it?



Draping solver feedback

What is it?

When you update layups or plies for draping, the Information window opens,and as necessary, displays the following warning messages:

• WARNING — Bad continuity detected for ply X. Draping results could be

wrong. Check element normals, slope continuity and mesh density.

In the graphics window, the regions with bad continuity between elementsare highlighted. Element edges and the element normal are shown inyellow.


Digital Simulation

• WARNING — Flat Pattern of plyX tears or overlaps Y times.

In the graphics window, the regions where elements tear or overlap arehighlighted. Element edges are shown in red.

• WARNING — Flat Pattern of plyX might tear or overlap Y times.

In the graphics window, the regions where elements might tear or overlapare highlighted. Element edges are shown in magenta.

The last two warnings are issued when the algorithm detects stretching infibers, which could indicate that the ply cannot conform to the undevelopablefaces. In practice, the ply would exhibit gapping or wrinkling on the mold.

Use one of the following remedial actions to improve the draping process:

• Use a different start point and draping direction.

• Add a splice in the ply.

• Introduce cut curves.

Where do I find it?




Digital Simulation

List draping results

What is it?

You can now export draping information for a given ply to a spreadsheetapplication or a comma separated values (CSV) file using the List DrapingResults dialog box.

For a given ply, the created report contains the draping solver that was used,the starting and lock angles, and the number of elements.

For each element, the report contains:

• Element ID

• Shear angle

• Yarn angle

• Primary direction

• Secondary direction

• Normal direction


Use this functionality when you want to evaluate the validity of your draping.This is mainly a debugging tool.

Where do I find it?



SimulationNavigator Right-click the ply node® List Draping Results

Envelope results for each element

What is it?

When you use the Graphical Post Report command, you can now view theworst ply value at each element for:

• Ply Failure Index

• Bond Failure Index

• Ply Stress


Digital Simulation

• Ply Strain

• Ply Safety Margin

• Bond Safety Margin

The new ply envelope nodes in the Post Processing Navigator have the samename as existing ply envelope nodes. In the existing nodes, you can view thevalues for each ply separately. In the new nodes, you can view the value fromthe ply with the worst result at each element.

In the following figure, the new ply envelope nodes are followed by andthe existing ones by .

Laminate Post Report 1Ply Failure Index — ElementalPly Failure Index Bottom — ElementalPly Failure Index Top — ElementalPly Failure Index — ElementalBond Failure Index — ElementalBond Failure Index Bottom — ElementalBond Failure Index Top — ElementalBond Failure Index — ElementalPly Stress — ElementalPly Stress Bottom — ElementalPly Stress Top — ElementalPly Stress — ElementalPly Strain — ElementalPly Strain Bottom — ElementalPly Strain Top — ElementalPly Strain — ElementalPly Safety Margin — ElementalPly Safety Margin Bottom — ElementalPly Safety Margin Top — ElementalPly Safety Margin — ElementalBond Safety Margin — ElementalBond Safety Margin Bottom — ElementalBond Safety Margin Top — ElementalBond Safety Margin — Elemental


The new ply envelope nodes allow you to assess the worst ply results withouthaving to manually scan through all the ply results.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteA Simulation file with a laminate model in Nastran,ANSYS, or Abaqus solution

Toolbar Laminate ® Graphical Post ReportMenu Insert ® Laminate ® Graphical Post ReportLocation inPost ProcessingNavigator Under the Laminate Post Report node

FE Model Correlation

What is it?

FE Model Correlation is a new Advanced Simulation process which you canuse to quantify and visualize the level of agreement between two sets ofmodal results by comparing mode shapes and nodal responses.

FE Model Correlation can correlate modal results between structuralfinite element analysis and experimental test modal analysis results(test-analysis) or between two sets of structural finite element analysisresults (analysis-analysis).

7th mode shape of the referencesolution

13th mode shape of the worksolution

You prepare the finite element model for structural analysis by defining themesh and material properties. Then, you solve the following modal analysissolutions:

• NX or MSC Nastran: SEMODES 103


Digital Simulation

• ANSYS: Modal

• ABAQUS: Frequency Perturbation Substep

With FE Model Correlation, you create a solution with the new solverenvironment, MODAL TEST DATA, and the new solution type, Test Solution.You then import the experimental modal results and the test model from NXI-deas Universal (UNV) files into that solution. The test model is disjointfrom the finite element model.

FE Model Correlation allows you to:

• Setup the correlation process.

• Align test solution with the analysis solution.

• Pair the test modes with the analysis modes.

• Obtain correlation metrics.


FE Model Correlation objectively compares mode shapes and nodal responsesto assess the level of agreement between experiments and FE results instructural dynamics.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation file with modal analysis solutionMenu Insert®Correlation

Import and export

Import changes for related elements that share a physical property table

What is it?

When you import related elements (an element type and its transitionalelement) that share the same physical property table, the software now placesthem in the same mesh in the Simulation Navigator. In previous releases, thesoftware automatically created a separate mesh in the Simulation Navigatorfor every combination of physical property and element type.

For example, consider the following Nastran .dat file:GRID,1,,0.,0.,0.GRID,2,,1.,0.,0.GRID,3,,1.,1.,0.GRID,4,,0.,1.,0.CQUAD4,1,1,1,2,3,4CTRIA3,2,1,1,2,3


Digital Simulation

PSHELL,1,1,.1MAT1,1,1.E10,.3ENDDATA

Notice that both the CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements reference the samePSHELL bulk data entry.

Previously, if you imported this file into Advanced Simulation, the softwarecreated the following structure for the mesh data in the Simulation Navigator:

2D Collectors

PSHELL_1

CQUAD4_1

CQUAD3_2

Now, the software combines the CQUAD4 and CTRIA3 elements into thesame mesh:

2D Collectors

PSHELL_1

CQUAD4_1

Where do I find it?


Option to import nodal temperatures as a node ID table

What is it?

For Nastran, Abaqus, and ANSYS models, the Import Selective Loads asField Data customer default from previous releases now also controls whethernodal temperatures are imported as node ID tables. Whether you importnodal temperatures as loads or as initial conditions, if you select ImportSelective Loads as Field Data, the software combines all nodal temperatureboundary conditions into a single node ID table in the Simulation Navigator.

Previously, the Import Selective Loads as Field Data option only applied toforces and moments. Each imported nodal temperature boundary conditionwas displayed separately. This remains the default behavior.


When you import models with many nodal temperature boundary conditions,the Import Selective Loads as Field Data option improves performance andusability. The default method may result in slower import processing and


Digital Simulation

require a large amount of scrolling to view all the boundary conditions in theSimulation Navigator.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active Simulation with NX Nastran, MSC Nastran,

Abaqus, or ANSYS as the specified solverMenu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Simulation®General→Environment tab

Ability to export a subset of your model

What is it?

For Nastran, ANSYS, and Abaqus solutions, use the options in the newSubset Export group in the Export Simulation dialog box to selectively exportportions of your model. You can use these options to export:

• Only the elements currently displayed in your model.

• Entities in selected groups.

Subset export based on the elements currently displayed

Use the new Visible elements option to export only the elements that arecurrently displayed in your model. This option replaces the Visible meshesoption from previous releases. With the Visible meshes option, even if onlya single element in a mesh was displayed, the software exported all theelements in that mesh.

Subset export based on selected groups

Use the new Selected groups option to export only the contents of a selectedgroup. If you select multiple groups, the software exports all the entitiesin those groups as well as:

• Any loads and boundary conditions associated with the nodes andelements in the group.

• All nodes associated with the elements in that group, even if the nodesthemselves are not members of the group.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite An active FEM or Simulation file in which Nastran,

ANSYS, or Abaqus is the specified solverMenu File®Export®Simulation


Digital Simulation

NX Open

Enhanced NX Open support in CAE

What is it?

Several JA-based NX Open APIs are now available that let you automateAdvanced Simulation operations. The following new functions have beenadded:

NX Open class New function addedBaseFEModel Provides access to the Update Finite

Element Model command.SimSolution Provides access to solve a solution or

write a solver input file.SimSolution Provides access to complete edit

capability for SimSolution propertiesas well as Solver Parameters.

NodeElementManage Creates a NodesRepositionBuilderobject that lets you efficientlyreposition large numbers of nodes.

For details about each new function, see the NX Open Reference Guide for thelanguage you are using (for example, the NX Open C++ Reference Guide).You can find the NX Open reference guides in the NX Help Library underAutomation®NX Open.

NX Open support for reading and displaying solver results

What is it?

Using the NX Open interface, you can now write custom automation code forreading and displaying solver results in Advanced Simulation.

Several new NX Open classes have been added to the CAE NameSpace.

• ResultManager

• IResult

• ImportedResult

• ResultAccess

• ResultParameters

• SolutionResult

Use these general steps for working with these new classes:


Digital Simulation

1. Create a Result object from a solution or by opening a result file.

2. Create a ResultAccess object by providing a Result object and aResultParameters object.

ResultAccess holds a state that can be modified using a ResultParametersobject. ResultParameters is a container of result properties that can bequeried, modified, and set to a ResultAccess object.

3. Query file data from the Result object such as number of nodes, elements,load cases, and so on.

4. Access state data from the ResultAccess object such as minimum andmaximum results values, min-max locations, and so on.

For details about each new class, see the NX Open Reference Guide for thelanguage you are using (for example, the NX Open C++ Reference Guide).You can find the NX Open reference guides in the NX Help Library underAutomation®NX Open.

NX Open support for manual creation of all 3D solid element types

What is it?

You can use the new ElemDimTypeAnySolid option in theCAE::ElementCreateBuilder NX Open class to create a 3D element of anysolid topology supported by your solver. In previous versions, you could createonly Penta(6) and Hexa(8) elements.

For details about the new option, see the NX Open Reference Guide for thelanguage you are using (for example, the NX Open C++ Reference Guide).You can find the NX Open reference guides in the NX Help Library underAutomation®NX Open.

Post Processing

Unaveraged results across feature angle boundaries

What is it?

When you analyze elemental or element-nodal results in post-processing andyou use the Averaged results option, you can now choose not to average theresults across nodes at feature angle boundaries in your model.

In the Smooth Plot dialog box, the Averaged option calculates a nodalaverage across all adjacent elements for elemental and element-nodalresults. For this release, a new Feature Angles option has been added tothe averaged-across options.


Digital Simulation

When the Feature Angles check box is not selected, the software leaves theresults unaveraged across feature angles greater than the angle thresholdyou specify. For example, if you do not want the results averaged acrossfeature angles of 45 degrees or greater, enter 45 in the angle threshold box.

The angle is measured at the free element faces, as shown in the followingexample.

Note

The Include Internal Elements option is unavailable when the FeatureAngles check box is not selected.

Example

The following examples illustrate how the stress results remain unaveragedpast the hole and slot features in this disk part.


Digital Simulation

Stress averaged across feature angles (default setting; FeatureAngles check box selected)

Stress unaveraged across feature angles greater than 45 degrees(Feature Angles check box not selected)


Digital Simulation

About the Identify command

You use the Identify command to probe and display nodal information forthe post view display. When you use the Identify command and the FeatureAngles check box is not selected, you may see multiple values on a singlenode, depending on the number of faces that share this node and the faceyou position the mouse over.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite Simulation file with elemental or element-nodal results.

The Include Internal Elements option must be turned off.Toolbar

Post Processing®Post ViewLocation in dialogbox

Result (Color Display)®Averaged®Feature Angles

Expanded results support in Post-Processing

What is it?

You can now display and analyze results in post-processing for severaladditional result types and element types.

NX Nastran results

• Contact gap distance

• Shell element thickness


Digital Simulation

• Gasket Pressure

• Gasket Closure

• Plastic Gasket Closure

• Gasket Status

• Gasket Yield Stress

• 2D axisymmetric contact results

NX Nastran elements

• Pyramid elements: CPYRAM

• Axisymmetric solid elements: CTRAX3, CQUADX4, CTRAX6, andCQUADX8

NX Response Simulation results

These Response Simulation contour results types are now supported correctly.In previous versions, all possible component results were displayed in theSimulation Navigator even if you had not requested certain components.

• Peak

• RMS

• Level Crossing

NX Laminates results

• Ply Failure Indices (ANSYS support added)

• Ply Strength Ratio

• Bond Strength Ratio

NX Flow results

Fluid density is now supported.


Digital Simulation

Context highlighting in Post-Processing Navigator

What is it?

The active results set that is plotted in the graphics window now displays inblue in the Post-Processing Navigator.

Von Mises stress result plotted in graphics window and displayed inblue in Post-Processing Navigator

If more than one results set is displayed, the Master post view is shown inblue in the navigator.


When you plot several results sets, the blue color in the Post-ProcessingNavigator can help you distinguish which set is displayed in the graphicswindow.


Digital Simulation

Restarting streamlines at the interface of a disjoint mesh

What is it?

If your model contains adjacent fluid meshes that share a common boundary,you can use the Connect Disjoint Fluid Mesh option in the Create Solution orEdit Solution dialog box to have the flow solver join them during the analysis.If you then create a streamline display of your velocity results for thatmodel, you can use the new Attempt Restart in Disjoint Mesh option in theExtraction Parameters group of the Seed Set dialog box to control whetherthe streamline is continuous across the interface between the meshes. If youselect Attempt Restart in Disjoint Mesh, the software creates a continuousstreamline across the discontinuous meshes. However, restarting streamlinesacross discontinuous meshes can negatively impact the display performance.You should use caution when selecting this option.

Note

In the Seed Set dialog box, you must select the Attempt Restart inDisjoint Mesh option before you select any seed points.

The following graphic shows an example of a streamlines display createdon a model that contains a disjoint fluid mesh. (A) shows the streamlinedisplay with the Attempt Restart in Disjoint Mesh cleared, while (B) showsthe streamline display with the Attempt Restart in Disjoint Mesh selected.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteA solved model with a disjoint fluid mesh, velocityresults, and a displayed post view

Post-ProcessingNavigator Right-click a post view®Create Streamlines


Digital Simulation

New results display options

What is it?

Now, when you create a contour plot, marker plot, or streamline display ofyour results, new options in the Select Results dialog box give you greatercontrol over how the software generates the display.

Option for averaging results for internal elements

If you select the Averaged option, you can use the new Include InternalElements option to control whether the software includes the results forinternal 3D elements in the averaging calculations. If you clear the IncludeInternal Elements check box, the software only includes elements that havefaces on the model’s surface in averaging calculations.

The following graphic shows contour plots of elemental stress-nodal resultsgenerated with the Include Internal Elements check box selected (A) and withthe Include Internal Elements check box cleared (B).

Option for controlling the display of results at midside nodes

When your mesh includes parabolic elements, use the new Include Midnodesoption to control whether the software displays results at the midside nodes.

The following graphic shows contour plots of elemental stress-nodal resultsgenerated with the Include Midnodes check box selected (A) and with the


Digital Simulation

Include Midnodes check box cleared (B). The differences between the displaysare very subtle for this model.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite A solved model with results and a displayed post viewMenu Tools®Results®Post ViewPost-ProcessingNavigator Right-click a post view®Edit

Nastran

Support for displaying Nastran strain curvature results

What is it?

In a Nastran analysis, when you include a Strain type of Structural OutputRequest with the STRCUR option from the Plate Curvature list selected,you can now display those results in post-processing. In previous releases,although you could request the output of strain curvature results, you couldnot display them.


Digital Simulation

Supported strain resultant components for 1D elements

In the Post-Processing Navigator, you can now create displays of thefollowing strain resultant components for 1D elements:

• Axial Strain Exx

• Strain Curvature KXZ and KYZ

• Twist

• Shear Strain TXZ and TYZ

Supported strain resultant components for 2D elements

In the Post-Processing Navigator, you can now create displays of thefollowing strain resultant components for 2D elements:

• Membrane Strain EXX, EYY, and EXY

• Strain Curvature KXX, KYY, and KXY

• Shear Strain TXZ and TYZ

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationPrerequisite A solved Nastran model with strain results

Toolbar Post Processing®Post ViewMenu Tools®Results®Post ViewPost-ProcessingNavigator Right-click the appropriate strain results®Apply

Abaqus

Ability to animate across load cases

What is it?

For solutions that include multiple load cases, you can now animate theresults across the load cases. The Animation dialog box includes two options:Result and Iterations. The Iterations option lets you specify a Start LoadCase, Start Iteration (if the starting load case contains iterations), and EndLoad Case, as well as a Step increment to determine the number of framesin the animation.


Digital Simulation

For example, suppose you have three load cases (1, 2, and 3 in the picturebelow) and you want the animation to start at the first load case and endafter the last load case.

In this example, you would choose Load Case 1 as the Start Load Case andLoad Case 3 as the End Load Case. The following animated picture showsthe result. The first and last load cases each have one static step and thesecond load case has 10 iterations. The Step option is set to 1, which meansthe animation includes a frame for each step and iteration between the startand end load case. Therefore, the animation contains 12 frames. Note theload case and iteration number indicated by the arrow in the picture.


Digital Simulation

Note

In this example, all iterations in Load Case 2 were includedautomatically because it was not the starting or ending load case. Youcan specify a Start Iteration only if the load case that contains iterationsis specified as either the Start Load Case or the End Load Case.

Where do I find it?


Post-Processing®Animation

Teamcenter Integration

Part attributes supported for FEM and Simulation files

What is it?

You can now assign Part Name and Part Description attributes to FEM andSimulation files in Advanced Simulation (in addition to Part Number, PartRevision, Part Type, and Part Unit of Measure attributes).When you create a new FEM or Simulation file, you can now click theAttributes button, which opens the Define Attributes dialog box. There youcan define the Part Name and Part Description attributes. You can alsoassign these attributes by selecting Format®Database Attributes to openthe Database Attributes dialog box.


Digital Simulation

After initially defining these attributes, you can make changes to them untilyou save the part.

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationToolbar

Standard®New ®Simulation tab®AttributesMenu File®New®Simulation tab®Attributes

Format®Database AttributesSimulationNavigator

Right-click the part file®New FEM®Attributes

Right-click the FEM file®New Simulation®Attributes

Teamcenter file browser used when importing simulation results files

What is it?

You can now import results files associated with Simulation files managedin Teamcenter. In the Simulation Navigator, you can now right-click theSimulation file node and choose from two import options:

• Import Local Results — Lets you select a solver results file to importusing the native operating system file browser.

• Import Results file from Teamcenter— Lets you select a solver resultsfile to import using the Import Results File from Teamcenter dialog box.You can browse your Teamcenter database and select a Simulation file.The dialog box provides a view of each file’s Teamcenter attributes, suchas Number, Revision, Description, and so on. Results files stored withthat Simulation file are displayed in the Choose result file to import list.

Also, in Advanced Simulation dialog boxes in which you select a simulationresults file to import, the file system browser that appears is now theTeamcenter file browser.

For example, you can run a thermal solution to generate results for atemperature preload to a structural solution. In the structural solution,you choose Teamcenter as the Source when you define your temperaturepreload. The Teamcenter file browser appears, where you can browse yourTeamcenter database and select the Simulation dataset that contains theresults. The dialog box provides a view of each file’s Teamcenter attributes,such as Number, Revision, Description, and so on. Results files stored withthat Simulation dataset are displayed in the list.


Digital Simulation

Where do I find it?

Application Advanced SimulationMenu File®Import®Results file from TeamcenterSimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation file node®Import Results filefrom Teamcenter

Assign a Teamcenter project to a CAE item

What is it?

In the Advanced Simulation application, you can now assign a Simulation fileor FEM file to a Teamcenter project as you create the file.

A Projects button has been added to the File New dialog box, Name Partsdialog box, and Save Part File As dialog box.


Digital Simulation

The Projects button opens the Assign to Project dialog box, where you canselect from a list of projects created in Teamcenter.

NX 7.5 Design Simulation

Teamcenter Integration for Simulation

Simulation Search View

What is it?

Simulation Search View is an extension of the Simulation File View panelin the Simulation Navigator that allows you to search Teamcenter for CAEitems related to the current item.

To use Simulation Search View, right-click an item revision in the SimulationFile View and choose Find CAE Items:

• If you right-click a master part item revision, the software finds allidealized part item revisions and FEM item revisions related to themaster part.

• If you right-click an idealized part item revision, the software finds allFEM item revisions related to the idealized part.

• If you right-click a FEM item revision, the software finds all relatedSimulation item revisions.


Digital Simulation

Double-click any part in Simulation Search View to load it and display itin the Simulation Navigator.

To return to the Simulation File View, right-click Teamcenter Search Resultsand choose Switch to Session View.


When using the Teamcenter for Simulation data model, you can use the CAEManager in the Teamcenter client to easily find related CAE items, but priorto this release, there was no easy way to find related CAE items in NX. UsingSimulation Search View, you can quickly and easily find all CAE data relatedto the master part without leaving NX.

Where do I find it?



Resource bar Simulation NavigatorSimulationNavigator

Simulation File View®right-click an itemrevision®Find CAE Items


Digital Simulation

Clone enhancements

What is it?

The Clone command has been enhanced to include the option of revising themaster part item along with the CAE items. On the Clone dialog box, chooseCreate New Revision from the Action list and select the Include Mastercheck box. The Master file group becomes active, and you can specify a newrevision level for the master part.


By including the master part in the new revision, you set a consistent revisionlevel for each iteration of your CAE data, and establish a clean baseline forfurther analysis.

Where do I find it?



SimulationNavigator

Right-click the Simulation node® Clone.

Right-click the FEM node ® Clone.

Enhancements for materials

What is it?

As part of the ongoing enhancements to the NX materials capabilities, anumber of functional enhancements have been added. You can now:



• Enter a description for a material.

• Assign a label (integer value) to a material record.


• View a material record in the material dialog box (using the Inspect

Material command).

The standard NX materials library is now stored in MatML xml format. Thename of the NX material library is now physicalmateriallibrary.xml.


Digital Simulation


Where do I find it?

Application AllMenu Tools®Material PropertiesToolbar

Design Simulation toolbar®Material Properties

New option for creating a FEM file with visible bodies

What is it?

Now, when you create a new FEM file that is associated with a CAD part,you can use the new All Visible option to create the FEM file using only thecurrently visible bodies. In previous releases, you could either create a FEMfile on all bodies or just on selected bodies.

• If you created a FEM using only selected bodies, and you later added newbodies to the idealized part, the new bodies would not get automaticallyadded to the FEM.

• If you created a FEM using all bodies, you often included more bodies inyour FEM file than were necessary for the analysis. For example, modelsoften include either construction geometry or bodies on hidden layers thatare not relevant to a CAE workflow.

When you select the new All Visible option from the Bodies to Use list in theNew FEM dialog box, the software only adds the bodies that are currentlydisplayed in the FEM file. If you later display additional bodies, the softwareautomatically adds those to the FEM file. Similarly, if you perform operationson the idealized part that create new bodies, the software automaticallyadds those to the FEM file. For example, if you create a midsurface on asolid part, the software automatically adds the new midsurface sheet bodiesto the FEM file.

Note

With the All Visible bodies option, the software does not remove a bodyfrom a FEM file if you later hide the body.

Where do I find it?

Application Design SimulationPrerequisite An active part or idealized partSimulationNavigator

Right-click the part or idealized part and choose NewFEM


Digital Simulation

Controlling the maximum tetrahedral mesh size for undo operations

What is it?

You can now control the maximum size of a tetrahedral mesh on which youcan use the Undo command. Using the Undo command to recursively undoan existing mesh and then remesh can consume a large amount of availablememory. The memory required by the Undo command also increases with thesize of the mesh. On very large meshes, the Undo command can cause thesystem to run out of memory.

Now, you can use the new Maximum Mesh Size for Undo default to set anupper limit on the number of nodes a mesh can contain and be valid for anUndo operation. To access this option:



3. On the 3D Tetrahedral Mesh tab, specify the maximum size of atetrahedral mesh on which you want to allow use of the Undo command.

Change for the maximum solution time default

What is it?

The value for the Maximum Job Time option in the Solution dialog box isnow blank by default. The Maximum Job Time option corresponds to theNastran TIME executive control statement. It controls the maximum allowedexecution time for the solution. Previously, the default value for MaximumJob Time was set to 999 CPU minutes, which could be insufficient for largecontact or nonlinear models. Now, when you export or solve your model, if youdo not specify a maximum time value, the software uses Nastran’s defaultvalue for the TIME statement, 1.89E9 seconds.

Where do I find it?

Application Design SimulationPrerequisite A Simulation file with Nastran as the specified solver

for the active solutionSimulationNavigator




Digital Simulation

Reusable regions for contact and glue definitions

What is it?

Use the new Simulation Region command to create a reusable collection ofhomogenous entities, such as polygon faces. You can then use the regionto define the source or target faces in Surface-to-Surface Contact orSurface-to-Surface Gluing definitions. For example, you can create a regionand then use that region as both the Source Region in a Surface-to-SurfaceContact definition and the Target Region in a Surface-to-Surface Gluedefinition.

When you export or solve your model, the software exports the region to yourNX Nastran input file as a single BSURFS bulk data entry, even if that regionis referenced by multiple contact or glue definitions.

Regions are managed in the Simulation Navigator

Once you create a region, the software stores it in the new Regions node inthe Simulation Navigator. The Regions node is available when you have aSimulation file active.

Regions1 – Top Bracket Inside Faces2 – Top Bracket Outside Faces3 – Bottom Bracket

You can use the Regions node to:• Highlight the entities that belong to a selected region in the graphicswindow.

• Rename, edit, delete, or to list information about a selected region.

Where do I find it?

Application Design Simulation

Toolbar Design Simulation®Simulation Region

Durability Wizard

What is it?




Digital Simulation




• Fatigue life










Digital Simulation



Where do I find it?





What is it?

Design Simulation post-processing enhancements include:

• The ability to control the numeric format used for results values.

• The ability to display component-based deformation.

• The ability to select nodes to define the center of rotation for post viewdisplays.

• The ability to add user-derived results to existing results for the samemodel.

Numeric format for results values

You can now control the numeric format used to display results values in thecolor bar, legend, Min/Max markers, and so on. In the Post View dialog box,click the Annotation tab. From the Format list, choose from the following:

• Automatic — The software chooses a numeric format based on theabsolute difference between consecutive color bar levels.

• Fixed Point—Displays results in decimal notation with a fixed number ofdecimal places you specify.

• Scientific—Displays results in scientific notation using a fixed number ofdecimal places you specify.

Component-based deformation

You can now display the XYZ components of displacement, rotation, force,and moment as deformation plots. Right-click a post view and choose Set


Digital Simulation

Deformation. In the Deformation dialog box, choose the X, Y, or Z component.The default deformation display is Magnitude.

Specify the center of rotation in post view displays

In past releases, you needed to specify a point on geometry to set the center ofrotation when orienting your model. Because by default there is no selectablegeometry in a post view display, you could not easily set a rotation point. Youcan now select nodes to set the center of rotation.

To specify the center of rotation, right-click in the Graphics window andchoose Set Rotate Point. Then select a node to specify a center of rotation.

Add user-derived results

If you use additional processing to derive custom results data for youranalyses, you can use Add Companion Result Data to incorporate theseresults into a target solution results set. You can then post-process thesederived results alongside standard solution results. Derived results must bein an NX-readable format (such as a universal file), and the results must befrom the same model. Derived results files must contain only results data;node and element geometry is retrieved from the target results set.

To add user-derived results, right-click the results node in SimulationNavigator and choose Add Companion Result Data.

Where do I find it?

Displaying deformation components

Application Design SimulationPrerequisite Analysis results data.


Toolbar Post-Processing®EditMenu Tools®Results®Edit

Post-ProcessingNavigator

Right-click a post view®Set Deformation.

Right-click a post view®Edit®Result (Deformation)


Digital Simulation

NX 7.5 Motion Simulation

Flexible bodies dynamic solution

What is it?

Typical motion simulations represent mechanisms using rigid bodiesthat move in prescribed degrees of freedom according to constraints.These rigid-body motion simulations cannot represent certain dynamiccharacteristics, especially those resulting from conditions such as sharpimpacts, sudden changes in motion, or if the component is flexible enoughto affect the motion of the mechanism. For these situations, you can use aflexible body analysis to combine both elastic deformation and rigid bodymotion.

This type of analysis requires NX Motion Simulation with the RecurDynsolver and NX Advanced Simulation with the NX Nastran solver.

To set up a flexible body analysis, you define one or more components inyour mechanism as flexible, and define stiffness at the points where thecomponents are connected to the mechanism (typically at joint locations). TheNX Nastran SEMODES 103 – Flexible Body solution reduces the dynamicbehavior of the flexible component to a set of mode shapes, which are storedin an output file.

After you solve this modal solution, you associate the flexible body outputfile (.rfi file) with the link on which the component is defined in the motionsimulation. When you solve the motion simulation, the RecurDyn solvercommunicates with NX Nastran and recovers the FE results. When youanimate the mechanism, the contour plot for the flexible component isanimated along with the rigid body animation.


Digital Simulation

For more information, see Flexible body workflow in the Motion Simulationonline Help.

Where do I find it?

In Advanced Simulation:


Prerequisite

An active Simulation with NX Nastran as the specifiedsolver and SEMODES 103 – Flexible Body as thespecified solution.

SimulationNavigator Right-click an existing Simulation®New SolutionMenu Insert®New Solution

In Motion Simulation:

Application Motion Simulation

Prerequisite

A Dynamic simulation with Flexible Body Dynamicsselected under Advanced Solution Options and asolution with Flexible Body as the specified solution type

Menu Insert®Flexible Link

Toolbar Motion toolbar®Flexible Link

Capture assembly arrangements during an animation

What is it?

During a Motion Simulation animation, you can now pause the animation atany position in the range of motion and capture an assembly arrangementfrom your motion mechanism.

Previously, you had to first capture an assembly Sequence and then create anarrangement. This new ability significantly reduces the number of steps tocreate an arrangement.

Old method New method1. Animate the mechanism. 1. Animate the mechanism.2. Export the animation to AssemblySequencing.3. Launch Sequencing.4. Position the sequence at thedesired steps.5. Capture the arrangement.

2. Pause the animation at thedesired position and capture thearrangement.


Digital Simulation

Identical subassemblies in two arrangements

Where do I find it?

Application Motion SimulationToolbar

Motion toolbar®Animation

Also available on the Animation Options toolbar (fromthe Animation Control toolbar)

Menu Analysis®Motion®AnimationLocation in dialogbox Capture Arrangement

Launch co-simulation directly from MATLAB/Simulink

What is it?

In this release, you can now launch the co-simulation from directly withinMATLAB® Simulink® after you create your co-simulation plant inputs andplant outputs in NX Motion Simulation. You can then view the animationsresults in Motion Simulation or in MATLAB Simulink.

In previous versions, you had to first define the linkage between the twoproducts in NX Motion Simulation and in MATLAB Simulink, and thenlaunch the co-simulation from within NX Motion Simulation. This workflowwas tedious when the control design required multiple changes.


Digital Simulation

Co-simulation supports MATLAB Simulink versions R2007a, R2007b,R2008a, and R2008b.

Where do I find it?

Application Motion SimulationPrerequisites Simulation of type Co-Simulation

Solution of Analysis Type Control/DynamicsToolbar

Motion toolbar®SolveMenu Analysis®Motion®SolveLocation in dialogbox

Solve dialog box®Host Program®Simulink


What is it?

In this release, several enhancements have been made to improve theusability of the Animation command.

• Two new options have been added to the Post-processing toolbar:

– Move Animation lets you move the animation to a particularposition using a slider.


Digital Simulation

– Animation Speed lets you control the speed of the animationplayback using a scale selector of 1–10.

• In the Motion Navigator, you can now right-click the Animation node andchoose Animate to animate the mechanism.

Where do I find it?


Motion toolbar®AnimationMenu Analysis®Motion®Animation

Static Equilibrium result as input to Dynamic solution

What is it?

You can now solve a Kinematics/Dynamics solution and specify to include theresults of a Static Equilibrium analysis as the starting point. The solver firstruns the simulation as a Static Equilibrium analysis. The Static Equilibriumsolution establishes a position in which all internal and external forces thataffect the mechanism are balanced. All velocities and accelerations are


Digital Simulation

set to zero. Then the solver runs the dynamic analysis starting from themechanism’s equilibrium position.

This feature is supported only by the RecurDyn solver.

Where do I find it?

Application Motion SimulationPrerequisite A Kinematics/Dynamics solutionMotion Navigator Right-click the solution®Solution Attributes®Include

Static Analysis

New motion object for coupling joints

What is it?

Use the new 2–3 Joint Coupler command to join the motion of two or threerevolute, slider, and cylindrical joints. This is similar to how you work withthe existing Gear and Rack and Pinion objects. You can scale the motion ofeach joint relative to the other or use a negative value to reverse the directionof a joint.

The 2–3 Joint Coupler dialog box contains two Attachment Type options:Two-Joint Coupler and Three-Joint Coupler. After selecting the appropriateAttachment Type, you can choose whether the joint you select will be inRotation or Translation within the coupler, and you can define the Scalefor that joint.

A single Two-joint Coupler joining two revolute joints


Digital Simulation

Three Two-joint Couplers (1, 2, and 3 in the graphic) joining fourrevolute joints. The bike chain is not modeled.

Where do I find it?


Motion toolbar®2–3 Joint Coupler (under the Gear

listMenu Insert®Coupler®2–3 Joint Coupler

Gruebler count displays in Motion Navigator

What is it?

In this release, the Gruebler count is always displayed in the Gruebler Countcolumn in the Motion Navigator. In previous versions, the Gruebler countwas displayed in the NX status line, and was only displayed at certain times,such as when you created a joint.

The Gruebler count is a software estimate of the number of degrees of freedomin a Motion Simulation mechanism. The display for the solution includessolution-specific, stand-alone motion drivers; the display for the simulationdoes not include stand-alone drivers.


Digital Simulation

Import a Process Simulate Kinematics model

What is it?

The Tecnomatix Process Simulate on Teamcenter application allows you todesign, analyze, simulate, and optimize manufacturing processes from thefactory level down to lines and workcells. In this release, you can import aProcess Simulate Kinematics model into NX Motion Simulation to leveragethe more powerful kinematics modeling available in NX. Links and jointsthat were created in Process Simulate import as links and joints in theMotion Simulation model.

There is no ability to export the NX Motion model back to Process Simulate.

Teamcenter Integration is required.

Where do I find it?

Application Motion SimulationPrerequisite Teamcenter Integration for NX

Motion NavigatorRight-click a simulation file®Import®Process SimulateKinematics


Digital Simulation

Additional support for Measure commands

What is it?

In this release, the Measure Angle command and the Measure packagingoption (with Type set to Angle) now have the ability to monitor and displayangles between a geometry object in the mechanism and a datum plane,datum axis, or planar face.

Where do I find it?


Motion toolbar®AnimationMenu Analysis®Motion®Animation

Context menu for motion objects in graphics window

What is it?

When you right-click a motion object, such as a link or joint, in the graphicswindow, a context menu appears that lets you perform basic commands onthe object. Depending on the type of object you right-click, the commandsmay include:

• Select from List— Opens the QuickPick dialog box

• Hide— Hides the object (the same as if you had cleared the check box forthe object in the Motion Navigator).

• Edit — Opens the object in the appropriate editing dialog box, such asthe Joint dialog box.

• Delete — Deletes the object.

• Edit Display— Opens the Edit Object Display dialog box.

• Information— Opens the Information window for the object.

Bar graph option

What is it?

You can now create a bar graph using the NX Functions and Graphing tools.

After you plot a graph, you can choose Bar as the Graph Style when youedit the graph curve.


Digital Simulation

Force graph displayed with Bar option

Same graph displayed with default Line option

Where do I find it?

Application Motion Simulation or Advanced Simulation


Digital Simulation

Prerequisites A plotted function.Toolbar

XY Graph toolbar®Edit ®double-click the graphcurve


Curve Options dialog box®Graph Style list®Bar.

Change parent and child object colors in Customer Defaults

What is it?

When you select motion objects in the Motion Navigator, relationshipsbetween the objects are indicated with color. For example, when you select ajoint, all child links of the joint are highlighted with color. When you select alink, all parent joints of the link are highlighted with a different color. Youcan now change these colors in the Customer Defaults for the Part Navigator.


Digital Simulation

Parent objects displayed in blue; child objects in pink

Where do I find it?

Application Motion SimulationMenu File®Utilities®Customer Defaults®Gateway®Part

Navigator®Parent Objects Color and Child ObjectsColor

NX 7 Motion Simulation

RecurDyn Solid 3D Contact

What is it?

A new type of 3D Contact has been added for the RecurDyn solver. The Solidcontact method generates a force between two links when they come into


Digital Simulation

contact. Each link is represented as a single solid for contact purposes. Thismethod solves much faster and is more accurate than the existing Facetedand Fitted contact methods.

You should use the Solid contact method for most contact situations. Ingeneral, the Faceted and Fitted methods are now useful only for backwardcompatibility with existing Motion mechanisms.

For more information, see 3D Contact for solid bodies in the MotionSimulation online Help.

Where do I find it?


Motion toolbar®3D ContactMenu Insert®Connector®3D Contact

Joint Wizard support for assembly constraints

What is it?

The Motion Simulation Joint Wizard now converts assembly constraints(as well as legacy mating conditions) to appropriate links and jointsautomatically. In previous releases, only mating conditions were supported.

The wizard creates the appropriate joint type based on the degrees of freedomin the components referenced by the assembly constraint. For example, if theassembly constraint removes five degrees of freedom (leaving one rotationaldegree of freedom), the Joint Wizard creates a revolute joint.


../../ugdoc/html_files/motion/index.html?goto=motion/solid_contact_overview.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation

Translational DOF Rotational DOF Joint to create0 0 Fixed0 1 Revolute1 0 Slider1 1 Cylindrical2 1 Planar0 3 Spherical or AtPoint0 2 Universal1 3 InLine2 3 InPlane3 0 Orientation3 1 Parallel3 2 Perpendicular

The wizard also infers the origin and orientation of the joint based on thegeometry referenced by the assembly constraint. When you convert a jointfrom an assembly constraint, the wizard creates a smart point for the jointmarker origin. This makes the joint position update automatically if theCAD model is modified.

The Joint Wizard runs automatically when you create a new MotionSimulation from an assembly that contains either mating conditions orassembly constraints.

Where do I find it?

Application Motion SimulationPrerequisite Assembly that contains mating conditions or assembly

constraints

Driver for Point on Curve constraint

What is it?

With the RecurDyn solver, you can now create a motion driver for use with aPoint on Curve constraint. Use the Driver dialog box to create a Constant,Harmonic, or Function driver (Displacement and Velocity data types only)and assign it to the Point on Curve constraint. This ability lets you drive themotion of the point on curve tangential to the curve.


Digital Simulation

Also, new Customer Defaults settings have been added to control how NXcommunicates the curve representation to the RecurDyn solver. In mostcases, the default setting is recommended. However, if you have problemssolving the mechanism, you can try changing the new Curve ParameterizationMethod in Customer Defaults, as described in About the Point on Curvemethod in Customer Defaults.

Where do I find it?

Application Motion SimulationPrerequisite Normal Run solutionToolbar

Motion toolbar®DriverMenu Insert®Driver

Quasi Static Articulation option for Adams/Solver

What is it?

When using Adams/Solver and running an Articulation solution, you can nowchoose the algorithm for Adams/Solver to use: Quasi Static or Dynamic.• Quasi Static — (Default) Use this method for most Articulationsimulations.

• Dynamic— Use this method when your mechanism contains nonlinearattributes such as many bushings and/or high damping coefficients.

Note

Generally, with this type of nonlinear mechanism, you should use aNormal Run solution instead of Articulation. However, if you mustuse Articulation, use this Dynamic option.

In previous releases, the solver selected the method automatically, but thiscaused problems when solving some mechanisms.

For detailed information about each algorithm, see your Adams/Solverdocumentation.


../../ugdoc/html_files/motion/index.html?goto=motion/motion_point_curve_defaults.html&vars=-aux

../../ugdoc/html_files/motion/index.html?goto=motion/motion_point_curve_defaults.html&vars=-aux

Digital Simulation

To change the Articulation algorithm:


2. In the Customer Defaults dialog box, choose Motion®Analysis.

3. On the Adams page, select the appropriate option.


Chapter

13 NX Analysis


What is it?

One-step Formability Analysis is now Analyze Formability – One-step.

When you use this command, you can now:

• Specify the type of unform regions you want to create. A new Type groupis available with the following options: Entire Unform, IntermediateUnform, Advanced Unform.

• Use the new Advanced Unform type to do the following:

– Select curves that represent the location of the Draw Beads anddefine the corresponding strain while generating the flattened profile.Multiple Draw Beads with different strain values can also be used.

– Specify constraints for the Blank Holder and Draw Beads. A newAdvanced Constraints group is available.

– Specify springback match points and generate the springback facetedbody.

• Save the analysis results to the One-step feature. A new Save AnalysisResults into Feature option is available.

The solver is also enhanced to reflect the differences in the unform profilesand thickness, strain, or stress results when using different materials.

The One-step Unform feature is listed in the main panel of the Part Navigator.

Where do I find it?

Analyze Formability – One-step dialog box

Application Gateway, Modeling, Progressive Die Wizard, AerospaceSheet Metal


NX Analysis

ToolbarAnalysis®Analyze Formability – One-step

Body Design®Analyze Formability – One-step

Die Engineering®Analyze Formability – One-step

Progressive Die Wizard®Sheet Metal Tools®Analyze

Formability – One-step

Aerospace Sheet Metal®Flat Pattern Feature

Drop-down list®Analyze Formability – One-stepMenu In Gateway, choose Analysis®Analyze Formability –

One-step

In the Body Design application, choose Tools®VehicleDesign Automation®Body Design®AnalyzeFormability – One-step

In the Die Engineering application, chooseTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Analyze Formability – One-step

In the Progressive Die Wizard application, chooseTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Sheet Metal Tools®Analyze Formability –One-step

In the Aerospace Sheet Metal application, chooseInsert®Flat Pattern®Analyze Formability – One-step


Analyze Formability – One-step dialog box®Typegroup®Advanced Unform

Analyze Formability – One-step dialog box®AdvancedConstraints group (Available when Type is set toAdvanced Unform)

Analyze Formability – One-step customer defaults


Analysis®Analyze Formability – One-step®AdvancedConstraints tab

Analysis®Analyze Formability – One-step®Solvertab®Save Analysis Results into Feature


NX Analysis

Durability Wizard

What is it?






• Fatigue life








NX Analysis





Where do I find it?




Space Finder

What is it?

The Space Finder command enhancement lets you:

• Set a user defined precision for inner volume calculation.

• Send the results to the Information window.


Use a user defined precision when other precision options do not produceresults with the accuracy you expect.

Where do I find it?

Menu Analysis ® Space Finder

NX – SIZER Integration

What is it?

This enhancement is an integration between NX and SINAMICSMICROMASTER SIZER software. You can do the following:


NX Analysis

• Export input parameters for motor selection to SIZER. The source ofthe load cycle is in the motion graphs which are part of a given motionsolution.

• Import 3D geometry and input parameters for motor selection fromSIZER. The geometry is added to your model as a component.


You can transfer input parameters and 3D geometry for motor selectionbetween NX and SIZER to support the sizing, configuration, and selectionof drive components.

Where do I find it?

Application Motion SimulationPrerequisite You must open a model.

Toolbar

Reuse Library ® Export to SIZER

Reuse Library ® Import from SIZERMenu Tools ® Reuse Library ® SIZER


Chapter

14 Product Validation

Check-Mate

Check-Mate enhancements

What is it?

Check-Mate functionality is enhanced to integrate it more closely into theproduct lifecycle management (PLM) process. The enhancements include:

• Support for other applications with the checking and HD3D display tools.

• A Check-Mate Result column in the Assembly Navigator.

• Ability to allow Check-Mate to automatically or manually fix problems.

• Enhancements to specific checkers.

• Streamlining of batch processing capability.


Product validation and requirements validation are a key part of the PLMprocess. Use Check-Mate product validation to check that models meetquality and best practice standards.


Product Validation

Where do I find it?

Resource bar HD3D Tools® Check-MateToolbar Check-MateMenu Analysis®Check-Mate

Check-Mate Result column in the Assembly Navigator

What is it?

A Check-Mate Result column is added to the Assembly Navigator. You mayneed to add this column if it is not displayed by default.

This column displays icons that indicate whether a component failed aCheck-Mate test, passed with a warning, or has information associated withthe test result. The icons are the same as the standard Check-Mate resulticons that appear in HD3D Tools dialog box. No icon is displayed if thecomponent is not loaded or has not been tested.

You can:

• Sort the Assembly Navigator nodes by this column.

• Display the tool tip on the status icon for more information.

Tip

An assembly or subassembly can pass all the checks, but componentsinside the assembly may have failed checks.

To view the status of all components in an assembly, right-click in thebackground of the Assembly Navigator and choose Expand All.


Product Validation


Use the Check-Mate Result column to visually scan the Check-Mate resultsfor all components in an assembly.

Where do I find it?

Check-Mate Result column option

AssemblyNavigator

Right-click in the background® Columns®Check-Mate Result

Check-Mate healing options

What is it?

Check-Mate now provides the capability of fixing errors as well as findingthem. This process is called healing.

Some checks provide healing options to allow the check to repair problems.For example, a test that checks for sharp edges may be able to apply edgeblends. A test that checks for hidden objects may be able to change thevisibility state of the hidden objects.

When healing is enabled using Customer Defaults, the healing options willbe visible with the checkers.

Healing options allow you to:

• Specify whether to allow Check-Mate to perform healing.

• Allow the healing process to automatically fix errors or to manuallyprompt the user to fix them

• Specify whether to rerun the check after healing.


Use healing to allow Check-Mate to repair errors.


Product Validation

Where do I find it?

MenuFile→ Utilities→ Customer Defaults→ Analysis→Check-Mate

Check-Mate applications support

What is it?

Check-Mate now supports Weld Advisor and Mold Wizard as well asModeling, Drafting, Assemblies, and Sheet Metal and Routing.

Checks written for these applications can be displayed in the HD3D ToolsCheck-Mate dialog box.


Run validation tests on models from other NX applications using the sameCheck-Mate tools and methods.

Where do I find it?

Menu Insert→ Welding→ Welding AdvisorResource bar HD3D Tools→ Check-Mate

Check-Mate rule files

What is it?

Rule files can control how tests are run and how the results are displayed.

Using rule files, you can:

• Specify which tests are run on different part types.

• Specify which tests are displayed for selection when setting up tests.

• Filter the displayed test results to show only certain types of tests.

• Specify which test results are stored.

To use a rule file interactively, you must define its location on the Check-MateRule tab in the Customer Defaults dialog box.

Rule files can be stored in the operating system or in Teamcenter. InTeamcenter, they are stored as ValidationRuleSet datasets.

A Validation Rule Set Editor is provided to create and edit the rule files. InWindows systems, this is usually available in the Start menu in NX Tools.


Product Validation


Use rule files to automate the Check-Mate process, to enforce site-widestandards of what tests are run.

Where do I find it?

New Customer Defaults settings have been added to support the Check-Mateoptions for rules files.

Menu

File→ Utilities→ Customer Defaults→ Analysis→Check-Mate

Click on the Rule tab to select options defining how therule files will be used.

Check-Mate test enhancements

What is it?

New checkers and functions have been added or enhanced along withdocumentation that appears in the HD3D Check-Mate Result dialog box.Some of the categories of enhancements include:

• Modeling enhancements include:

– New SASIG PDQ checkers

– Functions to check that the weight data is up-to-date

– Check that the part is in History mode

• Drawing check enhancements include:

– Functions to check drafting style of objects such as dimensions and text

– Functions to check for shaded views

• Assembly enhancements include:

– Functions to check for components without geometry

– Functions to check component suppression

– Functions to check component arrangements

• Enhancements have made to checks for expressions:

– Checks that include expression types other than numeric

– Check for unused expressions


Product Validation

• Spell checking functions for part attributes and drawing annotationshave been enhanced:

– Allow standard dictionaries for spell checking

– Allow users to exclude special strings

• New checkers and functions can make standard checks that are oftenperformed before releasing files, including:

– Check that WAVE links are up-to-date

– Check to see that part history had been removed

– Check that the “last application” state matches the contents. Forexample to check that drawings are saved in Drafting application,parts in Modeling, and so on.

Where do I find it?

The complete list of new and enhanced checks is available when setting uptests.

View the complete documentation on checkers and functions in the QuickReference available within NX from the Check-Mate Author Tools dialog box.

Menu

Analysis→ Check-Mate→ Author Tests

Click the Quick Reference button.

Check-Mate Set Up Tests enhancements

What is it?

The process of setting up tests has been improved with enhancements to theParts tab in the Check-Mate dialog box.

• A Calculate Part Count for Run button reports the number of partsthat will be tested and the number of parts that will be skipped based onthe options selected.

• You can sort the parts to test in order of file name by clicking on the Partsto Test column heading.


Product Validation

Calculate Part Count for Run button

Parts to Test column heading


Knowing the number of parts on which each selected test will be run will helpestimate how long the selected tests will take to run.

Sorting the selected parts by name makes it easier to scan for parts in the list.

Where do I find it?

Toolbars and menus:

Toolbar Checkmate→Set Up TestsMenu Analysis→Checkmate→Set Up Tests

HD3D Tools:

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab ®double-click Check-MateLocation in dialogbox Settings group®Set Up Tests


Product Validation

Check-Mate batch processing

What is it?

The ug_check_part utility now has a –flat_report option. Use this optionto display results while the tests are running. You can redirect the outputto a text file.


Importing the test results into a spreadsheet in a flat report may be useful forperforming further data analysis on the test results.

Where do I find it?

Command line ug_check_part –help

Check-Mate customer defaults

What is it?

New customer defaults are added to support the new Check-Mate functions.

• Use the Rule options to define the location of rule files, and how theyare used.

• Use the HD3D options to define the locations of site-specific directories.

• Use the Heal options to enable manual or automatic healing for certaintests when errors are found.

Additional defaults are added to the Run Options tab to define the defaultvalues used when setting up tests.

Tip

On the Customer Defaults dialog box, click Find Default to searchfor specific options. Search for Check-Mate to find these and otheroptions.


Where do I find it?

Menu File→ Utilities→ Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox Analysis→ Check-Mate


Product Validation

Check Requirements

Defining requirements

Requirement definition using a formula

What is it?

You can use a formula to define a complex requirement that cannot be definedusing a comparison or a set of values.

Example

Suppose a specification exists that the measured product length isbetween 50 mm and 100 mm or between 250 mm and 300 mm. You candefine this requirement by specifying the Formula definition methodand entering a complex logic or a Knowledge Fusion function. For thisexample, you could use this formula:

50[mm] < [expression]&& [expression] <100[mm] || 250[mm] < [expression]&& [expression] <300[mm]

The formula follows NX expression syntax and supports Design Logic. Thetarget is represented by the keyword [expression] and must be referenced atleast once inside the formula. The formula always evaluates to true or false.

Data Types for requirements

What is it?

You can choose any of the following data types for a requirement:

• Number

• Integer

• String

• Boolean

The data type is used to ensure a match between a requirement and theexpression in a data check. When you create a check in NX, the softwarecompares the check’s evaluated expression data type with the requirementdata type.

Example

If the requirement data type is String, but p0 is entered as the targetexpression and p0 evaluates to a Number, the software displays anerror message regarding the mismatch.


Product Validation

You can specify the data type in the following locations:

• In the Ad Hoc Requirement dialog box in NX. Select a type from theData Type list.

• In a spreadsheet. In the ValueType column for a requirement, enter thedata type you want.

• In an XML file. In the attributes for a requirement item, use the keywordValueType, and enter the data type you want.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingMenu Analysis®Check Requirement


• Right-click User Requirements®New Requirement

or

• Right-click a user requirement name®EditRequirement

and then in the Ad Hoc Requirement dialog box®DataType list

Managing External Requirements from all sources

Source Type for External Requirements customer default

What is it?

You can set the Source Type for External Requirements customer default tospecify the default source for external requirements. Your choices are:

• Teamcenter

• Teamcenter Systems Engineering (TcSE)

• Spreadsheet or XML File

External requirements cannot be mixed between Teamcenter and Teamcentersystems engineering. However, even if you select Teamcenter or Teamcentersystems engineering as the default external requirements source, you canselect the option Allow Files as Additional Requirements Sources inTeamcenter or TcSE to still get requirements from a file.

If Spreadsheet or XML File is the default source, only files can be used as asource for new external requirements. You can use files in the native file


Product Validation

system. If you are running Teamcenter Integration for NX, you can alsouse files in the connected database.


The customer default requirements source determines source options thatappear within the Check Requirements dialog box.

Where do I find it?


Analysis®Check Requirements®Source Type forExternal Requirements

All displayed requirements saved with part

What is it?

All displayed external requirements are saved with a part whether they areused by a check or not.

Tip

To remove requirements that are not used, use the context menuRemove command for external requirements and the Delete commandfor internal requirements.


You can create a part template with requirements from external sources.When you create a new part using this part template, you can see therequirements before you begin designing the part.

Refreshing requirements

What is it?

You have two methods for refreshing requirements data to ensure thatcurrent data is present in the part:

• Set the Refresh Outdated Requirements when Part is Opened default toautomatically refresh data when the part is opened.

• Click the Refresh Requirements From External Source button within theCheck Requirements dialog box.

Where do I find it?

Refresh Outdated Requirements when Part is Opened customer default


Product Validation

MenuFile®Utilities®Customer Defaults and thenAnalysis®Check Requirements.

Refresh Requirements From External Source button

Application ModelingMenu Analysis®Check RequirementsLocation in dialogbox Fetch Requirements group

Managing External Requirements from Teamcenter

Link and Unlink requirements from Teamcenter

What is it?

The Check Requirements dialog box contains a Trace Link column. Thecolumn contains a link icon when a trace link exists between theTeamcenter requirement and the NX part.

• Use Create Trace Link to create a trace link between a part and aTeamcenter requirement.

• Use Remove Trace Link to remove a trace link.


In Teamcenter a system engineer can associate requirements with the ItemRevision or BOM Line for an NX part. When the NX designer creates theactual part under that item revision and opens the Check Requirementsdialog box, the requirements linked to the current work part are shown andmarked.

From within NX, a designer can create a trace link to the requirement tosupport understanding of the reasons for design decisions, and to potentiallyalert engineers to the effects of changes to design requirements. A linkbetween a requirement and a part will be shown in a Trace Link Reportin Teamcenter Rich Client.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteMust be running Teamcenter Integration. The currentwork part must be saved in order to link or unlink.

Menu Analysis®Check Requirements


Product Validation

Dialog BoxRequirement row®right-click®Create Trace Link orRemove Trace Link

Dragging requirements to work parts

What is it?

You can drag requirement objects from the Teamcenter Navigator to thecurrent work part or selected feature.

A special cursor appears during the drag operation, and features aredisplayed in the pre-selection color as the cursor passes over them.


The requirement you drag is loaded and a link is created between the selectedrequirement and the part.

When dragged to a feature, a requirement check is also created with therequirement and the feature expression.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite

Must be running Teamcenter Integration andthe connected Teamcenter version must supportRequirement Check results.

Resource bar Teamcenter Navigator tab

Specify Requirement Revision Rule

What is it?

You can use the Requirement Revision Rule command button in theCheck Requirements dialog box to set the revision rule for all displayedrequirements that use revision rules. If a rule change means a differentrequirement revision now matches the rule, that revision replaces the formerrevision. Requirements with specific fixed revisions are not affected.

You can also set a customer default revision rule to use when loading newrequirements from Teamcenter.

Where do I find it?

Requirement Revision Rule



Product Validation

Prerequisite

Must be running NX in managed mode and theconnected Teamcenter version must supportRequirement Check results.

Menu Analysis®Check RequirementsLocation in dialogbox Requirement Revision Rule button

Customer Default Revision Rule


Analysis®Check Requirements®DefaultRequirements Revision Rule

Viewing documents associated with Teamcenter requirements

What is it?

You can view the document associated with a requirement object inTeamcenter using the View Document command.

Note

The requirement document you see is associated in Teamcenter with aValidationReq item, not a RequirementSpec item.


You can get a better understanding about the requirement by viewing the fulldocument of a requirement.

Where do I find it?


PrerequisiteYou must be running Teamcenter Integration onWindows.

Menu Analysis®Check RequirementsLocation in dialogbox

Appropriate requirement row®right-click®ViewDocument

Browsing requirements in NX Relations Browser

What is it?

You can browse relations between trace-linked requirements and parts usingthe NX Relations Browser.


Product Validation

You can use the Show Requirement Links command to open the browser andget relationships from Teamcenter.


You can find out which requirements are linked to a part, and which parts arelinked to a requirement from within NX.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisite


TeamcenterNavigator

Right-click a part item or a requirement item®ShowRequirement Links


Dialog boxAppropriate requirement row®right-click®ShowRequirement Links.

Managing Requirement Checks

Re-parenting Requirement Checks

What is it?

You can re-parent a check by dragging a check from one requirement toanother in the Check Requirements dialog box.


Dragging allows you to move a check from one requirement to another withouthaving to delete the check and recreate it under a different requirement.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingMenu Analysis®Check Requirements

Viewing check dependencies in the Part Navigator

What is it?

In the Part Navigator, different colors are used to display the dependenciesbetween checks, features, and expressions.


Product Validation

Example

When you select a feature item in the Part Navigator, a dependentcheck is displayed in blue. When you select a check, the parent featureand the expression it depends on are displayed in red.


You can quickly see which expressions and features a check depends on, andwhich checks are used by a feature or expression.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingResource bar Part Navigator

Checks folder status in the Part Navigator

What is it?

The status icon for the Checks folder in Part Navigator reflects the status ofthe checks inside the folder.

• indicates that all requirement checks pass.

The following three icons, from least severe to most severe, indicate thatat least one requirement check fails. The folder status icon shows themost severe level failure.

• indicates that at least one check fails, Information severity level.

• indicates that at least one check fails, Warning severity level.

• indicates that at least one check fails, Error severity level.


You can see whether or not all requirement checks pass without having toexpand the Checks folder.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPart Navigator Checks folder


Product Validation

Requirement Check notification message

What is it?

The Show Requirement Check Message customer default determines atwhat requirement check failure level the software displays a message.

The message box includes the following command buttons:

• Send Email. Use this command to create an e-mail message containingthe error message text.

• Reference. Use this command to view more detailed information aboutthe failure.

Where do I find it?


Analysis®Check Requirement®Show RequirementCheck Message

Saving check results to Teamcenter

What is it?

Use the following Save Results to Teamcenter shortcut commands to specifywhether or not to save requirement check results to the Teamcenter database:

• Do Not Save

• Save if Passed

• Always Save


The saved results can be used in Teamcenter workflows, in conjunction withthe Validation Workflow handlers, to ensure that product requirements aremet before parts are released.

Where do I find it?


Prerequisites


Part NavigatorChecks folder®requirement item®right-click arequirement check®Save Results to Teamcenter



Product Validation


Right-click the appropriate requirement checkrow®Save Results to Teamcenter


Chapter

15 Systems Design

Routing Systems

Routing Electrical

Stock Twist and Stock Fold

What is it?

Use the Stock Twist and Stock Fold commands to model flat ribbon cables.


These commands help you model twists and folds in flat ribbon cables.

Where do I find it?

Application Routing Electrical

Toolbar

Routing Electrical→Stock®Stock list®Stock Twist

Routing Electrical®Stock list®Stock FoldMenu Insert®Routing Stock®Stock Twist/Stock Fold

Formboard Version 2

What is it?

Formboard Version 2 is the next version of the formboard application.Formboard V2 will:

• Create formboard drawings allowing you to lay them out in a preferredway.

• Update formboards.

• Allow you to change the shaping of segments so that branches fall whereyou want them to fall.


Systems Design

• Provide a cut sheet for the formboard.

• Provide for annotations of object attributes.

• Provide a means of automatic annotation.

• Provide dimensioning of paths.

• Flip components easily in the plane of the formboard.


Use Formboard V2 when you layout a harness for manufacturing.

Where do I find it?

Application Routing Electrical and Drafting

Toolbar Formboard ToolsMenu Tools®Formboard

Create Formboard

What is it?

Use the Create Formboard command to create a formboard drawing,


This command is useful when you want to create a formboard drawing ofyour harness.

Where do I find it?


ToolbarFormboard Tools®Create Formboard list®CreateFormboard Drawing

Menu Tools®Formboard®Create Formboard Drawing

Formboard Layout

What is it?

Use the Formboard Layout command to specify how to layout your formboardon creation. This includes the main run for the formboard, branch angles,minimum separation between branches, and the size of a formboard frame.


Systems Design


This command helps you determine the initial look of your formboarddrawing.

Where do I find it?


ToolbarFormboard Tools®Create Formboard list®FormboardLayout

Menu Tools®Create Formboard®Formboard Layout

Update Formboard

What is it?

Use the Update Formboard command to update your formboard based onchanges that you made in the 3D model. The formboard updates to reflectany changes to the 3D model, such as added wires, deleted wires, or changesin wire lengths.

Update Formboard replaces Synchronize Formboard.


This command is useful when you want your formboard to match your 3Dharness assembly.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Formboard Tools®Create Formboard list®Update

FormboardMenu Tools®Create Formboard®Update Formboard

Orient Branch

What is it?

Use the Orient Branch command to change the angle of a branch in yourformboard with respect to another segment/branch.


This command is useful when you want to move a branch to better fit withina certain area as defined by your physical formboard.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Formboard Tools®Orientation list®Orient BranchMenu Tools®Formboard®Orient Branch

Shape Segment

What is it?

Use the Shape Segment command to change the shape or orientation of asegment in the formboard part. With this command you can:

• Change the angle of a linear segment with respect to its original anglefrom a root point.

• Change the shape of the segment to a spline.

• Change the shape of the segment to a radial bend (line/arc/lineconfiguration) so the rest of the branch fits within your formboard framearea.

Shape Segment replaces Modify Path.


Use Shape Segment to fit the branch attached to the segment within yourformboard frame area.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Formboard Tools Orientation list ®Shape Segment

Menu Tools®Formboard®Shape Segment

Cut Sheet Annotation

What is it?

Use the Cut Sheet Annotation command to display a listing of harnessinformation (such as cut length) available in the Connection List. A cut sheettemplate annotation can be created and multiple cut sheets can reside ina formboard drawing.


Systems Design


This command is useful when you want to add a tabular note on yourformboard drawing with the information you specify.

Where do I find it?


ToolbarFormboard Tools ®Annotation list®Cut SheetAnnotation

Menu Tools®Formboard Annotation®Cut Sheet Annotation

Object Attribute Annotation

What is it?

Use the Object Attribute Annotation command to create an annotation abouta bundle or an overstock. An Object Attribute Annotation contains any visiblerouting object’s attributes instead of the Connection List values. It supportsuser formatting (when you use the Style option) and can be stored/defined asa template annotation.


This command is useful when you have additional information stored asattributes on a routing object that you want displayed in your formboard.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Formboard Tools® Annotation list®Object Attribute

Annotation

MenuTools®Formboard Annotation®Object AttributeAnnotation

Automatic Annotation

What is it?

Use the Automatic Annotation command to have the software place manyobject attribute annotations specific to a type of object automatically. Afteryou create a template annotation for the type, you can place several objectattributes automatically.


Systems Design


This command helps you to place several annotations for a given object typeat the same time.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Formboard Tools®Annotation list®Automatic

AnnotationMenu Tools®Formboard Annotation®Automatic Annotation

Path Length Dimension

What is it?

Use the Path Length Dimension command to define a dimension on a routingpath.


This command is useful when you want to know the length of a path on yourformboard. The path length note updates as the path changes.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Formboard Tools®Path Length DimensionMenu Tools®Formboard Tools®Path Length Dimension

Flip Formboard Component

What is it?

Use the Flip Component command to rotate a component on the formboardplane by 180º. The port of the connector remains in the plane of theformboard. Instead of having your 90º connector face left in the drawing, youcan flip the connector to face right.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Formboard Tools®Flip ComponentMenu Tools®Formboard®Flip Component


Systems Design

Routing Bill of Materials

What is it?

Use the Routing Bill of Materials command to create a Bill of Materials(BOM) tabular note for your routing part. The Routing BOM understandsrouting stock (including overstock, and wire stock) and routing user definedobjects (UDOs) for gaskets, nuts, and bolts.


This command helps you to get a list of the Routing items in an assembly.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Formboard Tools®Annotation list®Routing Bill of

MaterialMenu Insert®Table®Routing BOM

Tables NavigatorDrag the Routing BOM template part onto a drawingsheet

Ship/Plant Cableways

What is it?

Ship/Plant Cableways provides functionality related to creating stocktransitions, and cableways enhancements.

• Stock Transition allows you to create a stock which acts as a transitionbetween two stocks with cross sections having the same number of curves.

• Cableways Properties functionality allows you to specify parameters formaximum percent fill and lock status on segments defining paths forrouting cable connections.

• View Cableways Layout allows you to view the arrangement of cables in acable tray space reservation/stock. A design rule violation will be createdif the no of cables routed through segment exceeds the max percent fill.


• With the Stock Transition command you can model reducers for cabletrays and HVAC ducts.

• With the Cableways Properties command you can control the paths forlaying cables through different routes and cable trays based on MaxPercent Fill, Locked Segments, and Cable Arrangements,


Systems Design

• With the View Cableways Layout command you can view how the cablesare arranged in your cable tray.

Where do I find it?

Application Routing Electrical and Routing Mechanical

Toolbar

Routing Electrical®Stock list®Stock Transition

Routing Mechanical®Stock list®Stock TransitionMenu Insert®Routing Stock

Application Routing Electrical and Routing Mechanical

Toolbar

Routing Electrical®Stock list®View Cableways

Layout

Routing Mechanical ®Stock list®View Cableways

Layout

Routing Electrical®Stock list®Cableways Properties

Routing Mechanical®Stock list®Cableways

Properties

Menu

Tools®View Cableways Layout

Tools®Cableways Properties

Routing Mechanical

Ship/Plant HVAC – Split Duct

What is it?

Use the Split Duct command to divide a rectangular stock into divisions. Therectangular stock can be in the form of a HVAC duct. Splitting a duct willenable you to appropriately divert the flow from the main duct into branchducts.


Split Duct provides a quick and easy way to split a rectangular stock intomultiple divisions. This will enable you to divert the flow in the main duct intothe branch ducts using the appropriate absolute or relative flow percentages.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?

Application Routing Mechanical

Toolbar Routing Tools®Split DuctMenu Tools®Split Duct

Routing General

Space Reservation

What is it?

Use the Space Reservation command to assign circular, rectangular, or flatoval Space Reservation stock on the selected segment(s).


This command provides a quick and easy way to assign space reservationstock.

Where do I find it?

Application Routing Electrical or Routing Mechanical

Toolbar

Routing Electrical®Stock list®New Space

Reservation

Routing Mechanical®Stock list®New Space

Reservation

Routing Electrical®Stock list®Edit Space

Reservation

Routing Mechanical®Stock list®Edit Space

Reservation

Menu

Insert®Routing Electrical®New Space Reservation

Insert®Routing Mechanical®New Space Reservation

Insert®Routing Electrical®Edit Space Reservation

Insert®Routing Mechanical®Edit Space Reservation

Graphics windowRight-click one or more segments®New SpaceReservation.


Systems Design

Reuse Library integration

What is it?

The Reuse Library Integration capability is a new way of organizing andplacing parts in the Routing Part Library. Those familiar with Routing canview the Reuse Library as a replacement for the Specify Item dialog box. TheReuse Library uses the existing PLV/PTB mechanism, so you do not need anyextra configuration. You will be able to use the Reuse Library immediately.

Routing is now integrated into the standard reuse library. This means youcan store routing parts using the Reuse Library Folder, Teamcenter, andTC Classification method and place those parts where you desire using theRouting Place Part dialog box (when in a Routing application).

For certain operations, such as Routing Preferences, Electrical Wizards,Specify Stock operations, and so on, the Specify Item dialog box opens toallow you to navigate the part library. For these operations, there is now anew Specify Item dialog box, which is essentially a reuse library navigator ina dialog box. It works the same as the Reuse Library Navigator and you canuse it to search the part library to select routing parts.


The Reuse Library provides an enhanced searching mechanism for therouting part library and a simple drag and drop interface for routing parts.

Where do I find it?

The Reuse Library Navigator is part of the tabbed navigators which includesthe Part Navigator and Assembly Navigator. In a Routing application, whenthe Reuse Library Navigator is expanded, the Routing Part Library will bedisplayed and available for use.

Application Routing Electrical and Routing MechanicalReuse LibraryNavigator Routing Part Library

Overstock on Fittings

What is it?

Use the Overstock on Fittings command to create overstock on routing parts.In earlier versions of NX, you could only place overstock on other stock.


This command is useful when you want to insulate or protect routing partslike connectors, elbows, equipment, and so on. You can completely cover the


Systems Design

routing part, for example put insulation over an elbow in the middle of apiping run, or partially cover the routing part, for example, wrap overstockoff the bundle part of the way onto the connector.

Where do I find it?

Application Routing Electrical or Routing Mechanical

Toolbar

Routing Electrical®Stock list®Overstock on Fittings

Routing Mechanical®Stock list®Overstock on

Fittings

Routing Electrical®Stock list®Edit Overstock on

Fittings

Routing Mechanical®Stock list®Edit Overstock on

Fittings

Menu

Insert®Routing Stock®Overstock on Fittings

Insert®Routing Stock®Edit Overstock on Fittings

Graphics windowRight-click a routing part®Overstock on Fittings orEdit Overstock on Fittings.

Usability enhancements

What is it?

A number of dialog boxes have been updated to increase your productivity.

• There is a more logical layout in the dialog boxes to increase thediscoverability of commands.

• Common dialog box elements are reused across similar commands toachieve consistency of the user interface.

• The system will remember dialog box settings to gradually adapt NX toyour way of working.

• The location of dialog boxes and toolbars is managed so that the graphicswindow has minimal obstruction.


Systems Design

Automotive

General Packaging

2D Manikin enhancement

What is it?

The 2D Manikin wizard is enhanced to reflect the workflow, and has a newoption.

When you use the 2D Manikin command, you can now input posture valuesthat are out of the standard range. NX displays a warning when you do this,but allows you to proceed.

You can also perform the following activities faster:

• Review values.

• Focus on inputs of most interest.

• Conduct studies involving values out of the standard range.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPrerequisite You must define the vehicle coordinate system.


Systems Design

Toolbar

General Packaging®2D Manikin

Tip

To display this toolbar, right-click in the toolbararea and choose Industry Specific®GeneralPackaging.

MenuTools®Vehicle Design Automation®GeneralPackaging®2D Manikin

Tire Envelope enhancements

What is it?

The Tire Envelope wizard is enhanced to reflect the workflow, and has severalnew options. When you use this command, you can now:

• Set the Distance Tolerance option to determine how closely the sheetbody follows the radial cross section.

• Set the minimum distance between the radial section splines and thespindle line using the Add Trim Radius option.

• Access more layer setting controls.

• Select local spindle files in the Teamcenter environment using your filebrowser.

• Input different offset values in different locations on a radial sectionspline.

• Input offset values from the CSV offset file or a Windows spreadsheet file.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPrerequisite You must define the vehicle coordinate system.

Toolbar

General Packaging®Tire Envelope

Tip

To display this toolbar, right-click in the toolbararea and choose Industry Specific®GeneralPackaging.

MenuTools®Vehicle Design Automation®GeneralPackaging®Tire Envelope

Die Engineering

Draw Bead enhancements

What is it?

The Draw Bead command allows you to apply a bead shape to a sheet body.You can also create two sheets representing the faces of the upper and lowerdies containing the male and female bead shapes.

During sheet metal forming, beads directly influence the draw by controllingthe flow of material in the die.

This command now allows flexibility in defining transition areas and in howthe bead sheets are created. You can:


Systems Design

• Vary the shape of the bead along the length of the centerline bysubdividing the centerline into two or more segments, and then assigninga different bead shape to each segment.

• Apply a blend at the segment boundary to provide a smooth transitionbetween segments.

• Cap the ends of the bead by specifying a taper value for each end.


Use beads on sheet metal parts to strengthen the material.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering®Draw Bead

Tip

To display this toolbar, right-click in thetoolbar area and choose Industry Specific®DieEngineering.

MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Draw Bead

Springback Compensation

What is it?

Use the Springback Compensation command to adjust the die face of astamped sheet metal part to compensate for springback that occurs afterthe forming process.

Inputs for the command include the formed sheet metal, a dense set of pointson the formed sheet metal, and the corresponding set of points on the sprungsheet. You can obtain this data in the following ways:

• Use a formability analysis software that is capable of predictingspringback. In NX, you can use the Analyze Formability One-stepcommand. If you use a third party analysis package, you can importthe analysis results to NX as STL data to create faceted bodies. TheSpringback Compensation command can use these faceted bodies tocalculate the compensation.


Systems Design

• Use white light scanning to measure a physical part in the sprungposition. Corresponding points on the nominal surface must also begenerated. These measurements can then be imported to NX as STL files.

• Create two simple text files which contain manually generated point sets.The Springback Compensation command can read these files directly.

NX Analysis STL data files Text files

AnalyzeFormabilityOne-stepfeature

Or

Sprung facets

Product facets(optional)

Product sheetbody

Or

Sprung points

Product points(optional)

Product sheetbody

Springback Compensation

• Compensated sheet

• Compensated facets (optional)


Sheet metal panels formed in a stamping press spring back when the formingforce is released. That is, the metal returns to its original shape to somedegree due to elastic recovery of the material. Die engineers compensatefor this by exaggerating the formed shape, so that the panel springs backto the desired shape.

This command approximates the compensated shape of the die face that isneeded to produce the desired product sheet. The topology of the originalproduct sheet is preserved.

Where do I find it?



Systems Design

Toolbar

Die Engineering®Springback Compensation

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Springback Compensation

Develop Trim Line

What is it?

Use the Develop Trim Line command to develop flange faces onto addendumfaces.

During the stamping process, a flat blank sheet body is formed into thedesired shape, excess material is trimmed away, and then flanges are bentinto position. It is during the trim operation – when flanges are laid out onthe addendum – that an accurate trim line must be determined.

When you have two sheet bodies with thickness and material properties thatshare a common boundary, this command unforms or develops the boundaryof the first sheet onto the second. In Die Engineering, the first sheet is theflange, the second is the addendum, and their common boundary is the breakcurve. Unforming the flange boundary onto the addendum produces the trimline.

You can use this command either within the Die Operations Lineup (DOL)or independent of it.

You can:

• Develop the trim line automatically, by taking into consideration thespecified metal thickness and the bend allownace.

• Compute and displays a trim line that includes hoop strain values.

The values are displayed both numerically and with color codes.

• Compute and display the flange expansion values at points along the trimcurve. The flange expansion value is the area of the flange in final positiondivided by the area of the flange when it is laid out on the addendum.

• Determine if the type of unforming process is expansion or compression.

• Perform instantaneous local flange analysis at a point to determinesplitting in case of expansion, or wrinkling in case of compression.


Systems Design

• Detect any deflection in the part.

• Create a spine curve automatically to orient the bending planes if thebreak line does not match the bending curve.

• Use a spine curve, other than the break curve, to guide the unbendingoperation.

• Extend the product sheet tangentially along the break line if there is noaddendum.

You can export flange expansion values to a spreadsheet. The values aremeasured along sampled points of the trim curve

Product and flange faces

Trim line


This command is significantly faster than comparable tools based on finiteelement methods, without sacrificing accuracy of the results.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering®Develop Trim Line

Tip



Systems Design

MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Develop Trim Line

Quick Binder Wrap enhancement

What is it?

When you use the Quick Binder Wrap command, you can now create acomposite developable sheet body. This means that the sheet can be flattenedwithout splitting or wrinkling.

You first create a sheet body by first best fitting a single face to a givenpart, such as an automobile door panel. You can then add, remove, insert,and edit faces to create a composite sheet. The developability and unitnormal continuity are maintained during these operations. Moreover, theapexes of conical faces are kept outside the interior domain of the compositedevelopable sheet body.

You can:

• Add a planar or cylindrical or conical face to the outer edge of thecomposite developable sheet or insert one in between two faces.

• Extend an edge of a face.

• Change the radius of an edge or face which is cylindrical or conical.

• Reverse the convexity of a cylindrical or conical face.

• Delete a face.

• Specify the ruling direction and transform the composite developablesheet using a dynamic coordinate system.


A binder wrap is the shape of the blank when the die closes and before thepunch moves to give the sheet metal the desired shape. That shape should bedevelopable, and this command makes it developable.

This command is also useful in architectural design, for example in to createstaircases, and in packaging, for example, to design containers.

Where do I find it?



Systems Design

Toolbar

Die Engineering®Quick Binder Wrap

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Quick Binder Wrap

Uncut Regions

What is it?

Use the Uncut Regions command to identify uncut regions along a profilecurve by a 3–axes machining tool of a given radius. In other words, itdetermines the parts of the given curve that the machining tool cannot reachdue to its size. The profile curve usually lies in a plane perpendicular to thetool axis direction. However, this command also accommodates 3D curves.

From a modeling point of view the command:

• Smoothens the curve, on the upper and lower side of the curve with agiven radius in a view plane.

• Recommends a maximum size of the tool. If this size is used no uncutregions remain.


Systems Design

When you use this command, the following objects are displayed:

• Curves that define the uncut area between the part and the path of thecutting tool.

• The points at the ends of these curves.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering®Uncut Regions

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Uncut Regions


Systems Design

Trim Task Assistant enhancements

What is it?

The Trim Task Assistant dialog box now has the Create Scrap option.This option lets you create a sheet body that represents the scrap materialtrimmed from the part.

Other enhancements are as follows:

• You can use the Trim Task Assistant command on sheet bodies that arenot in die position (-ZC).

• You can export trim and wall angles to a spreadsheet using the newExport Trim Angles option. Each row of the spreadsheet consists of:

– Point coordinates on the trim curve where the trim angle value iscalculated.

– The trim angle value.

• When dragging a trim division, the division can snap to a point, plane,or datum plane.

• If a plane or datum plane is selected, the orientation of the trim divisionaligns with the plane.

• The Trim Task Assistant creates datum planes.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering®Trim Task Assistant

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Trim Task Assistant


Export Trim Angles

More Options ®Create Scrap check box


Systems Design

Addendum Section enhancements

What is it?

When you use the Addendum Section command, you can now:

• Perform formability analysis during section construction. You can viewthe formability characteristics of a surface that was built using thesections that you created.

• Access standard section shapes that were saved in the Reuse Library.

• Assign attributes, such as color, to individual sections.

• Exercise more control over the shape of transition areas.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering®Addendum Section

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Addendum Section

DOL Assembly Structure

Lineup enhancement

What is it?

You can now read the orientation of the lineup created using the Lineupcommand from the WCS. You can also change the orientation by editing thelineup.

Where do I find it?



Systems Design

Toolbar

Die Engineering®Lineup

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Lineup

DOL assembly enhancements

What is it?

Die Engineering commands now work across the components in an assembly.

Stamping operations can reside in different part files.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering

Die Tip enhancement

What is it?

The Define Product Orientation function in the Die Tip dialog box nowdisplays a depth analysis plot. Use the new Visualize Depth option to displaya plot in the graphics window.

You can control the color coding of the display of the draft analysis and depthanalysis by using the Draw Depth Settings in the Visualization Optionsdialog box.


Systems Design

Draw Depth Settings include:

• Pass — Specifies the color for the portion of the product that is in anacceptable draw depth condition.

• Warning— Specifies the threshold at which the draw depth is no longerconsidered safe. You can also specify a color to display the portions ofthe product that are in this state.

• Failure— Specifies the condition of the product at which the draw depthcauses it to fail. You can also specify a color to display the portions ofthe product that are in this state.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering®Die Tip

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Die Tip


Die Tip dialog box®Define ProductOrientation®Visualize Depth

Die Tip dialog box®Define ProductOrientation®Visualization Options®DrawDepth Settings


Systems Design

DOL Report enhancement

What is it?

Customized information can now be obtained in the DOL Report. To dothis, customize the input using the More Details option for the followingcommands:

• Die Tip

• Form Task

• Flange Task

• Trim Task

• Pierce Task

• Binder Ring

• Draw Bead

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering®DOL Report

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®DOL Report

Trim Task, Pierce Task enhancements

What is it?

The Trim Task and Pierce Task commands now allow you to turn the displayof trim angle violations on or off.

You can create bodies that represent the scrap that is cut away using theCreate Scrap option in the following locations:

• The Trim Task dialog box


Systems Design

• The Pierce Task dialog box

• The DOL Report

Turning this option on or off in the DOL Report also turns this option on oroff for all the Trim Task and Pierce Task features.

You can also show or hide these scrap bodies.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Engineering®Trim Task /Pierce Task

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Trim Task/Pierce Task

Die Design

Sub-feature commands

New sub-feature commands

What is it?

Use the Sub-features commands to create die design features that can beaccessed in the Part Navigator and edited independent of the main casting.


Systems Design

Using these commands you can:

• Create fill areas by adding material in a closed area in a die design casting.

• Remove material to accommodate the panel automation in an uppercasting.

• Clear an area of the casting for gage instrumentation, grippers, or liftmachinery.

• Remove material from a casting for handling operations.

• Add or remove relief from an area of the casting.


The Sub-features commands help you to create fill areas, finger clearancenotches, clearances, handling cores, and machine relief areas on the casting.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Design®Sub-features Drop-down list

Tip

To display this toolbar, right-click in the toolbararea and choose Industry Specific®Die Design.

MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieDesign®Sub-features


Systems Design

Fill Area

What is it?

Use this command to create a fill area feature on a die design casting. Youcan add or subtract material in a closed area on a casting.

This command obtains input data from the target you select and can makeinput optional in the dialog box.

Draw die punch

Base flange Product contact

Scrap area User defined fill area


You can:

• Create a flange at the base of the die.


Systems Design

• Create a product contact area in the upper deck of a die. This is useful fordesigning cast relief in the die face.

• Remove material for use in a trim die.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Design®Sub-features Drop-down list®Fill Area

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieDesign®Sub-features®Fill Area

Finger Clearance Notch

What is it?

Use this command to create a finger clearance notch feature on the uppercasting portion of the die set. This notch is useful for automation tools thatlift and transfer the panel from one press operation to the next.

To create the notch, you do the following:

• Select the geometry that represents the press equipment.

• Use a section, a face, or a sheet to define the clearance area.

• Specify the width and depth for the notch relief.

• Specify the orientation for the clearance.


Systems Design

• Specify a clearance direction if necessary.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Design®Sub-features Drop-down list®Finger

Clearance Notch

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieDesign®Sub-features®Finger Clearance Notch

Clearance

What is it?

Use this command to create a clearance feature on a casting. The clearancecan accommodate the following devices:

• Gage instrumentation

• A gripper

• A lifter

Material is removed to accommodate gage and lifter equipment. A notch iscreated for a gripper. You can specify the clearance direction.

Casting


Systems Design

Gage clearance Gripper clearance Lifter clearance

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Design®Sub-features Drop-down list®Clearance

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieDesign®Sub-features®Clearance

Handling Core

What is it?

Use this command to create a handling core feature on a casting. Arectangular portion of the material is removed from the casting toaccommodate the following:

• Chains used for moving the casting.

• Piping that needs to be routed through the casting for cooling or forhydraulic actuation of the die set.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Design®Sub-features Drop-down list®Handling

Core

Tip


MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieDesign®Sub-features®Handling Core

Machine Relief

What is it?

Use this command to create a machine relief on a casting. You can removematerial for relief, add material to thicken a wall, or add a support structurefor cam guidance.


Systems Design

Cam Thicken Relief


This command is useful when you want to create the following:

• Clearances in the casting, for example, the clearance between the belt faceand the trim steels.

• Additional supports along the main wall of the casting, for example, theadditional support for a flanging operation using high strength steel.

• Guiding structures necessary for cam steels, bypass angles, and additionalwall support structures added to the upper die set.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Die Design®Sub-features Drop-down list®Cam

Definition

Tip



Systems Design

MenuTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieDesign®Sub-features®Cam Definition

Ship Design

Steel planning/sectioning

Enhanced usability of the Section feature

What is it?

The Section dialog box has been enhanced with new usability featuresincluding filtering and automated assembly arrangement for both Native andTeamcenter environments.


To create a new ship section.

Where do I find it?

Application Ship Design

Toolbar

Ship Design ®Steel Planning/Sectioning ®Section

Menu Insert ®Steel Planning/Sectioning ®Section

Enhanced functionality of the Section feature

What is it?

In previous releases the Section feature could only create manufacturingblocks in the concept part. The Section feature has been enhanced so thatthe concept part can be divided into sub-sections, and manufacturing blockscan be created from the sub-sections.


To create a new ship section.

Where do I find it?



Systems Design

Toolbar

Ship Design ®Steel Planning/Sectioning ®Section

Menu Insert ®Steel Planning/Sectioning ®Section

Enhanced functionality of the Intersections feature

What is it?

The Intersections feature has been enhanced to allow the creation ofintersection curves.


To create grid intersection curves on a section body.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Ship Design ®Steel Planning/Sectioning

®IntersectionsMenu Insert ®Steel Planning/Sectioning ®Intersections

Shell Expansion feature

What is it?

The Shell Expansion feature provides the ability to create a flatrepresentation of ship hull faces and the user-selected geometry on thosefaces.


Use the flattened representation to determine the proper placement ofstructures.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Ship Design®Steel Planning/Sectioning ®Shell

ExpansionMenu Insert ®Steel Planning/Sectioning ®Shell Expansion


Systems Design

Steel features

Enhanced usability of Steel Features

What is it?

The Steel feature dialog boxes have been enhanced with new usabilityfeatures including preview, drag handles, journaling, and improvedperformance.


To create a new ship design steel feature.

Where do I find it?

Application Ship DesignMenu Insert ®Steel Features

Profile / Plate

What is it?

The following features are merged in the new Profile / Plate feature:• Linear Profile

• Non-Linear Profile

• Linear Sheet

• Non-Linear Sheet

You can now choose one feature to create a profile or plate. You do not need toknow if the placement face is planar or non-planar.

Note

The former Sheet feature is now called Plate.


This merger allows you to edit the feature and switch the type from a profileto a plate or from a plate to a profile.

Where do I find it?

Application Ship DesignToolbar

Steel Features→Profile / Plate


Systems Design

Menu Insert→Steel Features→Profile / Plate

Profile/Plate combined with belt dialog box

What is it?

The profile and belt steel features have been combined into one dialog box.


To create a new ship design profile or belt feature.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Ship Design ®Profile/Plate

Ship Design ®Steel Feature list®Profile/PlateMenu Insert ®Steel Feature®Profile/Plate

Endcut

What is it?

This option defines an endcut by utilizing the Steel Feature Library function.It also allows you to apply a miter to an endcut feature or to the thicknessface of a solid body.


Use this functionality to modify the end condition of any solid body.

Where do I find it?


Steel Features→EndcutMenu Insert→Steel Features→Endcut


Systems Design

Weld Cut dialog box

What is it?

The Weld Cut on Edge and Weld Cut along Edge steel features have beencombined into one dialog box.


To create a new ship design weld cut feature.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Ship Design®Steel Feature list®Weld CutMenu Insert ®Steel Features ®Weld Cut

Collar Plate

What is it?

A solid steel feature that is associative to a profile feature.


Predefining shapes to fill the gaps around a profile and using the collarplate feature will allow you to fill all of the gaps faster than trying to modelsomething by hand for each profile with a gap.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Ship Design®Steel Feature list® Collar PlateMenu Insert®Steel Feature® Collar Plate

Update Steel Library

What is it?

The reading in of a library part is now a separate step and includes endcuts.


This allows you to read in all of your different library parts before you createa feature and updates the library in a part file if the library changes.

Where do I find it?


Steel Features→Update Steel LibraryMenu Insert→Steel Features→Update Steel Library

Modifiable sketches in steel features

What is it?

Some steel features (bracket, weld cut, cutout, and ventilation holes) nowsupport modifiable sketches allowing you to create many different sizedfeatures from the same sketch.


It gives you more flexibility with your sketch libraries.

Where do I find it?


Menu

The sketch libraries for the bracket, weld cut, andcutout/ventilation holes support modifiable sketches.There are sample modifiable sketch libraries providedin the nxship kit.


Systems Design

Manufacturing features

Cutting Side Face

What is it?

With Cutting Side Face, you can now define the face of a plate that will be upon the table during the flame-cutting operation.


Definition of the cutting side face is required for all Manufacturing operationsthat are specific to plates, including Marking Line, Reference Line, PlatePreparation, Excess Material, Rolling Line, and Manufacturing XML Output.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Ship Design®Manufacturing drop-down list®Cutting

Side FaceMenu Insert®Manufacturing®Cutting Side

Marking Line

What is it?

Marking Line creates curved geometry showing the location of a profile and/orplate on a section of the hull, deck, or bulkhead.


In the context of a section assembly, it is necessary to indicate the location ofprofile and plate parts on a hull section, deck, and/or bulkhead. To accomplishthis, you need to create curved geometry with assigned attributes. Thisgeometry and attributes will be part of the output file for the flame cutter.The flame cutter will scribe this information on the part.

Where do I find it?


Manufacturing→Marking LineMenu Insert→Manufacturing→Marking Line


Systems Design

Reference Line

What is it?

Reference Line creates a curve lying in a plane parallel to a grid plane at auser-specified offset.

Note

The grid plan is a datum plane created by the Concept module.


Use this line as a point to measure from.

Where do I find it?


Manufacturing→Reference LineMenu Insert→Manufacturing→Reference Line

Excess Material

What is it?

Use Excess Material to add additional manufacturing material to the end ofplates. A reference line is also added to the cutting side face of the componentthat indicates the original location of the plate edge.


Use Excess Material to add additional material to a distributed platecomponent to compensate for Manufacturing assembly tolerance build up.This information is passed to the flame cutter through Manufacturing XMLOutput. The reference line indicating the designed edge of the plate is alsoscribed onto the plate.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Ship Design®Manufacturing drop-down list®Excess

MaterialMenu Insert®Manufacturing®Excess Material


Systems Design

Plate Preparation

What is it?

Plate Preparation flattens non-planar plates and applies a shrink factor toall plates.


Use Plate Preparation to prepare all plates for manufacturing by flatteningthe plates and/or adding a shrink factor.

Where do I find it?


Manufacturing→Plate PreparationMenu Insert→Manufacturing→Plate Preparation

Manufacturing XML Output

What is it?

This function will output flame cutter information used for the cutting ofparts and scribing information on the parts.


Use this functionality to create an XML file, which is used to generate a filethat can be read by the flame cutter to manufacture a part.

Where do I find it?


Manufacturing→XML OutputMenu Insert→Manufacturing→XML Output

Material Allowance

What is it?

Material Allowance creates attributes on the end faces of profiles. Thefunction creates the attribute MK_TYPE and MK_SIZE.


Systems Design


This allowance is needed to compensate for manufacturing and assemblyinaccuracies.

Where do I find it?


Manufacturing→Material AllowanceMenu Insert→Manufacturing→Material Allowance

Vent Hole Marking Sketch

What is it?

Vent Hole Marking Sketch creates a table showing the location of theventilation holes on a part.


Use this function to create a table which shows the X and Y location of eachventilation hole on a part in the flattened state.

Where do I find it?


Manufacturing→Vent Hole Marking SketchMenu Insert→Manufacturing→Vent Hole Marking Sketch

Knuckled Profile

What is it?

Knuckled Profile creates a bend table for profiles that are bent on a brakepress.


In order to manufacture bent profiles from a straight semi-finished material,you need to provide a distance measurement from an edge to the bendcenterline of each bend. Knuckled Profile provides this capability.

Where do I find it?



Systems Design

ToolbarManufacturing→Knuckled Profile

Menu Insert→Manufacturing→Knuckled Profile

Inverse Bending Line

What is it?

Inverse Bending Line creates curved geometry on a profile.


In order to form curved profiles from a straight semi-finished material, it isnecessary to mark a curve on the profiles. This curve is used as a gaugeduring the bending process. When the curved line becomes straight theprofile is in its formed shape.

Where do I find it?


Manufacturing→Inverse Bending LineMenu Insert→Manufacturing→Inverse Bending Line

Profile List

What is it?

Profile List generates a Bill of Material (BOM) of all the profiles contained ina distributed assembly.


Use this to obtain the information needed for the BOM of the profilescontained in a distributed assembly.

Where do I find it?


Manufacturing→Profile ListMenu Insert→Manufacturing→Profile List


Systems Design

Flexible Printed Circuit Design

Flexible Cable

What is it?

Use the Flexible Cable command to create a fixed-width segment of flexibleprinted circuit material having planar and bend geometry from a start pointand two directions.

You can:

• Design flexible circuit conductor-type parts between two friction-fitconnectors on discrete PC boards.

• Define the path of cable segments from one connector to the other in anassembly, and simultaneously check for clearances.

You can specify the colors of the top and bottom faces of the conductor, andthe default dimensions using customer defaults, or Flexible Printed CircuitDesign preferences.

The thickness face of the conductor is shown in red. You cannot change thedefault red color of the thickness face.

The flat pattern view of the conductor shows the final length of the conductorand the centerline of each bend region.

Top face of the conductor

Bottom face of the conductor

Thickness face of the conductor


Systems Design

Where do I find it?

Flexible Cable dialog box

Application Flexible Printed Circuit Design

Toolbar

Flexible Printed Circuit Design®Bend Drop-down list

®Flexible CableMenu Insert®Bend®Flexible Cable

Flexible Printed Circuit Design Preferences dialog box

Application Flexible Printed Circuit Design

MenuPreferences®Flexible Printed Circuit DesignPreferences


Part Properties tab®Global Parameters and FlexibleCable Parameters groups

Rebend enhancement

What is it?

When you use the Rebend command, you can specify a stationary face duringthe rebending operation.

This command works the same as the Rebend command in NX Sheet Metal.For more information, see NX Sheet Metal — Rebend enhancement.

Where do I find it?

Application Flexible Printed Circuit Design, NX Sheet Metal

Toolbar

Flexible Printed Circuit Design®Rebend

NX Sheet Metal®RebendMenu Insert®Form®Rebend


Systems Design

PCB Exchange

PCB Exchange for Zuken

What is it?

PCB Exchange for Zuken is a new application that lets you import or exportPCB assemblies in the Zuken’s CR5000 native format.

You import or export Zuken format files the same way you import or exportfiles of other supported formats.

All functionality previously supported for other file formats is also supportedfor the Zuken format. In addition, the Zuken format supports the importand export of:

• Flexible printed circuits

• Traces

• Pads

• Metal masks

• Resist masks

On the Other Entities page of the PCB Exchange Settings dialog box, youcan specify how to:

• Import traces, pads, masks, and internal layers from Zuken format filesin the Import Rules group.

• Export projection view of the PCB to Zuken format files in the ExportRules group.

Where do I find it?

Note

When importing PCB assembly from Zuken format files, file type isautomatically detected.

To specify Zuken import and export settings

Application PCB Exchange for ZukenPrerequisite An active PCB assemblyMenu PCB Exchange ® SettingsLocation in dialogbox Other Entities page

Export PCB assembly to Zuken format files


Systems Design

Application PCB Exchange for ZukenPrerequisite An active PCB assemblyToolbar

PCB Exchange toolbar® Export ECAD ModelMenu PCB Exchange ® Export ECAD ModelLocation in dialogbox

Export Options ® File Format ® Zuken bmb or Zukenpcb

Support for Zuken CR5000 versions

What is it?

PCB Exchange for Zuken now supports Zuken CR5000 files in versions 9, 10,11, and 12.

The new default version is 11.

To change this option set the following variable in the pcbx_ug_model.inifile as follows:

UGII_PCB_CR5000_VERSION = 11


When you use the CR5000 Data Server, the version of the file must match theversion of the CR5000 server.

File version is not automatically recognized, so you need to set the correctversion of the Zuken file being imported to avoid warning or errors duringimport.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB Exchange for ZukenPrerequisite Modify the pcbx_ug_model.ini file before launching NX.

The pcbx_ug_model.ini file can be found in the following locations:

• NX installation directory

• Location specified by MAYA_PCB_DIR

• Network Location specified by MAYA_PCB_ENV_DIR


Systems Design

Negative layers support

What is it?

You can now import layers specified as negative in PCB Exchange for Zuken.

PCB Exchange for Zuken creates the negative shape of the areas containedin a negative layer as:

Acreated=Aboard-(Aholes+Alayer)

Area of the board Areas defined innegative layer

Imported negativelayer

To activate this option set the following variable in the pcbx_ug_model.inifile as follows:

NxWriteNegativeShapes = yes


You can use this option to import masks more efficiently. Masks usually coverthe whole area of the board minus the area of the holes.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB Exchange for ZukenPrerequisite Modify the pcbx_ug_model.ini file before launching NX.Toolbar PCB Exchange toolbar ® Settings


PCB Exchange settings dialog box ® Other Entitiestab ® Generate Negative Shape for Negative Layersoption


Systems Design





Merging intersecting or touching bodies

What is it?

You can now merge intersecting or touching bodies that are on the samelayer into a single body.

Sample with non merged pad andtrace layers

Sample with merged pad andtrace layers

To activate this option set the following variable in the pcbx_ug_model.inifile as follows:

NxWriteMergeLayers = yes


Use this option to join the conductive sections of traces and pads layers ina single body and for the calculation of the board orthotropic conductivityof a single layer.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB Exchange for ZukenPrerequisite Modify the pcbx_ug_model.ini file before launching NX.


Systems Design

Toolbar PCB Exchange toolbar ® SettingsLocation in dialogbox

PCB Exchange settings dialog box ® Other Entitiestab® Merge Layer’s Traces and Pads option





Selective layer import in PCB Exchange for Zuken

What is it?

When you import an ECAD model in PCB Exchange for Zuken, you can nowchoose to import:

• All entities

• The board only

• Specific layers


Use this feature when you want to bring specific entities in your model. Forexample you can start by importing the board and components for clearancecheck purposes, and after the traces and vias layers for a thermal analysis.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB Exchange

Toolbar PCB Exchange toolbar® Import ECAD ModelMenu PCB Exchange ® Import ECAD Model

On the dialog boxImport ECAD Model dialog box ® Import Optionsgroup ® Import list.

Thermal conductivity calculation of a board

What is it?

PCB Exchange lets you accurately calculate the thermal conductivity of aboard and taking into account its internal layers. PCB Exchange calculatesthe board’s orthotropic conductivity for each layer when their geometry isavailable as solid bodies and you define materials for each layer.


Systems Design

Each solid body layer is independently transformed into a high resolutionimage bounded by the board outline. The image is then subdivided into asecond image where the pixels of each calculation point are made visible andmeasurable. The thermal conductivities of each calculation point in the X andY directions are calculated according to the distribution of the pixels.

PCB sample top layer High resolution imageSubdivided layer

image

The high resolution and pixilated images are saved in the folder you specify.A UNV file is also created in the same location that allows you to observe theresultant kx and ky conductivities using NX post-processing tools as shownbelow:

Original traces and contours of kx and ky conductivities

These results can be used in NX Thermal and Flow, NX Electronic SystemsCooling, or NX Space Systems Thermal as attributes of a mesh collector.


With this new tool, you can model your electronic systems more accurately.Complex heat conduction paths exist in PCBs due to conductive dielectrics,traces, vias, and other entities. These paths are best represented in thermalmodels by discretizing each layer and using orthotropic material propertiesthat vary in the plane of each layer.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite A PC assembly with a board and traces defined.

Toolbar

PCB Exchange toolbar ® Board Mesh and Thermal

SettingsMenu PCB Exchange ® Board Mesh and Thermal SettingsLocation in thedialog box

Board Mesh and Thermal Settings dialog box ®Materials and Thermal Conductivity groups

Board mesh creation options

What is it?

PCB Exchange now lets you select the type of board mesh you can create forthe FE model. For the board, you can create the following:

• A 2D shell mesh

• A 2D multi-layer shell mesh

• Two 2D shell meshes: one for the top board definition and one for thebottom board definition

• A 3D mesh


This option gives you more flexibility and helps you define your FE modelfaster.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite A PC assembly with a board and traces defined.

Toolbar

PCB Exchange toolbar ® Board Mesh and Thermal

SettingsMenu PCB Exchange ® Board Mesh and Thermal SettingsLocation in thedialog box

Board Mesh and Thermal Settings dialog box® MeshSettings group ® Mesh Type


Systems Design

Support for GenCAD file format

What is it?

You can now import generic computer aided design (GenCAD) files intothe PCB Exchange application. The GenCAD file contains physical designinformation for electronic circuit boards or hybrids. GenCAD files have .cadextensions.


Import GenCAD files into PCB Exchange as they contain more electrical datathan IDF files like copper traces, pads, and vias.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar PCB Exchange ® Import ECAD ModelMenu PCB Exchange ® Import ECAD Model

Automatically save created components

What is it?

You can now control if files that are created by PCB Exchange during animport are automatically saved.

When you import an ECAD, GenCAD, or Zuken model in PCB Exchange,files can be imported or created depending on your settings, the informationavailable on the file, and your component database.

Some of the files that can be automatically created are:

• Missing components not found in the component database.

• Parts representing the vias, pads, or masks.

• Assemblies and subassemblies that contain groups of parts, vias, pads, ormasks.

In most cases these parts are used to display the assembly but are notrelevant to be saved in your component database.

To avoid saving all created files set the following variable in thepcbx_ug_model.ini file as follows:

NxWritePartAutoSave = No


Systems Design


Use this option to avoid populating shared part repositories like Teamcenterwith dummy or irrelevant parts.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite Modify the pcbx_ug_model.ini file before launching NX.Toolbar PCB Exchange toolbar ® SettingsLocation in dialogbox

PCB Exchange settings dialog box ® General tab ®Automatically save all created parts option





Part pad associativity

What is it?

In PCB Exchange you can control the pad movement to its associated parentpart.

In most cases the pad must follow the part, and this can influence tasks likethermal analyses and PCA validations.

Use this option to create groups containing a part and all its pads. One groupis created for each part.

To activate this option, set the following variable in the pcbx_ug_model.inifile as follows:

NxWriteCreatePartPadGroup = Yes


Use this option to automatically move the pads associated to a part.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite Modify the pcbx_ug_model.ini file before launching NX.Toolbar PCB Exchange toolbar ® Settings


Systems Design


PCB Exchange settings dialog box ® Other Entitiestab® Group Components Pads option





Exporting restriction area to IDF enhancement

What is it?

When you export the PCB restriction areas to IDF format, you can nowspecify the ECAD layer to which the area will be written.

To define the restriction area options for the IDF format, customize thefollowing variables in the pcbx_ug.ini file as follows:

KeepInAreaType = KIAreaType, ECADLayer

KeepOutAreaType = KOAreaType, ECADLayer

OtherAreaType = OTHERAreaType, ECADLayer

The first keys, KIAreaType, KOAreaType, and OTHERAreaType, are the restrictionarea types. These types did not change in this NX version. See Variables inthe pcbx_ug.ini file in the NX PCB Exchange Help for more information.

The second key, ECADLayer, can now be set when you export to IDF format.The following ECADLayer are recognized by the IDF format:

• other_outline— Exports your restricted area as an Other Other Area.

• route_outline— Exports your restricted area as a Routing Keep-in Area.

• place_outline — Exports your restricted area as a Placement Keep-inArea.

• route_keepout— Exports your restricted area as a Routing Keep-out Area.

• via_keepout— Exports your restricted area as a Via Keep-out Area.

• place_keepout— Exports your restricted area as a Placement Keep-outArea.

• place_region — Exports your restricted area as a Placement GroupKeep-in Area.


../../../ugdoc/html_files/pcb/index.html?goto=pcb/mc_variables_pcbx_ug_ini_file_op.html&vars=-aux

../../../ugdoc/html_files/pcb/index.html?goto=pcb/mc_variables_pcbx_ug_ini_file_op.html&vars=-aux

Systems Design


Specify the ECAD layer for the restriction area types when you want, forexample, to model areas where to place components as keep-in areas andexport them to IDF format as keep-out areas.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite Modify the pcbx_ug.ini file before launching NX.

Toolbar PCB Exchange toolbar® Export ECAD ModelMenu PCB Exchange ® Export ECAD Model

The pcbx_ug.ini file can be found in the following locations:




Automatically use component’s reference set

What is it?

When you import an ECAD model in PCB Exchange, PCB Exchange canload different instances of a component part using reference sets as the partnumber.

When you export an ECAD model in PCB Exchange, PCB Exchange can writethe part number as the name of the reference set.

These component instances are saved in the same NX Part. Each instance isa solid body with a specific reference set.

For each instance of the component part, set the Part Number in theComponent Attributes dialog box to its specific reference set name.

To activate this feature set the following variable in the pcbx_ug_model.inifile as follows:

NXWriteCompRefSetAsCompNumber = Yes

For example, in this graphic, the same component C1 is placed oncehorizontally and once vertically on the PC board. The horizontally placedcomponent has a reference set named 001, and the vertically placedcomponent has a reference set named 002. Both are saved in C1.prt.


Systems Design

In the Component Attributes dialog box, set Part Number to:• 001 for component C1–001.

• 002 for component C1–002.

After you export this PCA to ECAD and then re-import it, PCB Exchangeloads the appropriate instance of the component.

Note

When a component part has more then one instance and you do notspecify the reference set for each instance, PCB Exchange loads allinstances of that component.


Use this feature when you have some components that have the samepackage name, but are oriented differently or have different variants orshapes. For example, you may want to use the simplified version of yourcomponent for a thermal analysis, and the detailed version for evaluatingplacement interference.

Where do I find it?

To modify a component attribute

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite Modify the pcbx_ug_model.ini file before launching NX.

Toolbar PCB Exchange toolbar® Component AttributesMenu PCB Exchange ® Edit Attributes ® ComponentLocation in dialogbox Component Attributes ® Part Number

To export an ECAD model



Systems Design

Prerequisite Modify the pcbx_ug_model.ini file before launching NX.

Toolbar PCB Exchange toolbar® Export ECAD ModelMenu PCB Exchange ® Export ECAD Model

To import an ECAD model







Enhancement of attributes for cutouts converted to holes

What is it?

When you import an ECAD model containing circular cutouts in PCBExchange and convert these cutouts into Hole features, you can nowautomatically set the Associated Part attribute to:

• BOARD

• PANEL

• NOREFDES

• A reference designator

To activate this feature set the following variable in the pcbx_filter.ini fileas shown in the following example:

CircCutoutsPart = BOARD


Use this feature to assign and organize Drilled Hole Area attributes in yourmodel. This feature can also save you time when you have models withhundreds of cutouts without attributes that need to be imported as holefeatures.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite Modify the pcbx_filter.ini file before launching NX.


The pcbx_filter.ini file can be found in the following locations:




Merge restricted areas with cutouts into one loop

What is it?

You can now merge cutouts of a keep-in, keep-out, or other area region withits outer loop to form one loop. PCB Exchange merges loops of restrictionareas by introducing a small gap that connects cutouts (inner loops) to theouter loop.


Systems Design

PCA boardRestricted area (keep-in, keep-out, orother area) in blueOuter loop

2 cutouts (inner loops)Gaps between the inner and outerloops

To activate this feature the following variables should be set inpcbx_ug_model.ini file:

• NxWriteMergeAreaLoops = Yes

• NxWriteMergeAreaGapSize = # where # is the gap size. By default, this valueis 1e-3.


Use this option when your ECAD system does not accept the definition ofseparate restriction area and cutout loops.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?

The pcbx_ug_model.ini file can be found in the:


• Working directory



Specify drilled hole associated part

What is it?

The Associated Part option in the Drilled Hole Attributes dialog box is nowa list with Intermediate Data Format (IDF) accepted choices. In previousreleases, this option was a box in which you entered the name of theassociated part.

You can now choose the associated part on the board from the AssociatedPart list. The choices on the Associated Part list are:

• BOARD— The hole is associated to the board part.

• NOREFDES— The hole is associated to a mechanical component.

• Specify— The hole is associated to an electrical component. You mustspecify the name of the component in the Specify Part box.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite An imported ECAD model or an NX CAD printed circuit

assembly with drilled holesToolbar

PCB Exchange toolbar® Drilled Hole Attributes

PCB Exchange Settings dialog box enhancements

What is it?

The PCB Exchange Settings dialog box now has the following tabs:

• General

• PCA

• Board


Systems Design

• Holes

• Components

• Keep-ins

• Keep-outs

• Other Areas

• Other Entities

The settings on these different pages let you specify the most commonPCB Exchange work environment variables found in pcbx_ug.ini andpcbx_ug_model.ini initialization files.


Instead of modifying the initialization options in the pcbx_ug.ini andpcbx_ug_model.ini files and then restarting NX in order to have these optionstake effect, you can now set the most common PCB Exchange settings in theimproved PCB Exchange Settings dialog box.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangeMenu PCB Exchange ® Settings

ECAD/NX model comparison enhancement

What is it?

When comparing the current NX model with an existing ECAD model using

the Compare and Update PCA command, you can now preview the

detected changes in the graphics window by selecting Preview Changes .

The following graphic shows the original models and a preview of the detectedchanges.


Systems Design

Original NX model Original ECAD model

Detected changes between NX and ECAD models

The following changes are detected:

• Component is not placed at the same location in the NX model andthe ECAD model.

• Component is deleted from the NX model.

• Component is added to the NX model.

If you select one of the changed components from the component list underthe Components Status group, the NX model component and the ECADmodel component are highlighted in the graphics window.


Systems Design


The Preview Changes icon helps you visualize the differences betweenthe NX model and the ECAD model.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangeToolbar PCB Exchange toolbar ® Compare and Update PCA

Menu PCB Exchange ® Compare and Update PCA

Default directory for ECAD files

What is it?

You can now specify a default directory for ECAD files.

You can enter the absolute path to the directory in one of the following:

• The Default ECAD Directory box in the Settings dialog box.

• The EcadDefaultDir variable in the pcbx_ug.ini file.

Note

The PCB Exchange browser always points to the specified defaultECAD directory. If you do not specify the default ECAD directory, thePCB Exchange browser points to the last selected directory.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangeMenu PCB Exchange ® SettingsLocation in dialogbox Default ECAD Directory

Directory for new created components

What is it?

The Create New Components In option is now available in the Settingsdialog box. It is no longer available in the Import ECAD Model and Compareand Update PCA dialog boxes.

PCB Exchange places files containing new components from the ECADfootprint in the directory you specify in the Create New Components In box.


Systems Design

In the Create New Components In box, you can enter the absolute path to thedirectory, the Teamcenter folder name, or the following reserved keywords:

• ECAD_FILE_DIR— Use this keyword to place new components in the samedirectory as the ECAD file.

• NX_PART_DIR — Use this keyword to place new components in the samedirectory as the NX assembly or model file.

You can also set the directory for new components in the NewComponentDirvariable of the pcbx_ug.ini file.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangeMenu PCB Exchange ® SettingsLocation in dialogbox Create New Components In

PCA import rules

What is it?

You can now setup rules on how NX represents a printed circuit model. Priorto this version, the board was always defined in the master geometry of theprinted circuit assembly (PCA) part. With these new design rules, you canconfigure PCB Exchange so that the board is imported in a separate part andadded as an assembly component to the main PCA part.

On the PCA page of the PCB Exchange Settings dialog box, you can specifyhow to:

• Name the PCA. You can:

– Use the current NX model name.

– Use the ECAD model name.

– Specify a PCA name at import.

• Group PCA entities. This option creates subassemblies in order to classifythe printed circuit entities.

• Import the PCA board, components, and areas. You can import each entityas a master geometry of the main PCA part or an assembly component.


PCA import rules give you more flexibility when importing PCA entities intoNX.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangeMenu PCB Exchange ® SettingsLocation in dialogbox PCA page

Use existing part attribute as default for component number

What is it?

You can now define a user-specified component number attribute from whichPCB Exchange reads the component number instead of reading it from theMAYA_PCB_COMP_NUMBER variable.

To activate this feature, set the following variable in the pcbx_ug_model.inifile as in the following example:

NxComponentNumberSecondaryAttName = DB_PART_NO

Note

DB_PART_NO is an example. You can specify any attribute variable.


Use this feature when, for example, you create multiple components in PCBExchange from the Teamcenter database where DB_PART_NO is already defined.

Where do I find it?








Systems Design

Import ECAD model in a part file

What is it?

You no longer need to import ECAD models into an NX part file in the No Partstate. For example, if you have a part file with an electronic enclosure, PCBExchange allows you to directly import a PCA model into this enclosure’spart file.

If the part file contains a valid PCB, in order to avoid confusion, it is stronglyrecommended that you design this PCB as a subassembly. To share it withthe imported ECAD model, just make the PCB the work part or the displayedpart.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangePrerequisite A non empty part fileToolbar

PCB Exchange toolbar® Import ECAD ModelMenu PCB Exchange ® Import ECAD Model

Filtering enhancements

What is it?

The improved Filters List dialog box contains pre-defined and user-definedfilter rules.

When you import, export, or compare and update ECAD models, you can nowselect the entities to remove in the Filters List dialog box. You can select:

• Different types of holes.

• Different types of components.

• Different types of restriction areas.


The filter rules are now much easier to use with the improved Filters Listdialog box.

Where do I find it?



Systems Design

ToolbarPCB Exchange toolbar ® Import ECAD Model /

Export ECAD Model / Compare and Update PCA

Menu PCB Exchange ® Import ECAD Model / Export ECADModel / Compare and Update PCA


In Import Options, Export Options, or Compare Optionsgroup, select Use Entity Filter / Use Entity Filter on NXmodel / Use Entity Filter on ECAD model ® Filter List

Display the board coordinate system

What is it?

The board coordinate system is now automatically displayed when the BoardAttributes dialog box is open.

The board coordinate system is only visible when you use the BoardAttributes command.

Where do I find it?


assemblyToolbar

PCB Exchange toolbar® Board Attributes

Override board thickness

What is it?

You can now override the board thickness from the ECAD model by selectingthe Override Board Thickness check box and entering a value in the BoardThickness box in the following dialog boxes:

• Import ECAD Model

• Compare and Update PCA

You can change the default value in the Board Thickness box by modifyingthe NxWriteDefaultBoardThk variable in the pcbx_ug_model.ini file.


Use this option when the board thickness defined in the ECAD file is notcorrect.


Systems Design

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangeToolbar

PCB Exchange toolbar ® Import ECAD Model /

Compare and Update PCA

View or modify a specific NX object

What is it?

When you select an NX object, the new Object and Feature commands bringup the dialog box that shows the right attributes applied to this object. Forexample, PCB Exchange brings up the Keep-in Area Attributes dialog box ifthe specified NX object was designed as a keep-in area.

• The Object command lets you select an NX object from the graphicswindow.

• The Feature command lets you select an NX object from a list in theFeature Selection dialog box listing all features in the model.

If the selected NX object has no PCB attributes, PCB Exchange issues anerror message.

If you select more than one object, PCB Exchange shows the PCB attributesof the first selected object.


These new commands help you to quickly find what PCB Exchange attributesapply to a specific NX object. It is very useful when you have many objectsin the model and you don’t know what they are.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangeMenu PCB Exchange ® Edit Attributes ® Object

PCB Exchange ® Edit Attributes ® Feature

New drilled holes design features support

What is it?

Previously, you could specify Drilled Hole Attributes only for Simple Holefeatures you created using the Hole command in Modeling. Now you canspecify Drilled Hole Attributes also for cylindrical holes created using thefollowing Modeling commands:


Systems Design

• Extrude. The hole must be created by extruding a circular curve usingthe Subtract Boolean option.

• Cylinder. The hole must be created by subtracting the cylinder fromthe board.

• Instance Feature. The rectangular or circular array of holes is createdby copying a previously created hole using Hole, Extrude, or Cylindercommands.

Note

If you extrude a curve that is not circular, the Extrude feature is nota drilled hole, but only a cutout.

When importing ECAD model, drilled holes are still created as SimpleHole features.

Where do I find it?


assembly with holes created in the Modeling applicationusing the Extrude, Cylinder, or Instance Featurecommands.

ToolbarPCB Exchange toolbar® Drilled Hole Attributes

Space Systems Thermal solution

What is it?

You can now create a Space Systems Thermal solution from your PCBExchange model by selecting the Space Thermal option in the Create ESCSolution dialog box.


Use the Space Thermal option when you want to solve a thermal model ofyour PCB using the Space Systems Thermal simulation.

Where do I find it?

Application PCB ExchangeMenu PCB Exchange ® Thermal/Flow Simulation ® Create

ESC SolutionToolbar

PCB Exchange ® Create ESC Solution


Systems Design


Output Option group® Write Boundary Conditions list® Space Thermal

PCB.xchange application name change

What is it?

The PCB.xchange application is now called PCB Exchange.

PCB Exchange for Zuken

PCB.xchange + Zuken application name change

What is it?

The PCB.xchange + Zuken application is now called PCB Exchange for Zuken.


Chapter

16 Automation

Block Styler

Tree List block

What is it?

The Tree List block can now be added to a dialog box. This block supportsthe tree-node structure representing the node hierarchy. You can add nodesand columns to the tree list and assign various callbacks actions to tree andnode events.

The block supports functionality to:

• Insert nodes and child nodes, and edit and delete them.

• Provide a menu and submenu for the tree or for each node.

• Specify a label, icon, and a tooltip to each node.

• Customize the color, and checked or unchecked state of each node.


Automation

• Provide data to each node, such as a feature.

• Select the node for a displayable object, such as a feature or a PMI object,to highlight it in the graphics window.

• Specify resize policy for columns.

• The combination of tree properties and node insertion mechanism allowsthe tree to behave like a table.

• Allow or disallow:

– Sorting nodes.

You can provide customized callbacks to sort nodes.

– Dragging and dropping nodes within a list.

– Expanding and collapsing nodes.

– Showing and hiding columns.


Use this block when a tree structure, like the one in the Part Navigator, isrequired.

Where do I find it?

Application Block UI StylerMenu Start®All Applications®Block UI StylerResource Bar Block Catalog®Special®Tree List

Block-based wizard style dialog box layout

What is it?

You can now add a Wizard block to your dialog box from the Block Catalog.You can add steps to a the block using the Wizard Step item from the BlockCatalog.

You can create the block-based wizard style dialog box in the same way thatyou create the block-based dialog box with tabbed pages.


Automation


Use the Wizard block when a command:

• Has a large number of inputs.

• Has different workflows depending on user selections and settings.

• Creates one or more types of objects in a workflow.

Where do I find it?

Application Block UI StylerMenu Start®All Applications®Block UI StylerResource Bar Block Catalog®Layout®Wizard

Knowledge Fusion Language

What is it?

In Knowledge Fusion language, the ug_create_instance function is usedto infer the correct class and quantity of instances when the instance classor quantity depends on a calculation performed during the run time. Thisenhancement eliminates the need to use this function and enables theKnowledge Fusion application authors to use generic if then else statementin such cases if the application has ug_base_part mixin.


Automation


To infer the correct class and quantity of run-time evaluation basedKnowledge Fusion instances without using the ug_create_instance function.


Chapter

17 Manufacturing Design

Weld Assistant

User Defined Weld

What is it?

Use the User Defined Weld command to define a solid body as a user-definedweld. This is useful when you want to define a customized weld that cannotbe created using the standard weld feature methods.

You can:

• Use any valid modeling technique to model the weld shape.

• Assign attributes to the solid body to identify it as a weld.

The solid body is displayed as a weld feature in the Part Navigator and isused in the weld length and volume calculations.

• Specify the weld symbol PMI for the weld feature at the same time youcreate it.

• Access the user defined weld from theWeld Attribute Filter dialog box.

User defined welds are also listed in the Detailed Filtering dialog boxwhen you set the Selection filter to Welding Objects.

• Publish user defined welds to Teamcenter as individual weld objects.

• Remove a part file from the assembly that was selected as a connectedpart of the user defined weld. This results in the weld feature becomingretained. It has the same characteristics as other weld features includinga retained icon in the Part Navigator.

You can make the weld feature valid again by selecting a new componentin the assembly.


Manufacturing Design


Use the User Defined Weld command when you want to define a customizedweld that cannot be created using the standard weld feature methods.

Where do I find it?

User Defined Weld dialog box


Toolbar

Weld Assistant®User Defined Weld

Tip

To display this toolbar, right-click in the toolbararea and choose Industry Specific®WeldAssistant.

Menu Insert®Welding®User Defined Weld

Customer defaults for User Defined Weld

Application ModelingMenu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox

Weld Assistant®Creation page®User Defined Weldtab

Easy Measurement Pattern

What is it?

Use the Easy Measurement Pattern command to create measurement vectorsarranged in a pattern around specified geometry. You can create trim, surface,and hemmed vectors, and use multiple methods to specify the output patterns.

You can:

• Preview the sections, points, or both, before you create the measurementvectors.

• Edit each measurement vector feature individually.

• Export the created features to a CSV file.




This command lets you create multiple measurement vectors at once in apattern that traverses around a part file.

This command is useful when you need to specify both trim and surface, orhemmed and surface vectors along the same section.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

BIW Locator®Easy Measurement Pattern

Tip

To display this toolbar, right-click in the toolbararea and choose Industry Specific®BIW Locator.

Menu Insert®Welding®Easy Measurement Pattern

Weld Advisor enhancements

What is it?

The Weld Advisor command can now execute weld checks using theCheck-Mate analysis tool. You can identify the specific welds and weld checksin the Weld Advisor dialog box, and run the checks using either Check-Mateor the Weld Advisor dialog box. You can also execute weld checks directlyfrom Check-Mate with no interaction from theWeld Advisor dialog box.

Welding checks that were previously available only from the Weld Advisordialog box, are now available on the Tests tab in the Check-Mate dialog box.You can also select the checks in this location.

You can:

• Override welds that violate checks.

• Create permanent records of the check status and save them along withthe part file.

• Display the check results using HD3D tools.

You can also control checking values in the new Settings group in the WeldAdvisor dialog box. You no longer need to do this in the Customer Defaultsdialog box.




Executing weld checks directly from Check-Mate makes the checks availablefor inclusion in user-defined checking templates.

Using the options in the Weld Advisor dialog box to control the values thatchecks are evaluated against, saves you time. If you changed the valuesusing the Customer Defaults dialog box, you would have to restart NX eachtime to activate the defaults.

Where do I find it?

Weld Advisor command


Toolbar

Weld Assistant®Weld Advisor

Tip


Menu Insert®Welding®Weld Advisor

Check-Mate

Resource bar HD3D Tools tab®double-click Check-Mate

Toolbar Check-Mate®Set Up TestsMenu Analysis®Check-Mate®Set Up Tests

Bead

What is it?

The Bead command is upgraded. It replaces the following commands:

• The old Bead command

• Resistance Seam

• Edge Weld

Use the revised Bead command to define a cross sectional shape and sweepit along a path over any number of components to create a Bead feature.Like other Weld Assistant features, the Bead feature contains a solid



representation of the bead, the connected parts information, and customerdefined attributes.

You can:

• Set customer defaults for standard cross sectional sizes for a tube orellipse.

Bead with an elliptical crosssection

Bead with a tubular crosssection

• Access the Sketch tool from the Bead dialog box and create anycross-sectional shape.



Custom cross section

• Generate a guide path using curves, edges, and points making it simpleand effective for defining the beads sweep path.

Sweep path created using twosegments and a bridge curve

Sweep path created usingvarying cross sections


You can use this command to define a bead of various materials such as:

• Sealer

• Weld

• Glue

• Mastic

This command automates the creation of the solid geometry that representsthe bead.

Using this command to generate bead features makes them available to allother Weld Assistant functions such as filtering, information and featurepublishing.



Where do I find it?

Bead command


Toolbar

Weld Assistant®Bead

Tip


Menu Insert®Welding®Bead

Bead customer defaults

Application ModelingMenu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox Weld Assistant®Creation®Bead tab

Fill

What is it?

The new Fill command replaces the Tape command.

Use this command to specify a boundary atop an existing part or partsthat can be thickened to create a Fill feature. This feature contains a solidrepresentation of the fill, the connected parts information, and customerdefined attributes.

You can:

• Generate the boundary using curves, edges, a rectangle, or points. SnapPoint options are available on the Selection bar.

Curved boundary onan uneven surface Resultant Fill feature



• Divide the feature into various segmented strips, or subdivisions, usingcustomized parameters.

Fill feature with nosubdivisions

Fill feature withsubdivisions along

XC

Fill feature withsubdivisions along

YC

• Control each subdivision individually using handles in the graphicswindow.


You can create solid geometry that represents one of the following:

• A sprayed sealer such as liquid applied sound deadener.

• A tape.

• Other sheet type materials.

This command automates the creation of the solid geometry that representsthe fill.

Using this command to generate fill features makes them available to allother Weld Assistant functions such as filtering, information, and featurepublishing.

Where do I find it?

Fill command




Toolbar

Weld Assistant®Fill

Tip


Menu Insert®Welding®Fill

Fill customer defaults

Application ModelingMenu File®Utilities®Customer DefaultsLocation in dialogbox Weld Assistant®Creation®Fill tab

Delete in Connected Face Finder

What is it?

The Delete option is now available in the Connected Face Finder dialogbox. You can delete a weld point directly from the Results tree after yourun a Connected Face Finder check.

Spot Weld (117)Spot Weld (114)Spot Weld (95)Connected Face Set 1Connected Face Set 2Point 9Connected Face Set 1Connected Face Set 2

Point 10

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPrerequisite Run the Connected Face Finder.Toolbar

Weld Assistant®Connected Face FinderMenu Insert®Welding®Connected Face FinderLocation in dialogbox

In the Results tree, right-click a Point node®Delete.



Delete in Weld Advisor

What is it?

The Delete option is available in theWeld Advisor dialog box. You can deletea weld point directly from the Results tree after you run a Weld Advisor check.

Point WLD1Point WLD1Point WLD1Point WLD1Point WLD1Point WLD1

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPrerequisite Run the Weld Advisor.Toolbar

Weld Assistant®Weld AdvisorMenu Insert®Welding®Weld AdvisorLocation in dialogbox

In the Results tree, right-click a Point node®Delete.

New Auto Point options

What is it?

The Auto Point command has the following new options.

Maximum SingleThickness

Specifies the maximum single metal thickness for all theselected components. If the distance between the topfaces of two panels, or sheets, is greater than the specifiedMaximum Single Thickness plus the specified MaximumFace Gap distance, weld points are not created at thatlocation.

Maximum BendRadius

Specifies the bend radius of a flange. Weld points are notplaced on faces with a radius smaller than this value.

Minimum FlangeWidth

Specifies the minimum flange width. If the opposite sidesof a flange are smaller than the Minimum Flange Width,weld points are not created on that flange.

Where do I find it?




ToolbarWeld Assistant®Auto Point

Menu Insert®Welding®Auto PointLocation in dialogbox

Settings group®Maximum Single Thickness/MaximumBend Radius/Minimum Flange Width

Reverse Z Direction in Weld Point

What is it?

Reverse Z Direction is a new option in the Weld Point dialog box that isavailable for all spot welds. It lets you reverse the weld CSYS Z vectordirection for all welds in the feature set at once, as shown in the followinganimation.


This option is primarily useful when you use sheets instead of solid bodies torepresent sheet metal panels. With a sheet, it is not easy to determine theinside and outside of a part, and the Z vector of the weld CSYS may point inan undesirable direction. With the new Reverse Z Direction option, you canhave better control over the direction of the weld CSYS.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPrerequisite Available only when you select the Display CSYS check

box in the Preview/Edit group.Toolbar

Weld Assistant®Weld Point



Menu Insert®Welding®Weld PointsLocation in dialogbox

Preview/Edit group®Reverse Z Direction

Control Direction in Weld Point

What is it?

There are now Control Direction options in the Weld Point dialog box thatyou can use to control the Z-axis direction for spot welds.

Default Specifies the direction of the weld CSYS along the Z-axisusing the default direction.

Opposite Specifies the direction of the weld CSYS along the Z-axisusing the opposite direction.

Note

The default Z direction may be different for different solid types. Forexample, a cylinder’s default Z direction is opposite of the default Zdirection for a measurement vector.


You can use Control Direction options in conjunction with the Reverse ZDirection option for better flexibility in defining connections such as selfpierce rivets.

Where do I find it?

Application ModelingPrerequisite Available only when you create Clinch type weld points

or custom spot welds that use either a cylinder or coneas the display object.

ToolbarWeld Assistant®Weld Point

Menu Insert®Welding®Weld PointLocation in dialogbox

Settings group®Control Directionlist®Default/Opposite



Mold Design

Assembly load option change for large assemblies

What is it?

In earlier releases, choosing Application ® Mold Wizard automatically setthe assembly load options to fully load all components. This was done to loadWAVE data and interpart expressions. This is a problem if you use very largemold assemblies, which are now common.

In this release, your default assembly load options are not changed when youstart the Mold Wizard application.

You can selectively load interpart data for parents that play a part in updatesfor any component that you want to update. For example, to swap the originalmodel for a new one, load the interpart data for the parting-set component.


If you use the default options for large assembly, such as partial loading orlightweight representations, assembly load options can impact Mold Wizardcommands that rely on interpart expressions and WAVE links.

How To

If you have a relatively small assembly and want to load all relevant data, inthe Assembly Load Options dialog box Scope group, do the following:

• Clear Use Partial Loading• Select Load Interpart Data• Set Load Parents as required.

If you have a large assembly, use the NX Relations Browser to do thefollowing:

• Determine which parts you need to load for a selected component.

• Load the required data.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold WizardPrerequisite Make these changes before you open your assembly.

Toolbar Standard ® Open ® Options



Menu

File ® Options ® Assembly Load Options

File ® Open ® Options

Assemblies ® WAVE ® Relations Browser


Assembly Load Options ® Scope group

NX Relations Browser ® right-click a node for relevantoptions.

Parting workflow enhancements

What is it?

Use the new Mold Parting Tools toolbar and the new Parting Navigatorwindow to create and edit parting geometry in a more efficient workflow.

You can now display the Parting Navigator at any time during the molddevelopment process.

There are four categories of parting commands on the Mold Parting Toolstoolbar to do the following:

• Define core and cavity regions and parting lines.

• Perform surface patching.

• Design parting surfaces and guide lines.

• Create the cavity and core bodies.

Revised parting dialog boxes support the journal process that you use fromTools ® Journal. This includes all parting-related dialog boxes exceptMolded Part Validation and Swap Model.

The parting workflow includes the following consolidations:

• The guide line design, transition objects, and parting line editingcommands are consolidated with parting surfaces, so you can create andedit parting-related curves without leaving the parting surface dialog box.

• The Suppress Parting command is combined with the Define Cavityand Core dialog box. When you edit a core, cavity, or other major moldsurface, the suppression command is now immediately available if youneed it to complete your edit.

Parting toolbar



Parting Design

Product Body

Workpiece

Workpiece Wireframe

Parting Lines

Guide LinesParting Surfaces

Patch SurfacesPatch SolidsCavity

CoreSimulation of Parting Navigator

Where do I find it?

Application Mold WizardPrerequisite A Mold Wizard assembly must be displayed.

Toolbar Mold Wizard ® Mold Parting Tools

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® MoldParting Tools

Concept design option

What is it?

Use the Concept Design option in standard-part-style dialog boxes to insertsketch-based concept symbols. The symbols:

• Represent the part identified by the concept point.

• Are associative with the concept point.

• Are configured by dimensions you specify for the part they represent.

• Are placed in a symbol folder with part files and symbol bitmaprepresentations for the dialog boxes.

You can add or edit concept design symbols in the Gateway or Modelingapplication.

You can also define your own symbols



To replace concept points with the associated part, click Concept Design

on the Mold Wizard toolbar. The symbols are not deleted when you addthe parts that they represent.

The following new folders are included in the Mold Wizard engineeringdatabase:

• $MOLDWIZARD_DIR\symbol\metric

• $MOLDWIZARD_DIR\symbol\english

There is a new keyword, SYMBOL, for standard part database spreadsheets.You must place the full path relative to $MOLDWIZARD_DIR in the adjacentcell, as shown in the following figure:

SYMBOL \symbol\metric\ejector.prt

Concept symbols



Example design showing several concept ejector pins


Use the symbols that you can insert with the Concept Design option to keepyour assembly disk space requirements very small, especially in the earlystages when changes are frequent.

Concept symbols are faster to load and update than the parts they represent.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold Wizard

Dialog boxes

Standard Part Management

Mold Base Management

Workpiece Insert Design

Slider/Lifter Design

Sub-insert Library

Cooling Component Design

Electrode Design




The Concept Design check box is in the unnamedscrolling panel in the upper right corner ofstandard-parts-style dialog boxes.

Trim Region Patch

What is it?

When you use the Trim Region Patch command, you can now select aboundary body instead of boundary curves and edges. The boundary betweenthe target body and bounding body is calculated automatically.

The preceding figure shows the major steps in creating a trim region patchsheet:

1. Selecting a solid body as the target body from which to create the patchsheet.

2. Selecting a boundary body to limit the patch sheet extent.

3. Selecting an area on the target body to keep or discard.

The resulting sheet consists of faces that lie on target body faces and aretrimmed by the target body and bounding body intersections.




If you have many edges to select, it is faster to select a bounding body than itis to use the options under Traverse select bounding edges.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Trim Region Patch

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® MoldTools ® Trim Region Patch

Split Face

What is it?

The Split Face command has the following enhancements:

• You can split multiple faces at one time.

• You can open the following dialog boxes directly from the Split Face dialogbox to create splitting geometry:

– Line

– Datum Plane

– Intersection Curve

In this example, the part has 8 crossover faces and 3 vertical faces.



Using the Split Face command, in one operation, you can:

• Select all eleven unassigned faces as targets, as shown in the target color.

• Create a datum plane to split the faces at the parting, as shown in thetool color.

The following graphic shows the split faces. The new faces are assigned to thecore or cavity region and the default region colors are set.




It is faster to create splitting geometry during the face splitting process.

Where do I find it?

Application Mold WizardPrerequisite Identify faces that cross over parting geometry.

Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Split Face

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® MoldTools ® Split Face

Edit Parting and Patch Surface

What is it?

The new Edit Parting and Patch Surface dialog box combines the AddExisting Surface and Remove Parting/Patch Surface dialog boxes.

In the Edit Parting and Patch Surface dialog box, you can do the following:

• Select sheet bodies to add extra copies for core and cavity and identifythem as patch surfaces.

• Deselect patch or parting surfaces to remove the extra copies andidentifying attributes, leaving common sheet bodies.



Where do I find it?

Application Mold WizardPrerequisite One or more Mold Wizard patch sheets must be present.

Toolbar

Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Edit Parting and Patch

Surface

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® MoldTools ® Split Face

Mold Design Validation

What is it?

Use the Mold Design Validation command to check molded part quality usingCheck Mate technology. You can view the results in the new HD3D Toolswindow, in the Results group.

The following are available to check bodies, areas, and faces:

Model Quality CheckerVerifies a selected solid body for such things as data structure, consistency,face self-intersection, and tiny objects. You can set the Distance Toleranceto control the size of objects reported as tiny objects.

Undercut CheckerShows you areas that must be corrected or molded with slides, lifters,and so on.

Draft Angle CheckerShows vertical faces or faces with draft less than the specified draft angle.You can set the Draft Angle to control the reported angle.

Split Face CheckerShows faces that must be split before you can define core and cavityregions.

Undercut 3

Undercut Region1 3

Undercut Region2 3

Cross Over Faces 6

Draft Angle 3

Unqualified Faces(+) 4

Unqualified Faces(–) 4



Vertical Faces 24

Unsplit Faces

Model QualityThe preceding figure is a simulated report in the HD3D Tools

Check-Mate results table, including objects passed with information,passed with warning, and passed.

The following figure shows the display for the preceding simulation.Vertical faces are highlighted.

Undercut 3

Draft Angle 3

Unsplit Faces

Model Quality 1

Check Tiny Objects 2

Edge:R-56650-35

Edge:R-56643-35The preceding figure is a simulated report in the HD3D Tools

Check-Mate results table, including objects passed with information,passed with warning, and failed.

The following figure shows a graphics display for preceding results table. Thetiny objects are highlighted, but they are too tiny to be seen in the figure.




Use the Mold Design Validation command to insure that your initial model iscapable of supporting a valid mold tooling design.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Mold Wizard ® Mold Tools ® Mold Design Validation

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® MoldTools ® Mold Design Validation

Mold Cooling Tools toolbar

What is it?

Use the Mold Cooling Tools toolbar to access all cooling-related commands.

Where do I find it?




Toolbar Mold Wizard ® Mold Cooling Tools

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® CoolingTools

Pattern Channel

What is it?

Use the Pattern Channel command to design round-profile cooling channelswith specified curves or a sketch.

You can preview the resulting bodies.

The following animation shows the major steps to create a sketched coolingpattern.

1. In the Pattern Channel dialog box, in the Channel Path group, clickSketch Section .

2. In the Sketch task environment, define the path for cooling channelsusing only lines. Do not create arcs or splines.

3. After you click Finish Sketch, in the Pattern Channel dialog box, in theSettings group, set the channel diameter, and click OK.

A tube feature is created for every line in the sketch.

Note

You can also select existing lines.



Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Cooling Tools ® Pattern Channel

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® CoolingTools ® Pattern Channel

Adjust Channel

What is it?

Use the Adjust Channel command to do the following:

• Move cooling channels.

• Adjust the length of baffles.


You can use the Pattern Channel command to sketch a cooling circuit veryquickly, with no need to specify exact dimensions. In the following graphic,the roughly placed cooling channels are too close to the cavity on one side,and too far from the cavity on the other side.



Use the Adjust Channel command to move one or more selected channels to auniform distance from a set of selected faces.

In the following graphic, the Adjust Channel command was used to movethree channels from the previous graphic in different directions to 8 mm fromselected faces in a single operation. Some channels were moved closer to thenearest face, while others were moved farther away from the nearest face.Notice that the tolerance used by the software is well within requirementsfor cooling channels.



Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Cooling Tools ® Adjust Channel

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® CoolingTools ® Adjust Channel

Direct Channel

What is it?

Use the Direct Channel command to design a round cooling channel with aspecified start point.

You can define the end point using one of the following methods:

• Set the distance and a vector. The OrientXpress tool is available to setthe vector.

• Indicate two end points.

• Drag the handles of a dynamic CSYS.

In the following animation, an existing point, direction vector, and draggingare used to define a channel.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Cooling Tools ® Direct Channel

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® CoolingTools ® Direct Channel



Connect Channels

What is it?

Use the Connect Channels command to connect two channels. The commandextends channels until they intersect. If the channels are not on the sameplane, a new connecting channel is created.

The following animation shows different cases of connecting channels.

In the first example, two channels on the same plane are parallel. A startpoint is specified to determine the location of the new channel.

In the second example, two channels lie in different planes. One channel isextended to the theoretical intersection, and a new channel is created atthat location.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Cooling Tools ® Connect Channels

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® CoolingTools ® Connect Channels

Extend Channel

What is it?

Use the Extend Channel command to extend existing cooling channels. Youcan extend a target channel in the following ways:

• To the face of a boundary body

• Until the center of a boundary channel, with optional extra distance



• By a specified distance

Examples

Extend to the face of a boundary body



Extend to the center of another channel



Extend by a specified distance


This capability may be used when you want to extend the cooling channel.

This command provides a convenient way to extend a channel, and it letsyou add a drill tip angle to a channel.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Cooling Tools ® Extend Channel

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® CoolingTools ® Extend Channel



Cooling Fittings

What is it?

Use the Cooling Fittings command to add cooling fitting concept points andsketch-based schematic representations of the fittings to channels. Fittingpoints are created in relation to the channel and other parts. You can alsomanually specify fitting points.

Use the Concept Design command to add the fitting standard parts at coolingfitting concept points.


The Cooling Fittings command supports concept points. Using concept designsaves time and greatly reduces the size of a tooling assembly.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Cooling Tools ® Cooling Fittings

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® CoolingTools ® Cooling Fittings

Enlarge Surface Patch

What is it?

The Enlarge Surface Patch command now supports the following trimgeometry in addition to edges:

• Faces

• Curves

• Datum planes

When you select a face as a boundary, the boundary face is automaticallyenlarged enough to trim the enlarged sheet.



The preceding figure shows trimming an enlarged surface with the following:

• A datum plane, constructed when you select a planar face.

• Another enlarged surface, created when you select a boundary face.


Use this capability when you want to create a patch-up sheet by trimming anenlarged surface with boundary objects.

This function provides many boundary object types and multiple regiondefinition.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Enlarge Surface Patch

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® MoldTools ® Enlarge Surface Patch

Edge Patch

What is it?

The Edge Patch command now combines the functionality of the followingcommands from previous versions:

• Edge Patch

• Surface Patch



• Auto Hole Patch

You can select the following as targets to patch:

• A face.

• A body.

• A loop of edges.


You can use the new Edge Patch command instead of the three commands itreplaces.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Mold Wizard ® Mold Tools ® Edge Patch

Mold Wizard ® Parting ® Create/Delete Patch

Surfaces

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® MoldTools ® Edge Patch

Runner

What is it?

The Runner command now supports Boolean options. For example, youcan sketch the path of a vent, define the section, and subtract it from theappropriate bodies.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Wizard ® RunnerMenu Tools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® RunnerLocation in dialogbox Options group ® Boolean



Design Trim Tool

What is it?

Use the Design Trim Tool command to design trimming tools. You can dothe following:

• Create or delete a trim part in a mold design assembly.

• Create, delete, or edit a trim surface in a trim part.

This dialog box replaces a tabbed page that appeared in both in the EjectorPin Post Processing and Mold Trim dialog boxes.

The Design Trim Tool command has the Rename Components option to openthe Part Name Management dialog box after you click Create Trim Part. Thislets you define names for new trim parts.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Mold Wizard ® Mold Trim Tools Drop-down ® Design

Trim Tool

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® Mold TrimTools ® Design Trim Tool

Solid Patch

What is it?

The Solid Patch command now supports the creation of multiple bodies. Youcan select a target and a tool that result in more than one intersection body.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Wizard®Mold Tools®Solid Patch

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard®MoldTools®Solid Patch



Traverse

What is it?

The Traverse options replace the Traverse Loop dialog box in the Edge Patchand Trim Region Patch commands.

When you choose the Traverse option in the Edge Patch and Trim RegionPatch dialog boxes, or when you click Traverse Parting Lines in the DesignParting Surface dialog box, you can now use the new options. SelectionIntent is available. For example, you can use Selection Intent to traverse aset of tangent curves.

When you select the Traverse by Face Color check box under Settings, inSelection Intent, the Tangent Curves option is the default in the Curve Rulelist. You can also select Single Curve. Use this option to select parting edgesor edges between any two adjacent regions of different color.

The Selection Intent setting Tangent Curves is not available when theTraverse by Face Color check box is cleared.

Traverse options

Where do I find it?


Dialog boxes

Edge Patch®Loop Selection group®Typelist®Traverse

Trim Region Patch®Boundary group®Typelist®Traverse

Design Parting Surface®Edit Parting Lines group®Traverse Parting Lines


Edge Patch®Traverse Loop group

Trim Region Patch®Boundary group, under TraverseLoop

Traverse Parting Lines®Traverse Parting Lines group

Motion simulation for tooling

What is it?

Use the Motion Simulation command to:



• Clone a predefined kinematic model for tooling into your current assemblyor a directory you specify.

• Mount assembly components to an imported kinematic modelautomatically or manually. For example, you can mount fixed or movingcomponents, ejectors, injectors, and so on, each according to it’s kinematicnature.

• Generate and import control data to an imported kinematic modelaccording to die settings.

• Define cam kinematic components for slides and lifters.

• Run a motion simulation to view the operations.


A complete set of progressive die or mold assemblies can have thousandsof components. Both halves of the die or mold open and close continuouslywith the injection or press machine cycle. The motion can be complicated,especially in a progressive die assembly, which has complex structure andmovement including strip layout, piercing, bending, and forming inserts thatall move during the open-and-close cycle.

When you simulate the motion of your progressive die or mold assembly, youcan locate and resolve potential interference problems in your progressivedie or mold assembly before the assembly is built.



Where do I find it?


Toolbar Mold Wizard ® Tooling Motion Simulation

MenuTools ® Process Specific ® Mold Wizard ® MoldTools ® Tooling Motion Simulation

Progressive Die Wizard

Assembly constraints in Insert Group and Standard Parts

What is it?

When you add an insert group or a standard part to a progressive dieassembly, you can now position the object with assembly constraints insteadof legacy mating conditions.

To use assembly constraints, set the Interaction assembly preference toAssembly Constraints.


You can create assembly constraints faster and more easily than matingconditions.

Where do I find it?

Menu Preferences®AssembliesLocation in dialogbox Interaction®Assembly Constraints

Standard Part Library enhancements

What is it?

The Standard Part Library now includes standard parts from the followingcatalogs:

• Universal Catalog, which has metric-unit and English-unit parts

• Futaba Catalog, which has metric-unit parts


These catalogs are popular die standard catalogs. These standard parts, withminor modifications if necessary, should meet many of your needs.



Where do I find it?

Application Progressive Die Wizard

Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Standard Parts

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Standard Parts

Location in dialogbox Catalog tab®Catalog

Piercing Insert Design enhancements

What is it?

When you use the Piercing Insert Design command to create a piercing punchand die block, you can now:

• Add a backing insert underneath the die insert.

• Use the Sketcher to design any conceptual profile for the die block. Afteryou conform the design, you can convert the profile to a solid body.

• Specify a clearance for the piercing punch and die.

• Access the standard die and punch inserts in the Standard PartManagement dialog box without closing the Piercing Insert Design dialogbox.

• Add two new cavity types: Round Step1 and Round Step2.

• Add a stripper insert.

Another enhancement is that all slug holes are put into one part file named<PDW_SLUGHOLE>.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Piercing Insert Design

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Piercing Insert Design



Forming Insert Design

What is it?

Use the Forming Insert Design command to create a forming punch and dieor a free-form insert design.

With the Forming Insert Design dialog box, you can:

• Specify any forming region or free-form region for purposes such asbending or embossing.

• Load a standard forming blank or a sketch to define any shape for aforming blank.

• Specify a clearance in the Punch Plate, Bottoming Plate, Stripper Plate,and Die Plate boxes.

• Automatically create the forming head area and unit with the formingblank when you click Apply.


This command simplifies creating a forming punch and die. To design aforming punch and die manually, as you had to do before NX 7.5, you wouldneed to use a number of different commands.

This command also provides functions for free-form insert design.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Forming Insert Design

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Forming Insert Design

Insert Auxiliary Design

What is it?

Use the Insert Auxiliary Design command to:

• Add a shank to strengthen any punch or die insert. The shank can have aheel, ramp, or flange shape.



• Specify a clearance in the Punch Plate, Bottoming Plate, Stripper Plate,and Die Plate boxes.

• Create or edit a punch mount. NX provides eleven types of punch mounts.(Before NX 7.5, this function was on the Insert Group dialog box.)

• Copy, array, or delete inserts. These options are similar to existing optionsin the Piercing Insert dialog box, but the new options can be used withany type of insert.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Insert Auxiliary Design

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Insert Auxiliary

Direct Unfolding enhancements

What is it?

When you use the Direct Unfolding command to create intermediate stages,you can now:

• Specify the stage sequence as from part to blank, or from blank to part.

• Specify the start station, pitch, and pitch orientation.

• Specify where the intermediate stage is inserted.

• Delete a selected intermediate stage.

The software translates all intermediate stages to different positions so allstages are visible during design.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Progressive Die Wizard®Sheet Metal Tools

®Direct Unfolding

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Sheet Metal Tools®Direct Unfolding

Location in dialogbox Type list®Create Intermediate Stages



Bend Operation enhancements

What is it?

When you use the Bend Operation command, you can now:

• Unfold all the bends in your model in a single operation using the newUnfold All type.

• Specify the target radius of an overbend using the new Target Radiusoption.


The Unfold All type supports blank-to-part sequences.

Where do I find it?

Unfold All


Toolbar

Progressive Die Wizard®Sheet Metal Tools

®Bend Operation

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Sheet Metal Tools®Bend Operation


Type list®Unfold All

Type list®Overbend®Inputs group®Target Radius

Progressive Die Wizard usability enhancements

What is it?

The Progressive Die Wizard has the following enhancements:

• When you create a Wire EDM Start Hole, you can specify the hole depthusing the new Hole Depth option.

• When you create pilot scrap, the pilot scrap can now be any shape. BeforeNX 7.5, pilot scrap was limited to circles.

• When you clone a standard part that includes a master model drawingfile, the drawing file is also cloned.

• When you create a blank layout, you can lock the pitch and width usingthe new Lock Pitch and Width option.



• When you design a die base, you can change the die base reference pointby editing the expression Die Base Reference Point: Ref_X, Ref_Y in the<PDW_VAR> part file.

The Strip Layout command has the following enhancements:

• The Insert Idle Station option lets you insert a new station before thecurrent station. You can copy current intermediate parts and bodies intothe new station.

• The Insert Process Station command lets you insert a new station beforethe current station. You should keep this station empty, because a processstation is usually used to add a new process that will be done in the DirectUnfolding command.

Where do I find it?

Hole Depth option


Toolbar

Progressive Die Wizard®Progressive Die Tools

®Wire EDM Start Hole

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Progressive Die Tools®Wire EDM Start Hole

Location in dialogbox Parameters group®Hole Depth

Lock Pitch and Width option


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Blank Layout

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Blank Layout

Location in dialogbox Settings group®Lock Pitch and Width

Die Base enhancements

What is it?

The Die Base Library now has more pre-configured die bases.




The additional die bases make it easier for you to find one that meets yourneeds, or that can meet your needs with fewer modifications. You cansignificantly shorten your design time when you use a pre-configured die base.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Die Base

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Die Base

Die Design Setting

What is it?

Use the Die Design Setting command to specify progressive die parametersthat can be used later in downstream design. Examples of progressive dieparameters include the following:

STRIP_LIFT_HEIGHTSpecifies the metal-strip-lifted height when the die setis open. You can adjust this value in the Insert GroupDesign dialog box.

PUNCH_PENETRATIONSpecifies the depth of the piercing punch that goes intothe piercing die. You can adjust this value in the DieDesign Setting dialog box

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Die Design Setting

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Die Design Setting

Relief Design enhancements

What is it?

The Relief Design command has the following enhancements:

• Creating and editing the relief area is easier than in previous NX releases.For example, when you set Create to Bounding Box and select faces for



the relief design, an initial bounding box appears. You can then modifythe size of the bounding box by dragging its faces in the graphics window.

• Creating a user-defined relief profile is also easier than in previous NX

releases, because you can click the Sketch Section button to open theSketcher, where you can design the profile.


The enhancements simplify the creation of relief pockets for forming areas,bending areas, and so on.

Where do I find it?

Bounding Box


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Relief Design

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Relief Design


Type®Create®Create group®Bounding Box

Type®Edit®Edit group®Bounding Box®Edit

Bounding Box

Sketch Section


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Relief Design

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Relief Design


Type®Create or Edit®Create/Edit group®UserDefined®Create/Edit group®Sketch Section

Force Calculation enhancements

What is it?

You can now use the Force Calculation command to calculate any force, suchas forming or bending, by adding a user-defined process for the force youwant to calculate.



In the Force Calculation dialog box, you can create the user-defined processby using the Define New Process options, and adding it to the Process List.


Before NX 7.5, you could use the Force Calculation command only to calculatepiercing forces. Now, you can use the Force Calculation command to defineprocesses for any type of force, and calculate the force.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Force Calculation

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Force Calculation

Motion simulation for tooling

What is it?

Use the Motion Simulation command to:

• Clone a predefined kinematic model for tooling into your current assemblyor a directory you specify.

• Mount die assembly components to an imported kinematic modelautomatically or manually.

• Generate and import control data to an imported kinematic modelaccording to die settings.

• Define cam and slide kinematic components.

• Run a motion simulation to view the operations.


A complete set of progressive die or mold assemblies can have thousandsof components. Both halves of the die or mold open and close continuouslywith the injection or press machine cycle. The motion can be complicated,especially in a progressive die assembly, which has complex structure andmovement including strip layout, piercing, bending, and forming inserts thatall move during the open-and-close cycle.

When you simulate the motion of your progressive die or mold assembly, youcan locate and resolve potential interference problems in your progressivedie or mold assembly before the assembly is built.



Where do I find it?


Toolbar

Progressive Die Wizard®Tooling Validation®Motion

Simulation

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Validation Tools®Motion Simulation


What is it?

One-step Formability Analysis is now Analyze Formability – One-step.

When you use this command, you can now:

• Specify the type of unform regions you want to create. A new Type groupis available with the following options: Entire Unform, IntermediateUnform, Advanced Unform.

• Use the new Advanced Unform type to do the following:

– Select curves that represent the location of the Draw Beads anddefine the corresponding strain while generating the flattened profile.Multiple Draw Beads with different strain values can also be used.

– Specify constraints for the Blank Holder and Draw Beads. A newAdvanced Constraints group is available.

– Specify springback match points and generate the springback facetedbody.

• Save the analysis results to the One-step feature. A new Save AnalysisResults into Feature option is available.

The solver is also enhanced to reflect the differences in the unform profilesand thickness, strain, or stress results when using different materials.

The One-step Unform feature is listed in the main panel of the Part Navigator.

Where do I find it?

Analyze Formability – One-step dialog box

Application Gateway, Modeling, Progressive Die Wizard, AerospaceSheet Metal



ToolbarAnalysis®Analyze Formability – One-step

Body Design®Analyze Formability – One-step

Die Engineering®Analyze Formability – One-step

Progressive Die Wizard®Sheet Metal Tools®Analyze

Formability – One-step

Aerospace Sheet Metal®Flat Pattern Feature

Drop-down list®Analyze Formability – One-stepMenu In Gateway, choose Analysis®Analyze Formability –

One-step

In the Body Design application, choose Tools®VehicleDesign Automation®Body Design®AnalyzeFormability – One-step

In the Die Engineering application, chooseTools®Vehicle Manufacturing Automation®DieEngineering®Analyze Formability – One-step

In the Progressive Die Wizard application, chooseTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Sheet Metal Tools®Analyze Formability –One-step

In the Aerospace Sheet Metal application, chooseInsert®Flat Pattern®Analyze Formability – One-step


Analyze Formability – One-step dialog box®Typegroup®Advanced Unform

Analyze Formability – One-step dialog box®AdvancedConstraints group (Available when Type is set toAdvanced Unform)

Analyze Formability – One-step customer defaults


Analysis®Analyze Formability – One-step®AdvancedConstraints tab

Analysis®Analyze Formability – One-step®Solvertab®Save Analysis Results into Feature



Hole Table enhancements

What is it?

The Hole Table command has the following enhancements:

• Circles in suppressed or invisible sketches are no longer reported.Previously, circles in suppressed or invisible sketches were sometimesincluded in reports, for example, if your Circles in Sketch customerdefault was selected.

• You can control whether a hole label has a leader by setting the DisplayHole Label with Leader customer default.

• You can select holes to generate or edit a hole table using the WindowSelection method.

• You can control the Partial Hole angle by setting the Partial Hole Anglecustomer default.

• Hole tables are supported in all the languages NX supports.

These enhancements are also available in NX 6.0.3 and NX 7.0.

Where do I find it?

Window Selection

Application Drafting and Progressive Die Wizard together

Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Hole Table

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Hole Table

Location in dialogbox Holes group®Window Selection

Customer defaults



Drafting®Hole Table®Label and Precisiontab®Display Hole Label with Leader/Partial HoleAngle



Scrap Design enhancements

What is it?

The Scrap Design command has the following enhancements:

• You can define an overcut on any scrap and overlap.

• You can add an arc in the tangent overcut sketch.

• You can set the Scrap Type option to define whether the scrap type ispiercing or piloting.

• You can split scrap into multiple pieces in a single operation.

• You can split hole scrap (also known as piloting scrap).

• You can add an overlap or overcut into hole scrap.

These enhancements are also available in NX 6.0.3 and NX 7.0.

Where do I find it?


Toolbar Progressive Die Wizard®Scrap Design

MenuTools®Process Specific®Progressive DieWizard®Scrap Design

Progressive Die Wizard uses assembly constraints

What is it?

Progressive Die Wizard can create assembly constraints when you:

• Add insert groups.

• Add standard parts.

The use of constraints is automatic when you set your assembly positioningpreference to Assembly Constraints.


You should consider using constraints as soon as it is practical becauseconstraints are the current and preferred method of positioning components.



Where do I find it?

If your company already works with assembly constraints instead of thelegacy mating conditions you need take no further action.


MenuPreferences ® Assemblies ® Assembly PositioningInteraction ® Assembly Constraints

Customer Default

File ® Utilities ® Customer Defaults ® Assemblies® Extras ® Assembly Constraints ® Positioning ®Assembly Constraints

Electrode Design

Electrode Multiple Sparking Positions

What is it?

A Multiple Sparking Positions option is now available. Use this optionto combine multiple electrode sparking heads into an electrode blank byspecifying additional positions for an electrode head. The electrode head iscopied as an instance to each position you specify in the Multiple SparkingPositions dialog box.

When you close the Multiple Sparking Positions dialog box, you can add ablank foot to complete the electrode blank design.


Sparking multiple areas by rotating or moving a single electrode can saveelectrode machining time and EDM process time for the assembly.

A multiple sparking design process can have many transformations and,therefore, a risk of interferences. You can use the electrode head positioninformation provided by this option to analyze and avoid interferences.

Where do I find it?

Application Electrode Design

Toolbar Electrode Design®Blank Design

MenuTools®Process Specific®Electrode Design®BlankDesign

Location in dialogbox Mode®Multiple Sparking Positions


Chapter

18 Translators

NX to JT

Exploded views support

What is it?

NX views are stored in JT files as JT PMI Modelviews. NX exploded viewsare now incorporated in those JT PMI Modelviews. You can activate anexploded view in ’s Teamcenter’s Lifecycle Viewer by selecting the Modelviewon the PMI tab.

Note

Lightweight sections of exploded views are supported in JT, buttraditional sections of exploded views are not. JT files comprisingtraditional sections of exploded views show the exploded stateun-sectioned. You should use a lightweight section if you have anexploded view.

Section view with exploded state is not supported. If you createda section view of an exploded state, the resulting JT contains onlyexploded view and no section view.

Where do I find it?

Exploded views are automatically written to JT when you export an NX file toJT, when you save JT data to Teamcenter, or when you write JT files usingthe run_ugtopv command line utility.

Lightweight section view support

What is it?

NX lightweight section views are written to JT files. Lightweight sectionviews are represented in JT as PMI Modelviews. You can activate alightweight section view in Teamcenter’s Lifecycle Viewer by selecting theModelview on the PMI tab.

Lightweight section views store the section cutter definition in the JT file.They are displayed by clipping the model graphics. Traditional section


Translators

views store the model geometry resulting from a section cut. You can createlightweight section views quickly, without noticeable increase to JT file size.

Note

• NX can select the objects or components to include in a lightweightsection cut and this selection state is stored in the JT file.Teamcenter’s Lifecycle Viewer does not support this choice. Allobjects are displayed sectioned.

• NX can apply different CAP colors to different lightweight sectionviews and cap colors are stored in the JT file. Since Teamcenter’sLifecycle Viewer has a session-based, rather than JT-file based CAPcapability, it applies the CAP color to all lightweight sections.


In case of traditional section views, the NX and JT file size increases due tothe cut body’s representation. Use lightweight section views both in NX andin JT when you do not want to store the cut body representation. The JT filewill contain the same type of section that was created in NX.

Where do I find it?

The lightweight section views are written to JT when you export an NX file toJT, when you save JT data to Teamcenter, or when you write JT files usingthe run_ugtopv command line utility.

Note

Lightweight sections are always processed when you configure your JTto contain PMI. Traditional sections require you to set the additionalconfiguration parameter, doSectionViews = true.

Write real PMI in JT files

What is it?

Alongside the graphical representation of PMI that has always been stored,JT files now store the full definition of PMI. That definition is used togenerate real PMI when the JT file is imported into NX.


Real PMI in the JT file increases the scope of workflows for which JT canbe used. Applications like NX that import JT can use it in downstreamworkflows. Imported real PMI behaves just like native PMI and can be edited,used for NX Drafting, NX CAM feature-based machining and toleranceanalysis.


Translators

Where do I find it?

JT files store the full definition of the PMI when you export an NX file toJT, when you save JT data to Teamcenter, or when you write JT files usingthe run_ugtopv command line utility.

Visualizing part and assembly representations within Teamcenter

What is it?

Using NX 6.0 and Teamcenter 2007.1 MP3 onwards, you can configureJT files stored by Teamcenter Integration for NX to additionally includeassembly-level representations. Using Teamcenter, you can visualize bothpart and assembly representations of PMI, attributes, promoted geometryand color within a single Bill of Materials.

A number of settings are required to achieve this result.

The following table compares the JT files stored by Teamcenter Integrationfor NX both with, and without these settings:

CharacteristicWithout therequiredsettings

With the required settings

AssemblyLevelPMI

AssemblyLevelcoloroverride

AssemblyLevelattribute

JT files aregenerated forparts only.AssemblyPMIs, coloroverrides andassemblylevelattributesare notdisplayed byTeamcenter.

Additional JT files are generated with assembly-levelinformation. Assembly PMIs, color overrides andassembly level attributes are displayed byTeamcenter.

NX partreferenceset data

A JT file isgeneratedfor eachreference setin the NXpart.

A single JT file is generated for each NX part. Itcontains all requested reference sets from the NXpart.

Assemblywith nogeometry

JT filesare notgenerated.

A JT file corresponds to the NX assembly isgenerated.


Translators

Numberof JT filesgenerated

The numberof JT filesgeneratedmay not equalthe numberof part filesin the NXassembly.

The number of JT files generated equals the numberof part files in the NX assembly.

The JT BOM matches the NX assembly.

Result ofusing thesettinguseRefset= ALL

SeparateJT files aregeneratedfor each ofthe referencesets.

A single JT file is generated containing all referencesets data in the NX part.

This also avoids duplication of geometry if itpreviously appeared in more than one and referenceset.

Where do I find it?

Visualizing part and assembly representations is only available withTeamcenter Integration for NX. It is applicable for the modes of JT generationas shown:

Prerequisite To run the translator in consistent visualization mode,set the following:

Environment variable:

• UGII_GENERATE_MULTI_CAD_JT=1

Configuration options:

• JtFileFormat = "9" (or above)

• mergeSolids = false

• mergeAll = false

To get the JT dataset, select the Save JT Data check boxbefore performing any File®Save operation.

To get all NX part reference sets into a single JT dataset,set useRefsets to ALL in the tessUG.config file.

Interactive modes File®Save

File®Save As

File®Save All

File®Force Save All

File®Save Work Part Only


Translators

Command linemodes

run_ugtopv.bat –pim=yes –config=tessUG.config@DB/ITEM/REV

run_ugtopv.bat –pim=yes –single_part–config=tessUG.config @DB/ITEM/REV

• JT files written using the following methods represent the selectedassembly and do not have additional files :

– File®Export®JT

– File®Interoperate

– -honour_structure

– -generate_assy_jt

– -generate_bookmark modes of translation

– Any unmanaged mode, that is without Teamcenter Integration for NXmode of translation

• Section view functionality is not supported.

DXF/DWG Import to NX Drafting as Drawing Views

What is it?

The DXF/DWG data will be created in drawing views instead of importedviews. There will not be any data in modeling when you use this option.

The new options added to these dialogs are:

• Import to Drafting as Drawing Views - If this option is set then views inAutoCAD drawings (layout) will be created as drawing views in the NXdrawing.

• Include Model Space – If this option is set, one additional drawing will becreated for model data in the DXF/DWG file. The drawing will containthe TOP view of model data.

Note

Include Model Space is visible only if you select Import to Draftingas Drawing Views.


Use these commands if you want your 3D data in AutoCAD as 2D in NXdrafting and want to create drawing views instead of imported views. The


Translators

data in the drawing views is not associated to the 3D data in Modeling andjust contains the 2D data. You can modify this 2D or can add data to drawingview.

Where do I find it?

Menu

File®Import®DXF/DWG®Import to New Part

File ®Open (*.dwg, *.dxf)®Options

Import Assembly to Teamcenter

What is it?

You can now import foreign assembly data files (IGES/STEP/DWG) into theTeamcenter database.

A new option is available on the dialog boxes:

• Import into Teamcenter - If this option is turned on assembly fileswill import into Teamcenter via theImport Assembly into Teamcentercommand.

Note

This option will be visible only in NX Manager mode


Use this command if you want to import assembly files directly into theTeamcenter database.

Where do I find it?

Menu

File®Import®IGES®Import to New Part

File®Import®STEP203®Import to New Part

File®Import®STEP214®Import to New Part

File®Import®DWG/DXF®Import to New Part


Translators

Infinite Line translation using 2D Exchange, IGES, and DXF/DWG

What is it?

Infinite line is a new type of entity added in Drafting. You can translateinfinite lines from an NX part file to IGES, DXF/DWG and 2D part files usingthe 2D Exchange, IGES and DXF/DWG translations.

Where do I find it?

No special command is needed. Normal use of the File®Export®<translatorname> will ensure translation of infinite lines.

Geometry repair options in Translators

What is it?

Two new geometry repair options are available in the Pro/E, CATIA V4,CATIA V5, STEP and IGES translations.

• Optimize: Use to merge all the possible edges, and faces in a body.

• Simplify: Use to create analytic surface geometry from b-spline surfacegeometry.


Using the optimize and simplify operations will result in more efficientloading of data and reduce the final file size.

Where do I find it?

Menu

File®Import®Pro/E®Options

File®Import®CATIA V4®Options

File®Import®CATIA V5®Options

File®Import®STEP203®Options

File®Import®STEP214®Options

File®Import®IGES®Options, choose Advanced tab


nx_nx75_cad

Documents